Biopharmaceutics Brahmankar

7/14/2019 Biopharmaceutics- Brahmankar
1
Introduction
Drugs, whether obtained from plant, animal or mineral sources or synthesized

chemically, are rarely administered in their pure chemical form. Often, they are
combined with a number of inert substances (excipients/adjuvants) and transformed into
a convenient dosage form that can be administered by a suitable route. Earlier, it was
believed that the therapeutic response to a drug is an attribute of its intrinsic
pharmacological activity. But today, it is very much understood that the dose-response
relationship obtained after drug administration by different routes—for example, oral and
parenteral, are not the same. Variations are also observed when the same drug is
administered as different dosage forms or similar dosage forms produced by different
manufacturers, which in turn depend upon the physicochemical properties of the drug, the
excipients present in the dosage form, the method of formulation and the manner of
administration. A new and separate discipline called biopharmaceutics has therefore
been developed to account for all such factors that influence the therapeutic effectiveness
of a drug.
Biopharmaceutics is defined as the study of factors influencing the rate and amount
of drug that reaches the systemic circulation and the use of this information to optimise
the therapeutic efficacy of the drug products. The process of movement of drug from its
site of administration to the systemic circulation is called as absorption. The
concentration of drug in plasma and hence the onset of action, and the intensity and
duration of response depend upon the bioavailability of drug from its dosage form.
Bioavailability is defined as the rate and extent (amount) of drug absorption . Any
alteration
processes in theplay
that drug’s bioavailability
a role is reflected
in the therapeutic in its of
activity pharmacological effects. Other
a drug are distribution and
elimination. Together, they are known as drug disposition. The movement of drug
between one compartment and the other (generally blood and the extravascular tissues)
is referred to as drug distribution. Since the site of action is usually located in the
extravascular tissues, the onset, intensity and sometimes duration of action depend upon
the distribution behaviour of the drug. The magnitude (intensity) and the duration of
action depend largely upon the effective concentration and the time period for which this
concentration is maintained at the site of action which in turn depend upon the
elimination processes. Elimination is defined as the process that tends to remove the
drug from the body and terminate its action. Elimination occurs by two processes—
which is responsible (metabolism),

biotransformation which usually inactivates
for the exit of drug/metabolites the drug, and excretion
from the body.
In order to administer drugs optimally, knowledge is needed not only of the
mechanisms of drug absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion ( ADME) but also
of the rate (kinetics) at which they occur i.e. pharmacokinetics. Pharmacokinetics is
defined as the study of time course of drug ADME and their relationship with its
therapeutic and toxic effects of the drug. Simply speaking, pharmacokinetics is the
kinetics of ADME or KADME. The use of pharmacokinetic principles in optimising the
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar 1/413
drug dosage to suit individual patient needs and achieving maximum therapeutic utility is
called as clinical pharmacokinetics. Figure 1.1 is a schematic representation of
processes comprising the pharmacokinetics of a drug.
Fig. 1.1. Schematic illustration of pharmacokinetic processes

Drug administration and therapy can now be conveniently divided into four phases or
processes:
1. The Pharmaceutical Phase: It is concerned with –
(a) Physicochemical properties of the drug, and
(b) Design and manufacture of an effective drug product for administration by
a suitable route.
2. The Pharmacokinetic Phase: It is concerned with the ADME of drugs as elicited
by the plasma drug concentration-time profile and its relationship with the dose,
dosage form and frequency and route of administration. In short, it is the sum of all
the processes inflicted by the body on the drug.
3. The Pharmacodynamic Phase: It is concerned with the biochemical and
physiologic effects of the drug and its mechanism of action. It is characterized by
the concentration of drug at the site of action and its relation to the magnitude of
effects observed. Thus, in comparison –
Pharmacokinetics is a study of what the body does to the drug, whereas
Pharmacodynamics is a study of what the drug does to the body.
Pharmacokinetics relates changes in concentration of drug within the body with
time after its administration, whereas
Pharmacodynamics relates response to concentration of drug in the body.
4. The Therapeutic Phase: It is concerned with the translation of pharmacological
effect into clinical benefit.
A schematic representation of the various processes involved in the therapy with a
drug is given in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2. Schematic representation of the processes involved in drug therapeutics
To achieve optimal therapy with a drug, the drug product must be designed to
deliver the active principle at an optimal rate and amount, depending upon the patient’s
needs. Knowledge of the factors affecting the bioavailability of drug helps in designing
such an optimum formulation and saves many drugs that may be discarded as useless.
On the other hand, rational use of the drug or the therapeutic objective can only be
achieved through a better understanding of pharmacokinetics (in addition to
pharmacodynamics of the drug), which helps in designing a proper dosage regimen (the
manner in which the drug should be taken). This obviates the use of the empirical
approach where
between the a considerable
desired experimentation
therapeutic and the undesiredistoxic
needed to arrive
effects at to
in order thedefine
balance
an
appropriate dosage regimen.
The knowledge and concepts of biopharmaceutics and pharmacokinetics thus

have an integral role in the design and development of new drugs and their dosage forms
and improvement of therapeutic efficacy of existing drugs.
2
Absorption of Drugs
A drug injected intravascularly (intravenously and/or intra-arterially) directly
enters the systemic circulation and exerts its pharmacological effects.
However, majority of drugs are administered extravascularly, generally orally.
If intended to act systemically, such drugs can exert their pharmacological
actions only when they come into blood circulation from their site of
application, and for this, absorption is an important prerequisite step.
Drug absorption is defined as the process of movement of unchanged
drug from the site of administration to systemic circulation . Following
absorption, the effectiveness of a drug can only be assessed by its
concentration at the site of action. However, it is difficult to measure the drug
concentration at such a site. Instead, the concentration can be measured more
accurately in plasma. There always exist a correlation between the plasma
concentration of a drug and the therapeutic response and thus, absorption can
also be defined as the process of movement of unchanged drug from the site of
administration to the site of measurement i.e. plasma . This definition takes
into account the loss of drug that occurs after oral administration due to
presystemic metabolism or first-pass effect.
Fig. 2.1. Plots showing significance of rate and extent of absorption in drug
therapy.
Not only the magnitude of drug that comes into the systemic circulation but
also the rate at which it is absorbed is important. This is clear from Fig. 2.1.
A drug that is completely but slowly absorbed may fail to show therapeutic
response as the plasma concentration for desired effect is never achieved. On
the contrary, a rapidly absorbed drug attains the therapeutic level easily to
elicit pharmacological effect. Thus, both the rate and the extent of drug
absorption are important. Such an absorption pattern has several advantages:
1. Lesser susceptibility of the drug for degradation or interaction due

to rapid absorption.
2. Higher blood levels and rapid onset of action.
3. More uniform, greater and reproducible therapeutic response.

Drugs that have to enter the systemic circulation to exert their effect can be
administered by three major routes:
1. The Enteral Route: includes peroral i.e. gastrointestinal,
sublingual/buccal and rectal routes. The GI route is the most common
for administration of majority of drugs.
2. The Parenteral Route: includes all routes of administration through
or under one or more layers of skin. While no absorption is required
when the drug is administered i.v., it is necessary for extravascular
parenteral routes like the subcutaneous and the intramuscular routes.
3. The Topical Route: includes skin, eyes or other specific membranes.
The intranasal, inhalation, intravaginal and transdermal routes may be
considered enteral or topical according to different definitions.
Table 2.1 compares the bioavailability/absorption pattern and advantages
and disadvantages of drugs administered by common routes.
TABLE 2.1.
Bioavailability/absorption of drug from common routes of drug
administration
Route Bioavailability Advantages Disadvantages
Parenteral
Intravenous Complete (100%) Drug is given for Increased chance
(IV) systemic drug immediate or for adverse
absorption. controlled effect. reaction.
May inject large Possible
fluid volumes. anaphylaxis.
Suitable for irritating Requires skill in
drugs insertion of infusion
set.
Tissue damage at
site of injection
(infiltration,
necrosis, or sterile
abscess).
Intramuscular Rapid absorption Easier to inject than Irritating drugs
injection (IM) from aqueous intravenous may be very
solutions. injection. painful.
Slow absorption Larger volumes Variable rates of
from non-aqueous may be used absorption
(oily) solutions. compared to depending upon
subcutaneous muscle group
solution. injected
flow. and blood
Subcutaneous Rapid absorption Generally, used for Rate of drug
injection (SC) from aqueous vaccines and drugs absorption depends

solution. not absorbed orally upon blood flow
Slow absorption e.g. insulin. and injection
from depot volume.
formulations.
Enteral Routes
Buccal or Rapid absorption of No presystemic Some drug may be
sublingual lipid-soluble drugs. metabolism. swallowed. Not for
(SL) most drugs or
drugs with high
doses.
Oral (PO) Absorption may Safest and easiest Some drugs are
vary. Generally route of drug unstable in GIT, or
slower absorption administration. undergo
rate compared to IV Suitable for both presystemic
bolus or IM injection. immediate-release metabolism or
and modified- show erratic
release drug
products. absorption.
Rectal (PR) Absorption may Useful when patient Absorption may be
vary from cannot swallow erratic. Suppository
suppository. medication. may migrate to
More reliable Used for local and different position.
absorption from systemic effects. Some patient
enema (solution). discomfort.
Other Routes
Transdermal Slow absorption, Transdermal Some irritation by
rate may vary. delivery system patch or drug.
Increased (patch) is easy to Permeability of
absorption with use and withdraw. skin variable with
occlusive dressings. Continuous release condition, anatomic
for a specified site, age, and
period. gender.
Used for lipid- Type of cream or
soluble drugs with ointment base
low dose and low affects drug release
MW. and absorption.
Low presystemic
metabolism.
Inhalation Rapid absorption. May be used for Particle size of
Total dose local or systemic drug determines
absorbed is effects. anatomic
variable. placement in
respiratory tract.
May stimulate
cough reflex.
Some drug may be
swallowed.
GASTROINTESTINAL ABSORPTION OF DRUGS

The oral route of drug administration is the most common for systemically
acting drugs and therefore, more emphasis will be given to gastrointestinal
(GI) absorption
observed in drugof drugs. Moreover,
absorption. it covers to
Before proceeding alldiscuss
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar the aspects of variability
absorption aspects, 6/413
Cell Membrane: Structure and Physiology

For a drug to be absorbed and distributed into organs and tissues and
eliminated from the body, it must pass through one or more biological
membranes/barriers at various locations. Such a movement of drug across the
membrane is called as drug transport.
The basic structure of cell membrane is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2. Basic structure of functional cell membrane

The cellular membrane consists of a double layer of amphiphilic
phospholipid molecules arranged in such a fashion that their hydrocarbon
chains are oriented inwards to form the hydrophobic or lipophilic phase and
their polar heads oriented to form the outer and inner hydrophilic boundaries
of the cellular
Globular proteinmembrane
molecules that face the surrounding
are associated aqueous
on either side of theseenvironment.
hydrophilic
boundaries and also interspersed within the membrane structure. In short, the
membrane is a mayonnaise sandwich where a bimolecular layer of lipids is
contained between two parallel monomolecular layers of proteins. The
hydrophobic core of the membrane is responsible for the relative
impermeability of polar molecules. Aqueous filled pores or perforations of 4
to 10 Å in diameter are also present in the membrane structure through which
inorganic ions and small organic water-soluble molecules like urea can pass.
In general, the biomembrane acts like a semipermeable barrier permitting
rapid and limited passage of some compounds while restricting that of others.
The GI lining constituting the absorption barrier allows most nutrients like
glucose, amino acids, fatty acids, vitamins, etc. to pass rapidly through it into
the systemic circulation but prevents the entry of certain toxins and
medicaments. Thus, for a drug to get absorbed after oral administration, it
must first pass through this biological barrier.
MECHANISMS OF DRUG ABSORPTION

The three broad categories of drug transport mechanisms involved in
absorption are –
A. Transcellular/intracellular transport
B. Paracellular/intercellular transport
C. Vesicular transport
A. Tr anscell ul ar/I ntracell ular Tr anspor t – is defined as the passage of

drugs across the GI epithelium. It is the most common pathway for drug
transport. The 3 steps involved in transcellular transport of drugs are –
(i) Permeation of GI epithelial cell membrane, a lipoidal barrier –
this is the major obstacle to drug absorption.
(ii) Movement across the intracellular space (cytosol).
(iii) Permeation of the lateral or basolateral membrane- this is of
secondary importance.
The various transcellular transport processes involved in drug absorption are –
1. Passive Tr anspor t Pr ocesses – These transport processes do not

require energy other than that of molecular motion (Brownian
motion) to pass through the lipid bilayer. Passive transport
processes can be further classified into following types –
a. Passive diffusion.
b. Pore transport.
c. Ion-pair transport.
d. Facilitated- or mediated-diffusion.
2. Active Transport Processes – This transport process requires

energy from ATP to move drug molecules from extracellular to
intracellular milieu. These are of two types –
a. Primary active transport.
b. Secondary active transport – this process is further
subdivided into two –
i. Symport (co-transport).
ii. Antiport (counter-transport).
B. Par acell ul ar/I nter cell ular Tr anspor t – is defined as the transport of
drugs through the junctions between the GI epithelial cells . This pathway
is of minor importance in drug absorption. The two paracellular transport
mechanisms involved in drug absorption are –
1. Per meation thr ough tight j un ctions of epithelial cell s – this
process basically occurs through openings which are little
bigger than the aqueous pores. Compounds such as insulin and
cardiac glycosides are taken up this mechanism.
2. Persorption – is permeation of drug through temporary
openings formed by shedding of two neighbouring epithelial
cells into the lumen.
Paracellular transport differs from pore transport in that the former

involves transfer of drug across epithelium and through the cellular junctions
whereas in the case of latter, the molecules are transferred from outside of the
epithelial cell into the cell through pores present in the cell membrane.
C. Vesicular or Corpuscular Transport (Endocytosis) – Like active

transport, these are also energy dependent processes but involve transport
of substances within vesicles into a cell. Since the mechanism involves
transport across the cell membrane, the process can also be classified as
transcellular. Vesicular transport of drugs can be classed into two
categories –
1. Pinocytosis.
2. Phagocytosis.
Figure 2.3. compares transcellular, paracellular and vesicular transport

mechanisms.
Fig. 2.3. Illustrative comparison of transcellular, paracellular and vesicular

transport.
Passive Diffusion
Also called non-ionic diffusion, it is the major process for absorption of more
than 90% of the drugs. The driving force for this process is the concentration
or electrochemical gradient. It is defined as the difference in the drug
concentration on either side of the membrane. Drug movement is a result of
the kinetic energy of molecules. Since no energy source is required, the
process is called as passive diffusion. During passive diffusion, the drug
present in the aqueous solution at the absorption site partitions and dissolves
in the lipid material of the membrane and finally leaves it by dissolving again
in an aqueous medium, this time at the inside of the membrane.
Passive diffusion is best expressed by Fick’s first law of diffusion, which
states that the drug molecules diffuse from a region of higher concentration to
one of lower concentration until equilibrium is attained and that the rate of
diffusion is directly proportional to the concentration gradient across the
membrane. It can be mathematically expressed by the following equation:
dQ DAK m/w
dt h
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar
CGIT - C (2.1) 9/413
dQ/dt = rate of drug diffusion (amount/time). It also represents the rate of

appearance of drug in blood
D = diffusion coefficient of the drug through the membrane
A = (area/time)
surface area of the absorbing membrane for drug diffusion (area)
Km/w = partition coefficient of the drug between the lipoidal membrane
and the aqueous GI fluids (no units)
(CGIT – C) = difference in the concentration of drug in the GI fluids
and the plasma, called as the concentration gradient
(amount/volume)
h = thickness of the membrane (length)
canBased on the above

be generalized – equation, certain characteristics of passive diffusion
1. The drug moves down the concentration gradient indicating downhill
transport.
2. The process is energy-independent and non-saturable.
3. The rate of drug transfer is directly proportional to the concentration
gradient between GI fluids and the blood compartment.
4. Greater the area and lesser the thickness of the membrane, faster the
diffusion; thus, more rapid is the rate of drug absorption from the
intestine than from the stomach.
5. The process is rapid over short distances and slower over long
distances.
6. Equilibrium is attained when the concentration on either side of the
membrane becomes equal.
7. Drugs which can exist in both ionised and unionised forms approach
equilibrium primarily by the transfer of the unionised species; the rate
of transfer of unionised species is 3 to 4 times the rate for ionised
drugs.
8. Greater the membrane/water partition coefficient of drug, faster the
absorption; since the membrane is lipoidal in nature, a lipophilic drug
diffuses at a faster rate by solubilising in the lipid layer of the
membrane.
9. The drug diffuses rapidly when the volume of GI fluid is low;
conversely, dilution of GI fluids decreases the drug concentration in
these fluids (CGIT) and lower the concentration gradient (CGIT – C).
This phenomenon is, however, made use of in treating cases of oral
overdose or poisoning.
10. The process is dependent, to a lesser extent, on the square root of the
molecular size of the drug – drugs having molecular weights between

100 to 400 Daltons are effectively absorbed passively. The diffusion

generally decreases with increase in the molecular weight of the
compound. However, there are exceptions—for example, cyclosporin
A, a peptide of molecular weight 1200, is absorbed orally much better
than any other peptide.
Initially, when the drug is ingested, CGIT >> C and a large concentration
gradient exists thereby acting as the driving force for absorption. As
equilibrium approaches, the drug diffusion should stop and consequently a
large fraction of drug may remain unabsorbed. But this is not the case; once
the passively absorbed drug enters blood, it is rapidly swept away and
distributed into a much larger volume of body fluids and hence, the
concentration of drug at the absorption site, CGIT, is maintained greater than
the concentration of drug in plasma. Such a condition is called as sink
condition for drug absorption.
Since under usual conditions of absorption, D, A, K m/w and h are
constants, the term DAKm/w/h can be replaced by a combined constant P
called as permeability coefficient. Permeability refers to the ease with which
a drug can penetrate or diffuse through a membrane . Moreover, due to sink
conditions, the concentration of drug in plasma C is very small in comparison
to CGIT. As a result, equation 2.1. may be simplified to:
dQ
PC (2.2)
dt GIT
Equation 2.2 is an expression for a first-order process. Thus, passive

diffusion follows first-order kinetics. Since a large concentration gradient
always exists at the absorption site for passive diffusion, the rate of drug
absorption is usually more rapid than the rate of elimination. Besides, dilution
and distribution of the absorbed drug into a large pool of body fluids and its
subsequent binding to various tissues are other reasons for elimination being
slower than absorption.
Figure 2.4 illustrates the relative permeability of different molecules to
lipid bilayer.
Fig. 2.4. Relative passive diffusion rate of different types of molecules
Pore Transport
It is also called as convective transport, bulk flow or filtration. This
mechanism is responsible for transport of molecules into the cell through the
protein channels present in the cell membrane. Following are the
characteristics of pore transport –
1. The driving force is constituted by the hydrostatic pressure or the
osmotic differences across the membrane due to which bulk flow of
water along with small solid molecules occurs through such aqueous
channels. Water flux that promotes such a transport is called as solvent
drag.
2. The process is important in the absorption of low molecular weight (less
than 100), low molecular size (smaller than the diameter of the pore) and
generally water-soluble drugs through narrow, aqueous-filled channels
or pores in the membrane structure —for example, urea, water and
sugars.
3. Chain-like or linear compounds of molecular weight up to 400 Daltons
can be absorbed by filtration.
Drug permeation through water-filled channels is of particular importance
in renal excretion, removal of drug from the cerebrospinal fluid and entry of
drugs into the liver.
Ion-Pair Transport
Yet another mechanism that explains the absorption of drugs like quaternary
ammonium compounds and sulphonic acids, which ionise under all pH
conditions, is ion-pair transport. Despite their low o/w partition coefficient
values, such agents penetrate the membrane by forming reversible neutral
complexes with endogenous ions of the GIT like mucin. Such neutral
complexes have both the required lipophilicity as well as aqueous solubility
for passive diffusion. Such a phenomenon is called as ion-pair transport
(Fig. 2.5). Propranolol, a basic drug that forms an ion pair with oleic acid, is
absorbed by this mechanism.
Fig. 2 5. Ion-pair transport of a cationic drug
Carrier-Mediated Transport
Some polar drugs cross the membrane more readily than can be predicted
from their concentration gradient and partition coefficient values. This
suggests presence of specialized transport mechanisms without which many
essential water-soluble nutrients like monosaccharides, amino acids and
vitamins will be poorly absorbed. The mechanism is thought to involve a
component of the membrane called as the carrier that binds reversibly or non-
covalently with the solute molecules to be transported. This carrier-solute
complex traverses
and discharges the across the membrane
solute molecule. The to the other
carrier side where
then returns to itsitoriginal
dissociates
site
to complete the cycle by accepting a fresh molecule of solute. Carriers in
membranes are proteins (transport proteins) and may be an enzyme or some
other component of the membrane. They are numerous in all biological
membranes and are found dissolved in the lipid bilayer of the membrane.
Important characteristics of carrier-mediated transport are:
1. A carrier protein always has an uncharged (non-polar) outer surface
which allows it to be soluble within the lipid of the membrane.
2. The
both carriers have no directionality; they work with same efficiency in
directions.
3. The transport process is structure-specific i.e. the carriers have special
affinity for and transfer a drug of specific chemical structure only (i.e.
lock and key arrangement); generally the carriers have special affinity
for essential nutrients.
4. Since the system is structure-specific, drugs having structure similar to
essential nutrients, called as false nutrients, are absorbed by the same
carrier system. This mechanism is of particular importance in the
absorption
bromouracilofwhich
several antineoplastic
serve agents like 5-fluorouracil and 5-
as false nutrients.
5. As the number of carriers is limited, the transport system is subject to

competition between agents having similar structure.
6. Since the number of carriers is limited, the system is capacity-limited
i.e. at higher drug concentration; the system becomes saturated and
approaches an asymptote. It is important to note that for a drug
absorbed by passive diffusion, the rate of absorption increases linearly
with the concentration but in case of carrier-mediated processes, the
drug absorption increases linearly with concentration until the carriers
become saturated after which it becomes curvilinear and approach a
constant value at higher doses (see Fig. 2.6). Such a capacity-limited
process can be adequately described by mixed order kinetics, also
called as Michaelis-Menten, saturation or non-linear kinetics. The
process is called mixed-order because it is first-order at sub-saturation
drug concentrations and apparent zero-order at and above saturation
levels. Moreover, the capacity-limited characteristics of such a system
suggest that the bioavailability of a drug absorbed by such a system
decrease with increasing dose—for example, vitamins like B1, B2 and
B12. Hence, administration of a large single oral dose of such
vitamins is irrational.
Fig. 2.6. Comparison of rate of absorption versus drug concentration

plots for passive and carrier-mediated transport processes
5. Specialized absorption or carrier-mediated absorption generally occurs

from specific sites of the intestinal tract which are rich in number of
carriers. Such an area in which the carrier system is most dense is
called as absorption window. Drugs absorbed through such
absorption windows are poor candidates for controlled release
formulations.
Two
They types
are— of carrier-mediated
facilitated transport
diffusion and active systems have been identified.
transport.
Facilitated Diffusion
It is a carrier-mediated transport system that operates down the concentration
gradient (downhill transport) but at a much a faster rate than can be accounted
by simple passive diffusion. The driving force is concentration gradient
(hence a passive process). Since no energy expenditure is involved, the
process is not inhibited by metabolic poisons that interfere with energy
production. Facilitated diffusion is of limited importance in the absorption of
drugs. Examples of such a transport system include entry of glucose into
RBCs and intestinal absorption of vitamins B1 and B2. A classic example of
passive facilitated diffusion is the GI absorption of vitamin B12. An intrinsic
factor (IF), a glycoprotein produced by the gastric parietal cells, forms a
complex with vitamin B12 which is then transported across the intestinal
membrane by a carrier system (Fig. 2.7).
Fig. 2.7. Facilitated diffusion of vitamin B12
Active Transport
This transport mechanism requires energy in the form ATP. Active transport
mechanisms are further subdivided into -
a. Primary active transport – In this process, there is direct ATP
requirement. Moreover, the process transfers only one ion or molecule and
in only one direction, and hence called as uniporter e.g. absorption of
glucose. Carrier proteins involved in primary active transport are of two
types –
(i) Ion transporters – are responsible for transporting ions in or out
of cells. A classic example of ATP-driven ion pump is proton
pump which is implicated in acidification of intracellular
compartments. Two types of ion transporters which play
important role in the intestinal absorption of drugs have been
identified –
(a) Organic anion transporter – which aids absorption of

drugs such as pravastatin and atorvastatin.
(b) Organic cation transporter – which aids absorption of
drugs such as diphenhydramine.
(ii) ABC (ATP-binding cassette) transporters – are responsible for
transporting small foreign molecules (like drugs and toxins)
especially out of cells (and thus called as efflux pumps) which
make them clinically important. A classic example of ABC
transporter is P-glycoprotein (P-gp). The latter is responsible for
pumping hydrophobic drugs especially anticancer drugs out of
cells. Presence of large quantity of this protein thus makes the
cells resistant to a variety of drugs used in cancer chemotherapy,
a phenomenon called as multi-drug resistance. It is for this
reason
protein. that
ABCP-gp is calledpresent
transporters as multi-drug resistance (MDR)
in brain capillaries pump a
wide range of drugs out of brain.
b. Secondary active transport – In these processes, there is no direct
requirement of ATP i.e. it takes advantage of previously existing
concentration gradient. The energy required in transporting an ion aids
transport of another ion or molecule (co-transport or coupled transport)
either in the same direction or in the opposite direction. Accordingly this
process is further subdivided into –
i. Symport (co-transport) – involves movement of both molecules in
the same direction e.g. Na+-glucose symporter uses the potential
energy of the Na+ concentration gradient to move glucose against
its concentration gradient. A classic example of symporter is
peptide transporter called as H+-coupled peptide transporter
(PEPT1) which is implicated in the intestinal absorption of
peptide-like drugs such as -lactam antibiotics.
ii. Antiport (counter-transport) – involves movement of molecules in
the opposite direction e.g. expulsion of H + ions using the Na+
gradient in the kidneys.
Figure 2.8 illustrates active transport of a drug and figure 2.9 represents the
types of active transport.
Fig. 2.8. Active absorption of a drug
Fig. 2.9. Types of active transport

Active transport is a more important process than facilitated diffusion in
the absorption of nutrients and drugs and differs from it in several respects:
1. The drug is transported from a region of lower to one of higher
concentration i.e. against the concentration gradient (in the case of ions,
against an electrochemical gradient) or uphill transport, without any
regard for equilibrium.
2. The process is faster than passive diffusion.
3. Since the process is uphill, energy is required in the work done by the
carrier.
4. As the process requires expenditure of energy, it can be inhibited by
metabolic poisons
cyanide and that interfere
dinitrophenol andwith
lackenergy
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar production
of oxygen, etc.like fluorides,
Endogenous 17/413
calcium, iron, glucose, certain amino acids and vitamins like niacin,
pyridoxin and ascorbic acid. Drugs having structural similarity to such
agents are absorbed actively, particularly the agents useful in cancer
chemotherapy. Examples include absorption of 5-fluorouracil and 5-
bromouracil via the pyrimidine transport system, absorption of
methyldopa and levodopa via an L-amino acid transport system and
absorption of ACE inhibitor enalapril via the small peptide carrier
system. A good example of competitive inhibition of drug absorption
via active transport is the impaired absorption of levodopa when
ingested with meals rich in proteins. Active transport is also important
in renal and biliary excretion of many drugs and their metabolites and
secretion of certain acids out of the CNS.
Figure 2.10 compares active and passive transport
Fig. 2.10. Comparison between active and passive transport
Endocytosis
It is a minor transport mechanism which involves engulfing extracellular
materials within a segment of the cell membrane to form a saccule or a vesicle
(hence also called as corpuscular or vesicular transport) which is then
pinched-off intracellularly (Fig. 2.11). This is the only transport mechanism
whereby a drug or compound does not have to be in an aqueous solution in
order to be absorbed.
Fig. 2.11. Endocytic uptake of macromolecules.

This phenomenon is responsible for the cellular uptake of
macromolecular nutrients like fats and starch, oil soluble vitamins like A, D, E
and K, water soluble vitamin like B12 and drugs such as insulin. Another
significance of such a process is that the drug is absorbed into the lymphatic
circulation thereby bypassing first-pass hepatic metabolism.
Endocytosis includes two types of processes:
1. Phagocytosis (cell eating): adsorptive uptake of solid particulates, and
2. Pinocytosis (cell drinking): uptake of fluid solute.
Orally toxin
botulism administered Sabinfood
(that causes poliopoisoning)
vaccine, large protein to
are thought molecules and the
be absorbed by
pinocytosis. Sometimes, an endocytic vesicle is transferred from one
extracellular compartment to another. Such a phenomenon is called as
transcytosis.
Combined Absorption Mechanisms

A drug might be absorbed by more than just one mechanism —for example,
cardiac glycosides are absorbed both passively as well as by active transport.
Vitamin B12 is absorbed by passive diffusion, facilitated diffusion as well as
endocytosis. The transport mechanism also depends upon the site of drug
administration (see Table 2.8).
Absorption of drugs by various mechanisms is summarized in Fig.
2.12.
Fig. 2.12. Summary of important transport processes and drugs absorbed

through them
Phases of Drug Transfer from GI Absorption Site (GI Epithelium) into

Systemic Circulation
Absorption of drugs through the GI epithelium can be divided into three
phases –
1. Pr e-uptake phase – the two important pre-uptake processes are –
(a) Dissolution of drug in the GI fluids.
(b) Metabolism of drug in the GI lumen – this can be affected by –
(i) Digestive enzymes present in the GIT, and/or
(ii) Bacterial enzymes in the colon.
2. Uptake phase – is three processes involved in drug uptake are –
(a) Delivery of drug to the absorption site in the GIT.
(b) Metabolism of drug by enzymes in the GI epithelium (gut wall
metabolism).
(c) Passage of drug through the GI epithelium.
3. Post-uptake phase - the three important post-uptake processes are –
(a) Metabolism of drug by the liver, en route to the systemic
circulation (first-pass hepatic metabolism).
(b) Enterohepatic circulation of drug – during the first pass
through the liver, the drug may be excreted in the bile, re-enter
(c) the GIT via

Transfer gall bladder
of drug into the and gets reabsorbed.
systemic
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar circulation. 20/413
Routes of Drug Transfer from the Absorption Site in GIT into the
Systemic Circulation
A drug is transferred from the absorption site into systemic circulation by one
of the two routes –
1. Splanchni c cir culation – which is the network of blood vessels that
supply the GIT. It is the major route for absorption of drug into the
systemic circulation. A drug that enters splanchnic circulation goes to
the liver first where it may undergo presystemic metabolism before
finally arriving into the systemic circulation. A drug whose uptake is
through stomach, small intestine or large intestine goes into the
systemic circulation via splanchnic circulation. Rectally administered
drugs have direct access to systemic circulation and thus circumvent
firs-pass effect.
ymphatic cir culation – is a path of minor importance in drug
2. Labsorption into systemic circulation for two reasons –
(a) The lymph vessels are less accessible than the capillaries
(b) The lymph flow is exceptionally slow.
However, fats, fat-soluble vitamins and highly lipophilic drugs are
absorbed through lymphatic circulation.
There are three advantages of lymphatic absorption of drugs –
(a) Avoidance of first-pass effect.
(b) Compounds of high molecular weight (above 16,000) can be absorbed
by lymphatic transport.
(c) Targeted delivery of drugs to lymphatic system as in certain cases of
cancer is possible.
Figure 2.13 represents the transfer of drug to splanchnic and lymphatic
circulation after its uptake by the intestinal epithelium.
Fig. 2.13. Transfer of drug from intestinal epithelium to splanchnic and

lymphatic circulation
FACTORS INFLUENCING DRUG ABSORPTION

AND BIOAVAILABILITY
Biopharmaceutic Considerations in Dosage Form Design

To achieve the desired therapeutic objective, the drug product must deliver the
active drug at an optimal rate and amount. By proper biopharmaceutic design,
the rate and extent of drug absorption (also called as bioavailability) or the
systemic delivery of drug to the body can be varied from rapid and complete
absorption to slow and sustained absorption depending upon the desired
therapeutic objective. The chain of events that occur following
administration of a solid dosage form such as a tablet or a capsule until its
absorption into systemic circulation are depicted in Fig. 2.14.
Fig. 2.14. Sequence of events in the absorption of drugs from orally

administered solid dosage forms
The process consists of four steps:
1. Disintegration of the drug product.
2. Deaggregation and subsequent release of the drug.
3. Dissolution of the drug in the aqueous fluids at the absorption site.
4. Absorption i.e. movement of the dissolved drug through the GI
membrane into the systemic circulation and away from the
absorption site
As illustrated in Fig. 2.14, the drug may also dissolve before disintegration
or deaggregation of the dosage form, and before or after reaching the
absorption site. Unless the drug goes into solution, it cannot be absorbed into
the systemic circulation.
In a series of kinetic or rate processes, the rate at which the drug reaches
the systemic circulation is determined by the slowest of the various steps
involved in the sequence. Such a step is called as the rate-determining or
rate-limiting step (RDS). The rate and extent of drug absorption from its
dosage form can be influenced by a number of factors in all these steps. The
various factors that influence drug absorption (also called as
biopharmaceutic factors in the dosage form design ) can be classified as
shown in Table 2.2.

TABLE 2.2.
Factors influencing GI Absorption of a Drug from its Dosage Form
A. PHARMACEUTICAL FACTORS: include factors relating to the

physicochemical properties of the drug, and dosage form characteristics
and pharmaceutical ingredients
I. Physicochemical Properties of Drug Substances
1. Drug solubility and dissolution rate
2. Particle size and effective surface area
3. Polymorphism and amorphism
4. Pseudopolymorphism (hydrates/solvates)
5. Salt form of the drug
6. Lipophilicity of the drug
7. pKa of the drug and gastrointestinal pH
8. Drug stability
9. Stereochemical nature of the drug
II. Dosage Form Characteristics and Pharmaceutical Ingredients
(Pharmaco-technical Factors)
1. Disintegration time (tablets/capsules)
2. Dissolution time
3. Manufacturing variables
4. Pharmaceutical ingredients (excipients/adjuvants)
5. Nature and type of dosage form
6. Product age and storage conditions
B. PATIENT RELATED FACTORS: include factors relating to the
anatomical, physiological and pathological characteristics of the patient
1. Age
2. Gastric emptying time
3. Intestinal transit time
4. Gastrointestinal pH
5. Disease states
6. Blood flow through the GIT
7. Gastrointestinal contents:
a. Other drugs
b. Food
c. Fluids
d. Other normal GI contents
8. Presystemic metabolism by:
a. Luminal enzymes
b. Gut wall enzymes

c. Bacterial enzymes
d. Hepatic enzymes
PHARMACEUTICAL FACTORS
In order to design a formulation that will deliver the drug in the most
bioavailable form, the pharmacist must consider –
1. Physicochemical properties of the drug, and
2. Type of formulation (e.g. solution, suspension, tablet, etc.), and
3. Nature of excipients in the formulation.
PHYSICOCHEMICAL FACTORS AFFECTING DRUG

ABSORPTION
Drug Solubility and Dissolution Rate
Consider the events that occur following oral administration of a solid dosage
form as shown in Fig. 2.14. Except in case of controlled-release formulations,
disintegration and deaggregation occur rapidly if it is a well-formulated
dosage form. Thus, the two critical slower rate-determining processes in the
absorption of orally administered drugs are:
1. Rate of dissolution, and
2. Rate of drug permeation through the biomembrane.
Dissolution is the RDS for hydrophobic, poorly aqueous soluble drugs like
griseofulvin and spironolactone; absorption of such drugs is often said to be
dissolution rate-limited. If the drug is hydrophilic with high aqueous
solubility—for example, cromolyn sodium or neomycin, then dissolution is
rapid and RDS in the absorption of such drugs is rate of permeation through
the biomembrane. In other words, absorption of such drugs is said to be
permeation rate-limited or transmembrane rate-limited (Fig. 2.15).
Fig. 2.15. The two rate-determining steps in the absorption of drugs from
orally administered formulations
Based on the intestinal permeability and solubility of drugs, Amidon et al

developed Biopharm aceuti cs Classification System (BCS) which classifies
the drugs into one of the 4 groups as shown in the table 2.3.
TABLE 2.3.
The Biopharmaceutics Classification System for Drugs
Class Solubility Permeability Absorption Rate-Limiting Drug
Pattern Step in Examples
Absorption
I High High Well absorbed Gastric Diltiazem
emptying
II Low High Variable Dissolution Nifedipine
III High Low Variable Permeability Insulin
IV Low Low Poorly absorbed Case by case Taxol
Class I dru gs (high solubility/high permeability) are well absorbed orally

since they have neither solubility nor permeability limitation.
Class I I drugs (low solubility/high permeability) show variable absorption
owing to solubility limitation.
Class III drugs (high solubility/low permeability) also show variable
absorption owing to permeability limitation.
Class I V dr ugs (low solubility/low permeability) are poorly absorbed
orally owing to both solubility and permeability limitations.
An important prerequisite for the absorption of a drug by all mechanisms
except endocytosis is that it must be present in aqueous solution. This in turn
depends on the drug’s aqueous solubility and its dissolution rate. Absolute or
intrinsic solubility is defined as the maximum amount of solute dissolved in a
given solvent under standard conditions of temperature, pressure and pH. It
is a static property. Dissolution rate is defined as the amount of solid
substance that goes into solution per unit time under standard conditions of
temperature, pH and solvent composition and constant solid surface area . It
is a dynamic process. Several drugs have poor aqueous solubility to have a
bearing
is on dissolution
less than 1 to 2 mg/mlrate.in The matter
the pH is of
range ofgreat concern
2 to 8. whenthere
However, the solubility
are well
known examples of drugs such as cisapride which despite their low aqueous
solubility have sufficient oral bioavailability. Two reasons can be attributed
to this—one, the rapid rate of dissolution despite low intrinsic solubility and
two, the therapeutic dose of drug may be so small that the GI transit time is
sufficient for adequate dissolution and absorption to occur. Thus, in contrast
to absolute solubility, the dynamic process of drug dissolution is better related
to drug absorption and bioavailability.
Theories of Drug Dissolution

Dissolution is a process in which a solid substance solubilises in a given

solvent i.e. mass transfer from the solid surface to the liquid phase. Several
theories to explain drug dissolution have been proposed. Some of the
important ones are:
1. Diffusion layer model/Film theory,
2. Danckwert’s model/Penetration or Surface renewal theory, and
3. Interfacial barrier model/Double-barrier or Limited solvation theory.
Diffusion Layer Model/Film Theory
This is the simplest and the most common theory for dissolution. Here, the
process of dissolution of solid particles in a liquid, in the absence of reactive
or chemical forces, consists of two consecutive steps:
1. Solution of the solid to form a thin film or layer at the solid/liquid
interface called as the stagnant film or diffusion layer which is
saturated with the drug; this step is usually rapid, and
2. Diffusion of the soluble solute from the stagnant layer to the bulk of
the solution; this step is slower and is therefore the rate-determining
step in drug dissolution. The model is depicted in Fig. 2.16.
Fig. 2.16. Diffusion layer model for drug dissolution
The earliest equation to explain the rate of dissolution when the process is
diffusion controlled and involves no chemical reaction was given by Noyes
and Whitney:
dC
k Cs - Cb (2.3)
dt
where,
dC/dt = dissolution rate of the drug,
k = dissolution rate constant (first order),
Cs = concentration of drug in the stagnant layer (also called as the
Cb = concentration of drug in the bulk of the solution at time t.

Equation 2.3 was based on Fick's second law of diffusion. Nernst and
Brunner incorporated Fick‘s first law of diffusion and modified the Noyes -
Whitney’s equation to:

dC DAK o/w Cs - Cb
(2.4)
dt Vh
where,
D = diffusion coefficient (diffusivity) of the drug
A = surface area of the dissolving solid
Kw/o = water/oil partition coefficient of the drug considering the fact that
dissolution body fluids are aqueous. Since the rapidity with which
a drug dissolves depends on the Kw/o, it is also called as the
intrinsic dissolution rate constant. It is a characteristic of drugs.
V = volume of dissolution medium.
h = thickness of the stagnant layer.
(Cs – Cb) = concentration gradient for diffusion of drug.
The influence of various parameters in equation 2.4 on drug dissolution is
depicted in Table 2.4.
TABLE 2.4.
Influence of Some Parameters on Dissolution Rate of Drug
Parameter s Symbol I nf lu ence on dru g dissolu tion
Diffusion D Greater the value, faster the dissolution of drug. Diffusion
coefficient decreases as the viscosity of dissolution medium increases.
Surface area A Greater the surface area, faster the drug dissolution; can be
of solid micronisation of drug.
Water/oil Kw/o Higher the value, more the coefficient of drug hydrophilicity
partition and faster the dissolution in aqueous fluids.
Concentration (Cs – Cb) Greater the concentration gradient, faster the diffusion and drug
gradient dissolution; can be increased by increasing drug solubility and
the volume of dissolution medium.
Thickness of h More the thickness, lesser the diffusion layer and drug
stagnant dissolution; can be decreased by increasing agitation.
Equation 2.4 represents first-order dissolution rate process, the driving

force for which is the concentration gradient (Cs – Cb). Under such a
situation, dissolution is said to be under non-sink conditions. This is true in
case of in vitro dissolution in a limited dissolution medium. Dissolution in
such a situation slows down after sometime due to build-up in the
concentration of drug in the bulk of the solution. The in vivo dissolution is
always rapid than in vitro dissolution because the moment the drug dissolves;
it is absorbed into the systemic circulation. As a result, Cb = 0, and
dissolution is at its maximum. Thus, under in vivo conditions, there is no
concentration build-up in the bulk of the solution and hence no retarding
effect on the dissolution rate of the drug i.e. C s >> Cb and sink conditions are
maintained. Under sink conditions, if the volume and surface area of solid are
kept constant, then equation 2.4 reduces to:
dC K (2.5)
dt
where K incorporates all the constants in equation 2.4. Equation 2.5
represents that the dissolution rate is constant under sink conditions and
follows zero-order kinetics i.e. yields a linear plot (Fig. 2.17).
Fig. 2.17. Dissolution rate under non-sink and sink conditions.
To obtain good in vitro-in vivo dissolution rate correlation, the in vitro

dissolution must always be carried under sink conditions. This can be
achieved in one or more of the following ways:
1. Bathing the dissolving solid in fresh solvent from time to time.
2. Increasing the volume of dissolution fluid.
3. Removing the dissolved drug by partitioning it from the aqueous
phase of the dissolution fluid into an organic phase placed either
above or below the dissolution fluid—for example, hexane or
chloroform.
4. Adding a water miscible solvent such as alcohol to the dissolution
fluid, or
5. By adding selected adsorbents to remove the dissolved drug.
The in vitro sink conditions are so maintained that Cb is always less than
10% of Cs.
The Noyes-Whitney’s equation assumes that the surface area of the
dissolving solid remains constant during dissolution, which is practically not
possible for dissolving particles. Hence, dissolution methods that involve use
of constant surface area discs are employed to determine the rate of

dissolution.
To account for the particle size decrease and change in surface area
accompanying dissolution, Hixson and Crowell’s cubic root law of
dissolution is used:
W0
1/3
W1/3 Kt (2.6)
where,
Wo = original mass of the drug
W = mass of the drug remaining to dissolve at time t
K = dissolution rate constant
Danckwert’s Model (Penetration or Surface Renewal Theory)
Danckwert did not approve of the existence of a stagnant layer and
suggested that turbulence in the dissolution medium exists at the solid/liquid
interface. As a result, the agitated fluid consisting of macroscopic mass of
eddies or packets reach the solid/liquid interface in a random fashion due to
eddy currents, absorb the solute by diffusion and carry it to the bulk of the
solution. Such solute containing packets are continuously replaced with new
packets of fresh solvent due to which the drug concentration at the solid/liquid
interface never reaches Cs and has a lower limiting value of C i. Since the
solvent packets are exposed to new solid surface each time, the theory is
called as surface renewal theory.

The Danckwert’s model is expressed by equation:
dC dm
V A Cs - Cb D (2.7)
dt dt
where,
m = mass of solid dissolved, and
= rate of surface renewal (or the interfacial tension).
The model is depicted in Fig. 2.18.
Fig. 2.18. Danckwert’s model for drug dissolution
Interfacial Barrier Model (Double Barrier or Limited Solvation

Theory)
The diffusion layer model and the Danckwert’s model were based on two
assumptions:
1. The rate-determining step that controls dissolution is the mass
transport.
2. Solid-solution equilibrium is achieved at the solid/liquid interface.
According to the interfacial barrier model, an intermediate concentration
can exist at the interface as a result of solvation mechanism and is a function
of solubility rather than diffusion. When considering the dissolution of a
crystal, each face of the crystal will have a different interfacial barrier. Such a
concept is given by the following equation:
G K i Cs - C b (2.8)
where,
G = dissolution rate per unit area, and
Ki = effective interfacial transport constant.
In this theory, the diffusivity D may not be independent of saturation
concentration Cs. The interfacial barrier model can be extended to both
diffusion layer model and the Danckwert’s model ( for in vitro drug
dissolution models refer chapter 11).
Factors Affecting Drug Dissolution and Dissolution Rate

Factors of in vivo importance that can affect dissolution and hence absorption
can be categorized into 2 classes:
1. Physicochemical properties of the drug, and
2. Dosage form factors.
The various physicochemical properties of drug that affect drug dissolution
and its rate are—solubility, particle size, polymorphism, salt form,
pseudopolymorphism, complexation, wettability, etc. Dosage form factors
include several formulation factors and excipients incorporated in the dosage
form. Each of these factors will be discussed in detail in the latter part of this
chapter.
Of the various factors listed above, the factor of prime importance is drug
solubility. Almost every factor that affects dissolution rate, influences the
drug solubility in one way or the other. From several equations pertaining to
dissolution rate, it is clear that it is directly related to drug solubility. An
empirical relation which is useful to predict the dissolution rate of a drug from
its solubility is:
R dC
2.24 Cs (2.9) 30/413
dt
where R = dissolution rate of the drug.

It has been shown that a drug should have a minimum aqueous solubility of
1% to avoid bioavailability problems.
Particle Size and Effective Surface Area of the Drug
Particle size and surface area of a solid drug are inversely related to each
other. Smaller the drug particle, greater the surface area. Two types of
surface area of interest can be defined:
1. Absolute surface area which is the total area of solid surface of any
particle, and
2. Effective surface area which is the area of solid surface exposed to
the dissolution medium.
From the modified Noyes-Whitney equation 2.4, it is clear that larger the
surface area, higher the dissolution rate. Since the surface area increases with
decreasing particle size, a decrease in particle size, which can be
accomplished by micronisation, will result in higher dissolution rates.
However, it is important to note that it is not the absolute surface area but the
effective surface area that is proportional to the dissolution rate. Greater the
effective surface area, more intimate the contact between the solid surface and
the aqueous solvent and faster the dissolution. But it is only when
micronisation reduces the size of particles below 0.1 microns that there is an
increase in the intrinsic solubility and dissolution rate of the drug. The surface
of such small particles has energy higher than the bulk of the solid resulting in
an increased interaction with the solvent. This is particularly true in case of
drugs which are non-hydrophobic, for example, micronisation of poorly
aqueous soluble drugs like griseofulvin, chloramphenicol and several salts of
tetracycline results in superior dissolution rates in comparison to the simple
milled form of these drugs.
Micronisation has in fact enabled the formulator to decrease the dose of
certain drugs because of increased absorption efficiency —for example, the
griseofulvin dose was reduced to half and that of spironolactone was
decreased
hydrophobic20drugs times
likefollowing micronisation.
aspirin, phenacetin However, micronisation
and phenobarbital, in case of
actually results in a decrease in the effective surface area of such powders and
thus, a fall in the dissolution rate. Three reasons have been suggested for such
an outcome —
1. The hydrophobic surface of the drug adsorbs air onto their surface
which inhibit their wettability.
2. The particles re-aggregate to form larger particles due to their high
surface free energy, which either float on the surface or settle at the
bottom of the dissolution medium.
3. Electrically induced agglomeration owing to surface charges prevents

intimate contact of the drug with the dissolution medium.
The net result of these effects is that there is a decrease in the effective
surface arearate.
dissolution available to the dissolution medium and therefore a fall in the
The absolute surface area of hydrophobic drugs can be converted to their
effective surface area by:
1. Use of surfactant as a wetting agent that -
 Decreases the interfacial tension, and
 Displaces the adsorbed air with the solvent.
For example, polysorbate 80 increases the bioavailability of phenacetin
by promoting its wettability.
2. Adding hydrophilic diluents such as PEG, PVP, dextrose, etc. which
coat the surface of hydrophobic drug particles and render them
hydrophilic.
Particle size reduction and subsequent increase in the surface area and
dissolution rate is not advisable under following circumstances –
 When the drugs are unstable and degrade in solution form
(penicillin G and erythromycin),
 When drugs produce undesirable effects (gastric irritation caused
by nitrofurantoin)
 When a sustained effect is desired.
In addition to increasing the dissolution rate, the second mechanism by
which a reduction in particle size improves drug dissolution is through an
increase in its solubility. However, such an effect can only be achieved by
reducing the particle size to a submicron level which is possible by use of one
of the following specialized techniques such as formation of:
1. Molecular dispersion/solid solution where the sparingly soluble drug is
molecularly entrapped in the lattice of a hydrophilic agent such as
cyclodextrins.
2. Solid dispersion where the drug is dispersed in a soluble carrier such as
PVP, PEG, urea, etc.
(Refer chapter 11 for methods used in enhancing the bioavailability of
drugs).
Polymorphism and Amorphism

Depending upon the internal structure, a solid can exist either in a crystalline
or amorphous form (Fig. 2.19). When a substance exists in more than one
crystalline form, the different forms are designated as polymorphs and the
phenomenon as polymorphism. Polymorphs are of two types:
1. Enantiotropic polymorph is the one which can be reversibly changed

into another form by altering the temperature or pressure e.g. sulphur,
and
2. Monotropic polymorph is the one which is unstable at all
temperatures and pressures e.g. glyceryl stearates.
The polymorphs differ from each other with respect to their physical
properties such as solubility, melting point, density, hardness and compression
characteristics. They can be prepared by crystallizing the drug from different
solvents under diverse conditions. The existence of the polymorphs can be
determined by using techniques such as optical crystallography, X-ray
diffraction, differential scanning calorimetry, etc.
Fig. 2.19. Classification of internal structure of a compound

Depending on their relative stability, one of the several polymorphic forms
will be physically more stable than the others. Such a stable polymorph
represents the lowest energy state, has highest melting point and least aqueous
solubility. The remaining polymorphs are called as metastable forms which
represent the higher energy state, have lower melting points and higher
aqueous solubilities. Because of their higher energy state, the metastable
forms have a thermodynamic tendency to convert to the stable form. A
metastable form cannot be called unstable because if it is kept dry, it will
remain stable for years.
Since the metastable forms have greater aqueous solubility, they show
better bioavailability and are therefore preferred in formulations—for
example, of the three polymorphic forms of chloramphenicol palmitate -A, B
and C, the B form shows best availability and the A form is virtually inactive
biologically. The polymorphic form III of riboflavin is 20 times more water-
soluble than the form I. Only 10% of the pharmaceuticals are present in their
metastable forms. However, because of their poor thermodynamic stability,
aging of dosage forms containing such metastable forms usually result in
formation of less soluble, stable polymorph —for example, the more soluble
crystalline form II of cortisone acetate converts to the less soluble form V in
an aqueous suspension resulting in caking of solid. Such a transformation of
metastable to stable form can be inhibited by dehydrating the molecule
environment or by adding viscosity building macromolecules such as PVP,
CMC, pectin or gelatin that prevent such a conversion by adsorbing onto the
surface of the crystals.
About 40% of all organic compounds can exist in various polymorphic
forms. Seventy percent of the barbiturates and 65% of sulphonamides exhibit
polymorphism. Barbital, methyl paraben and sulphapyridine can exist in as
many as 6 polymorphic forms and cortisone acetate in 8 forms.
Some drugs can exist in amorphous form (i.e. having no internal crystal
structure). Such drugs represent the highest energy state and can be
considered as supercooled liquids. They have greater aqueous solubility than
the crystalline forms because the energy required to transfer a molecule from
crystal lattice is greater than that required for non-crystalline (amorphous)
solid—for example, the amorphous form of novobiocin is 10 times more
soluble than the crystalline form. Chloramphenicol palmitate, cortisone
acetate and phenobarbital are other examples where the amorphous forms
exhibit higher water solubility. Thus, the order for dissolution of different
solid forms of drugs is —
Amorphous > Metastable > Stable.
Hydrates/Solvates (Pseudopolymorphism)
The crystalline form of a drug can either be a polymorph or a molecular
adduct or both. The stoichiometric type of adducts where the solvent
molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the solid are called as the
solvates, and the trapped solvent as solvent of crystallization. The solvates
can exist in different crystalline forms called as pseudopolymorphs. This
phenomenon is called as pseudopolymorphism. When the solvent in
association with the drug is water, the solvate is known as a hydrate.
Hydrates are most common solvate forms of drugs.
Generally, the anhydrous form of a drug has greater aqueous solubility than
the hydrates. This is because the hydrates are already in interaction with
water and therefore have less energy for crystal break-up in comparison to the
anhydrates (thermodynamically higher energy state) for further interaction
with water. The anhydrous form of theophylline and ampicillin have higher
aqueous solubilities, dissolve at a faster rate and show better bioavailability in
comparison to their monohydrate and trihydrate forms respectively. On the
other hand, the organic (nonaqueous) solvates have greater aqueous solubility
than the non-solvates—for example, the n-pentanol solvate of fludrocortisone
and succinylsulphathiazole and the chloroform solvate of griseofulvin are
more water-soluble than their non-solvated forms. Like polymorphs, the
solvates too differ from each other in terms of their physical properties. In
case of organic solvates, if the solvent is toxic, they are not of therapeutic use.
Salt Form of the Drug
Most drugs are either weak acids or weak bases. One of the easiest
approaches to enhance the solubility and dissolution rate of such drugs is to
convert them into their salt forms. Generally, with weakly acidic drugs, a
strong base salt is prepared such as the sodium and potassium salts of
barbiturates and sulphonamides. In case of weakly basic drugs, a strong acid
salt is prepared like the hydrochloride or sulphate salts of several alkaloidal
drugs.
At a given pH, the solubility of a drug, whether acidic/basic or its salt form
is a constant. The influence of salt formation on the drug solubility, rate of
dissolution andand
diffusion layer absorption canof be
not the pH theexplained
bulk of thebysolution
considering the pH oflayer
(refer diffusion the
theory of drug dissolution). Consider the case of a salt of a weak acid. At any
given pH of the bulk of the solution, the pH of the diffusion layer (saturation
solubility of the drug) of the salt form of a weak acid will be higher than that
observable with the free acid form of the drug (can be practically observed in
the laboratory). Owing to the increased pH of the diffusion layer, the
solubility and dissolution rate of a weak acid in this layer is promoted; since it
is a known fact that higher pH favours the dissolution of weak acids. Thus, if
dissolution is faster, absorption is bound to be rapid. In case of salts of weak
bases, the pH of the diffusion layer will be lower in comparison to that found
with the free base form of the drug. Consequently, the solubility of a basic
drug at this lower pH is enhanced. Thus, if:
[H+]d = hydrogen ion concentration of the diffusion layer, and
[H+]b = hydrogen ion concentration of the bulk of the solution, then,
for salts of weak acids, [H+]d < [H+]b
for salts of weak bases, [H+]d > [H+]b

The increase and decrease in pH of the diffusion layer by the salts of weak
acids and bases have been attributed to the buffering action of strong base
cation and strong acid anion respectively.
Yet another convincing reason for enhanced solubility of salts of weak
acids is the precipitation of the drug as very fine particles. When the soluble
ionic form of the drug diffuses from the stagnant diffusion layer into the bulk
of the solution whose pH is low, it is transformed into its free acid form
having lesser aqueous solubility at the lower pH of the bulk solution.
Consequently, this free acidic form of the drug is precipitated in the form of
fine particles. The resultant increase in the surface area is then responsible for
the rapid dissolution and absorption in comparison to the drug administered in

just the acidic form (Fig. 2.20).
Fig. 2.20. Dissolution and absorption of an acidic drug administered in a salt

form
The principle of in situ salt formation has been utilized to enhance the
dissolution and absorption rate of certain drugs like aspirin and penicillin from
buffered alkaline tablets. The approach is to increase the pH of the
microenvironment of the drug by incorporating buffer agents and promote
dissolution rate. Apart from the enhanced bioavailability, buffered aspirin
tablets have two more advantages: firstly, the gastric irritation and ulcerogenic
tendency of the drug is greatly reduced, and secondly, the problem with the
use of sodium salt of aspirin (to enhance the solubility) which otherwise has
poor hydrolytic stability, is overcome by in situ salt formation.
The selection
important. It has of appropriate
been shown thatsalt
theform for and
choline better
the dissolution rate is salts
isopropanolamine also
of theophylline dissolve 3 to 4 times more rapidly than the ethylenediamine
salt and show better bioavailability.
A factor that influences the solubility of salt forms of the drug is the size of
the counter ion. Generally speaking, smaller the size of the counter ion,
greater the solubility of salt —for example, the bioavailability of novobiocin
from its sodium salt, calcium salt and free acid form was found to be in the
ratio — 50 : 25 : 1. Where the counter ion is very large in size and/or has
poor
be ioniclower
much strengththan(as
theinfree
thedrug
caseitself
of ester
—forform of drugs),
example, the solubility
the pamoates, may
stearates
and palmitates of weak bases have poor aqueous solubility. These forms are,
however, useful in several ways such as to prolong the duration of action
(steroidal salts), to overcome bad taste (chloramphenicol palmitate), to
enhance GI stability (erythromycin estolate) or to decrease the side effects,
local or systemic.
There are exceptions where the so called more soluble salt form of the drug
showed poor bioavailability. One such study was the comparative dissolution
of sodium phenobarbital and free phenobarbital from their tablets. Slower
dissolution with sodium salt was observed and the reason attributed to it was
that its tablet swelled but did not disintegrate and thus dissolved slowly. An
identical result was obtained with hydrochloride salts of several tetracycline

analogs and papaverine; better dissolution and bioavailability was observed
with the free bases. The reason for poor solubility and dissolution rate was
the suppression action of the common ion effect.
Drug pKa and Lipophilicity and GI pH—pH Partition Hypothesis
The pH partition theory (Brodie et al) explains in simple terms, the process of
drug absorption from the GIT and its distribution across all biological
membranes. The theory states that for drug compounds of molecular weight
greater than 100, which are primarily transported across the biomembrane by
passive diffusion, the process of absorption is governed by:
1. The dissociation constant (pKa) of the drug.
2. The lipid solubility of the unionised drug (a function of drug K ).
3. The pH at the absorption site. o/w
Since most drugs are weak electrolytes (weak acids or weak bases), their
degree of ionisation depends upon the pH of the biological fluid. If the pH on
either side on the membrane is different, then the compartment whose pH
favours greater ionisation of the drug will contain greater amount of drug, and
only the unionised or undissociated fraction of drug, if sufficiently lipid
soluble, can permeate the membrane passively until the concentration of
unionised drug on either side of the membrane becomes equal i.e. until
equilibrium
The aboveis statement
attained. of the hypothesis was based on the assumptions that:
1. The GIT is a simple lipoidal barrier to the transport of drug.
2. Larger the fraction of unionised drug, faster the absorption.
3. Greater the lipophilicity (Ko/w) of the unionised drug, better the
absorption.
Drug pKa and Gastrointestinal pH
The amount of drug that exists in unionised form is a function of dissociation
constant (pKa) of the drug and pH of the fluid at the absorption site.
It is customary to express the dissociation constants of both acidic and
basic drugs by pKa values. The lower the pKa of an acidic drug, stronger the
acid i.e. greater the proportion of ionised form at a particular pH. Higher the
pKa of a basic drug, stronger the base. Thus, from the knowledge of pKa of
drug and pH at the absorption site (or biological fluid), the relative amount of
ionised and unionised drug in solution at a particular pH and the percent of
drug ionised at this pH can be determined by Henderson-Hasselbach
equations:
for weak acids,
Ionised Drug
pH pKa log (2.10)
Unionised Drug
10 pH - pK a
% Drug Ionised 1 10 pH - pK a 100 (2.11)
for weak bases,
Unionised Drug
pH pKa log (2.12)
Ionised Drug
10 pK a - pH (2.13)
% Drug Ionised pK a - pH
100
1 10
When the concentration of ionised and unionised drug becomes equal, the
second term of equations 2.10 and 2.12 reduces to zero (since log 1 = zero),
and thus pH = pKa. The pKa is a characteristic of the drug.
If there is a membrane barrier that separates the aqueous solutions of
different pH such as the GIT and the plasma, then the theoretical ratio R of
drug concentration on either side of the membrane can be given by equations
derived by Shore et al:
for weak acids,
pH GIT - pK a
CGIT 1 10
Ra pH plasma - pK a
(2.14)
Cplasma 1 10
for weak bases,
pK a - pH GIT
CGIT 1 10
Rb pK a - pH plasma
(2.15)
Cplasma 1 10
If one considers the pH range in the GIT from 1 to 8, that of the stomach
from 1 to 3 and of the intestine (from duodenum to colon) 5 to 8, then certain
generalisations regarding ionisation and absorption of drugs can be made, as
predicted from the pH-partition hypothesis:
For Weak Acids:
1. Very weak acids (pK a > 8) such as phenytoin, ethosuximide and
several barbiturates are essentially unionised at all pH values and
therefore their absorption is rapid and independent of GI pH.
2. Acids in the pKa range 2.5 to 7.5 are greatly affected by changes in pH
and therefore their absorption is pH-dependent; e.g. several NSAIDs
like aspirin, ibuprofen, phenylbutazone, and a number of penicillin
analogs. Such drugs are better absorbed from acidic conditions of
stomach (pH < pKa) where they largely exist in unionised form.
3. Stronger acids with pKa < 2.5 such as cromolyn sodium are ionised in
the entire pH range of GIT and therefore remain poorly absorbed.
For Basic Drugs:
1. Very weak bases (pKa < 5.0) such as caffeine, theophylline and a
number of benzodiazepines like diazepam, oxazepam and nitrazepam
are essentially unionised at all pH values and therefore their absorption
is rapid and pH-independent.
2. Bases in the pKa range 5 to 11.0 are greatly affected by changes in pH
and hence their absorption is pH-dependent; e.g. several morphine
analogs, chloroquine, imipramine and amitriptyline. Such drugs are
better absorbed from the relatively alkaline conditions of the intestine
where they largely exist in unionised form.
3. Stronger bases with pKa > 11.0 like mecamylamine and guanethidine
are ionised in the entire pH range of GIT and therefore poorly
absorbed.
A summary of above discussion is given in Table 2.5.
TABLE 2.5.
Influence of drug pKa and GI pH on Drug Absorption
Drugs pKa pH/site of absorption
Very weak acids (pKa > 8.0)
Pentobarbital 8.1 Unionised at all pH values; absorbed along the
Hexobarbital 8.2 entire length of GIT
Phenytoin 8.2
Ethosuximide 9.3
Moderately weak acids (pKa 2.5 to 7.5)
Cloxacillin 2.7 Unionised in gastric pH and ionised in intestinal
Aspirin 3.5 pH; better absorbed from stomach
Ibuprofen 4.4
Phenylbutazone 4.5
Stronger acids (pKa < 2.5)
Disodium cromoglycate 2.0 Ionised at all pH values; poorly absorbed from
GIT.
Very weak bases (pKa < 5.0)
Theophylline 0.7 Unionised at all pH values; absorbed along the
Caffeine 0.8 entire length of GIT
Oxazepam 1.7
Diazepam 3.7
Moderately weak bases (pKa 5 to 11.0)
Reserpine 6.6 Ionised at gastric pH, relatively unionised at
Heroin 7.8 intestinal pH; better absorbed from intestine
Codeine 8.2
Amitriptyline 9.4
Stronger bases (pKa > 11.0)
Mecamylamine 11.2 Ionised at all pH values; poorly absorbed from
Guanethidine 11.7 GIT
By using equations from 2.10 to 2.15, one can calculate the relative
amounts of unionised (absorbable) and ionised (unabsorbable) forms of the
drug and predict the extent of absorption at a given pH of GIT. An example
of this is illustrated in figure 2.21.
Fig. 2.21. Influence of pH on ionisation of drug. [HA] and [BOH] are

concentration of unionised acid and base, and [A-] and [B+] are
concentration of ionised acid and base respectively
Besides the dissociation constant pK a, total aqueous solubility, ST, of

an ionisable drug is an important factor in the passive absorption of drugs. It is
defined as the sum of concentration of ionised drug in solution and
concentration of unionised drug in solution . The solubility of unionised form
of the drug is known as the in tri nsic solubili ty of the drug. If Sa is the intrinsic
solubility of weakly acidic drugs and S b that of weakly basic drugs, then –
for acidic drugs,
ST = Sa [1 + 10(pH –pKa)] (2.16)
for basic drugs,
ST = Sb [1 + 10(pKa –pH)] (2.17)

Fig. 2.22 illustrates pH-solubility profile for a free acid and free base of
weakly acidic and weakly basic drugs.
Fig. 2.22 pH-solubility curve for weakly acidic and weakly basic drugs
Certain conclusions and generalizations can now be stated –

For weakly acidic drugs,
1. When pH > pKa, S T >> Sa because ionisation of drug increases
tremendously.
2. When pH = pKa, ST = 2Sa, because the drug is 50% ionised.
3. When pH < pKa, ST Sa since the drug exists predominantly in
unionised form.
For weakly basic drugs,

1. When pH > pKa, ST Sb since the drug exists predominantly in
unionised form.
2. When pH = pKa, ST = 2Sb, because the drug is 50% ionised.
3. When pH < pKa, ST >> Sb because ionisation of drug increases
tremendously.
Lipophilicity and Drug Absorption

As mentioned earlier, it is the pK a of a drug that determines the degree of
ionisation at a particular pH and that only the unionised drug, if sufficiently
lipid soluble, is absorbed into the systemic circulation. Thus, even if the drug
exists in the unionised form, it will be poorly absorbed if it has poor lipid
solubility (or low Ko/w). Ideally, for optimum absorption, a drug should have
sufficient aqueous solubility to dissolve in the fluids at the absorption site and
lipid solubility
the lipoidal (Ko/w) highand
biomembrane enough to facilitate
into the systemic the
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar partitioning
circulation. of thewords,
In other drug ina 41/413
perfect hydrophilic-lipophilic balance (HLB) should be there in the

structure of the drug for optimum bioavailability.
The lipid solubility of a drug is measured by a parameter called as log P
where P is oil/water
This value partitionofcoefficient
is a measure the degree( Ko/w or simply P) of
of distribution value of the
drug drug.
between
lipophilic solvents such as n-octanol and an aqueous phase (water or a suitable
buffer). In general, the octanol/pH 7.4 buffer partition coefficient value in the
range of 1 to 2 of a drug is sufficient for passive absorption across lipoidal
membranes. A direct correlation between a drug’s Ko/w and extent of
absorption is illustrated in Table 2.6.
TABLE 2.6.
Comparison between Intestinal Absorption of Some Drugs through the Rat Intestine
and Ko/w of the Ionised Form of the Drugs
Drugs K heptane/water % Absor bed
Rapid rate of absorption
Phenylbutazone 100.0 54
Thiopental 3.3 67
Benzoic acid 0.19 54
Salicylic acid 0.12 60
Moderate rate of absorption
Aspirin 0.03 21
Theophylline 0.02 30
Theobromine < 0.002 22
Sulphanilamide < 0.002 24
Slow rate of absorption
Barbituric acid < 0.002 5
Sulphaguanidine < 0.002 2
Source: Schanker, J. Med. Pharm., 2, 343 (1960).
For ionisable drugs where the ionised species does not partition into the
aqueous phase, the apparent partition coefficient (D) can be calculated from
following equations -
for acidic drugs,
log D = log P - log [1 + 10 (pH –pKa)] (2.18)

for basic drugs,
log D = log P - log [1 + 10 (pKa –pH)] (2.19)

Limitations of pH-Partition Hypothesis
The pH-partition hypothesis over-simplified the otherwise complicated
process of drug
deviations from absorption and therefore has its own limitations. Some of the
the theory are:
1. Presence of virtual membrane pH

2. Absorption of ionised drug
3. Influence of GI surface area and residence time of drug
4. Presence of aqueous unstirred diffusion layer

1. Presence of Virtual Membrane pH: The pH-partition hypothesis
suggested that only the unionised drug at a given GI lumen pH is absorbed.
An S-shaped curve, called as the pH-absorption curve denoting the
dissociation of drug, is obtained when pH is plotted versus rate of drug
absorption (Fig. 2.23).
Fig. 2.23. pH-absorption curve for acidic and basic drugs. Dotted lines
indicate curves predicted by pH-partition hypothesis and bold
lines indicate the practical curves.
However, differences in the extent of absorption of salicylic acid has been
observed at a given GI pH than that predicted by pH-partition hypothesis. The
experimental pH-absorption curves are less steep and shift to the left (lower
pH values) for a basic drug and to the right (higher pH values) for an acidic
drug. This led to the suggestion that a virtual pH, also called as the
microclimate pH, different from the luminal pH exists at the membrane
surface. This virtual membrane pH actually determines the extent of drug
ionisation and thus, drug absorption.
was2.that Absorption
only unionised of Ionised
form of Drugs: An important
the drug assumption
is absorbed of the theory
and permeation of the
ionised drug is negligible since its rate of absorption is 3 to 4 times less than
that of unionised drug. This is called as prin ciple of non-ionic dif fu sion . The
principle is true to a large extent as ionised drugs have low lipid solubility and
relatively poor permeability. However, the pH-absorption curve shift
suggested that ionised forms of some drugs also get absorbed to a
considerable extent. If such drugs have a large lipophilic group in their
structure, despite their ionisation, they will be absorbed passively—for
example, morphinan derivatives. Other mechanisms are also involved in the
absorption of ionised drugs such as active transport, ion-pair transport and
convective flow.
3. Influence of GI Surface Area and Residence Time of Drug:

According to the pH-partition theory, acidic drugs are best absorbed from
stomach (acidic pH) and basic drugs from intestine (alkaline pH) in which
conditions they are unionised to a large extent. This could be true under
conditions where the surface area of stomach and intestine are same. It could
also mean that once an acidic drug reaches the intestine, the remaining
fraction will be poorly absorbed and that unless a basic drug reaches the
intestine and gets absorbed considerably, it may not be able to attain its
therapeutic level. But, irrespective of the GI pH and the degree of ionisation,
both acidic and basic drugs are more rapidly absorbed from the intestine,
primarily because of its large surface area and secondly, because of long
residence time of the drug in the intestine.
4. Presence of Aqueous Unstirred Diffusion Layer: The pH-shift in
the absorption of acidic and basic drugs, as discussed earlier, also accounts for
the fact that the bulk of the luminal fluid is not in direct contact with the
membrane but a barrier called as aqueous unstirred diffusion layer is
interposed between them. Such a model is depicted in Fig. 2.24.
Fig. 2.24. Presence of aqueous unstirred diffusion layer on the membrane

surface
Such a layer has a real thickness and is a barrier to absorption of drugs. In
the original pH-partition theory, the rate-limiting step in the absorption of
drugs was the partitioning in the lipid barrier. With the incorporation of
unstirred aqueous diffusion layer, a drug must diffuse first through this
aqueous barrier coefficient
large partition and then through the lipoidal
can rapidly barrier.
penetrate Thus,membrane
the lipid drugs having
but
diffusion through unstirred water layer is the rate-limiting step in their
absorption. This applies in particular to high molecular weight fatty acids and
bile acids.
Despite its limitations, the pH-partition theory is still useful in the basic
understanding of drug absorption and movement of drug between various
body compartments.
Drug Permeability and Absorption

Most orally administered drugs enter the systemic circulation by passive

diffusion and their absorption is expressed mathematically by equation –
M = Peff A Capp tres (2.20)
where, M = amount of drug absorbed

Peff = effective membrane permeability
A = surface area available for absorption
Capp = apparent luminal drug concentration
tres = residence time of drug in GI lumen.
Since it is difficult to alter or control surface area and residence time of

drug, focus for promoting absorption depends on enhancing permeability of
drug or drug concentration at absorption site (see BCS classification of drugs,
Table 2.3).
The three major drug characteristics that determine the passive
transport or permeability of drugs across intestinal epithelium are –
 Lipophilicity of drug expressed as log P.
 Polarity of drug which is measured by the number of H-bond acceptors
and number of H-bond donors on the drug molecule.
 Molecular size.
The net effect of the above three properties of drug on its permeability
across intestinal epithelium is given as Rule of F ive by Lipinski et al which is
written as –
 Molecular weight of drug 500
 Lipophilicity of drug, log P 5
 Number of H-bond acceptors 10
 Number of H-bond donors 5
For a given drug, if any two of these values is greater than that specified
above, then oral absorption may be significant problem.
Drug Stability
A drug for oral use may destabilize either during its shelf-life or in the GIT.
Two major stability problems resulting in poor bioavailability of an orally
administered drug are—degradation of the drug into inactive form, and
interaction with one or more different component(s) either of the dosage form
or those present in the GIT to form a complex that is poorly soluble or is
unabsorbable. Destabilization of a drug during its shelf-life and in the GIT
will be discussed in detail under formulation factors and patient related factors
respectively.
Stereochemical Nature of Drug
Chiral drugs constitute approximately 60% of the drugs in current use.

Majority of these are marketed as racemic mixtures. Although it is well
established that optical isomers differ in the potency of pharmacological
effect, it is only recently that attention is being paid to influence of chirality
on pharmacokinetic processes like absorption, distribution and elimination.
Enantiomers possess identical physical and chemical properties despite
significant differences in spatial configuration. Thus, biological processes
which are passive in nature (and thereby depend only upon physical and
chemical characteristics of the molecule) do not display selectively for one
isomer over another. However, biological processes such as protein binding
which require interaction of a drug with a macromolecule may exhibit
stereoselectivity.
As majority of drugs are absorbed passively, they do not display
stereoselectivity. Conversely, demonstration of stereoselective absorption
would be strong evidence that a drug is absorbed by a carrier-mediated
process.
DOSAGE FORM (PHARMACO-TECHNICAL) FACTORS

Disintegration Time
Disintegration time (DT) is of particular importance in case of solid dosage
forms like tablets and capsules. In vitro disintegration test is by no means a
guarantee of drug’s bioavailability because if the disintegrated drug particles
do not dissolve, absorption is not possible. However, if a solid dosage form
does not conform to the DT, it portends bioavailability problems because the
subsequent process of dissolution will be much slower and absorption may be
insufficient. Coated tablets, especially sugar coated ones have long DT.
Rapid disintegration is thus important in the therapeutic success of a solid
dosage form. DT of a tablet is directly related to the amount of binder present
and the compression force (hardness) of a tablet. A harder tablet with large
amount of binder has a long DT. Disintegration can be aided by incorporating
disintegrants in suitable amounts during formulation.
After disintegration of a solid dosage form into granules, the granules must
deaggregate into fine particles, as dissolution from such tiny particles is faster
than that from granules.
Manufacturing/Processing Variables
Drug dissolution is the single most important factor in the absorption of drugs,
especially from the most widely used conventional solid dosage forms, tablets
and capsules. The dosage form related factors that influence dissolution and
hence absorption of a drug from such formulations are:
1. Excipients
and (formulation ingredients apart from the active principles),
2. Manufacturing processes.
The influence of excipients such as binders, lubricants, disintegrants, etc.
on drug dissolution will be discussed in the subsequent section of this chapter.
Several
dosage manufacturing
forms. Processes of processes influence
such importance drug
in the dissolution
manufacture from solid
of tablets are:
1. Method of granulation, and
2. Compression force.
The processing factor of importance in the manufacture of capsules that
can influence its dissolution is the intensity of packing of capsule contents.
Method of Granulation: The wet granulation process is the most
conventional technique in the manufacture of tablets and was once thought to
yield tablets that dissolve faster than those made by other granulation
methods. The limitations of this method include—
(i) Formation of crystal bridge by the presence of liquid,
(ii) The liquid may act as a medium for affecting chemical reactions
such as hydrolysis, and
(iii) The drying step may harm the thermolabile drugs.
Involvement of large number of steps each of which can influence drug
dissolution—method and duration of blending, method, time and temperature
of drying, etc.
The method of direct compression has been utilized to yield tablets that
dissolve at a faster rate. One of the more recent methods that have resulted in
superior product is agglomerative phase of communition (APOC) . The
process involves grinding of drugs in a ball mill for time long enough to affect
spontaneous agglomeration. The tablets so produced were stronger and
showed rapid rate of dissolution in comparison to tablets made by other
methods. The reason attributed to it was an increase in the internal surface
area of the granules prepared by APOC method.
Compression Force: The compression force employed in tabletting
process influence density, porosity, hardness, disintegration time and
dissolution of tablets. The curve obtained by plotting compression force
versus rate of dissolution can take one of the 4 possible shapes shown in Fig.
2.25.
Fig. 2.25. Influence of compression force on dissolution rate of tablets
On the one hand, higher compression force increases the density and
hardness of tablet, decreases porosity and hence penetrability of the solvent
into the tablet, retards wettability by forming a firmer and more effective
sealing layer by the lubricant, and in many cases, promotes tighter bonding
between the particles, all of which result in slowing of the dissolution rate of
tablets (curve A of Fig. 2.25). On the other hand, higher compression forces
cause deformation, crushing or fracture of drug particles into smaller ones or
convert a spherical granule into a disc shaped particle with a large increase in
the effective surface area. This results in an increase in the dissolution rate of
the tablet (curve B of Fig. 2.25). A combination of both the curves A and B is
also possible as shown in curves C and D. In short, the influence of
compression force on the dissolution rate is difficult to predict and a thorough
study on each formulation should be made to ensure better dissolution and
bioavailability.
Intensity of Packing of Capsule Contents: Like the compression force
for tablets, packing density in case of capsule dosage form can either inhibit or
promote dissolution. Diffusion of GI fluids into the tightly filled capsules
creates a high pressure within the capsule resulting in rapid bursting and
dissolution of contents. Opposite is also possible. It has been shown that
capsules with finer particles and intense packing have poor drug release and
dissolution rate due to a decrease in pore size of the compact and poor
penetrability by the GI fluids.
Pharmaceutical Ingredients/Excipients (Formulation factors)
A drug is rarely administered in its original form. Almost always, a
convenient dosage form to be administered by a suitable route is prepared.
Such a formulation contains a number of excipients (non-drug components of
a formulation). Excipients are added to ensure acceptability, physicochemical
stability during the shelf-life, uniformity of composition and dosage, and
optimum bioavailability and functionality of the drug product. Despite their
inertness and utility in the dosage form, excipients can influence absorption of
drugs. The more the number of excipients in a dosage form, the more
complex it is and greater the potential for absorption and bioavailability
problems. Commonly used excipients in various dosage forms are vehicles,
diluents (fillers), binders and granulating agents, disintegrants, lubricants,
coatings, suspending agents, emulsifiers, surfactants, buffers, complexing
agents, colorants, sweeteners, crystal growth inhibitors, etc.
Vehicle: Vehicle or solvent system is the major component of liquid orals
and parenterals. The 3 categories of vehicles in use are—aqueous vehicles
(water, syrup, etc.), nonaqueous water miscible vehicles (propylene glycol,
glycerol, sorbitol) and nonaqueous water immiscible vehicles (vegetable oils).
Bioavailability of a drug from vehicles depends to a large extent on its
miscibility with biological fluids. Aqueous and water miscible vehicles are
miscible with the body fluids and drugs from them are rapidly absorbed.
Quite often, a drug is more soluble in water miscible vehicles like propylene
glycol (serving as a co-solvent) and show better bioavailability. Sometimes
dilution of such vehicles with the body fluids results in precipitation of drug
as fine particles which, however, dissolve rapidly. Solubilisers such as
polysorbate 80 are sometimes used to promote solubility of a drug in aqueous
vehicles. In case of water immiscible vehicles, the rate of drug absorption
depends upon it’s partitioning from the oil phase to the aqueous body fluids,
which could be a rate-limiting step. Viscosity of the vehicles is another factor
in the absorption of drugs. Diffusion into the bulk of GI fluids and thus
absorption of a drug from a viscous vehicle may be slower.
Diluents (Fillers): Diluents are commonly added to tablet (and capsule)
formulations if the required dose is inadequate to produce the necessary bulk.
A diluent may be organic or inorganic. Among organic diluents,
carbohydrates are very widely used—for example, starch, lactose,
microcrystalline cellulose, etc. These hydrophilic powders are very useful in
promoting the dissolution of poorly water-soluble, hydrophobic drugs like
spironolactone and triamterene by forming a coat onto the hydrophobic
surface of drug particles and rendering them hydrophilic. Among the
inorganic diluents, dicalcium phosphate (DCP) is most common. One classic
example of drug-diluent interaction resulting in poor bioavailability is that of
tetracycline and DCP. The cause is formation of divalent calcium-tetracycline
complex which is poorly soluble and thus, unabsorbable.
Binders and Granulating Agents: These materials are used to hold
powders together to form granules or promote cohesive compacts for directly
compressible materials and to ensure that the tablet remains intact after
compression. Popular binders include polymeric materials (natural,
semisynthetic and synthetic) like starch, cellulose derivatives, acacia, PVP,
etc. Others include gelatin and sugar solution. In general, like fillers, the
hydrophilic (aqueous) binders show better dissolution profile with poorly
wettable drugs like phenacetin by imparting hydrophilic properties to the
granule surface. However, the proportion of strong binders in the tablet
formulation is very critical. Large amounts of such binders increase hardness
and decrease disintegration/dissolution rates of tablets. PEG 6000 was found
to be a deleterious binder for phenobarbital as it forms a poorly soluble
complex with the drug. Non-aqueous binders like ethyl cellulose also retard
drug dissolution.
Disintegrants: These agents overcome the cohesive strength of tablet and
break them up on contact with water which is an important prerequisite to
tablet dissolution. Almost all the disintegrants are hydrophilic in nature. A
decrease in the amount of disintegrant can significantly lower bioavailability.
Adsorbing disintegrants like bentonite and veegum should be avoided with

low dose drugs like digoxin, alkaloids and steroids since a large amount of
dose is permanently adsorbed and only a fraction is available for absorption.
Microcrystalline cellulose is a very good disintegrant (and a binder too) but at
high compression forces, it may retard drug dissolution.
Lubricants/Antifrictional Agents: These agents are added to tablet
formulations to aid flow of granules, to reduce interparticle friction and
sticking or adhesion of particles to dies and punches. The commonly used
lubricants are hydrophobic in nature (several metallic stearates and waxes)
and known to inhibit wettability, penetration of water into tablet and their
disintegration and dissolution. This is because the disintegrant gets coated
with the lubricant if blended simultaneously which however can be prevented
by adding the lubricant in the final stage. The best alternative is use of soluble
lubricants like SLS and carbowaxes which promote drug dissolution.
Coatings: In general, the deleterious effect of various coatings on drug
dissolution from a tablet dosage form is in the following order:
Enteric coat > Sugar coat > Non-enteric film coat.
The dissolution profile of certain coating materials change on aging; e.g.
shellac coated tablets, on prolonged storage, dissolve more slowly in the
intestine. This can, however, be prevented by incorporating little PVP in the
coating formulation.
Suspending Agents/Viscosity Imparters: Popular suspending agents are
hydrophilic polymers like vegetable gums (acacia, tragacanth, etc.),
semisynthetic gums (CMC, MC) and synthetic gums which primarily stabilize
the solid drug particles by reducing their rate of settling through an increase in
the viscosity of the medium. These agents and some sugars are also used as
viscosity imparters to affect palatability and pourability of solution dosage
forms. Such agents can influence drug absorption in several ways. The
macromolecular gums often form unabsorbable complexes with drugs —for
example,
An sodium
increase CMC forms
in viscosity a poorly
by these agentssoluble
acts ascomplex with amphetamine.
a mechanical barrier to the
diffusion of drug from the dosage form into the bulk of GI fluids and from GI
fluids to the mucosal lining by forming a viscid layer on the GI mucosa. They
also retard the GI transit of drugs.
Surfactants: Surfactants are widely used in formulations as wetting
agents, solubilisers, emulsifiers, etc. Their influence on drug absorption is
very complex. They may enhance or retard drug absorption either by
interacting with the drug or the membrane or both.
Mechanisms involved in the increased absorption of drug by use of
surfactants include:
1. Promotion of wetting (through increase in effective surface area) and

dissolution of drugs e.g. polysorbate 80 with phenacetin.
2. Better membrane contact of the drug for absorption.
3. Enhanced membrane permeability of the drug.

The beneficial effects of surfactants have been observed at pre-critical
micelle concentration levels. However, physiologic surfactants like the bile
salts (anionic) and lysolecithin (nonionic) promote absorption of hydrophobic
drugs like steroids, oil soluble vitamins and griseofulvin by their micellar
solubilising property.
Decreased absorption of drug in the presence of surfactants has been
suggested to be due to:
1. Formation of unabsorbable drug-micelle complex at surfactant
concentrations above critical micelle concentration
2. Laxative action induced by a large surfactant concentration
Buffers: Buffers are sometimes useful in creating the right atmosphere for
drug dissolution as was observed for buffered aspirin tablets. However,
certain buffer systems containing potassium cations inhibit the drug
absorption as seen with vitamin B2 and sulphanilamide. The reason attributed
to it was the uptake of fluids by the intestinal epithelial cells due to which the
effective drug concentration in the tissue is reduced and the absorption rate is
decreased. Such an inhibitory effect of the various buffer cations on the drug
transfer rate is in the following order:
K+ > NH4+ > Li+ > Na+ > TRIS+.
Hence, the buffer system for a salt of a drug should contain the same cation
as the drug salt and introduce no additional cations.
Complexing Agents: Complex formation has been used to alter the
physicochemical and biopharmaceutical properties of a drug. A complexed
drug may have altered stability, solubility, molecular size, partition coefficient
and diffusion coefficient. Basically, such complexes are pharmacologically
inert and must dissociate either at the absorption site or following absorption
into the systemic circulation.
Several examples where complexation has been used to enhance drug
bioavailability are:
1. Enhanced dissolution through formation of a soluble complex e.g.
ergotamine tartarate-caffeine complex and hydroquinone-digoxin
complex.
2. Enhanced lipophilicity for better membrane permeability e.g. caffeine-
PABA complex.
3. Enhanced membrane permeability e.g. enhanced GI absorption of

heparin (normally not absorbed from the GIT) in presence of EDTA
which chelates calcium and magnesium ions of the membrane.
Complexation
poorly can beabsorbable
soluble or poorly deleteriouscomplex
to drug e.g.
absorption due toofformation
complexation of
tetracycline
with divalent and trivalent cations like calcium (milk, antacids), iron
(haematinics), magnesium (antacids) and aluminium (antacids).
Reasons for poor bioavailability of some complexes are –
4. Failure to dissociate at the absorption site, and
5. Large molecular size of the complex that cannot diffuse through the
cell membrane—for example, drug-protein complex.
Colorants: Even a very low concentration of water-soluble dye can have
an inhibitory effect on dissolution rate of several crystalline drugs. The dye
molecules get adsorbed onto the crystal faces and inhibit drug dissolution —
for example, brilliant blue retards dissolution of sulphathiazole. Dyes have
also been found to inhibit micellar solubilisation effect of bile acids which
may impair the absorption of hydrophobic drugs like steroids. Cationic dyes
are more reactive than the anionic ones due to their greater power for
adsorption on primary particles.
Precipitation/Crystal Growth Inhibitors: When a significant increase in
free drug concentration above saturation or equilibrium solubility occurs, it
results in supersaturation which in turn lead to drug precipitation or
crystallization. Precipitation or crystal growth inhibitors such as PVP, HPMC,
PEG, PVA (polyvinylalcohol) and similar such hydrophilic polymers prevent
or prolong supersaturation thus preventing precipitation or crystallization by –
1. Increasing the viscosity of vehicle.
2. Prevent conversion of a high-energy metastable polymorph into stable,
less soluble polymorph.
3. Adsorbing on the faces of crystal and reduce crystal growth.
Nature and Type of Dosage Form
Apart from the proper selection of drug, clinical success often depends to a
great extent on the proper selection of dosage form of that drug. For a given
drug, a 2 to 5 fold or perhaps more difference could be observed in the oral
bioavailability of a drug depending upon the nature and type of dosage form.
Such a difference is due to the relative rate at which a particular dosage form
releases the drug to the biological fluids and the membrane. The relative rate
at which a drug from a dosage form is presented to the body depends upon the
complexity of dosage form. The more complex a dosage form, greater the
number of rate-limiting steps and greater the potential for bioavailability
problems.
The rate at which a particular dosage form releases the drug following
administration is given in Fig. 2.26.
Fig. 2.26. Course of events that occur following oral administration of various
dosage forms
As a general rule, the bioavailability of a drug from various dosage forms
decreases in the following order:
Solutions > Emulsions > Suspensions > Capsules > Tablets > Coated
Tablets > Enteric Coated Tablets > Sustained Release Products.
Thus, absorption of a drug from solution is fastest with least potential for
bioavailability problems whereas absorption from a sustained release product
is slowest with greatest bioavailability risk.
Several factors, especially the excipients which influence bioavailability of
a drug from its dosage form, have been discussed earlier.
Solutions: A drug in a solution (syrups, elixirs, etc.) is most rapidly
absorbed since the major rate-limiting step, drug dissolution, is absent.
Factors that influence bioavailability of a drug from solution dosage form
include—the nature of solvent (aqueous, water miscible, etc.), viscosity,
surfactants, solubilisers, stabilizers, etc. Quite often, dilution of a drug in
solution with
generally GI fluids
dissolve resultsFactors
rapidly. in precipitation
that limitofthe
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar drug as fine particles
formulation which
of a drug in 53/413
solution form include stability, solubility, taste, cost of the product, etc.
Emulsions: Emulsion dosage forms have been found to be superior to

suspensions in administering poorly aqueous soluble lipophilic drugs. It was
observed with indoxole (an NSAID) that when it is dissolved in a vegetable
oil and emulsified in water, absorption increases 3 fold over its aqueous
suspension. Emulsion dosage form presents a large surface area of oil to the
GIT for absorption of a drug. Scientists have claimed that a drug administered
in oily vehicle (emulsified and solubilised in the GIT by bile salts to form
mixed micelles) can direct the distribution of drug directly into the lymphatic
system thereby avoiding the hepatic portal vein and first-pass metabolism.
Suspensions: The major rate-limiting step in the absorption of a drug from
suspension dosage form is drug dissolution which is generally rapid due to the
large surface area of the particles. Important factors in the bioavailability of a
drug from suspensions include particle size, polymorphism, wetting agents,
viscosity of the medium, suspending agents, etc.
Powders: Though powders are superior to tablets and capsules, they are
not in use nowadays due to handling and palatability problems. Major factors
to be considered in the absorption of a drug from powders are particle size,
polymorphism, wettability, etc.
Capsules: Powders and granules are popularly administered in hard gelatin
capsules whereas viscous fluids and oils in soft elastic shells. Factors of
importance in case of hard gelatin capsules include drug particle size, density,
polymorphism, intensity of packing and influence of diluents and excipients.
Hydrophilic diluents like lactose improve wettability, deaggregation and
dispersion of poorly aqueous soluble drugs whereas inhibitory effect is
observed with hydrophobic lubricants like magnesium stearate. A
hydrophobic drug with a fine particle size in capsule results in a decrease in
porosity of powder bed and thus, decreased penetrability by the solvent with
the result that clumping of particle occurs. This can be overcome by
incorporating a large amount of hydrophilic diluent (upto 50%), a small
amount of wetting agent cum lubricant such as SLS (upto 1%) and/or by wet
granulation to convert an impermeable powder bed to the one having good
permeability. Other factors of importance include possible interaction
between the drug and the diluent (e.g. tetracycline-DCP) and between drug
and gelatin shell. The influence of capsule processing factors on drug
dissolution and bioavailability have already been discussed.
Soft elastic capsules as such dissolve faster than hard gelatin capsules and
tablets and show better drug availability from oily solutions, emulsions or
suspensions of medicaments (especially hydrophobic drugs). One of the best
examples of this is the faster dissolution of indoxole (equivalent to that of an
emulsion dosage form) when formulated as soft gelatin capsule in comparison
to hard gelatin capsule and aqueous suspension. Such poorly soluble drugs
can be dissolved in PEG or other suitable solvent with the aid of surfactants
and encapsulated without difficulty. Soft gelatin capsules are thus of

particular use where the drug dose is low, drug is lipophilic or when oily or
lipid based medicaments are to be administered. A problem with soft gelatin
capsules is the high water content of the shell (above 20%). This moisture
migrates into the shell content and crystallization of drug occurs during the
drying stage resulting in altered drug dissolution characteristics.
Tablets: Compressed tablets are the most widely used convenience and
cost effective dosage forms. A schematic representation of disintegration,
deaggregation, dissolution and absorption of a drug from a tablet dosage form
is shown in Fig. 2.27.
Fig. 2.27. Sequence of events in the absorption of a drug from tablet dosage
form
The bioavailability problems with tablets arise from the reduction in the
effective surface area due to granulation and subsequent compression into a
dosage form. Since dissolution is most rapid from primary drug particles due
to their large surface area, disintegration of a tablet into granules and
subsequent deaggregation of granules into fine particles is very important. A
number of formulation and processing factors influencing these steps and also
the physicochemical properties of drug substance that influence bioavailability
have already been discussed in the earlier sections of this chapter.
Coated Tablets: In addition to factors that influence drug release from
compressed tablets, the coating acts as yet another barrier which must first
dissolve or disrupt to give way to disintegration and dissolution of tablet. Of
the two types of coatings, the film coat, which is thin, dissolves rapidly and
does not significantly affect drug absorption. The sugar coat which though
soluble, is generally tough and takes longer to dissolve. The sealing coat
which is generally of shellac, is most deleterious. Press coated tablets may be
superior to sugar coated tablets in such cases.
Enteric-Coated Tablets: Enteric coated tablets have great potential in

creating bioavailability problems because the coat dissolves only in the
alkaline pH of the intestine and it may take as long as 2 to 4 hours for such a
tablet to empty from the stomach into the intestine depending upon the meals
and the GI motility. Hence, the pharmacological response may eventually be
delayed by as much as 6 to 8 hours. The problem of gastric emptying can,
however, be overcome by enteric coating the granules or pellets and
presenting them in a capsule or compressing into a tablet. The thickness of
enteric coat is yet another determinant factor in drug dissolution, increasing
thickness being more problematic. Aging of the dosage form also affects drug
release, especially with shellac. In one of the studies, shellac coated tablets of
salicylic acid stored for 2 years showed a 60% decrease in the peak plasma
level.
Sustained-Release Products: Drug release from such products is most
unpredictable, the problems ranging from dose dumping to unsatisfactory or
no drug release at all. However, with the development of newer innovations
and technologies, it is becoming increasingly reliable and the results
reproducible with little inter-subject variations.
Product Age and Storage Conditions
A number of changes, especially in the physicochemical properties of a drug
in dosage form, can result due to aging and alterations in storage conditions
which can adversely
precipitation affect
of drug due bioavailability.
to altered With solution
solubility, especially due to dosage form,
conversion of
metastable into poorly soluble, stable polymorph can occur during the shelf-
life of the product. Changes in particle size distribution have been observed
with a number of suspension dosage forms resulting in decreased rate of drug
dissolution and absorption. In case of solid dosage forms, especially tablets,
disintegration and dissolution rates are greatly affected due to aging and
storage conditions. An increase in these parameters of tablets has been
attributed to excipients that harden on storage (e.g. PVP, acacia, etc.) while
the decrease is mainly due to softening/crumbling of the binder during storage
(e.g. CMC).
Changes that occur during the shelf-life of a dosage form are affected
mainly by large variations in temperature and humidity. In one of the studies
conducted on prednisone tablets containing lactose as the filler, high
temperature and high humidity resulted in harder tablets that disintegrated and
dissolved slowly.
PATIENT RELATED FACTORS AFFECTING DRUG ABSORPTION

Before dealing with the patient related factors influencing bioavailability of
a drug, the anatomy and physiology of the gastrointestinal tract will be
discussed briefly.
Gastrointestinal tract
The gastrointestinal tract (GIT) comprises of a number of components,
their primary function being secretion, digestion and absorption. The mean
length of the entire GIT is 450 cm. The major functional components of the
GIT are stomach, small intestine (duodenum, jejunum and ileum) and large
intestine (colon) which grossly differ from each other in terms of anatomy,
function, secretions and pH (Fig. 2.28 and Table 2.7).
Fig. 2.28. Schematic representation of the GIT and different sites of drug
absorption
TABLE 2.7.
Anatomical and Functional Differences Between the Important Regions
of the GIT
Stomach Small I ntestine L arge Intestine Rectum
pH range 1-3 5-7.5 7.9-8.0 7.5-8.0
Length (cms) 20 285 110 20
Diameter (cms) 15 2.5 5 2.5
Surface area (sq.M) 0.1-0.2 200 0.15 0.02
Blood flow (L/min) 0.15 1.0 0.02 —
Transit time (hours) 1-5 3-6 6-12 6-12
Absorptive role Lipophilic, All types of Some drugs, All types of
acidic and drugs water and drugs
neutral drugs electrolytes
Absorptive Passive All absorption Passive Passive
mechanisms diffusion, mechanisms diffusion, diffusion,
convective convective convective
transport transport transport,
endocytosis
The entire length of the GI mucosa from stomach to large intestine is lined
by a thin layer of mucopolysaccharides (mucus/mucin) which normally acts as
an impermeable barrier to the particulates such as bacteria, cells or food
particles.
Stomach: The stomach is a bag like structure having a smooth mucosa and
thus small surface area. Its acidic pH, due to secretion of HCl, favours
absorption of acidic drugs if they are soluble in the gastric fluids since they
are unionised to a large extent in such a pH. The gastric pH aids dissolution
of basic drugs due to salt formation and subsequent ionisation which are
therefore absorbed to a lesser extent from stomach because of the same
reason.
The stomach is not the principal region for drug absorption because –
1.
2. The total mucosal
The epithelium area is small.
is dominated by mucus-secreting cells rather than
absorptive cells.
3. The gastric residence time is limited due to which there is limited
opportunity for gastric uptake of drug.
Small Intestine: It is the major site for absorption of most drugs due to its
special characteristics –
1. Large surface area – the folds in the intestinal mucosa, called as the
folds of Kerckring, result in 3 fold increase in the surface area. The
surface of these folds possess finger like projections called as villi
which increase the surface area 30 times. From the surface of villi
protrude several microvilli (about 600 from each absorptive cell that
lines the villi) resulting in 600 times increase in the surface area (Fig.
2.29).
2. Great length of small intestine (approximately 285 cms) – result in
more than 200 square meters of surface which is several times that of
stomach.
3. Greater blood flow - the blood flow to the small intestine is 6 to 10
times that of stomach.
4. Favourable pH range – the pH range of small intestine is 5 to 7.5
which is favourable for most drugs to remain unionised.
5. Slow peristaltic movement – prolongs the residence time of drug in the
intestine
6. High permeability – the intestinal epithelium is dominated by
absorptive cells.
A contribution of all the above factors thus make intestine the best site for
absorption of most drugs.
Fig. 2.29. Representation of the components of intestinal epithelium that

accounts for its large surface area
Large Intestine: Its length and mucosal surface area is very small (villi
and microvilli are absent) in comparison to small intestine and thus absorption
of drugs
The mainfrom
role this region
of large is insignificant.
intestine Its contents
is in the absorption are neutral
of water or alkaline.
and electrolytes.
However, because of the long residence time (6 to 12 hours), colonic transit
may be important in the absorption of some poorly soluble drugs and
sustained release dosage forms.
PATIENT RELATED FACTORS

Age
In infants, the gastric pH is high and intestinal surface and blood flow to the
GIT is low resulting in altered absorption pattern in comparison to adults. In
elderly persons, causes of impaired drug absorption include altered gastric
emptying, decreased intestinal surface area and GI blood flow, higher

incidents of achlorhydria and bacterial overgrowth in small intestine.
Gastric Emptying
Apart from dissolution of a drug and its permeation through the biomembrane,
the passage from stomach to the small intestine, called as gastric emptying,
can also be a rate-limiting step in drug absorption because the major site of
drug absorption is intestine. Thus, generally speaking, rapid gastric emptying
increases bioavailability of a drug.
Rapid gastric emptying is advisable where:
1. A rapid onset of action is desired e.g. sedatives.
2. Dissolution of drug occurs in the intestine e.g. enteric-coated dosage
forms.
3. The drugs are not stable in the gastric fluids e.g. penicillin G and
erythromycin.
4. The drug is best absorbed from the distal part of the small intestine e.g.
vitamin B12.
For better dissolution and absorption, the gastric emptying can be promoted
by taking the drug on empty stomach. Since gastric emptying is altered by
several factors due to which large intersubject variations are observed, all
biopharmaceutic studies that require the drug to be taken orally are performed
in volunteers on empty stomach.
Gastric emptying of a drug is delayed by co-administering food because
unless the gastric contents are fluid enough or the size of the solid particles is
reduced below 2 mm, its passage through the pylorus into the intestine is not
possible.
Delay in gastric emptying is recommended in particular where:
1. The food promotes drug dissolution and absorption e.g. griseofulvin.
2. Disintegration and dissolution of dosage form is promoted by gastric
fluids.
3. The drugs dissolve slowly e.g. griseofulvin.
4. The drugs irritate the gastric mucosa e.g. aspirin, phenylbutazone and
nitrofurantoin.
5. The drugs are absorbed from the proximal part of the small intestine
and prolonged drug-absorption site contact is desired e.g. vitamin B2
and vitamin C
Gastric emptying is a first-order process. Several parameters are used to
quantify gastric emptying:
1. Gastric emptying rate is the speed at which the stomach contents
empty into the intestine.
2. Gastric emptying time is the time required for the gastric contents to
empty into the small intestine . Longer the gastric emptying time, lesser
the gastric emptying rate.
3. Gastric emptying t is the time taken for half the stomach contents to
empty. ½
In vivo gastric emptying of a drug (so also the disintegration of dosage

form and drug release) can be studied by using radio-opaque contrast
materials like barium sulphate or tagging the drug with a radioisotope and
scanning the stomach at regular intervals of time.
A large number of factors influence gastric emptying as discussed below.
1. Volume of meal: Larger the bulk of the meals, longer the gastric
emptying time. However, an initial rapid rate of emptying is observed
with a large meal volume and an initial lag phase in emptying of a
small volume meal. Since gastric emptying is a first-order process, a
plot of log of volume of contents remaining in the stomach versus time
yields a straight line.
2. Composition of meal: Predictably, the rate of gastric emptying for
various food materials is in the following order: carbohydrates >
proteins > fats. Fats promote secretion of bile which too has an
inhibitory effect on gastric emptying. Delayed gastric emptying as
observed with fatty meals, is beneficial for the absorption of poorly
soluble drugs like griseofulvin.
3. Physical state and viscosity of meal: Liquid meals take less than an
hour to empty whereas a solid meal may take as long as 6 to 7 hours.
Viscous materials empty at a slow rate in comparison to less viscous
materials.
4. Temperature of the meal: High or low temperature of the ingested
fluid (in comparison to body temperature) reduce the gastric emptying
rate.
5. Gastrointestinal pH: Gastric emptying is retarded at low stomach pH
and promoted at higher or alkaline pH. Chemicals that affect
gastrointestinal pH also alter gastric emptying. The inhibitory effect
of various acids on gastric emptying decreases with increase in
molecular weight and is in the following order -
HCl > acetic > lactic > tartaric > citric
With alkaline solutions, a low base concentration (1% NaHCO 3)
increases the gastric emptying rate more than the one of higher
concentration (5%).
6. Electrolytes and osmotic pressure: Water, isotonic solutions, and
solutions of low salt concentration empty the stomach rapidly whereas
a higher electrolyte concentration decreases gastric emptying rate.
7. Body posture: Gastric emptying is favoured while standing and by

lying on the right side since the normal curvature of the stomach
provides a downhill path whereas lying on the left side or in supine
position retards it.
8. Emotional state: Stress and anxiety promote gastric motility whereas
depression retards it.
9. Exercise: Vigorous physical training retards gastric emptying.
10. Disease states: Diseases like gastroenteritis, gastric ulcer, pyloric
stenosis, diabetes and hypothyroidism retard gastric emptying. Partial
or total gastrectomy, duodenal ulcer and hyperthyroidism promote
gastric emptying rate.
11. Drugs: Drugs that retard gastric emptying include poorly soluble
antacids (aluminium
propantheline), narcotic hydroxide),
analgesics anticholinergics
(morphine) and (atropine,
tricyclic
antidepressants (imipramine, amitriptyline). Metoclopramide, dom-
peridone and cisapride (prokinetic agents) stimulate gastric emptying.
The passage of drug through the oesophagus, called as oesophageal
transit, is important in persons who swallow the solid dosage form lying
down in supine position or with little or no water. In such cases, the dosage
form remains lodged in the oesophagus and disintegrates slowly which may
result in delayed absorption or local damage to the mucosa from drugs like
NSAIDs.
Intestinal Transit
Since small intestine is the major site for absorption of most drugs, long
intestinal transit time is desirable for complete drug absorption ( see Table
2.8).
TABLE 2.8.
Transit Time for Contents from Different Regions of Intestine
Intestinal region Transit time
Duodenum 5 minutes
Jejunum 2 hours
Ileum 3 to 6 hours
Caecum 0.5 to 1 hour
Colon 6 to 12 hours
The residence time depends upon the intestinal motility or contractions.
The mixing movement of the intestine that occurs due to peristaltic
contractions promote drug absorption, firstly, by increasing the drug-intestinal
membrane contact, and secondly, by enhancing drug dissolution especially of
poorly soluble drugs, through induced agitation.
Delayed intestinal transit is desirable for:
1. Drugs that dissolve or release slowly from their dosage form

(sustained-release products) or when the ratio of dose to solubility is
high e.g. chlorothiazide.
2. Drugs that dissolve only in the intestine (enteric-coated formulations).
3. Drugs which are absorbed from specific sites in the intestine (several
B vitamins, lithium carbonate, etc.).
4. When the drug penetrates the intestinal mucosa very slowly e.g.
acyclovir.
5. When absorption of drug from the colon is minimal.
However, as the contents move down the intestine into the colon, its
viscosity gradually increases due to absorption of water and electrolytes
which limits the design of sustained release products of drugs having short
biological half-lives.
Like gastric emptying, intestinal transit is influenced by several factors like
food, drugs and diseases. Food, decreased digestive secretions and pregnancy
retard intestinal transit whereas diarrhoea promotes it. Drugs like
metoclopramide that promote gastric emptying and intestinal transit enhance
absorption of rapidly soluble drugs. Laxatives also promote the rate of
intestinal transit. Drugs such as anticholinergics that retard gastric and
intestinal transit promote absorption of poorly soluble drugs—for example,
propantheline shows a 100%, 50% and 30% rise in the absorption of vitamin
B2, nitrofurantoin and hydrochlorothiazide respectively.
Gastrointestinal pH
A tremendous 107 fold difference in the hydrogen ion concentration is
observed between the gastric and colon fluids. The GI pH generally increases
gradually as one move down the stomach to the colon and rectum ( see Fig.
2.22). GI fluid pH influence drug absorption in several ways:
1. Disintegration: The disintegration of some dosage forms is pH
sensitive. With enteric-coated formulations, the coat dissolves only in the
intestine followed by disintegration of the tablet.
2. Dissolution: A large number of drugs are either weak acids or weak
bases whose solubility is greatly affected by pH. A pH that favours formation
of salt of the drug enhances the dissolution of that drug. Since drug
dissolution is one of the important rate-determining steps in drug absorption,
GI pH is of great significance in the oral bioavailability of drugs. Weakly
acidic drugs dissolve rapidly in the alkaline pH of the intestine whereas basic
drugs dissolve in the acidic pH of the stomach. Since the primary site for
absorption of most drugs is small intestine, the poorly water-soluble basic
drugs must first dissolve in the acidic pH of stomach before moving into the
intestine.
3. Absorption: Depending upon the drug pK a and whether its an acidic

or a basic drug, the GI pH influences drug absorption by determining the
amount of drug that would exist in the unionised form at the site of
absorption. This topic has already been dealt with in sufficient details under
pH-partition hypothesis.
4. Stability: GI pH also influences the chemical stability of drugs. The
acidic stomach pH is known to affect degradation of penicillin G and
erythromycin. This can be overcome by preparing prodrugs of such drugs that
do not degrade or dissolve in acidic pH e.g. carindacillin and erythromycin
estolate. With basic drugs, formation of insoluble drug hydroxide in the
alkaline pH of the intestine has been observed.
Disease States
Several disease states can influence the rate and extent of drug absorption.
The 3 major classes of disease states that can influence the bioavailability of a
drug are:
1. Gastrointestinal diseases,
2. Cardiovascular diseases, and
3. Hepatic diseases.
1. Gastrointestinal diseases: A number of pathologic conditions of the
GIT can influence changes in drug absorption pattern, namely:
(b) Altered
(a) GI motility
Gastrointestinal : (discussed
diseases earlier) : The influence of achlorhydria
and infections
(decreased gastric acid secretion and increased stomach pH) on gastric
emptying and drug absorption, especially that of acidic drugs
(decreased absorption, e.g. aspirin) has been studied. Two of the
intestinal disorders related with malabsorption syndrome that influence
drug availability are celiac disease (characterized by destruction of villi
and microvilli) and Crohn’s disease. Abnormalities associated with
celiac disease include increased gastric emptying rate and GI
permeability, altered intestinal drug metabolism, steatorrhea (impaired
secretion of bile thus affecting absorption of lipophilic drugs and
vitamins) and reduced enterohepatic cycling of bile salts, all of which
can significantly impair drug absorption. Conditions associated with
Crohn’s disease that can alter absorption pattern are altered gut wall
microbial flora, decreased gut surface area and intestinal transit rate.
Malabsorption is also induced by drugs such as antineoplastics and
alcohol which increase permeability of agents not normally absorbed.
GI infections like shigellosis, gastroenteritis, cholera and food
poisoning also result in malabsorption. Colonic diseases such as colitis,
amoebiasis and constipation can also alter drug absorption.
(c) Gastrointestinal surgery: Gastrectomy can result in drug dumping in

the intestine, osmotic diarrhoea and reduced intestinal transit time.
Intestinal surgery also influences drug absorption for predictable
reasons.
2. Cardiovascular diseases: Several changes associated with congestive
cardiac failure influence bioavailability of a drug viz. oedema of the intestine,
decreased blood flow to the GIT and gastric emptying rate and altered GI pH,
secretions and microbial flora.
3. Hepatic diseases: Disorders such as hepatic cirrhosis influence
bioavailability mainly of drugs that undergo considerable first-pass hepatic
metabolism e.g. propranolol; enhanced bioavailability is observed in such
cases.
Blood Flow to the GIT

The GIT is extensively supplied by blood capillary network and the lymphatic
system. The absorbed drug can thus be taken up by the blood or the lymph.
Since the blood flow rate to the GIT (splanchnic circulation) is 500 to 1000
times (28% of cardiac output) more than the lymph flow, most drugs reach the
systemic circulation via blood whereas only a few drugs, especially low
molecular weight, lipid soluble compounds are removed by lymphatic system.
The high perfusion rate of GIT ensures that once the drug has crossed the
membrane, it is rapidly removed from the absorption site thus maintaining the
sink conditions and concentration gradient for continued drug absorption.
For drugs that have high permeation rates, e.g. highly lipid soluble drugs or
drugs absorbed through pores, the GI perfusion rate could be a rate-limiting
step in the absorption, e.g. tritiated water. This is not so in the case of drugs
having poor permeability coefficient, e.g. ribitol. Blood flow is also important
for actively absorbed drugs since oxygen and energy is required for
transportation.
Food influences blood flow to the GIT. The perfusion rate increases after
meals and persists for few hours but drug absorption is not influenced
significantly.
Gastrointestinal Contents
A number of GI contents can influence drug absorption as discussed below:
1. Food-drug interactions: Presence of food may either delay, reduce,
increase or may not affect drug absorption (Table 2.9).
TABLE 2.9.
Influence of Food on Drug Absorption
Delayed Decreased Increased Unaffected
Aspirin Penicillins
Griseofulvin Methyldopa 65/413
Paracetamol Erythromycin Nitrofurantoin Propylthiouracil
Diclofenac Ethanol Diazepam Sulphasomidine

Nitrofurantoin Tetracyclines Actively absorbed
Digoxin Levodopa water-soluble
Iron vitamins
Food-drug interactions may be due to the influence of food on physiologic
functions (alterations in the GI emptying rate, GI fluid secretions, pH, blood
flow and absorptive processes) and/or a consequence of physicochemical
interaction with the drug (alteration in drug dissolution profile, complexation
and adsorption).
As a general rule, drugs are better absorbed under fasting conditions and
presence of food retards or prevents it. Food does not significantly influence
absorption of a drug taken half an hour or more before meals and two hours or
more after meals.
Delayed or decreased drug absorption by the food could be due to one or
more of the several mechanisms:
(a) Delayed gastric emptying, affecting drugs unstable in the stomach e.g.
penicillins, or preventing the transit of enteric coated tablets into the
intestine which may be as long as 6 to 8 hours
(b) Formation of a poorly soluble, unabsorbable complex e.g. tetracycline-
calcium
(c) Increased viscosity due to food thereby preventing drug dissolution
and/or diffusion towards the absorption site
Increased drug absorption following a meal could be due to one or more of
the under mentioned reasons –
(a) Increased time for dissolution of a poorly soluble drug
(b) Enhanced solubility due to GI secretions like bile
(c) Prolonged residence time and absorption site contact of the drug e.g.
water-soluble vitamins
(d) Increased lymphatic absorption e.g. acitretin
The specific meal components also have an influence on drug absorption.
Meals high in fat aid solubilisation of poorly aqueous soluble drugs e.g.
isotretinoin. Food high in proteins inhibits absorption of levodopa. An
interesting example of influence of high protein meal is that of increased oral
availability of propranolol to which two reasons were attributed—firstly, such
a meal increases the hepatic blood flow due to which the drug can bypass
first-pass hepatic metabolism (propranolol is a drug with high hepatic
extraction), and secondly, it promotes blood flow to the GIT thus aiding drug
absorption.
2. Fluid volume: Administration of a drug with large fluid volume results
in better dissolution, rapid gastric emptying and enhanced absorption —for
example, erythromycin is better absorbed when taken with a glass of water

under fasting condition than when taken with meals.
3. Interaction of drug with normal GI constituents: The GIT contains
ainfluence
number drug
of normal constituents
absorption. such
Mucin, as mucin,mucopolysaccharide
a protective bile salts and enzymes
thatwhich
lines
the GI mucosa, interacts with streptomycin and certain quaternary ammonium
compounds and retards their absorption. It also acts as a barrier to diffusion
of drugs. The bile salts aid solubilisation and absorption of lipid soluble drugs
like griseofulvin and vitamins A, D, E and K on one hand and on the other,
decreases absorption of neomycin and kanamycin by forming water insoluble
complexes.
The influence of GI enzymes on absorption will be discussed later.
4. Drug-Drug
drug-drug
interactions in the GIT: Like food-drug interactions,
interactions can either be physicochemical or physiological.
(a) Physicochemical drug-drug interactions can be due to—
Adsorption: Antidiarrhoeal preparations containing adsorbents like
attapulgite or kaolin-pectin retard/prevent absorption of a number of
drugs co-administered with them e.g. promazine and lincomycin.
Complexation: Antacids and/or mineral substitutes containing heavy
metals such as aluminium, calcium, iron, magnesium or zinc retard
absorption of tetracyclines through formation of unabsorbable
complexes. The anion exchange resins, cholestyramine and colestipol,
bind cholesterol metabolites, bile salts and a number of drugs in the
intestine and prevent their absorption.
pH change: Basic drugs dissolve in gastric pH; co-administration of
such drugs, e.g. tetracycline with antacids such as sodium bicarbonate
results in elevation of stomach pH and hence decreases dissolution rate
or causes precipitation of drug.
(b) Physiologic drug-drug interactions can be due to following
mechanisms—
Decreased GI transit: Anticholinergics such as propantheline retard GI
motility and promote absorption of drugs like ranitidine and digoxin,
whereas delay absorption of paracetamol and sulpha-methoxazole.
Increased gastric emptying : Metoclopramide promotes GI motility and
enhances absorption of tetracycline, pivampicillin and levodopa.
Altered GI metabolism: Antibiotics inhibit bacterial metabolism of
drugs, e.g. erythromycin enhances efficacy of digoxin by this
mechanism. Co-administration of antibiotics with oral contraceptives
like ethinyl oestradiol

enterohepatic cycling decreases
of steroidtheconjugates
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankarefficacy ofwhich
latter otherwise
by decreasing
are 67/413
hydrolysed by gut bacteria after biliary excretion

Presystemic Metabolism/First-Pass Effects

For a drug administered orally, the 3 main reasons for its decreased
bioavailability are:
1. Decreased
complexation absorption (owing to adsorption,
and poor solubility). precipitation,
2. Destabilisation or destruction of drug.
3. First-pass/presystemic metabolism (see figure 2.30)
Fig. 2.30. Processes that reduce the availability of orally administered

drugs
Before a drug reaches blood circulation, it has to pass for the first time
through organs of elimination namely the GIT and the liver. The loss of drug
through biotransformation by such eliminating organs during its passage to
systemic circulation is called as first-pass or presystemic metabolism. The
diminished
plasma afterdrug
oral concentration
administrationorisrarely, complete
indicative absence effects.
of first-pass of the drug
The in3
primary systems which affect presystemic metabolism of a drug are (Fig.
2.31):
1. Luminal enzymes – the metabolism by these enzymes are further
categorised into two –
(b) Digestive enzymes, and
(c) Bacterial enzymes.
2. Gut wall enzymes/mucosal enzymes.
3. Hepatic enzymes.
Fig. 2.31. Different sites of presystemic metabolism

1. Digestive enzymes: These are the enzymes present in the gut fluids
and include enzymes from intestinal and pancreatic secretions. The latter
contains hydrolases which hydrolyse ester drugs like chloramphenicol
palmitate into active chloramphenicol, and peptidases which split amide
linkages and inactivate protein/polypeptide drugs. Thus, one of the
approaches to effect oral absorption of peptides is to deliver them to colon
which lack peptidases.
2. Bacterial enzymes: The GI microflora is scantily present in stomach
and small intestine and is rich in colon. Hence, most orally administered
drugs remain unaffected by them. The colonic microbes generally render a
drug more active or toxic on biotransformation—for example sulphasalazine,
a drug used in ulcerative colitis, is hydrolysed to sulphapyridine and 5-amino
salicylic acid by the microbial enzymes of the colon. An important role of
intestinal microflora is that in enterohepatic cycling. Their enzymes
hydrolyse the conjugates of drugs actively secreted via bile such as
glucuronides of digoxin and oral contraceptives. The free drugs are
reabsorbed into the systemic circulation.
3. Gut wall enzymes: Also called as mucosal enzymes, they are present
in stomach, intestine and colon. Alcohol dehydrogenase (ADH) is an enzyme
of stomach mucosa that inactivates ethanol. Intestinal mucosa contains both
phase I and phase II (predominant) enzymes, e.g. sulphation of ethinyl
oestradiol and isoprenaline. The colonic mucosa also contain both phase I and
phase II enzymes. However, it is only the enzymes of the proximal small

intestine that are most active.
4. Hepatic enzymes: Several drugs undergo first-pass hepatic metabolism,
the highly extracted
pentoxifylline, ones diltiazem,
nitroglycerine, being isoprenaline, propranolol,
nifedipine, lidocaine, alprenolol,
morphine, etc.
METHODS FOR STUDYING DRUG UPTAKE

The experimental methods for studying absorption of drugs can be classified
as in vitro and in situ.
1. I n vitr o exper im ents: are used to study the transport of drugs through
different types of membranes or biological materials. Such
experiments may utilize
(a) Diffusion cells
(b) Segments of GIT of laboratory animals – Two well known
established techniques are –
(i) Everted sac technique, and
(ii) Everted ring technique.
(c) Cell cultures of gut epithelium e.g. Caco-2 cells.
2. I n situ exper iments: simulates the in vivo conditions for drug
absorption and are based on perfusion of a segment of GIT by drug
solution and determination of amount of drug diffused through it. The
two perfusion methods used in laboratory animals are –
(a)
(b) Doluisio method
Single pass perfusion.
Diffusion Cell Method

Diffusion cells consist of two compartments –
1. Donor compartment which contains the drug solution and the lower
end of which contains the synthetic or natural GI membrane that
interfaces with the receptor compartment.
2. Receptor compartment which contains the buffer solution.
The procedure of uptake study using this technique involves measurement of
rate of arrival of drug in the receptor compartment (see figure 2.32).
Fig. 2.32. Diffusion cell for studying drug uptake from GIT.
Everted Sac Technique

This technique involves eversion of a segment (about 3 cm) of the intestine of
small intestine, conversion into a sac filled with buffer solution and its
immersion into a bath containing oxygenated solution of drug. The whole
preparation is maintained at 370C and shaken mildly. A predetermined time
intervals, the sac is removed and the concentration of drug in the serosal
(internal) liquid is determined (see figure 2.33).
Fig. 2.33. Everted sac technique for studying drug transport. uptake from GIT.
Everted Ring Technique

In this technique, appropriate section of intestine of rat is isolated, inverted
and dissected in slices or rings of thickness between 1 and 3 mm. The slices
are then placed in an oxygenated isotonic drug solution at 37 0C and incubated
for a predetermined period under gentle shaking. After incubation, the rings
are washed, dried and placed in a pre-weighed scintillation vials. Each vial is
reweighed to determine the wet tissue weight, and then the sample is analysed
for drug.
Cell Culture Technique

In this technique, differentiated cells of the intestine, originating from Caco-2
cells (cells of carcinoma of colon) are placed on synthetic polycarbonate
membrane previously treated with an appropriate material such as collagen
which on incubation aids reproduction of cells while not retarding drug
permeation characteristics. Solution of drug is placed on this layer of cultured
cells and the system is placed in a bath (receptor compartment) of buffer
solution. The drug that reaches the latter compartment is sampled and
analysed periodically.
Doluisio Method
In this method, the upper and lower parts of the small intestine of
anaesthetised and dissected rat are connected by means of tubing to syringes
of capacity 10 – 30 ml (see figure 2.34). After washing the intestinal segment
with normal saline, the syringe is filled with a solution of radiolabelled drug
and a non-absorbable marker which is used as an indicator of water flux
during perfusion. Part of the content of the syringe containing drug is
delivered to the intestinal segment which is then collected in the second
syringe and analysed for drug.
Fig. 2.34. Doluisio method for drug uptake through rat intestine.
Single-Pass Perfusion
In this technique the drug solution passes through the intestinal segment just
once (see figure 2.35). This technique is superior to Doluisio method in that
precise adjustment of hydrodynamic conditions that can influence blood
circulation and puts stress on intestinal wall can be controlled.
Fig. 2.35. Single-pass perfusion technique for studying drug uptake.
ABSORPTION OF DRUGS FROM NON-PER OS EXTRAVASCULAR

ROUTES
Drug absorption from all non-oral extravascular sites is governed by the
same factors that influence absorption from GIT viz. the physicochemical
properties of drug, formulation factors, and anatomic, physiologic and
pathologic characteristics of the patient. This is so because the barrier to
transport of drugs into the systemic circulation from all such sites is a lipoidal
membrane similar to the GI barrier and the major mechanism in the absorption
is passive diffusion. One of the major advantages of administering drugs by
non-invasive transmucosal routes such as nasal, buccal, rectal, etc. is that
greater systemic availability is attainable for drugs normally subjected to
extensive presystemic elimination due to GI degradation and/or hepatic
metabolism (Fig. 2.36). Moreover, peptide and protein drugs can also be
delivered by such routes. Some of the more important biopharmaceutic and
pharmacokinetic principles that must be considered for non-oral absorption
will be discussed here.
Fig. 2.36. Various transmucosal non-invasive routes of drug administration to

bypass presystemic elimination in GIT/liver
Buccal/Sublingual Administration
The two sites for oral mucosal delivery of drugs are:
1. Sublingual route: The drug is placed under the tongue and allowed to
dissolve.
2. Buccal route: The medicament is placed between the cheek and the
gum.
The barrier to drug absorption from these routes is the epithelium of oral
mucosa. Passive diffusion is the major mechanism for absorption of most
drugs; nutrients may be absorbed by carrier-mediated processes.
Some of the advantages of these routes are:
1. Rapid absorption and higher blood levels due to high
vascularisation of the region and therefore particularly useful for
administration of antianginal drugs.
2. No first-pass hepatic metabolism.
3. No degradation of drugs such as that encountered in the GIT
4. Presence of saliva facilitates both drug dissolution and its

subsequent permeation by keeping the oral mucosa moist.
Notable factors to be considered in the oral mucosal delivery of drugs are:
1. Lipophilicity of drug: Slightly higher lipid solubility than that required

for GI absorption is necessary for passive permeation.
2. Salivary secretion: In addition to high lipid solubility, the drug should
be soluble in aqueous buccal fluids i.e. biphasic solubility of drug is
necessary for absorption; absorption is delayed if the mouth is dry.
3. pH of the saliva: Usually around 6, the buccal pH favours absorption of
drugs which remain unionised.
4. Binding to oral mucosa: Systemic availability of drugs that bind to oral
mucosa is poor.
5. Storage compartment: For some drugs such as buprenorphine, a
storage compartment in the buccal mucosa appears to exist which is
responsible for the slow absorption of drugs.
6. Thickness of oral epithelium: Sublingual absorption is faster than
buccal since the epithelium of former region is thinner and immersed in
a larger volume of saliva.
Factors that limit drug administration by these routes are: limited mucosal
surface area (thus only a small dose can be administered), concern for taste of
the medicament and discomfort (since the region is highly innervated).
Examples of drugs administered by oral mucosal route include antianginals
like nitrites and nitrates, antihypertensives like nifedipine, analgesics like
morphine and bronchodilators like fenoterol. Certain steroids like oestradiol
and peptides like oxytocin can also be administered. Apart from tablets, the
drugs may be administered as a buccal spray especially to children. This
newer approach to drug absorption from the oral cavity is called as
tr ansli ngual deli ver y e.g. nitroglycerin spray.
Rectal Administration
Despite its diminished popularity, the rectal route of drug administration is
still an important route for children and old patients. The drugs may be
administered as solutions (microenemas) or suppositories. Absorption is more
rapid from solutions than from suppositories but is more variable in
comparison to oral route. Irritating suppository bases such as PEG promotes
defecation and drug loss. Presence of faecal matter retards drug absorption.
Though highly vascularised, absorption is slower because of limited surface
area. The pH of rectal fluids (around 8) also influences drug absorption
according to pH-partition hypothesis. Absorption of drugs from the lower half
of rectum bypasses presystemic hepatic metabolism. Drugs administered by
this route include aspirin, paracetamol, theophylline, few barbiturates, etc.
Excluding the respiratory tract’s contact with the inhaled air, the skin is
virtually the sole human surface directly interfacing the body with the external
environment. It is the largest organ of the body weighing approximately 2 Kg
and 2 m2 in area and receives about 1/3rd of total blood circulating through the
body. Though tolerant to many chemicals, topically contacted xenobiotics can
evoke both local and systemic effects. Majority of drugs applied topically are
meant to exert their effect locally. When topically applied drugs are meant to
exert their effects systemically, the mode of administration is called as
percutaneous or transdermal delivery. Percutaneous absorption occurs only
if the topically applied drug permeates the dermal capillaries and enters the
blood stream.
Anatomically, the skin is made of 3 distinct layers —the epidermis, the
dermis and the subcutaneous fat tissue. Epidermis is the nonvascular,
multilayered outer region of the skin. The dermis or true skin is a highly
vascular region; drugs permeating to this region are taken up into the systemic
circulation and sink conditions are maintained.
The principal barrier to the entry of xenobiotics is the most superficial
layer of epidermis called as stratum corneum. It is composed of dead,
keratinised, metabolically inactive horny cells that act as the major rate-
limiting barrier to passive diffusion of drugs. In order to act either locally or
systemically, a topically applied drug may diffuse through the skin by hair
follicles, sweat glands or sebaceous glands but permeation through the
multiple lipid bilayers of stratum corneum is the dominant pathway though the
rate is very slow. Several factors influence passive percutaneous absorption
of drugs:
1. Thickness of stratum corneum: absorption is very slow from regions
such as foot and palm where the skin has thickened stratum corneum.
2. Presence of hair follicles: absorption is rapid from regions where
numerous hair follicles exist e.g. scalp.
3. Trauma: cuts, rashes, inflammation, mild burns or other conditions in
which the stratum corneum is destroyed, promote drug absorption.
4. Hydration of skin: soaking the skin in water or occluding it by using
emollients, plastic film or dressing, promote hydration of skin and drug
absorption.
5. Environment humidity and temperature: higher humidity and
temperature increase both the rate of hydration as well as local blood
flow and hence drug absorption.
6. Age: gross histological changes take place as the skin ages. Aged skin
is more prone to allergic and irritant effects of topically contacted
chemicals as a result of hardening of blood vessels. Infants absorb
drug through skin as efficiently as adults. Their ratio of surface area to
body weight is 3 times that of adults; hence, systemic toxicity of

topically applied drugs is of particular concern in infants.
7. Grooming: the frequency and vigour with which one bathes and the
type of soap that is used also contribute to variability in drug
absorption.
8. Exposure to chemicals: occupational exposure to solvents can
accelerate shedding of epidermal cells and enhance drug absorption.
9. Vehicle or base: the vehicle in which the drug is incorporated
influences drug absorption; the one in which the drug is dissolved
rather than dispersed promotes absorption.
10. Permeation enhancers: incorporation of certain chemicals such as
DMSO, propylene glycol, azone, etc. in the topical formulations aid
11. drug penetration.

Chronic use of certain drugs: long term use of cortisol or keratolytics
like salicylic acid results in enhanced drug penetration.
Drugs that are administered percutaneously include nitroglycerine,
lidocaine, betamethasone, oestradiol, testosterone, etc. The route is
particularly useful for drugs with low oral availability and short duration of
action; the effect of the latter category of drugs is prolonged because
percutaneous absorption is a slow process.
Certain ionic drugs are not absorbed transdermally despite the use of
chemical penetration enhancers in the topical formulations. Percutaneous
absorption of such drugs can be affected by novel techniques such as –
1. I ontophor esis – Iontophoresis drug delivery implies delivery of ionic
drugs into the body by means of an electric current . An ionised drug
in solution is placed on the skin and an electrical potential difference
established thus driving the ions into the skin. Like electrical charges
repel. Therefore, application of a positive current will drive
positively charged drug molecules away from the electrode and into
the tissues; similarly, a negative current will drive negatively charge
ions into theand
and peptides tissues. Cortisol,
proteins such asmethacholine, lidocaine,
insulin have been salicylates
delivered in this
way.
2. Phonophoresis – Phonophoresis is defined as the movement of drug
molecules through the skin under the influence of ultrasound.
Intramuscular Administration
Absorption of drugs from i.m. sites is relatively rapid but much slower in
comparison to i.v. injections. Factors that determine rate of drug absorption
from i.m. sites are:
1. Vascularity of the injection site: the decreasing order of blood flow rate
to muscular tissues in which drugs are usually injected is:

Arm (deltoid) > Thigh (vastus lateralis) > Buttocks (gluteus maximus).
Since blood flow rate is often the rate-limiting step in absorption of
drugs from i.m. sites, most rapid absorption is from deltoid muscles
and slowest from gluteal region. The absorption rate decreases in
circulatory disorders such as hypotension.
2. Lipid solubility and ionisation of drug: highly lipophilic drugs are
absorbed rapidly by passive diffusion whereas hydrophilic and ionised
drugs are slowly absorbed through capillary pores.
3. Molecular size of the drug : small molecules and ions gain direct access
into capillaries through pores whereas macromolecules are taken up by
the lymphatic system. There is some evidence that small peptides and
fluids can cross the endothelial tissue of blood capillaries and lymph
vessels by transport in small vesicles that cross the membrane, a
process called as cytopemphis.
4. Volume of injection and drug concentration: a drug in concentrated
injection and large volume is absorbed faster than when given in dilute
form and small volume.
5. pH, composition and viscosity of injection vehicle: a solution of drug in
acidic or alkaline pH (e.g. phenytoin, pH 12) or in a nonaqueous
solvent such as propylene glycol or alcohol (e.g. digoxin) when
injected intramuscularly result in precipitation of drug at the injection
site followed by slow and prolonged absorption. Viscous vehicles such
as vegetable oils also slow drug absorption. The principle can however
be utilized to control rate of drug delivery.
Subcutaneous Administration
All factors that influence i.m. drug absorption are also applicable to
absorption from subcutaneous site. Generally, absorption of drugs from a s.c.
site is slower than that from i.m. sites due to poor perfusion, but this fact is of
particular importance for the administration of drugs for which a rapid
response is not desired and for drugs that degrade when taken orally e.g.
insulin and sodium
subcutaneous heparin.
site can be increasedThe rate of absorption of a drug from
in 2 ways:
1. Enhancing blood flow to the injection site: by massage, application of
heat, co-administration of vasodilators locally, or by exercise, and
2. Increasing the drug-tissue contact area: by co-administering the
enzyme hyaluronidase that breaks down the connective tissue and
permits spreading of drug solution over a wide area.
Absorption can be slowed down by causing vasoconstriction through local
cooling or co-injection of a vasoconstrictor like adrenaline or by
immobilization of limb. Because of relatively slow drug absorption from s.c.
tissues, the region is very popular for controlled release medication like
implants.
Pulmonary Administration
In principle, all drugs intended for systemic effects can be administered by
inhalation since the large surface area of the alveoli, high permeability of the
alveolar epithelium and rich perfusion permit extremely rapid absorption just
like exchange of gases between the blood and the inspired air. However, the
route has been limited for administering drugs that affect pulmonary system
such as bronchodilators (salbutamol), anti-inflammatory steroids
(beclomethasone) and antiallergics (cromolyn). Lipid soluble drugs are
rapidly absorbed by passive diffusion and polar drugs by pore transport.
Absorption of drugs whose ionisation is pH sensitive is dependent upon pH of
pulmonary
as fluids. The drugs
gases (volatile/gaseous are generally
anaesthetics) administered
or aerosol. by latter
In the inhalation
case,either
drug
delivery to lungs is largely dependent upon the particle size of the aerosolised
droplets—particles larger than 10 microns impact on the mouth, throat or
upper respiratory tract mucosa and do not reach the pulmonary tree whereas
very small particles (0.6 microns) from which drug absorption is rapid,
penetrate rapidly but are susceptible to easy exhalation. Sometimes, the
patients’ inability to inhale a sufficient amount of drug limits drug delivery to
lungs.
Intranasal Administration
The nasal route is becoming increasingly popular for systemic delivery
especially of some peptide and protein drugs. Drug absorption from nasal
mucosa is as rapid as observed after parenteral administration because of its
rich vasculature and high permeability. The route is otherwise used for drugs
to treat local symptoms like nasal congestion, rhinitis, etc.
Two mechanisms for drug transport across the nasal mucosa have been
suggested—
 A faster rate that is dependent upon drug lipophilicity, and
 A slower rate which is dependent upon drug molecular weight.

In case of lipophilic drugs, rapid absorption by diffusion is observed up to
400 Daltons and satisfactory absorption up to 1000 Daltons. By use of
permeability enhancers such as surfactants, even a drug with molecular weight
of 6000 Daltons shows reasonable bioavailability. Peptides up to 10 amino
acids appear to be able to penetrate nasal mucosa e.g. vasopressin, oxytocin,
calcitonin and buserelin. For polar compounds primarily absorbed by pore
transport, an upper threshold of 200 Daltons is the limiting factor. Other
factors that may influence nasal permeation of drugs include pH of nasal
secretions (5.5 to 6.5) and its viscosity, and pathological conditions such as
common cold and rhinitis. Drugs known to influence cleansing function of

nasal cilia should not be administered by this route.
Intraocular Administration
Topical application of drugs to the eyes is mainly meant for local effects such
as mydriasis, miosis, anaesthesia or treatment of infections, glaucoma, etc.
Sterile aqueous solutions of drugs are widely used ophthalmic formulations
and administered in the conjunctival cul-de-sac. The barrier to intraocular
penetration of drugs is the cornea which possesses both hydrophilic and
lipophilic characteristics. Thus, for optimum intraocular permeation, drugs
should possess biphasic solubility. The pH of lachrymal fluid influences
absorption of weak electrolytes such as pilocarpine. On the other hand, pH of
the formulation influences lachrymal output—higher pH decreases tear flow
and promotesanddrug
lachrymation absorption
subsequent whereas
drug loss due to lower pH Rate
drainage. solutions increase
of blinking also
influences drainage loss. The volume of fluid instilled into the eyes also
affects bioavailability and effectiveness of the drug. Normally, the human eye
can hold around 10 µl of fluid; hence, instillation of small volume of drug
solution in concentrated form increases its effectiveness than when
administered in large volume in dilute form. Viscosity imparters in the
formulation increase bioavailability by prolonging drug’s contact time with
the eye. Oily solutions, ointments and gels show sustained drug action for the
same reason. Sometimes systemic absorption of a drug with low therapeutic
index such as timolol may precipitate undesirable toxic effects. Systemic
entry of drugs occur by way of absorption into lachrymal duct which drains
lachrymal fluid into the nasal cavity and finally into the GIT. This can be
prevented by simple eyelid closure or naso-lachrymal occlusion by pressing
the fingertip to the inside corner of the eye after drug instillation.
Vaginal Administration
Drugs meant for intravaginal application are generally intended to act locally
in the treatment of bacterial or fungal infections or prevent conception. The
route is now used for systemic delivery of contraceptives and other steroids,
without the disadvantage of first-pass metabolism. Controlled delivery and
termination of drug action when desired, is possible with this route. Factors
that may influence drug absorption from intravaginal site include pH of lumen
fluids (4 to 5), vaginal secretions and the microorganisms present in the
vaginal lumen which may metabolise the drug.
A summary of mechanisms and drugs absorbed from various non-invasive
routes (other than the GI) is given in Table 2.10.
TABLE 2.10.
Absorption of Drugs from Non per os Extravascular Routes
Route Absorpti on M echani sm(s) D r ugs Deli ver ed
Buccal / Passive diffusion, carrier- Nitrites and nitrates antianginals,

Sublingual mediated transport nifedipine, morphine, fenoterol, etc.
Rectal Passive diffusion Aspirin, paracetamol, theophylline,
few barbiturates, etc.
Transdermal Passive diffusion Nitroglycerine, lidocaine,
scopolamine, testosterone,
betamethasone, etc.
Intramuscular Passive diffusion, endocytosis, Phenytoin, digoxin, several steroids
pore transport and antibiotics and many other drugs
Subcutaneous Passive diffusion Insulin, heparin, C.R. implants.
Inhalation Passive diffusion, pore transport salbutamol, cromolyn,
beclomethasone
Intranasal Passive diffusion, pore transport phenylpropanolamine, antihistamines
Intraocular Passive diffusion Atropine, pilocarpine, adrenaline,

antibiotics, etc.
Vaginal Passive diffusion Steroidal drugs and contraceptives,
metronidazole, etc.
QUESTIONS
1. Define drug absorption. What are the various routes from which absorption
of a drug is necessary for pharmacological action?
2. Why are both rapidity and completeness of drug absorption important? What
is their significance in drug therapy?
3. Classify the drug transport mechanisms.
4. What is the major mechanism for absorption of most drugs? What is the
driving force for such a process?
5. What do you understand by sink conditions? How is it maintained and
responsible for complete passive absorption of drugs from the GIT?
6. List the characteristics of passive diffusion of drugs.
7. Why is the absorption rate of a sufficiently water-soluble but lipophilic drug
always greater than its rate of elimination?
8. What are the characteristics of specialized transport systems? How can the
kinetics of such processes by described?
9. Differentiate passive and active transport mechanisms.
10. Differentiate transcellular and paracellular transport.
11. It is always advisable to administer B vitamins in small multiple doses rather
than as a single large dose. Why?
12. Discuss the similarities and differences between passive and facilitated
diffusion.
13. Why is active transport not a predominant mechanism for absorption of
drugs? What could be the reason for active absorption of several
antineoplastics or nutrient analogues?
14. What are the various types of active transport mechanisms? Give
significance of each.
15. How are ionic/ionisable drugs absorbed?
16. What is the only absorption mechanism for which aqueous solution of a drug
is not a prerequisite? What is the significance of such a transport process?
17. Suggest the likely mechanism for oral absorption of following agents:
lithium carbonate, ibuprofen, cyanocobalamin, methotrexate, quaternary
ammonium compounds and insulin.
18. Protein drugs such as insulin and heparin are not administered orally.
Suggest reasons. By which routes will you administer these agents if a rapid
effect and if prolonged action is desired?
19. In order to administer drugs optimally, what factors should be considered in
the design of a drug formulation?
20. Enlist and illustrate the steps involved in the absorption of a drug from orally
administered solid dosage forms.
21. Define the rate-determining step. What are the two major RDS' in the
absorption of orally administered drugs? Based on the solubility profile, to
which drugs they apply?
22. How are drugs classified according to the Biopharmaceutics Classification
System?
23. What are the various phases of drug transfer from GI absorption site into the
systemic circulation?
24. What
systemicare circulation?
the various routes of drug transfer from the absorption site into the
25. What is the significance of lymphatic circulation in drug absorption?
26. Classify and enumerate the biopharmaceutic factors influencing
bioavailability of a drug from its dosage form.
27. Justify the statement—dissolution rate is better related to drug absorption and
bioavailability than solubility.
28. Name the various theories that explain drug dissolution.
29. Using Noyes-Whitney’s equation, discuss the diffusion layer theory and the
variables that influence drug dissolution.
30. Why is in vivo drug dissolution always faster than in vitro dissolution? What
conditions should be simulated in order to obtain a good relationship?
31. What assumptions are made in diffusion layer and Danckwert’s models?
32. What is the difference between absolute and effective surface area? How can
the latter of a hydrophobic drug be increased?
33. Micronisation of hydrophobic drugs actually results in reduction in effective
surface area and dissolution rate. Why?
34. For which drugs an increase in surface area by micronisation is not
advisable?
35. Classify the internal structure of a solid compound and define:
polymorphism, amorphism and pseudopolymorphism.
36. How will you account for the rapid dissolution of amorphs, metastable
polymorphs and organic solvates in comparison to their respective
counterparts?
37. Why is the pH of the diffusion layer high and low respectively for salts of
weak acids and weak bases in comparison to that observed with free forms of
the drugs?
38. Give two reasons for higher solubility and better dissolution of salt forms of
the drug in comparison to their free acidic or basic forms.
39. Buffered aspirin tablets are more suitable than sodium salt form of aspirin.
Why?
40. What is the influence of the size of counter ion on solubility of salt forms of
the drugs?
41. State the pH-partition hypothesis briefly. On what assumptions this
statement is based?
42. Based on pH-partition theory, predict the degree of ionisation and absorption
of very weak, weak and strong acidic and basic drugs from stomach and
intestine.
43. State the principle of non-ionic diffusion.
44. For optimum absorption, a drug should have biphasic solubility or perfect
HLB in its structure. Explain.
45. Discuss the limitations and significance of pH-partition hypothesis.
46. Enlist the major characteristics that determine the passive diffusion of drugs
across intestinal epithelium. What is Lipinski’s rule of five?
47. Why is disintegration test not considered a guarantee of a drug’s
bioavailability from its solid dosage form?
48. The influence of compression force on drug dissolution and absorption from
tablets is unpredictable. Explain.
49. Discuss briefly the influence of pharmaceutical excipients on drug
bioavailability.
50. How do the surfactants promote bioavailability of a poorly water-soluble
drug? What is their influence when used in higher concentrations?
51. Quote examples of complexation used to enhance bioavailability of a drug.
52. How does the nature and type of dosage form influence drug absorption?
53. Assuming that the drug can be prepared in any dosage form, what type of
oral formulation will generally yield the greatest amount of systemically
available drug in the least amount of time? Why?
54. List the orally administered dosage forms in order of decreasing
bioavailability.
55. Enteric-coated multiparticulate (pellet) formulation of acid-labile drugs such
as erythromycin and omeprazole show greater bioavailability and faster onset
of action as compared to enteric-coated tablets. Give plausible explanation
for these observations.
56. The plasma concentration time profile of an orally administered drug shows
tow peaks. Suggest causes for such a phenomenon.
57. What are the anatomical and physiological reasons for differences in the rate
and extent of absorption of a drug from various regions of the GIT?
58. Stomach is not the principal site for drug absorption. Explain.
59. Why are drugs of all types, whether acidic, basic or neutral, better absorbed
from small intestine?
60. For which drugs rapid GE is desirable and when should it be slow?
61. Discuss briefly the factors affecting GE of drugs.
62. What is the influence of anticholinergics and of prokinetic agents on the oral
availability of drugs?
63. What are the possible reasons for delayed and for enhanced absorption of a
drug after meals? Why biopharmaceutic studies that requires the drug to be
taken orally, be performed in volunteers on empty stomach?
64. Delayed intestinal transit is sometimes desirable. Why?
65. What are the consequences of various disease states on oral bioavailability of
a drug?
66. What are the various mechanisms for drug-drug interactions in the GIT?
67. What are the different sites of presystemic metabolism of orally administered
drugs?
68. How would you circumvent the first-pass effect of an orally administered
drug?
69. How can the metabolic role of colonic microflora be utilized for drug
targeting to large intestine?
70. What are the advantages of administering drugs by non per os non-invasive
transmucosal routes? Name such routes.
71. Discuss the factors in the absorption of drugs from various non per os
transmucosal and transdermal routes.
72. Transdermal delivery as well as most of the transmucosal routes other than
the GI are limited for systemic administration of low dose drugs only.
Explain.
73. How can the absorption of drugs from subcutaneous sites be promoted?
74. What factors limit drug administration by pulmonary route? Why is this route
restricted for administration of drugs affecting pulmonary function?
75. Name the physicochemical and biological factors that limit drug
administration by oral route.
76. Given below in the table are 3 basic drugs together with some of their
physicochemical and biological properties:
Properties Diazepam Loratidine Guanethidine
Molecular weight 285.0 383.0 296.0
pKa 3.7 5.0 11.7
Aqueous solubility
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar Slight Insoluble High 83/413
Ko/w High 27.0 Low
% Presystemic metabolism Nil 90.0 40.0

a. Based on the aqueous solubility and K o/w, what could be the rate-limiting
step in the passive absorption of drugs?
b. Determine the per cent drug ionisation in stomach pH 3.0 and intestine pH
5.0.
Answer: Diazepam: 83% and 4.8%, Loratidine: 99% and 50% and
Guanethidine: 100% and 100%.
c. Based on pH-partition hypothesis, from which site the drugs will be best
absorbed? Which drug will be absorbed along the entire length of the GIT?
d. Assuming that only the unionised drug is absorbed, what per cent of drug
will be absorbed from the intestine at pH 7.4?
Answer: Diazepam: 100%, Loratidine: 99.6% and Guanethidine: 0%.
e. Determine the relative amount of drug present in the intestine at pH 5.0 and
plasma at pH 7.4.
Answer: Diazepam —1:1, Loratidine —2:1 and Guanethidine —500:1.
f. Delayed GI transit and food intake will be beneficial to absorption of which
drug?
g. From the above results and from presystemic metabolism data, a change in
the route of administration is advisable for which drug(s)?
h. If guanethidine shows an oral availability of 20%, what could be the
possible mechanism for its absorption?
3
Distribution of Drugs
After entry into the systemic circulation, either by intravascular injection or by absorption
from any of the various extravascular sites, the drug is subjected to a number of processes
called as disposition processes. Disposition is defined as the processes that tend to lower the
plasma concentration of drug. The two major drug disposition processes are –
1. Distribution which involves reversible transfer of a drug between compartments.

2. Elimination which causes irreversible loss of drug from the body. Elimination is
further divided into two processes –
(a) Biotransformation (metabolism)
(b) Excretion .
The interrelationship between drug distribution, biotransformation and excretion and the
drug in plasma is shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1. Interrelationship between different processes of drug disposition

As stated above, distribution is defined as the reversible transfer of a drug between one
compartment and another. Since the process is carried out by the circulation of blood, one of
the compartments is always the blood or the plasma and the other represents extravascular
fluids and other body tissues. In other words, distribution is reversible transfer of a drug
between the blood and the extravascular fluids and tissues. Distribution is a passive process,
for which, the driving force is concentration gradient between the blood and the extravascular
tissues. The process occurs by diffusion of free drug only until equilibrium is achieved. As
the pharmacological action of a drug depends upon its concentration at the site of action,
distribution plays a significant role in the onset, intensity and sometimes duration of drug
action.
Steps in Drug Distribution

Distribution of drug present in systemic circulation to extravascular tissues involves
following steps (see figure 3.2) –
1. Permeation of free or unbound drug present in the blood through the capillary wall
(occurs rapidly) and entry into the interstitial/extracellular fluid (ECF).
2. Permeation of drug present in the ECF through the membrane of tissue cells and into
the intracellular fluid. This step is rate-limiting and depends upon two major factors –
(a) Rate of perfusion to the extracellular tissue
(b) Membrane permeability of the drug.
Fig. 3.2. Schematic of the steps involved in drug distribution
Factors Affecting Distribution of Drugs

Distribution of a drug is not uniform throughout the body because different tissues receive the
drug from plasma at different rates and to different extents. Differences in drug distribution
among the tissues essentially arise as result of a number of factors as enumerated below –
1. Tissue permeability of the drug:
a. Physicochemical properties of the drug like molecular size, pKa and o/w partition
coefficient
b. Physiological barriers to diffusion of drugs
2. Organ/tissue size and perfusion rate
3. Binding of drugs to tissue components:
a. Binding of drugs to blood components
b. Binding of drugs to extravascular tissue proteins
4. Miscellaneous factors:
a. Age
b. Pregnancy
c. Obesity
d. Diet
e. Disease states
f. Drug interactions.
TISSUE PERMEABILITY OF DRUGS

Of the several factors listed above, the two major rate-determining steps in the distribution
of drugs are:
1. Rate of tissue permeation, and
2. Rate of blood perfusion.
If the blood flow to the entire body tissues were rapid and uniform, differences in the
degree of distribution between tissues will be indicative of differences in the tissue
penetrability of the drug and the process will be tissue permeation rate-limited. Tissue
permeability of a drug depends upon the physicochemical properties of the drug as well as
the physiological barriers that restrict diffusion of drug into tissues.
Physicochemical Properties of the Drug

Important physicochemical properties of drug that influence its distribution are molecular
size, degree of ionisation, partition coefficient and stereochemical nature.
Almost all drugs having molecular weight less than 500 to 600 Daltons easily cross the
capillary membrane to diffuse into the extracellular interstitial fluids. However, penetration
of drugs from the extracellular fluid into the cells is a function of molecular size, ionisation
constant and lipophilicity of the drug. Only small, water-soluble molecules and ions of size
below 50 Daltons enter the cell through aqueous filled channels whereas those of larger size
are restricted unless a specialized transport system exists for them.
The degree of ionisation of a drug is an important determinant in its tissue penetrability.

The pH of the blood and the extravascular fluid also play a role in the ionisation and diffusion
of drugs into cells. A drug that remains unionised at these pH values can permeate the cells
relatively more rapidly. Since the blood and the ECF pH normally remain constant at 7.4,
they do not have much of an influence on drug diffusion unless altered in conditions such as
systemic acidosis or alkalosis.
Most drugs are either weak acids or weak bases and their degree of ionisation at
plasma or ECF pH depends upon their pKa. All drugs that ionise at plasma pH (i.e. polar,
hydrophilic drugs), cannot penetrate the lipoidal cell membrane and tissue permeability is
the rate-limiting step in the distribution of such drugs. Only unionised drugs which are
generally lipophilic, rapidly cross the cell membrane. Among the drugs that have same o/w
partition coefficient but differ in the extent of ionisation at blood pH, the one that ionises to a
lesser extent will have greater penetrability than that which ionises to a larger extent; for
example, pentobarbital and salicylic acid have almost the same Ko/w but the former is more
unionised at blood pH and therefore distributes rapidly. The influence of drug pKa and Ko/w
on distribution is illustrated by the example that thiopental, a nonpolar, lipophilic drug,

largely unionised at plasma pH, readily diffuses into the brain whereas penicillins which are
polar, water-soluble and ionised at plasma pH do not cross the blood-brain barrier (Fig. 3.3).
Fig. 3.3. Permeation of unionised and ionised drugs across the capillary and the cell
membrane
Since the extent to which a drug exists in unionised form governs the distribution pattern,
situations that result in alteration of blood pH affect such a pattern; for example, acidosis
(metabolic or respiratory) results in decreased ionisation of acidic drugs and thus increased
intracellular drug concentration and pharmacological action. Opposite is the influence of
alkalosis. Sodium bicarbonate induced alkalosis is sometimes useful in the treatment of
barbiturate (and other acidic drugs) poisoning to drive the drug out and prevent further entry
into the CNS and promote their urinary excretion by favouring ionisation. Converse is true
for basic drugs; acidosis favours extracellular whereas alkalosis, intracellular distribution.
In case of polar drugs where permeability is the rate-limiting step in the distribution, the
driving force is the effective partition coefficient of drug. It is calculated by the following
formula:
Effective K o/w (Fraction unionised at pH 7.4) (K o/w of unionised drug) (3.1)
The extent to which the effective partition coefficient influences rapidity of drug
distribution can be seen from the example given in Table 3.1.
TABLE 3.1.
Distribution of Acidic Drugs in CSF
Drug Relative Effective Ko/w at pH Relative rate of
acidity 7.4 distribution
Thiopental
Salicylic acid Weaker
Strongeracid
acid 2.0
0.0005 80
1
Thus, thiopental distributes in CSF at a rate 80 times faster than salicylic acid.
Stereochemical nature of drug will also influence the distribution characteristics

especially when it has a tendency to interact with macromolecules like proteins. Tissue
localisation of certain drugs may be an indication of stereoselectivity in drug distribution.
Physiological Barriers to Distribution of Drugs

A membrane (or a barrier) with special structural features can be a permeability restriction
to distribution of drugs to some tissues. Some of the important simple and specialized
physiological barriers are:
1. Simple capillary endothelial barrier
2. Simple cell membrane barrier
3. Blood-brain barrier
4. Blood-CSF barrier
5. Blood- placental barrier
6. Blood-testis barrier.
The Simple Capillary Endothelial Barrier: The membrane of capillaries that supply
blood to most tissues is, practically speaking, not a barrier to moieties which we call drugs.
Thus, all drugs, ionised or unionised, with a molecular size less than 600 Daltons, diffuse
through the capillary endothelium and into the interstitial fluid. Only drugs bound to the
blood components are restricted because of the large molecular size of the complex.
The Simple Cell Membrane Barrier: Once a drug diffuses from the capillary wall into
the extracellular fluid, its further entry into cells of most tissues is limited by its permeability
through the membrane that lines such cells. Such a simple cell membrane is similar to the
lipoidal barrier in the GI absorption of drugs (discussed in chapter 2).
The physicochemical properties that influence permeation of drugs across such a barrier
are summarized in Fig. 3.4.
Fig. 3.4. Plasma membrane barrier and drug diffusion across it

Blood-Brain Barrier (BBB): Unlike the capillaries found in other parts of the body, the
capillaries in the brain are highly specialized and much less permeable to water-soluble
drugs. The brain capillaries consist of endothelial cells which are joined to one another by
continuous tight intercellular junctions comprising what is called as the blood-brain barrier
(Fig. 3.5). Moreover, the presence of special cells called as pericytes and astrocytes, which
are the elements of the supporting tissue found at the base of endothelial membrane, form a
solid envelope around the brain capillaries. As a result, the intercellular (paracellular)
passage is blocked and for a drug to gain access from the capillary circulation into the brain,
it has to pass through the cells (transcellular) rather than between them. (However, there are
specific sites in the brain where the BBB does not exist, namely, the trigger area and the
median hypothalamic eminence. Moreover, drugs administered intranasally may diffuse
directly into the CNS because of the continuity between submucosal areas of the nose and the
subarachnoid space of the olfactory lobe). There is also virtual absence of pinocytosis in
brain.
Fig. 3.5. Blood-brain barrier
A solute may thus gain access to brain via only one of two pathways:
1. Passive diffusion through the lipoidal barrier – which is restricted to small molecules
(with a molecular weight less than a threshold of approximately 700 Daltons) having
high o/w partition coefficient.
2. Active transport of essential nutrients such as sugars and amino acids. Thus,
structurally similar foreign molecules can also penetrate the BBB by the same
mechanism.
The effective partition coefficient of thiopental, a highly lipid soluble drug is 50 times that
of pentobarbital and crosses the BBB much more rapidly. Most antibiotics such as penicillin
which are polar, water-soluble and ionised at plasma pH, do not cross the BBB under normal
circumstances.
The selective permeability of lipid soluble moieties through the BBB makes appropriate
choice of a drug to treat CNS disorders an essential part of therapy; for example,
Parkinsonism, a disease characterized by depletion of dopamine in the brain, cannot be
treated by administration of dopamine as it does not cross the BBB. Hence, levodopa, which
can penetrate the CNS where it is metabolised to dopamine, is used in its treatment.
Targeting of polar drugs to brain in certain conditions such as tumour had always been a
problem. Three different approaches have been utilized successfully to promote crossing the
BBB by drugs:
i. Use of permeation enhancers such as dimethyl sulphoxide (DMSO).
ii. Osmotic disruption of the BBB by infusing internal carotid artery with mannitol.
iii. Use of dihydropyridine redox system as drug carriers to the brain.
In the latter case, the lipid soluble dihydropyridine is linked as a carrier to the polar drug
to form a prodrug that readily crosses the BBB. In the brain, the CNS enzymes oxidize the
dihydropyridine moiety to the polar pyridinium ion form that cannot diffuse back out of the
brain. As a result, the drug gets trapped in the CNS. Such a redox system has been used to
deliver steroidal drugs to the brain.
Blood-Cerebrospinal Fluid Barrier: The cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) is formed mainly by the
choroid plexus of the lateral, third and fourth ventricles and is similar in composition to the
ECF of brain. The capillary endothelium that lines the choroid plexus have open junctions or
gaps and drugs can flow freely into the extracellular space between the capillary wall and the
choroidal cells. However, the choroidal cells are joined to each other by tight junctions
forming the blood-CSF barrier which has permeability characteristics similar to that of the
BBB (Fig. 3.6).
Fig. 3.6. The blood-CSF barrier

As in the case of BBB, only highly lipid soluble drugs can cross the blood-CSF barrier
with relative ease whereas moderately lipid soluble and partially ionised drugs permeate
slowly. A drug that enters the CSF slowly cannot achieve a high concentration as the bulk
flow of CSF continuously removes the drug. For any given drug, its concentration in the
brain will always be higher than in the CSF.
Although the mechanisms for diffusion of drugs into the CNS and CSF are similar, the
degree of uptake may vary significantly. In some cases, CSF drug concentration may be
higher than its cerebral concentration e.g. sulphamethoxazole and trimethoprim, and vice
versa in other cases, e.g. certain -blockers.
Blood-Placental Barrier: The maternal and the foetal blood vessels are separated by a
number of tissue layers made of foetal trophoblast basement membrane and the endothelium
which together constitute the placental barrier. The flow of blood in the maternal and the
foetal blood vessels is shown in Fig. 3.7.
Fig. 3.7. Placental barrier and blood flow across it

The human placental barrier has a mean thickness of 25 microns in early pregnancy that
reduces to 2 microns at full term which however does not reduce its effectiveness. Many
drugs having molecular weight less than 1000 Daltons and moderate to high lipid solubility
e.g. ethanol, sulphonamides, barbiturates, gaseous anaesthetics, steroids, narcotic analgesics,
anticonvulsants and some antibiotics, cross the barrier by simple diffusion quite rapidly. This
shows that the placental barrier is not as effective a barrier as BBB. Nutrients essential for
the foetal growth are transported by carrier-mediated processes. Immunoglobulins are
transported by endocytosis.
An agent that causes toxic effects on foetus is called as teratogen. Teratogenecity is

defined as foetal abnormalities caused by administration of drugs during pregnancy.
Drugs can affect the foetus at 3 stages as shown in table 3.2.
TABLE 3.2.
Stages during which teratogens show foetal abnormalities
Period Significance Harmful effects
First 2 weeks Fertilization and implantation stage Miscarriage
2 – 8 weeks Period of organogenesis Cleft palate, optic atrophy, mental
retardation, neural tube defects,
etc.
8 weeks onwards Growth and development Development and functional
abnormalities
It is always better to restrict all drugs during pregnancy because of the uncertainty of their
hazardous effects.
Blood-Testis Barrier: This barrier is located not at the capillary endothelium level but at
sertoli-sertoli cell junction. It is the tight junctions between the neighbouring sertoli cells that
act as the blood-testis barrier. This barrier restricts the passage of drugs to spermatocytes and
spermatids.
ORGAN/TISSUE SIZE AND PERFUSION RATE

As discussed until now, distribution is permeability rate-limited in the following cases:
a. When the drug under consideration is ionic, polar or water-soluble.
b. Where the highly selective physiologic barriers restrict the diffusion of such
drugs to the inside of the cell.

In contrast, distribution will be perfusion rate-limited when: 91/413
i. The drug is highly lipophilic.

ii. The membrane across which the drug is supposed to diffuse is highly permeable
such as those of the capillaries and the muscles.
Whereas only highly lipophilic drugs such as thiopental can cross the most selective of the
barriers like the BBB, highly permeable capillary wall permits passage of almost all drugs
(except those bound to plasma proteins). In both circumstances, the rate-limiting step is the
rate of blood flow or perfusion to the tissue. Greater the blood flow, faster is the distribution.
Perfusion rate is defined as the volume of blood that flows per unit time per unit volume
of the tissue. It is expressed in ml/min/ml of the tissue. The perfusion rate of various tissues
is given in Table 3.3.
In Table 3.3, the various tissues are listed in decreasing order of their perfusion rate which
indicates the rapidity with which the drug will be distributed to the tissues. Highly perfused
tissues such as lungs, kidneys, adrenal, liver, heart and brain are rapidly equilibrated with
lipid soluble drugs.
TABLE 3.3.
Relative Volume of Different Organs, Blood Flow and Perfusion Rate under Basal Conditions Assuming
the Total Body Volume to be 70 litres
Organ/tissue % of Body Volume Blood Flow (ml/min) % of Cardiac Output Perfusion Rate (ml/min/ml)
I. Highly Perfused
1. Lungs 0.7 5000 100.0 10.2
2. Kidneys 0.4 1250 25.0 4.5
3. Adrenals 0.03 25 0.5 1.2
4. Liver 2.3 1350 27.0 0.8
5. Heart 0.5 200 4.0 0.6
6. Brain 2.0 700 14.0 0.5
II. Moderately Perfused
7. Muscles 42.0 1000 20.0 0.034
8. Skin 15.0 350 7.0 0.033
III. Poorly Perfused

9.Fat 10.0 200 4.0 0.03
(adipose)
10.Bone 16.0 250 5.0 0.02
(skeleton)
If K t/b is the tissue/blood partition coefficient of drug then the first-order distribution rate
constant, Kt, is given by following equation:
Perfusionrate
Kt (3.2)
K t/b
The tissue distribution half-life is given by equation:

0.693 0.693 K t/b
Distribution half - life (3.3)
Kt Perfusion rate
The extent to which a drug is distributed in a particular tissue or organ depends upon the
size of the tissue (i.e. tissue volume) and the tissue/blood partition coefficient of the drug.
Consider the classic example of thiopental. This lipophilic drug has a high tissue/blood
partition coefficient towards the brain and still higher for adipose tissue. Since the brain (site
of action) is a highly perfused organ, following i.v. injection, thiopental readily diffuses into
the brain showing a rapid onset of action. Adipose tissue being poorly perfused, takes longer
to get distributed with the same drug. But as the concentration of thiopental in the adipose
proceeds towards equilibrium, the drug rapidly

adipose tissue whose volume is more than diffuses
5 times that of out ofand
brain the has
brain and localizes
greater in the
affinity for the
drug. The result is rapid termination of action of thiopental due to such a tissue
redistribution.
BINDING OF DRUGS TO TISSUE COMPONENTS

A drug in the body can bind to several components such as the plasma proteins, blood
cells and haemoglobin (i.e. blood components) and extravascular proteins and other tissues.
This topic is dealt comprehensively in chapter 4 on Protein Binding of Drugs.
MISCELLANEOUS FACTORS AFFECTING DRUG DISTRIBUTION

Age
Differences in distribution pattern of a drug in different age groups are mainly due to
differences in—
a. Total body water (both intracellular and extracellular) — is much greater in
infants
—
b. Fat content is also higher in infants and elderly
c. Skeletal muscles — are lesser in infants and in elderly
d. Organ composition — the BBB is poorly developed in infants, the myelin content
is low and cerebral blood flow is high, hence greater penetration of drugs in the
brain
e. Plasma protein content — low albumin content in both infants and in elderly
Pregnancy
During pregnancy, the growth of uterus, placenta and foetus increases the volume
available for distribution of drugs. The foetus represents a separate compartment in which a
drug can distribute. The plasma and the ECF volume also increase but there is a fall in
albumin content.
Obesity
In obese persons, the high adipose tissue content can take up a large fraction of lipophilic
drugs despite the fact that perfusion through it is low. The high fatty acid levels in obese
persons alter the binding characteristics of acidic drugs.
Diet
A diet high in fats will increase the free fatty acid levels in circulation thereby affecting
binding of acidic drugs such as NSAIDs to albumin.
Disease States
A number of mechanisms may be involved in the alteration of drug distribution
characteristics in disease states:
a. Altered albumin and other drug-binding protein concentration.
b. Altered or reduced perfusion to organs or tissues.
c. Altered tissue pH.
An interesting example of altered permeability of the physiologic barriers is that of BBB.
In meningitis and encephalitis, the BBB becomes more permeable and thus polar antibiotics
such as penicillin G and ampicillin which do not normally cross it, gain access to the brain.
In a patient suffering from CCF, the perfusion rate to the entire body decreases affecting
distribution of all drugs.

Drug Interactions
Drug interactions that affect distribution are mainly due to differences in plasma protein or
tissue binding of drugs. This topic is discussed under the same heading in chapter 4.
VOLUME OF DISTRIBUTION
A drug in circulation distributes to various organs and tissues. When the process of
distribution is complete (at distribution equilibrium), different organs and tissues contain
varying concentrations of drug which can be determined by the volume of tissues in which
the drug is present. Since different tissues have different concentrations of drug, the volume
of distribution cannot have a true physiologic meaning. However, there exists a constant
relationship between the concentration of drug in plasma, C, and the amount of drug in the
body, X.
X C
or, X Vd C (3.4)
where Vd = proportionality constant having the unit of volume and popularly called as
apparent volume of distribution. It is defined as the hypothetical volume of body fluid into
which a drug is dissolved or distributed. It is called as apparent volume because all parts of
the body equilibrated with the drug do not have equal concentration.
Thus, from equation 3.4, Vd is given by the ratio:
Amount of drug in the body
Apparent Volume of Distribution
Plasma drug concentration
X
or, Vd (3.5)
C
The apparent volume of distribution bears no direct relationship with the real volume of
distribution.
The real volume of distribution has direct physiologic meaning and is related to the body
water. The body water is made up of 3 distinct compartments as shown in the Table 3.4.
TABLE 3.4.
Fluid Compartments of a 70 Kg Adult
Body Fluid Volume (litres) % of Body Weight % of TBW
1. Vascular fluid/blood 6 9 15
(Plasma) (3) (4.5) (7.5)
2.Extracellular fluid 12 17 28
(excluding plasma)
3. Intracellular fluid 24 34 57
(excluding blood cells)
Total Body Water (TBW) 42 60 100
The volume of each of these real physiologic compartments can be determined by use of
specific tracers or markers (Table 3.5). The plasma volume can be determined by use of
substances of high molecular weight or substances that are totally bound to plasma albumin,
for e.g. high molecular weight dyes such as Evans blue, indocyanine green and I-131
albumin. When given i.v., these remain confined to the plasma. The total blood volume can
also be determined if the haematocrit is known.
The extracellular fluid (ECF) volume can94/413
be determined by substances that easily penetrates the capillary membrane and rapidly
distribute throughout the ECF but do not cross the cell membranes, for e.g. the Na +, Cl-, Br–,
SCN– and SO42– ions and inulin, mannitol and raffinose. However, none of these
substances are completely kept out of the cells. The ECF volume, excluding plasma is
approximately 15 litres. The total body water (TBW) volume can be determined by use of
substances that distribute equally in all water compartments of the body (both intra- and
extracellular), for e.g. heavy water (D2O), tritiated water (HTO) and lipid soluble substances
such as antipyrine. The intracellular fluid volume is determined as the difference between
the TBW and ECF volume. The intracellular fluid volume including those of blood cells is
approximately 27 litres.
TABLE 3.5.
Markers Used to Measure the Volume of Real Physiological Compartments
Physiological Fluid Markers Used Approximate
Compartment Volume (litres)
Plasma Evans blue, indocyanine green, I-131, albumin 3
Erythrocytes Cr-51 2
Extracellular fluid Non-metabolisable saccharides like raffinose, inulin, 15
mannitol and radioisotopes of selected ions: Na+, Cl–, Br–
, SO42–
Total body water D2O, HTO, antipyrine 42
Since the tracers are not bound or negligibly bound to plasma or tissue proteins, their
apparent volume of distribution is same as their true volume of distribution. The situation is
different with most drugs which bind to plasma proteins or extravascular tissues or both.
Certain generalizations can be made regarding the apparent volume of distribution of such
drugs:
1. Drugs which bind selectively to plasma proteins or other blood components, e.g.
warfarin (i.e. those that are less bound to extravascular tissues), have apparent
volume of distribution smaller than their true volume of distribution. The Vd of
such drugs lies between blood volume and TBW volume (i.e. between 6 to 42
litres); for example, warfarin has a Vd of about 10 litres.
2. Drugs which bind selectively to extravascular tissues, e.g. chloroquine (i.e. those
that are less bound to blood components), have apparent volume of distribution
larger than their real volume of distribution. The Vd of such drugs is always greater
than 42 litres or TBW volume; for example, chloroquine has a V d of approximately
15,000 litres. Such drugs leave the body slowly and are generally more toxic than
drugs that do not distribute deeply into body tissues.
Thus, factors that produce an alteration in binding of drug to blood components, result in
an increase in Vd and those that influence drug binding to extravascular components result in
a decrease in Vd. Other factors that may influence Vd are changes in tissue perfusion and
permeability, changes in the physicochemical characteristics of the drug e.g. ionisation,
changes in the body weight and age and several disease states.
Apparent volume of distribution is expressed in litres and sometimes in litres/Kg body
weight. The Vd of various drugs ranges from as low as 3 litres (plasma volume) to as high as
40,000 litres (much above the total body size). Many drugs have Vd greater than 30 litres.
The Vd is a characteristic of each drug under normal conditions and is altered under
conditions that affect distribution pattern of the drug.
QUESTIONS
1. Define — (a) disposition, and (b) distribution of drugs. What is the major mechanism for
distribution of drugs and what is its driving force?
2. Unless distribution occurs, the drug may not elicit pharmacological response. Explain.
3. Why is distribution of a drug not uniform throughout the body? List the factors influencing drug
distribution.
4. What are the two major rate-limiting steps in the distribution of drugs? Under what circumstances
are they applicable?
5. Which physicochemical properties of the drug limit its distribution?
6. Phenobarbital and salicylic acid have almost the same K o/w but the former shows extensive
distribution. Why?
7. What is the influence of change in plasma pH on distribution pattern of a drug? Based on pKa
values, which drugs are most affected and which will be least affected by a change in plasma pH?
8. What parameter is considered to be the driving force for distribution of polar drugs?
9. Why cannot the capillary endothelium be considered a barrier to distribution of unbound drugs?
What would be the consequence or fate of drugs had it been a selective barrier?
10. Name the specialized barriers to distribution of drugs.
11. Describe the anatomy and physiology of blood brain barrier. What characteristics of a drug are
necessary to penetrate such a barrier?
12. How do nutrients which are generally polar, make their way into the brain?
13. Polar drugs such as penicillin normally do not cross BBB but do so in meningitis. Explain.
14. Name the three approaches by which a polar drug can be targeted to brain.
15. Drugs that penetrate the CNS slowly may never achieve adequate therapeutic brain
concentrations. Why?
16. Why is the placental barrier not as effective as BBB?
17. In which periods drugs are particularly harmful to foetus in pregnant women?
18. How are body tissues classified on the basis of perfusion rate?
19. Thiopental is a highly lipophilic, centrally acting drug. By which route should it be administered
for rapid onset of action? Why? What is the reason for its rapid termination of action?
20. Which are the factors responsible for the differences in drug distribution in persons of different
age groups?
21. What are the various mechanisms involved in the alteration of drug distribution characteristics in
disease states?
22. Define apparent volume of distribution. Why cannot the volume of distribution of a drug have a
true physiologic meaning?
23. What are the various physiologic fluid compartments of the body? What are their volumes and
how are they estimated?
24. The tracers used to determine the volume of body fluids have V d same as their true volume.
Why?
25. How are the binding characteristics of a drug related to its V d? Explain why some drugs have V d
value larger than TBW volume?
26. It is better to express V d in litres/Kg body weight. Why?
27. Can a drug have two or more Vd values? Explain why?
28. The tissue/blood partition coefficient values of a drug and tissue perfusion rates are given in table
below:
Tissues Kt/b Perfusion Rate Kt Distribution t½

Liver 1 0.8
Brain 4 0.5
Muscle 8 0.035
Fat 40 0.03
Determine the rate constants for distribution and distribution half-lives.
Answer: Kt values (per minute): liver - 0.8, brain - 0.125, muscle - 0.0044 and fat - 0.00075;
distribution t½ values (in minutes): liver - 0.86, brain - 5.54, muscle - 158.4 and fat - 924.
29. The Vd of fluoxetine is 3000 litres. Calculate —
a. The amount of drug in the body when the plasma concentration is 1 ng/ml.
Answer: 3 mg.
b. The plasma concentration when the amount of drug in the body is 2 mg.
Answer: 0.67 ng/ml.
c. The % of drug that is present in plasma.
Answer: 0.1%.
30. The Vd of three drugs—A, B and C are 12, 42 and 400 litres respectively.
a. Determine the % drug present outside plasma.
Answer: drug A - 75%, drug B - 93% and drug C - 99.3%.
b. Which drug is most extensively distributed in e.v. tissues?
c. If binding of drugs is negligible, which of the three can be used as markers and for which fluid
compartments?
4
Protein Binding of Drugs
A drug in the body can interact with several tissue components of which the two major
categories are –
1. Blood, and
2. Extravascular tissues.
The interacting molecules are generally the macromolecules such as proteins, DNA or
adipose. The proteins are particularly responsible for such an interaction. The phenomenon
of complex formation with proteins is called as protein binding of drugs .
Protein binding may be divided into –
1. Intracellular binding – where the drug is bound to a cell protein which may be the
drug receptor; if so, binding elicits a pharmacological response. These receptors with
which drug interact to show response are called as pri mary r eceptors.
2. Extracellular binding – where the drug binds to an extracellular protein but the
binding does not usually elicit a pharmacological response. These receptors are
called secondary or si lent r eceptors.
The most important extracellular proteins or silent receptors are plasma proteins, in
particular albumin. Binding to such proteins is important from the viewpoint that the
bound drug is both pharmacokinetically as well as pharmacodynamically inert i.e. an
extracellular protein bound drug is neither metabolised nor excreted nor it is active
pharmacologically. A bound drug is also restricted since it remains confined to a
particular tissue for which it has greater affinity. Moreover, such a bound drug, because of
its enormous size, cannot undergo membrane transport and thus its half-life is increased.
Mechanisms of Protein-Drug Binding

Binding of drugs to proteins is generally reversible which suggests that it generally involves
weak chemical bonds such as –
1. Hydrogen bonds
2. Hydrophobic bonds
3. Ionic bonds, or
4. van der Waal’s forces.
Irreversible
reason drug binding, though
for the carcinogenicity rare,
or tissue arisesof
toxicity asthe
a result
drug;of
forcovalent binding
example, andbinding
covalent is oftenofa
chloroform and paracetamol metabolites to liver results in hepatotoxicity.
Binding of drugs falls into 2 classes:

1. Binding of drugs to blood components like—
a. Plasma proteins
b. Blood cells
2. Binding of drugs to extravascular tissue proteins, fats, bones, etc.
The influence of binding on drug disposition and clinical response is shown in Fig. 4.1.
Fig. 4.1. Protein-drug binding: Binding of drugs to various tissue components and its
influence on disposition and clinical response. Note that only the unbound drug
moves reversibly between the compartments.
Of all types of binding, the plasma protein-drug binding is the most significant and most
widely studied.
BINDING OF DRUGS TO BLOOD COMPONENTS

Plasma Protein-Drug Binding
Following entry of a drug into the systemic circulation, the first things with which it can
interact are blood components like plasma proteins, blood cells and haemoglobin ( see Table
4.1). The main interaction of drug in the blood compartment is with the plasma proteins
which are present in abundant amounts and in large variety. The binding of drugs to plasma
proteins is reversible. The extent or order of binding of drugs to various plasma proteins is:
Abumin > 1-Acid Glycoprotein > Lipoproteins > Globulins.
TABLE 4.1
Blood Proteins to which Drugs Bind
Protein Molecular Weight Concentration (g%) Drugs that bind
Human Serum 65,000 3.5-5.0 Large variety of all types of
Albumin drugs
1-Acid 44,000 0.04-0.1 Basic drugs such as imipramine,
Glycoprotein lidocaine, quinidine, etc.
Lipoproteins 200,000 to Variable Basic, lipophilic drugs like
3,400,000 chlorpromazine
1-Globulin 59,000 0.003-0.007 Steroids like corticosterone, and
thyroxine and cyanocobalamin
2-Globulin 1,34,000 0.015-0.06 Vitamins A, D, E and K and
cupric ions
Haemoglobin 64,500 11-16 Phenytoin, pentobarbital, and
phenothiazines
Binding of Drugs to Human Serum Albumin

The human serum albumin (HSA), having a molecular weight of 65,000, is the most
abundant plasma protein (59% of total plasma
and 3.5 to 5.0 g%) with a large drug binding99/413
capacity. The therapeutic doses of most drugs are relatively much smaller and their plasma
concentration do not normally reach equimolar concentration with HSA. The HSA can bind
several compounds having varied structures. Both endogenous compounds such as fatty
acids, bilirubin and tryptophan as well as drugs bind to HSA. A large variety of drugs
ranging from weak acids, neutral compounds to weak bases bind to HSA. Four different sites
on HSA have been identified for drug-binding (Fig. 4.2). They are:
Site I: Also called as warfarin and azapropazone binding site , it represents the region
to which large number of drugs are bound, e.g. several NSAIDs (phenylbutazone,
naproxen, indomethacin), sulphonamides (sulphadimethoxine, sulphamethizole),
phenytoin, sodium valproate and bilirubin.
Site II: It is also called as the diazepam binding site. Drugs which bind to this region
include benzodiazepines, medium chain fatty acids, ibuprofen, ketoprofen,
tryptophan, cloxacillin, probenicid, etc.
Site I and site II are responsible for the binding of most drugs.
Site III: is also called as digitoxin binding site.
Site IV: is also called as tamoxifen binding site.
Very few drugs bind to sites III and IV.

A drug can bind to more than one site in which case the main binding site is called as the
primary site and the other as the secondary site; for example, site I is the primary site for
dicoumarol and site II the secondary site. Groups of drugs that bind to the same site compete
with each other for binding, but drugs that bind to one site do not competitively inhibit
binding of drugs to other sites. However, they may either promote or retard binding of a drug
to another site by energetic coupling mechanisms.
Fig. 4.2. Four major drug-binding sites on human serum albumin
Binding of Drugs to 1-Acid Glycoprotein ( 1-AGP or AAG)

Also called as the orosomucoid, it has a molecular weight of 44,000 and a plasma
concentration range of 0.04 to 0.1 g%. It binds to a number of basic drugs like imipramine,
amitriptyline, nortriptyline, lidocaine, propranolol, quinidine and disopyramide.
Binding of Drugs to Lipoproteins

Binding of drugs to HSA and AAG involve hydrophobic bonds. Since only lipophilic drugs
can undergo hydrophobic bonding, lipoproteins can also bind to such drugs because of their
high lipid content.

comparison to HSA and AAG.However, the plasma concentration of lipoproteins is much less in
A drug that binds to lipoproteins does so by dissolving in the lipid core of the protein and
thus its capacity to bind depends upon its lipid content. The molecular weight of lipoproteins
varies from 2 lakhs to 34 lakhs depending on their chemical composition. They are classified
on the basis of their density into 4 categories –
1. Chylomicrons (least dense and largest in size).
2. Very low density lipoproteins (VLDL).
3. Low-density lipoproteins (LDL) (predominant in humans).
4. High-density lipoproteins (HDL) (most dense and smallest in size).
The hydrophobic lipid core of these macromolecules consists of triglycerides and

cholesteryl esters and the relatively hydrophilic surface is made of apoproteins (free
cholesterol and proteins). Predictably, VLDL is rich in triglycerides and HDL is rich in
apoproteins.
Binding of drugs to lipoproteins is non-competitive i.e. there are no specific or non-
specific binding sites

reflects partitioning of and
drugsbinding is not dependent
in hydrophobic on drug concentration.
core of lipoprotein Binding
molecule. A number rather
of acidic
(diclofenac), neutral (cyclosporin A) and basic drugs (chlorpromazine) bind to lipoproteins.
Basic, lipophilic drugs have relatively more affinity. Lipoprotein binding becomes
significant in cases of drugs that predominantly bind to them, and secondly, when levels of
HSA and AAG in plasma are decreased.
The main physiological role of lipoproteins is circulation of lipids to tissues through
the blood. Similarly, lipoproteins also play an important role in the transport of drugs to
tissues.
Binding of Drugs to Globulins

Several plasma globulins have been identified and are labelled as 1-, 2-, 1-, 2- and -
globulins.
1. 1-globulin: also called as transcortin or CBG (corticosteroid binding globulin),
it binds a number of steroidal drugs such as cortisone and prednisone. It also binds
to thyroxine and cyanocobalamin.
2. 2-globulin: also called as ceruloplasmin, it binds vitamins A, D, E and K and
cupric ions.
3. 1-globulin: also called as transferrin , it binds to ferrous ions.
4. 2-globulin: binds to carotinoids.
5. -globulin: binds specifically to antigens.

Binding of Drugs to Blood Cells
More than 40% of the blood comprises of blood cells of which the major cell component is
the RBC. The RBCs constitute 95% of the total blood cells. Thus, significant RBC drug
binding is possible. The red cell is 500 times in diameter as the major plasma protein binding
component, albumin. The RBC comprises of 3 components each of which can bind to drugs:
1. Haemoglobin: It has a molecular weight of 64,500 (almost equal to that of HSA) but
is 7 to 8 times the concentration of albumin in blood. Drugs like phenytoin,
pentobarbital and phenothiazines bind to haemoglobin.
2. Carbonic Anhydrase: Drugs known to bind to it are acetazolamide and
chlorthalidone (i.e. carbonic anhydrase
inhibitors). 101/413
3. Cell Membrane: Imipramine and chlorpromazine are reported to bind with the RBC
membrane.
It has been shown that the rate and extent of entry into RBC is more for lipophilic drugs,
e.g. phenytoin. Hydrophilic drugs like ampicillin do not enter RBC.
TISSUE BINDING OF DRUGS

(TISSUE LOCALIZATION OF DRUGS)
The body tissues, apart from HSA, comprise 40% of the body weight which is 100 times that
of HSA. Hence, tissue-drug binding is much more significant than thought to be.
A drug can bind to one or more of the several tissue components. Tissue-drug binding is
important in distribution from two viewpoints:
1. It increases the apparent volume of distribution of drugs in contrast to plasma protein
binding which decreases it. This is because the parameter is related to the ratio of
amount of drug in the body to the plasma concentration of free drug and the latter is
decreased under conditions of extensive tissue binding of drugs.

2. Tissue-drug binding results in localization of a drug at a specific site in the body (with
a subsequent increase in biological half-life). This is more so because a number of
drugs bind irreversibly with the tissues (contrast to plasma protein-drug binding); for
example, oxidation products of paracetamol, phenacetin, chloroform, carbon
tetrachloride and bromobenzene bind covalently to hepatic tissues.
Factors influencing localization of drugs in tissues include lipophilicity and structural

features of the drug, perfusion rate, pH differences, etc. Extensive tissue-drug binding
suggests that a tissue can act as the storage site for drugs. Drugs that bind to both tissue and
plasma components result in competition between drug binding sites.
For majority of drugs that bind to extravascular tissues, the order of binding is:
L iver > K idney > L ung > M uscles
Several examples of extravascular tissue-drug binding are:

1. Liver: As stated earlier, epoxides of a number of halogenated hydrocarbons and
paracetamol bind irreversibly to liver tissues resulting in hepatotoxicity.
2. Lungs: Basic drugs like imipramine, chlorpromazine and antihistamines accumulate
in lungs.
3. Kidneys: Metallothionin, a protein present in kidneys, binds to heavy metals such as
lead, mercury, and cadmium and results in their renal accumulation and toxicity.
4. Skin: Chloroquine and phenothiazines accumulate in skin by interacting with
melanin.
5. Eyes: The retinal pigments of the eye also contain melanin. Binding of chloroquine
and phenothiazines to it is responsible for retinopathy.
6. Hairs: Arsenicals, chloroquine and phenothiazines are reported to deposit in hair
shafts.
7. Bones: Tetracycline is a well-known example of a drug that binds to bones and teeth.
Administration of this antibiotic to infants or children during odontogenesis results in
permanent brown-yellow discoloration of teeth. Lead is known to replace calcium
from bones and cause their brittleness.
8. Fats: Lipophilic drugs such as thiopental

adipose tissues by partitioning into and high
it. However, the pesticide DDTcoefficient
o/w partition accumulate in
is not
the only criteria for adipose distribution of drugs since several highly lipophilic (more
than thiopental) basic drugs like imipramine and chlorpromazine are not localized in
fats. The poor perfusion of adipose could be the reason for such an ambiguity.
Reports have stated that adipose localization of drugs is a result of binding
competition between adipose and non-adipose tissues (lean tissues like muscles, skin
and viscera) and not partitioning.
9. Nucleic Acids: Molecular components of cells such as DNA interact strongly with
drugs like chloroquine and quinacrine resulting in distortion of its double helical
structure.
Table 4.2 compares plasma protein-drug binding and tissue-drug binding.
TABLE 4.2
Comparison Between Plasma Protein-Drug Binding and Tissue-Drug Binding
Plasma protein -dru g bindi ng Ti ssue-dr ug bin ding
1. Binding
reversible.involves weak bonds and thus Binding
bonds and generally involves strong covalent
thus irreversible.
2. Drugs that bind to plasma proteins have Drugs that bind to extravascular tissues have
small apparent volume of distribution. large apparent volume of distribution.
3. Half-life of plasma protein bound drug is Half-life of extravascular tissue bound drug
relatively short. is relatively long.
4. Does not result in toxicity. Tissue toxicity is common.
5. Displacement from binding sites is possible Displacement by other drugs generally does
by other drugs. not occur.
6. Competition between drugs for binding to Tissue-drug binding is generally non-
plasma proteins can occur. competitive.
DETERMINATION OF PROTEIN-DRUG BINDING

The analytical techniques used in protein binding studies can be divided into two classes –
1. I ndi r ect techni ques are those based on the separation of bound form from the free
micromolecule. These techniques are usually applied in biological samples (blood,
serum, plasma) for the determination of the percentage of binding. Indirect analytical
methods used in protein binding studies are equilibrium dialysis, dynamic dialysis,
ultrafiltration, diafiltration, ultracentrifugation, gel filtration, etc.
2. Di r ect techni ques are those that do not require the separation of bound form of drug
from the free micromolecule. These methods are used for the estimation of the
number and the elucidation of the character of binding sites in pure aqueous solutions
of proteins. Direct techniques used in protein binding studies are UV spectroscopy,
fluorimetry, and ion-selective electrodes.
FACTORS AFFECTING PROTEIN-DRUG BINDING

Factors affecting protein-drug binding can be broadly categorized as —
1. Drug related factors
a. Physicochemical characteristics of the drug
b. Concentration of drug in the body
c. Affinity of a drug for a particular binding component
2. Protein/tissue related factors
a. Physicochemical characteristics of the protein or binding agent 103/413
b. Concentration of protein or binding component

c. Number of binding sites on the binding agent
3. Drug interactions
a. Competition between drugs for the binding site (displacement interactions)
b. Competition between the drug and normal body constituents
c. Allosteric changes in protein molecule
4. Patient related factors
a. Age
b. Intersubject variations
c. Disease states
DRUG RELATED FACTORS

Physicochemical Characteristics of the Drug
As mentioned earlier, protein binding is directly related to the lipophilicity of drug. An
increase in lipophilicity increases the extent of binding, for example, the slow absorption of
cloxacillin
lipophilicityinand
comparison to binding
larger (95%) ampicillin after i.m.
to proteins injection
while is isattributed
the latter to itsand
less lipophilic higher
just
20% bound to proteins. Highly lipophilic drugs such as thiopental tend to localize in adipose
tissues. Anionic or acidic drugs such as penicillins and sulphonamides bind more to HSA
whereas cationic or basic drugs such as imipramine and alprenolol bind to AAG. Neutral,
unionised drugs bind more to lipoproteins.
Stereoselectivity in protein binding of enantiomeric drugs has also been demonstrated.
Acidic drugs such as etodolac, flurbiprofen, ibuprofen, moxalactam, pentobarbital,
phenprocoumon, and warfarin and for basic drugs such as chloroquine, disopyramide,
methadone, propranolol, mexiletine, and verapamil show stereoselective binding.
Concentration of Drug in the Body

The extent of protein-drug binding can change with both changes in drug as well as protein
concentration. The concentration of drugs that bind to HSA does not have much of an
influence, as the therapeutic concentration of any drug is insufficient to saturate it. However,
therapeutic concentration of lidocaine can saturate AAG with which it binds as the
concentration of AAG is much less in comparison to that of HSA in blood.
Drug-Protein/Tissue Affinity
Lidocaine has greater affinity for AAG than for HSA. Digoxin has more affinity for proteins
of cardiac muscles than those of skeletal muscles or plasma. Iophenoxic acid, a radio-opaque
medium, has so great an affinity for plasma proteins that it has a half-life of 2½ years.
PROTEIN/TISSUE RELATED FACTORS

Physicochemical Properties of Protein/Binding Component
Lipoproteins and adipose tissue tend to bind lipophilic drugs by dissolving them in their lipid
core. The physiologic pH determines the presence of active anionic and cationic groups on
the albumin molecules to bind a variety of drugs.
Concentration of Protein/Binding Component

Among the plasma proteins, binding predominantly occurs with albumin, as it is present in a
higher concentration in comparison to other plasma proteins. The amount of several proteins
and tissue components available for binding, changes during disease states. This effect will
be discussed in the subsequent sections.
Number of Binding Sites on the Protein

Albumin has a large number of binding sites as compared to other proteins and is a high
capacity binding component. Several drugs are capable of binding at more than one site on
albumin, e.g. fluocloxacillin, flurbiprofen, ketoprofen, tamoxifen and dicoumarol bind to both
primary and secondary sites on albumin. Indomethacin is known to bind to 3 different sites.
AAG is a protein with limited binding capacity because of its low concentration and low
molecular size. Though pure AAG has only one binding site for lidocaine, in presence of
HSA, two binding sites have been reported which was suggested to be due to direct
interaction between HSA and AAG.
DRUG INTERACTIONS
Competition Between Drugs for the Binding Sites (Displacement Interactions)
When two or more drugs can bind to the same site, competition between them for interaction
with the binding site results. If one of the drugs (drug A) is bound to such a site, then
administration
displacement ofof another
drug A fromdrug (drug B)
its binding site.having
Such aaffinity for interaction
drug-drug the same for
sitetheresults
commonin
binding site is called as displacement interaction. The drug A here is called as the
displaced drug and drug B as the displacer. Warfarin and phenylbutazone have same
degree of affinity for HSA. Administration of phenylbutazone to a patient on warfarin
therapy results in displacement of latter from its binding site. The free warfarin may cause
adverse hemorrhagic reactions which may be lethal. Phenylbutazone is also known to
displace sulphonamides from their HSA binding sites. Displacement interactions can result
in unexpected rise in free concentration of the displaced drug which may enhance clinical
response or toxicity. Even a drug metabolite can affect displacement interaction.
Clinically significant interactions will result when:

I. The displaced drug (e.g. warfarin) —
1. Is more than 95% bound.
2. Has a small volume of distribution (less than 0.15 L/Kg).
3. Shows a rapid onset of therapeutic or adverse effects.
4. Has a narrow therapeutic index.
II. The displacer drug (e.g. phenylbutazone) —
1. Has a high degree of affinity as the drug to be displaced.
2. Competes for the same binding sites.
3. The drug/protein concentration ratio is high (above 0.10).
4. Shows a rapid and large increase in plasma drug concentration.
It will be worthwhile to mention here that, both the concentration of the displacer drug and
its affinity for the binding site with respect to that of the drug to be displaced, will determine
the extent to which displacement will occur.
For a drug that is 95% bound, a displacement of just 5% of the bound drug results in a
100% rise in free drug concentration. If the displaced drug has a small volume of
distribution, it remains confined to the blood compartment and shows serious toxic responses.
On the contrary, if such a drug has a large V d, it redistributes into a large volume of body
fluids and clinical effects may be negligible or insignificant. The increase in free drug
concentration following displacement also makes it more available for elimination by the
liver and the kidneys (Fig. 4.3). If the drug is easily metabolisable or excretable, its
displacement results in significant reduction in elimination half-life.
Fig. 4.3. Fate of a drug after displacement interaction

Displacement also becomes insignificant with the use of more selective, potent, low
dose drugs.
Besides the direct displacement interaction discussed above, indirect interactions are
also possible. For example, the use of heparin as an anticoagulant activates lipoprotein lipase,
an enzyme which metabolises triglycerides to free fatty acids. Heparin co-administration with
drugs has also been shown to result in decreased protein binding of propranolol, quinidine,
etc. via its effects on fatty acid levels.
Competition Between Drugs and Normal Body Constituents

Among the various normal body constituents, the free fatty acids are known to interact with a
number of drugs that bind primarily to HSA. The free fatty acid level is increased in several
physiologic (fasting), pathologic (diabetes, myocardial infarction, alcohol abstinence) and
pharmacologically induced conditions (after heparin and caffeine administration). The fatty
acids, which also bind to albumin, influence binding of several benzodiazepines and
propranolol (decreased binding) and warfarin (increased binding). Bilirubin binding to HSA
can be impaired by certain drugs and is of great concern in neonates whose BBB and
bilirubin metabolising capacity are not very efficient. Acidic drugs such as sodium salicylate,
sodium benzoate and sulphonamides displace bilirubin from its albumin-binding site. The
free bilirubin is not conjugated by the liver of the neonates and thus crosses the BBB and
precipitates the condition called as kernicterus (characterized by degeneration of brain and
mental retardation).
Allosteric Changes in Protein Molecule

This is yet another mechanism by which drugs can affect protein-binding interactions. The
process involves alteration of the protein structure by the drug or its metabolite thereby
modifying its binding capacity. The agent that produces such an effect is called as allosteric
effector, e.g. aspirin acetylates the lysine fraction of albumin thereby modifying its capacity
to bind NSAIDs like phenylbutazone (increased affinity) and flufenamic acid (decreased
affinity).
PATIENT RELATED FACTORS

Age
Modification in protein-drug binding as influenced by age of the patient is mainly due to
differences in the protein content in various age groups.
i. Neonates: Albumin content is low in newborn; as a result, the unbound concentration
of drug that primarily binds to albumin, for example phenytoin and diazepam, is
increased.
ii. Young infants: An interesting example of differences in protein-drug binding in

infants is that of digoxin. Infants suffering from congestive cardiac failure are given a
digitalizing dose 4 to 6 times the adult dose on body weight basis. This is contrary to
one's belief that infants should be given low doses considering their poorly developed
drug eliminating system. The reason attributed for use of a large digoxin dose is
greater binding of the drug in infants (the other reason is abnormally large renal
clearance of digoxin in infants).
iii. Elderly: In old age, the albumin content is lowered and free concentration of drugs
that bind primarily to it is increased. Old age is also characterized by an increase in
the levels of AAG and thus decreased free concentration is observed for drugs that
bind to it. The situation is complex and difficult to generalize for drugs that bind to
both HSA and AAG, e.g. lidocaine and propranolol.
Intersubject Variations
Intersubject variability in drug binding as studied with few drugs showed that the difference
is small and nofactors.

environmental more than two fold. These differences have been attributed to genetic and
Disease States
Several pathologic conditions are associated with alteration in protein content. Since albumin
is the major drug binding protein, hypoalbuminaemia can severely impair protein-drug
binding. Hypoalbuminaemia is caused by several conditions like aging, CCF, trauma, burns,
inflammatory states, renal and hepatic disorders, pregnancy, surgery, cancer, etc. Almost
every serious chronic illness is characterized by decreased albumin content. Some of the
diseases that modify protein-drug binding are depicted in Table 4.3. Hyperlipoproteinaemia,
caused by hypothyroidism, obstructive liver disease, alcoholism, etc., affects binding of
lipophilic drugs.
TABLE 4.3.
Influence of Disease States on Protein-Drug Binding
Disease Influence on Plasma Protein Influence on Protein-Drug Binding
Renal failure (uremia) Decreased albumin content Decreased binding of acidic drugs;
neutral and basic drugs unaffected
Hepatic failure Decreased albumin synthesis Decreased binding of acidic drugs;
binding of basic drugs is normal or
reduced depending on AAG levels
Inflammatory states Increased AAG levels Increased binding of basic drugs;
(trauma, surgery, neutral and acidic drugs unaffected
burns, infections, etc.)
Putting in a nutshell, all factors, especially drug interactions and patient related factors that
affect protein or tissue binding of drugs, influence:
1. Pharmacokinetics of drugs: A decrease in plasma protein —drug binding i.e. an
increase in unbound drug concentration, favours tissue redistribution and/or
clearance of drugs from the body (enhanced biotransformation and excretion).
2. Pharmacodynamics of drugs: An increase in concentration of free or unbound drug
results in increased intensity of action (therapeutic/toxic).
SIGNIFICANCE OF PROTEIN/TISSUE BINDING OF DRUGS

Absorption
The absorption equilibrium is attained by transfer of free drug from the site of administration
into the systemic circulation and when the concentration in these two compartments become
equal. Following equilibrium, the process may stop. However, binding of the absorbed drug
to plasma proteins decreases free drug concentration and disturbs such equilibrium. Thus,
sink conditions and the concentration gradient are re-established which now act as the driving
force for further absorption. This is particularly useful in case of ionised drugs which are
transported with difficulty.
Systemic Solubility of Drugs

Water insoluble drugs, neutral endogenous macromolecules such as heparin and several
steroids and oil soluble vitamins are circulated and distributed to tissues by binding especially
to lipoproteins which act as a vehicle for such hydrophobic compounds.
Distribution
Plasma protein binding restricts the entry of drugs that have specific affinity for certain
tissues. This prevents accumulation of a large fraction of drug in such tissues and thus,
subsequent toxic reactions. Plasma protein-drug binding thus favours uniform distribution of
drugs throughout the body by its buffer function (maintains equilibrium between the free and
the bound drug). A protein bound drug in particular does not cross the BBB, the placental
barrier and the glomerulus.
Tissue Binding, Apparent Volume of Distribution and Drug Storage

A drug that is extensively bound to blood components remains confined to blood. Such a
drug has a small volume of distribution. A drug that shows extravascular tissue binding has a
large volume of distribution. A tissue or blood component that has great affinity for a
particular drug acts as a depot or storage site for that drug; for example, RBC is a storage site
for the lipophilic compound tetrahydrocannabinol.
The relationship between tissue-drug binding and apparent volume of distribution can be
established as follows –
Amount of drug in the body X
Vd (4.1)
Plasma drug concentration C
or, the amount of drug in the body, X Vd C (4.2)
Similarly, we can write,
Amount of drug in plasma V C (4.3)

p
and, Amount of drug in extravascular tissues Vt C t (4.4)
The total amount of drug in the body is the sum of amount of drug in plasma and the
amount of drug in extravascular tissues. Thus,
V C V C V C (4.5)
d p t t
Where, Vd = apparent volume of distribution of drug
Vp = volume of plasma
Vt = volume of extravascular tissues
Ct = tissue drug concentration
Dividing equation 4.5 with C we get:

Vd Vp Vt (4.6)
The fraction of drug unbound (f u) in plasma is given as:
Concentration of unbound drug in plasma Cu
fu Total plasma drug concentration C (4.7)
Similarly, fraction of drug unbound to tissues is:
C ut
f ut (4.8)
Ct
Assuming that at distribution equilibrium, the unbound or free drug concentration in
plasma equals that in extravascular tissues i.e. Cu = Cut, equations 4.7 and 4.8 can be
combined to give:
Ct fu
(4.9)
C f ut
Substitution of equation 4.9 in 4.6 yields:
Vt f u
Vd Vp (4.10)
f ut
From equation 4.10 it is clear that greater the unbound or free concentration of drug in
plasma, larger its Vd.
Elimination
Only the unbound or free drug is capable of being eliminated. This is because the drug-
protein complex cannot penetrate into the metabolising organ (liver). The large molecular
size of the complex also prevents it from getting filtered through the glomerulus. Thus, drugs
which are more than 95% bound are eliminated slowly i.e. they have long elimination half-
lives; for example, tetracycline, which is only 65% bound, has an elimination half-life of 8.5
hours in comparison to 15.1 hours of doxycycline which is 93% bound to plasma proteins.
However, penicillins have short elimination half-lives despite being extensively bound to
plasma proteins. This is because rapid equilibration occurs between the free and the bound
drug and the free drug is equally rapidly excreted by active secretion in renal tubules.
Displacement Interactions and Toxicity

As stated earlier, displacement interactions are significant in case of drugs which are more
than 95% bound. This is explained from the example given in Table 4.4. A displacement of
just 1% of a 99% bound drug results in doubling of the free drug concentration i.e. a 100%
rise. For a drug that is bound to a lesser extent e.g. 90%, displacement of 1% results in only a
10% rise in free drug concentration which may be insignificant clinically.
TABLE 4.4.
Influence of Percent Binding and Displacement on Change in Free Concentration of
Drugs
Drug A Drug B
% drug before displacement
bound 99 90
free 1 10
% drug after displacement
bound
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar 98 89 109/413
free 2 11
% increase in free drug concentration 100 10
Kernicterus in infants is an example of a disorder caused by displacement of bilirubin

from albumin binding sites by the NSAIDs ans sulphonamides. Another example discussed
earlier was that of interaction between warfarin and phenylbutazone. Yet another example of
displacement is that of digoxin with quinidine. Digoxin represents a drug with a large
volume of distribution (i.e. shows extensive extravascular tissue binding). Since
displacement interactions may precipitate toxicity of displaced drug, a reduction in its dose
may be called for. This may become necessary for a drug having a small Vd such as warfarin
since displacement can result in a large increase in free drug concentration in plasma. With a
drug of large Vd such as digoxin, even a substantial increase in the degree of displacement of
drug in plasma may not effect a large increase in free drug concentration and dose adjustment
may not be required. This is for two reasons—one, only a small fraction of such a drug is
present in plasma whereas most of it is localized in extravascular tissues, and secondly,
following displacement, the free drug, because of its large V , redistributes in a large pool of
extravascular tissues. The extent to which the free plasma drugd concentration of drugs with
different Vd values will change when displaced, can be computed from Equation 4.10.
Diagnosis
The chlorine atom of chloroquine when replaced with radiolabelled I-131 can be used to
visualize melanomas of the eye since chloroquine has a tendency to interact with the melanin
of eyes. The thyroid gland has great affinity for iodine containing compounds; hence any
disorder of the same can be detected by tagging such a compound with a radioisotope of
iodine.
Therapy and Drug Targeting

The binding of drugs to lipoproteins can be used for site-specific delivery of hydrophilic
moieties. This is particularly useful in cancer therapies since certain tumour cells have
greater affinity for LDL than normal tissues. Thus, binding of a suitable antineoplastic to it
can be used as a therapeutic tool. HDL is similarly transported more to adrenal and testes.
An example of site-specific drug delivery in cancer treatment is that of oestramustine.
Oestradiol binds selectively and strongly to prostrate and thus prostrate cancer can be treated
by attaching nitrogen mustard to oestradiol for targeting of prostrate glands. Drug targeting
prevents normal cells from getting destroyed.
KINETICS OF PROTEIN-DRUG BINDING

If P represents proteins and D the drug, then applying law of mass action to reversible
protein-drug binding, we can write:
P + D ======== PD (4.11)
At equilibrium,
PD
Ka (4.12)
P D
PD Ka P D (4.13)
where, [P] = concentration of free protein
[D] = concentration of free drug
[PD] = concentration of protein-drug complex
Ka = association rate constant
Kd = dissociation rate constant

Ka > Kd indicates forward reaction i.e. protein-drug binding is favoured. If PT is the total
concentration of protein present, bound and unbound, then:
PT PD P (4.14)
If r is the number of moles of drug bound to total moles of protein, then,

PD PD
r (4.15)
PT PD P
Substituting the value of [PD] from equation 4.13 in equation 4.15 we get:
Ka P D Ka D
r (4.16)
Ka P D P Ka D 1
Equation 4.16 holds when there is only one binding site on the protein and the protein-
drug complex is a 1:1 complex. If more than one or N number of binding sites are available
per mole of the protein then:
r N Ka D
(4.17)
Ka D 1
The value of association constant, K a and the number of binding sites N can be obtained
by plotting equation 4.17 in four different ways as shown below (see Fig. 4.4.).
1. Direct Plot is made by plotting r versus [D] as shown in Fig. 4.4a. Note that when all the
binding sites are occupied by the drug, the protein is saturated and plateau is reached. At
the plateau, r = N. When r = N/2, [D] = 1/Ka.
2. Scatchard Plot is made by transforming equation 4.17 into a linear form. Thus,
r N Ka D (4.17)
Ka D 1
r r Ka D N Ka D
r N Ka D r Ka D
Therefore,
r
N Ka r Ka (4.18)
D
A plot of r/[D] versus r yields a straight line (Fig. 4.4b). Slope of the line = – Ka, y-
intercept = NKa and x-intercept = N.
3. Klotz Plot/Lineweaver-Burke Plot (Double Reciprocal Plot): The reciprocal of

equation 4.17 yields:
1 1 1
(4.19)
r N Ka N
A plot of 1/r versus 1/[D] yields a straight line with slope 1/NK a and y-intercept 1/N (Fig.
4.4c).
4. Hitchcock Plot is made by rewriting equation

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar 4.19 as – 111/413
N Ka D
1 Ka D (4.20)
r
Dividing both sides by NK a gives –
D 1 D
(4.21)
r N Ka N
Equation 4.21 is Hitchcock equation according to which a plot of [D]/r versus [D] yields a
straight line with slope 1/N and y-intercept 1/ NK a (see Fig. 4.4d).
Fig. 4.4. Plots used for the study of protein-drug binding. (a) Direct plot; (b) Scatchard
plot; (c) Klotz plot; and (d) Hitchcock plot.
QUESTIONS
1. A protein bound drug is both pharmacokinetically as well as pharmacodynamically
inert. Explain.
2. When is drug binding considered irreversible? What could be the consequence of
such an interaction?
3. Classify the body components to which drugs normally bind. 112/413
4. Why does binding of a drug to plasma proteins occur to a large extent in comparison
to binding to other tissue components?
5. Why is HSA considered a versatile protein for drug binding?
6. With examples, name the various drug binding sites on HSA.
7. Binding of drugs to erythrocytes could be as significant as binding to HSA.
Explain.
8. From distribution viewpoint, what is the significance of tissue-drug binding?
9. Though imipramine and chlorpromazine are more lipophilic than thiopental, they do
not localize in fats. Why?
10. List the factors influencing protein binding of drugs.
11. Define displacement interaction. What characteristics of the displacer and the
displaced drug are important for displacement interactions to be clinically
significant?
12. Displacement of a drug with a large Vd from its plasma protein-binding site may
not produce significant toxic reactions. Why?
13. How do the acidic drugs such as sulphonamides/NSAIDs precipitate kernicterus in
neonates?
14. What is the influence of protein binding and displacement interaction on the
elimination half-life of a drug?
15. Give two reasons for administering large digitalizing dose of digoxin to infants
suffering from CCF?
16. What is the influence of various disease states on plasma protein level and drug
binding?
17. How would the plasma protein-drug binding influence sink conditions and
absorption of a drug from the GIT?
18. Renal excretion of penicillins is unaffected by protein-drug binding. Why?
19. Give examples where binding of an agent to a specific tissue can be used for
diagnostic purpose.
20. How can the principle of binding be used for drug targeting?
21. Derive the relationship showing that greater the free concentration of drug in
plasma, larger its Vd.
22. Warfarin has a Vd of 8 litres in a 70 Kg man and is 90% bound to plasma proteins.
Given that the plasma volume is 3 litres and tissue volume 39 litres, determine -
a. The fraction of drug unbound to tissues.
Answer: 0.78.
b. The % increase in free plasma drug concentration if 10% of bound warfarin is
displaced by phenylbutazone.
Answer: 90%.
c. The new Vd after the displacement assuming that the tissue binding is unaffected.
Answer: 12.5 liters.
d. From the answer of question (a), suggest whether the displacement will be
clinically significant or not.
23. For a drug showing protein binding, the two points on the Scatchard plot of r versus
r/[D] are: (0.6, 1.2 x 104) and (1.2, 0.9 x 104).
a. Determine the association constant.
Answer: Ka = 0.5 x 104.
b. How many binding sites are present on the protein molecule?
Answer: N = 3.
c. If the points of Scatchard plot are transformed onto the Lineweaver-Burke plot (1/r
versus 1/[D]), what will be the slope of the line?
Answer: Slope = 1/NKa = 0.67 x 10-4.
d. Compute the x-axis intercept of Lineweaver-Burke plot.
Answer: 1/N = 0.33.
e. Are the values of K a and N computed from both the plots same?
5
Biotransformation of Drugs
The onset of pharmacological response depends upon two pharmacokinetic processes —

 Drug absorption, and
 Drug distribution (since most sites of action are in the extravascular tissues).
The duration and intensity of action depend upon –

 Tissue redistribution of drug, and
 The rate of drug removal from the body/site of action, i.e. rate of elimination.
Elimination is the major process for removal of a drug from the body and termination of
its action. It is defined as the irreversible loss of drug from the body. Elimination occurs by
two processes viz. biotransformation and excretion.
Biotransformation of drugs is defined as the chemical conversion of one form to another .
The term is used synonymously with metabolism. The chemical changes are usually
affected enzymatically in the body and thus, the definition excludes chemical instability of a
drug within the body; for e.g. conversion of penicillin to penicilloic acid by the bacterial
penicillinase and mammalian enzymes is metabolism but its degradation by the stomach acid
to penicillenic acid is chemical instability.
Need for Drug Biotransformation

All chemical substances that are not nutrients for the body and enter the body through,
ingestion,
exogenousinhalation
compounds or. absorption are called
Drugs are also as xenobiotics
xenobiotics (Greek:
which enter xenos
the body = foreign)
by virtue or
of their
lipophilicity. It is interesting to note that for effective absorption, a drug needs to be
sufficiently lipid soluble but it is this same physicochemical property that enables it to bypass
excretion. This is because only water-soluble agents undergo renal excretion (major route for
exit of drugs from the body) whereas lipid soluble substances are passively reabsorbed from
the renal tubules into the blood after glomerular filtration. Thus, if such a phenomenon
continues, drugs would accumulate in the body and precipitate toxic reactions. However, to
prevent such a consequence, the body is armed with the metabolic system which transforms
the water insoluble, lipophilic, nonpolar drugs into polar and water-soluble products that can
be easily excreted by the kidneys and are poorly reabsorbed; for instance, hippuric acid, the
metabolite of benzoic acid, is 2.5 times more water-soluble. Drug biotransformation is thus
a detoxification process. However, exceptions are there when biotransformation leads to
products with decreased water solubility. The N-acetyl derivatives of sulphonamides are less
water-soluble than the parent drug and thus have a tendency to cause crystalluria. Figure 5.1
illustrates the disposition of drug in the body as a result of metabolism.
Fig. 5.1. Disposition of drug in the body as a consequence of metabolism

Biotransformation –
 Normally results in pharmacological inactivation of drugs, i.e. it results in formation
of metabolites with little or no pharmacological activity; e.g. conversion of phenytoin
to p-hydroxy phenytoin.
 Occasionally yields metabolites with equal activity; e.g. conversion of phenylbutazone
to oxyphenbutazone.
 Rarely leads to toxicological activation of drugs, i.e. it results in formation of
metabolites with high tissue reactivity; e.g. conversion of paracetamol to reactive
metabolites that cause hepatic necrosis.
Inactive drugs (prodrugs) also depend upon biotransformation for activation, the process
being called as pharmacological activation; e.g. conversion of enalapril to enalaprilat. A
change in pharmacological activity of the drug on metabolism has also been observed ( see
Table 5.1.).
TABLE 5.1. Metabolites and Relative Activity of Drugs

Dr ugs M etaboli tes
Pharmacological Inactivation
Active Inactive
Amphetamine Phenylacetone
Phenobarbital Hydroxyphenobarbital
Phenytoin p-Hydroxy phenytoin
Salicylic acid Salicyluric acid
No Change in Pharmacological Activity
Active Active
Amitriptyline
Imipramine Nortriptyline
Desipramine
Codeine Morphine
Phenylbutazone Oxyphenbutazone
Diazepam Temazepam
Digitoxin Digoxin
Toxicological Activation
Acti ve Reactive I ntermediates
Isoniazid Tissue acylating intermediate
Paracetamol Imidoquinone of N-hydroxylated metabolite
Pharmacological Activation
I nactive (Prodru gs) Active
Aspirin Salicylic acid
Phenacetin Paracetamol
Sulphasalazine Mesalamine and Sulphapyridine
Pivampicillin Ampicillin
Enalapril Enalaprilat
Chloramphenicol palmitate Chloramphenicol
Change in Pharmacological Activity
Iproniazid (antidepressant) Isoniazid (antitubercular)
Diazepam (tranquilizer) Oxazepam (anticonvulsant)
In comparison with xenobiotics, the natural endogenous substances such as

neurotransmitters (dopamine, GABA, epinephrine, norepinephrine, etc.), steroids
(testosterone, progesterone, cortisol, etc.) and insulin which are also used as therapeutic
agents, are inactivated rapidly because of the body’s well developed system for metabolising
such agents. These substances are therefore called as soft drugs. Such soft drugs do not
precipitate unexpected toxicity when used in concentrations close to their normal levels.
Drug Metabolising Organs

Liver is the primary site for metabolism of almost all drugs (and other xenobiotics) because
of its relative richness in possessing a large variety of enzymes in large amounts. Metabolism
by organs other than liver (called as extrahepatic metabolism) is of minor importance since
lower level of drug metabolising enzymes are present in such tissues. The decreasing order
of drug metabolising ability of various organs is:
L iver > L un gs > Ki dneys > I ntestin e > Placenta > Adr enal s > Ski n
Brain, testes, muscles, spleen, etc. also metabolise drugs but to a small extent.
Drug Metabolising Enzymes
The
Theyenzymes that biotransform
are versatile xenobiotics
and non-specific differ from
in metabolising thosenumber
a large that metabolise
of drugs.food
Thematerials.
enzymes
are broadly divided into 2 categories:
 Microsomal enzymes
 Non-microsomal enzymes.
The microsomal enzymes catalyse a majority of drug biotransformation reactions.
The microsomes are basically artefacts which resulted when attempts were first made to
isolate endoplasmic reticulum of the liver homogenate. These vesicular fragments or
microsomes are derived from rough endoplasmic reticulum (rough due to the presence of
RNA rich ribosomes on the membrane surface whose function is protein synthesis) which
shed their ribosomes to become smooth surfaced. The large variety of microsomal enzymes
catalyse a number of oxidative, reductive and hydrolytic and glucuronidation reactions.
Some important characteristics of microsomal enzyme system are:

1. The intact nature of lipoidal membrane bound enzyme of the microsomes is essential
for its selectivity towards lipid-soluble substrates.
2. A number of lipid-soluble substrates (xenobiotics in general) can interact
nonspecifically with the microsomal enzymes. Natural endogenous substances which
are generally water-soluble do not interact.
3. The lipid soluble substrate is biotransformed into a water-soluble metabolite by the
microsomal enzymes which can be readily excreted.
The non-microsomal enzymes include those that are present in soluble form in the
cytoplasm and those attached to the mitochondria but not to endoplasmic reticulum. These
are also non-specific enzymes that catalyse few oxidative reactions, a number of reductive
and hydrolytic reactions and conjugation reactions other than glucuronidation. It is
interesting to note that, in contrast to microsomal enzymes, the non-microsomal enzymes,
especially the soluble enzymes, act on relatively water-soluble xenobiotics (as well as
endogenous compounds), e.g. oxidases, peroxidases, dehydrogenases, esterases, etc.
CHEMICAL PATHWAYS OF DRUG BIOTRANSFORMATION

R.T.Williams, the leading pioneer in drug biotransformation research, divided the pathways of
drug metabolism reactions into two general categories —
 Phase I reactions, and
 Phase II reactions.
Phase I Reactions
These reactions generally precede phase II reactions and include oxidative, reductive and
hydrolytic reactions. By way of these reactions, a polar functional group is either introduced
or unmasked if already present on the otherwise lipid soluble substrate, e.g. -OH, -COOH, -
NH2 and -SH. Thus, phase I reactions are also called as functionalisation reactions.
These transformations are also called as asynthetic reactions, opposite to the synthetic phase
II reactions. The resulting product of phase I reaction is susceptible to phase II reactions.
Phase II Reactions
These reactions generally involve covalent attachment of small polar endogenous molecules
such as glucuronic acid, sulphate, glycine, etc. to either unchanged drugs or phase I products
having suitable functional groups viz. -OH, -COOH, -NH2 and -SH and form highly water-
soluble conjugates which are readily excretable by the kidneys (or bile). Thus, these
reactions are called as conjugation reactions. Since the outcome of such processes are
generally products with increased molecular size (and altered physicochemical properties),
they are also called as synthetic reactions. Quite often, a phase I reaction may not yield a
metabolite that is sufficiently hydrophilic or pharmacologically inert but conjugation
reactions generally result in products with total loss of pharmacological activity and high
polarity. Hence, phase II reactions are better known as true detoxification reactions. Since
these reactions generally involve transfer of moieties to the substrate to be conjugated, the
enzymes responsible are called as transferases.
The biotransformation of drug metabolites, particularly the glutathione conjugates which
are excreted via bile in the gut, by the intestinal microflora, is considered by few researchers
as phase III reactions.
Quite commonly, the biotransformation reactions proceed sequentially and the

combination of several phase I and phase II reactions yield a range of metabolites (Fig. 5.2).
Fig. 5.2. Sequence of phase I and phase II reactions yielding a range of products
The various phase I and phase II reactions are listed in Table 5.2
TABLE 5.2. Chemical Pathways of Drug Biotransformation — (M) and (N) Indicate
Reactions Catalysed by Microsomal and Non-microsomal Enzymes
PHASE I REACTIONS
A. Oxidative Reactions
1. Oxidation of aromatic carbon atoms (M)
2. Oxidation of olefins (C=C bonds) (M)
3. Oxidation of benzylic. allylic carbon atoms and carbon atoms alpha to carbonyl and imines (M)
4. Oxidation of aliphatic carbon atoms (M)
5. Oxidation of alicyclic carbon atoms (M)
6. Oxidation of carbon-heteroatom systems:
a. Carbon-Nitrogen systems (aliphatic and aromatic amines):
i. N-Dealkylation (M)
ii. Oxidative deamination (M), (N)
iii. N-Oxide formation (M)
iv.
b. N-Hydroxylation
Carbon-Sulphur systems: (M)
i. S-Dealkylation (M)
ii. Desulphuration (M)
iii. S-oxidation (M)
c. Carbon-Oxygen systems (O-dealkylation) (M)
7. Oxidation of alcohol, carbonyl and acid functions (M)
8. Miscellaneous oxidative reactions (M), (N)
B. Reductive Reactions
1. Reduction of carbonyl functions (aldehydes/ketones) (M), (N)
2. Reduction of alcohols and C=C bonds (M)
3. Reduction of N-compounds (nitro, azo and N-oxide) (M), (N)
4. Miscellaneous reductive reactions
C. Hydrolytic Reactions 119/413
1. Hydrolysis of esters and ethers (M),(N)

2. Hydrolysis of amides (M),(N)
3. Hydrolytic cleavage of non-aromatic heterocycles (M),(N)
4. Hydrolytic dehalogenation
5. Miscellaneous hydrolytic reactions
PHASE II REACTIONS
1. Conjugation with glucuronic acid (M)
2. Conjugation with sulphate moieties (N)
3. Conjugation with alpha amino acids (N)
4. Conjugation with glutathione and mercapturic acid formation (N)
5. Acetylation reactions (N)
6. Methylation reactions (N)
7. Miscellaneous conjugation reactions (N)
PHASE I REACTI ONS

OXIDATIVE REACTIONS
Oxidative reactions are the most important and most common metabolic reactions. Almost
all drugs that undergo phase I biotransformation undergo oxidation at some stage or the other.
A simple reason for oxidation being a predominant reaction is that energy in animals is
primarily derived by oxidative combustion of organic molecules containing carbon and
hydrogen atoms.
Oxidative reactions increase hydrophilicity of xenobiotics by introducing polar functional
groups such as—OH. Such a polar metabolite can thus rapidly undergo phase II reaction or
is excretable by the kidneys.
Oxidation of xenobiotics is non-specifically catalysed by a number of enzymes located in
the microsomes. Such enzymes require both molecular oxygen (O2) and the reducing agent
NADPH to effect reaction. They are therefore referred to as the mixed-function oxidases.
The overall stoichiometry of this reaction involving the substrate RH which yields the
product ROH, is given by the following equation:
RH + O2 + NADPH + H+ ROH + H2O + NADP+
where NADPH = reduced nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate.

Since only one oxygen atom from the molecular oxygen (dioxygen or O 2) is incorporated
in the product formed, the mixed function oxidases are also called as monooxygenases .
Quite often, the product of such a reaction contains a hydroxyl function; hence, the enzymes
are sometimes also called as hydroxylases.
The multienzyme mixed function oxidase system, located in the endoplasmic reticulum of
hepatic cells, is composed of an electron transfer chain consisting of 3 components:
1. A heme protein known as cytochrome P-450 (CYP-450), which is actually a family
of enzymes. It is a terminal oxidase. Its function is to transfer an oxygen atom to the
substrate RH and convert it to ROH.
2. A second enzyme, the flavoprotein known as cytochrome P-450 reductase (or
cytochrome c reductase) which is NADPH-dependent. It functions as an electron
carrier, catalysing the reduction of cytochrome P-450 to the ferrous form by
transferring an electron from NADPH.
3. A heat stable lipid component known as phosphatidylcholine. Its function is to
facilitate electron transfer from NADPH to cytochrome P-450.
Magnesium ions are also required for maximal activity of mixed function oxidases.
The most important component of mixed function oxidases is the cytochrome P-450 since
it binds to the substrate and activates oxygen. The reduced form of this enzyme (Fe++) binds
with carbon monoxide to form a complex that shows maximum absorption at 450 nm, hence
the name. The mechanism of cytochrome P-450 catalysed metabolism of xenobiotics is
depicted in the r edox cycl e in Fig. 5.3.
Fig. 5.3. Cytochrome P-450 oxidation-reduction cycle

The various steps in the oxidation of xenobiotics are:
1. Binding of the substrate (RH) to the oxidised form of the cytochrome P-450 (Fe +++)
to form a complex.
2. A one-electron transfer from NADPH to the complex by cytochrome P-450 reductase
to form reduced (Fe++) P-450—substrate complex. This step is considered as the rate-
limiting step in the overall oxidation of xenobiotics.
3. The reduced enzyme-substrate complex combines with a molecule of oxygen to form
a ternary complex.
4. The ternary complex combines with a second electron supplied by NADH in presence
of enzyme cytochrome b5 reductase to form a ternary activated oxygen—P-450—
substrate complex.
5. One atom
to yield theofoxidised
oxygen from theand
product activated oxygen
the other atomcomplex is transferred
forms water. The freetooxidised
the substrate
form
of cytochrome P-450 is now ready to attach to yet another molecule of substrate.
Oxidation of Aromatic Carbon Atoms (Aromatic Hydroxylation)

This reaction proceeds via formation of a reactive intermediate arene oxide (epoxide), which
in most cases undergoes rearrangement to yield arenols, and in some cases catechols and
glutathione conjugates.
The arene oxide intermediate is highly reactive and known to be carcinogenic or cytotoxic
in some instances, e.g. epoxides of bromobenzene and benzo(a)pyrene.
Monosubstituted benzene derivatives can be hydroxylated at ortho-, meta- or para-
positions but para-hydroxylated product is most common, e.g. conversion of acetanilide to
paracetamol, and phenylbutazone to oxyphenbutazone.
Such a reaction is favoured if the substituent is an activating group (electron rich) like the
amino group. Deactivating or electron withdrawing groups such as carboxyl and
sulphonamide retard or prevent aromatic hydroxylation, e.g. probenecid.
Oxidation of Olefins
Oxidation of nonaromatic carbon-carbon double bonds is analogous to aromatic
hydroxylation i.e. it proceeds via formation of epoxides to yield 1,2-dihydrodiols. A better
known example of olefinic oxidation is conversion of carbamazepine to carbamazepine-
10,11-epoxide; the latter is converted to corresponding trans-10,11-dihydrodiol.
Olefinic hydroxylation differs from aromatic hydroxylation in that their epoxides are
stable and detectable which also indicate that they are not as reactive as aromatic epoxides.
However, an important example where the olefin epoxide is highly reactive is that of
aflatoxin B1. It is known as the most potent carcinogen (causes hepatic cancer).
Oxidation of Benzylic Carbon Atoms

Carbon atoms attached directly to the aromatic rings (benzylic carbon atoms) are
hydroxylated to corresponding carbinols. If the product is a primary carbinol, it is further
oxidised to aldehydes and then to carboxylic acids, e.g. tolbutamide. A secondary carbinol is
converted to ketone.
Oxidation of Allylic Carbon Atoms

Carbon atoms adjacent to olefinic double bonds (are allylic carbon atoms) also undergo
hydroxylation in a manner similar to benzylic carbons, e.g. hydroxylation of hexobarbital to
3'-hydroxy hexobarbital.
Oxidation of Carbon Atoms Alpha to Carbonyls and Imines

Several benzodiazepines contain a carbon atom (C-3) alpha to both carbonyl (C=O) and
imino (C=N) functions which readily undergoes hydroxylation, e.g. diazepam.
Oxidation of Aliphatic Carbon Atoms (Aliphatic Hydroxylation)

Alkyl or aliphatic carbon atoms can be hydroxylated at two positions - at the terminal methyl
group (called as -oxidation) and the penultimate carbon atom (called as -1 oxidation) of
which the latter accounts for the major product, e.g. valproic acid. Hydroxylation at other
carbon atoms in long chain compounds is less common.
Terminal hydroxylation of methyl group yields primary alcohol which undergoes

further oxidation to aldehyde and then to carboxylic acid quite rapidly. Penultimate carbon
atom can be secondary or tertiary of which the latter type is also equally reactive, e.g.
ibuprofen.
The -1 oxidations of secondary and tertiary penultimate carbons yield corresponding

alcohols. The secondary alcohol products seldom undergo further oxidation to ketones as the
latter are less hydrophilic. Further oxidation of tertiary alcohol products is improbable.
Hydroxylation of aliphatic side chains attached to an aromatic ring generally occurs at
benzylic methylene groups (1') which can be considered as -1 oxidation, e.g. parbendazole.
Oxidation of Alicyclic Carbon Atoms (Alicyclic Hydroxylation)

Cyclohexane (alicyclic) and piperidine (nonaromatic heterocycle) rings are commonly found
in a number of molecules, e.g. acetohexamide and minoxidil respectively. Such rings are
generally hydroxylated at C-3 or C-4 positions.
Oxidation of Carbon-Heteroatom Systems

Biotransformation of C-N, C-O and C-S systems proceeds in one of the two ways –
1. Hydroxylation of carbon atom attached to the heteroatom and subsequent cleavage
at carbon-heteroatom bond, e.g. N-, O- and S- dealkylation, oxidative deamination and
desulphuration.
2. Oxidation of the heteroatom itself, e.g. N- and S-oxidation.
Oxidation of Carbon-Nitrogen Systems

1. N-Dealkylation: Alkyl groups attached directly to nitrogen atom in nitrogen bearing
compounds are capable of undergoing N-dealkylation reactions, e.g. secondary and tertiary
aliphatic and aromatic amines, tertiary alicyclic amines and N-substituted amides and
hydrazines. Since N-dealkylation of amines yield amines and amides yield amides, the
reaction is said to undergo without any change in the state of oxidation. It is however the
removed alkyl group that is oxidised. Mechanism of N-dealkylation involves oxidation of -
carbon to generate an intermediate carbinolamine which rearranges by cleavage of C-N bond
to yield the N-dealkylated product and the corresponding carbonyl of the alkyl group (a
primary alkyl is transformed to aldehyde and a secondary alkyl to ketone).
Tertiary nitrogen is more rapidly dealkylated in comparison to secondary nitrogen because

of its higher lipid solubility. Thus, one alkyl from a tertiary nitrogen compound is removed
rapidly and the second one slowly. Small alkyl groups like methyl, ethyl, n-propyl,
isopropyl, etc. are removed rapidly. N-dealkylation of t-butyl group is not possible because
the -carbon cannot be hydroxylated. Such groups are, however, removed via initial
hydroxylation of one of the methyl groups to alcohol.
Tertiary nitrogen attached to different alkyl groups undergoes dealkylation by removal of

smaller alkyl group first. A representative example of each of the chemical classes of
compounds capable of undergoing N-dealkylation is given below.
Secondary aliphatic amines e.g. methamphetamine.
Tertiary aliphatic amines e.g. imipramine.
Secondary and tertiary aromatic amines are rare among therapeutic agents.
Tertiary alicyclic amines (nonaromatic heterocycle) e.g. hexobarbital.
Amides e.g. diazepam.
Hydrazines e.g. iproniazid.
2. Oxidative Deamination: Like N-dealkylation, this reaction also proceeds via the
carbinolamine pathway but here the C-N bond cleavage occurs at the bond that links amino
group to the larger portion of the drug molecule.
Thus, oxidative deamination is converse of N-dealkylation in terms of product formed —

the carbonyl product retains a large portion of the parent structure and the amines formed are
simple, e.g. NH3. Actually speaking, both the reactions are same, the criterion for
differentiation being the relative size of the products.
Primary aliphatic amines readily undergo deamination, e.g. amphetamine, while secondary
and tertiary amines are deaminated only when bulky groups are attached to nitrogen, e.g.
propranolol.
Primary amine metabolites formed by N-dealkylation or decarboxylation also undergo

deamination. Deamination is inhibited by the absence of -hydrogen, e.g. phentermine.
Aromatic and alicyclic amines are resistant to deamination.
3. N-Oxide Formation: N-oxides are formed only by the nitrogen atoms having basic
properties. Thus, amines can form N-oxides but amides cannot. Generally, the tertiary
amines yield N-oxides. Four categories of tertiary amines that form N-oxides are—
(i) Aliphatic amines e.g. imipramine.
(ii) Alicyclic amines e.g. nicotine.
(iii) Nitrogen atoms of aromatic heterocycles e.g. trimethoprim.
(iv) Amines attached to aromaticrings e.g. N,N-dimethyl aniline. 127/413
The N-oxide products are highly water-soluble and excreted in urine. They are, however,
susceptible to reduction to the corresponding amine.
4. N-Hydroxylation: Converse to basic compounds that form N-oxides, N-hydroxy
formation is usually displayed by non-basic nitrogen atoms such as amide nitrogen, e.g.
lidocaine.
N-hydroxylation of amides often leads to generation of chemically reactive intermediates

capable of binding covalently with macromolecules, e.g. paracetamol. Paracetamol is safe in
therapeutic doses since its reactive metabolite imidoquinone is neutralized by glutathione.
However, in high doses, the glutathione level becomes insufficient and significant covalent
tissue binding thus occurs resulting in hepatotoxicity. Phenacetin is also toxic for the same
reason.
Non-basic aromatic amines also undergo hydroxylation. A primary aromatic amine is

further converted to nitroso derivative, e.g. dapsone.
The N-hydroxy dapsone can oxidize ferrous form of haemoglobin to ferric form and cause
methemoglobinaemia. A secondary aromatic amine yields a nitrone subsequent to formation
of secondary hydroxylamine which is further hydrated to primary hydroxylamine.
N-hydroxylation is also possible at basic nitrogen, e.g. primary and secondary amines.
Phentermine, a primary aliphatic amine, cannot undergo deamination as the -carbon does
not contain hydrogen and the drug is therefore N-hydroxylated.
Oxidation of Carbon-Sulphur Systems

1. S-Dealkylation: The mechanism of S-dealkylation of thioethers (RSR’) is analogous
to N-dealkylation i.e. it proceeds via -carbon hydroxylation. The C-S bond cleavage results
in formation of a thiol (RSH) and a carbonyl product, e.g. 6-methyl mercaptopurine.
2. Desulphuration: This reaction also involves cleavage of carbon-sulphur bond (C=S

or thiono). The product is the one with C=O bond. Such a desulphuration reaction is
commonly observed in thioamides (RCSNHR’) such as thiopental.
Desulphuration also occurs with compounds containing P=S bonds such as the
organophosphate pesticides, e.g. parathion.
3. S-Oxidation: Apart from S-dealkylation, thioethers can also undergo S-oxidation

reactions to yield sulphoxides which may be further oxidised to sulphones (RSO 2R). Several
phenothiazines, e.g. chlorpromazine, undergo S-oxidation.
Oxidation of Carbon-Oxygen Systems
O-Dealkylation: This reaction is also similar to N-dealkylation and proceeds by -

carbon hydroxylation to form an unstable hemiacetal or hemiketal intermediate which
spontaneously undergoes C-O bond cleavage to form alcohol (arenol or alkanol) and a
carbonyl moiety.
The O-containing functional groups (analogous to amines and amides, the substrates
which undergo N-dealkylation) are ethers and esters. However, only the ethers undergo O-
dealkylation reaction. Aliphatic ether drugs are rare and aromatic ethers (phenolic) are
common. Methyl ethers are rapidly dealkylated in comparison to longer chain ethers such as
the one containing n-butyl group. The reaction generally leads to formation of active
metabolites, e.g. phenacetin to paracetamol, and codeine to morphine.
Oxidation of Alcohol, Carbonyl and Carboxylic Acid

These reactions are mainly catalysed by non-microsomal enzymes, dehydrogenases. Primary
and secondary alcohols and aldehydes undergo oxidation relatively easily but tertiary
alcohols, ketones and carboxylic acids are resistant since such a reaction involves cleavage of
C-C bonds.
Primary alcohols are rapidly metabolised to aldehydes (and further to carboxylic acids) but
oxidation of secondary alcohols to ketones proceeds slowly. This is because –
1. Primary alcohols are better substrates for dehydrogenases due to their acidic nature, and
2. Their oxidation products, carboxylic acids, are more water-soluble than ketones.
Since primary alcohols are inactivated rapidly, drugs bearing such groups are rare. In
case of ethanol, oxidation to acetaldehyde is reversible and further oxidation of the latter to
acetic acid is very rapid since acetaldehyde is highly toxic and should not accumulate in the
body. Compounds with two primary alcohol functions are oxidised stepwise and not
simultaneously. With secondary alcohols, the rate of oxidation increases with an increase in
alkyl chain length. Compounds with both primary and secondary alcohol groups are oxidised
preferentially at the primary group.
Miscellaneous Oxidative Reactions

a. Oxidative Aromatisation/Dehydrogenation: An example of metabolic aromatisation
of drugs is nifedipine.
b. Oxidative Dehalogenation: This reaction is common with halogen containing drugs

such as chloroform. Dehalogenation of this drug yields phosgene which may result in
electrophiles capable of covalent binding to tissues.
Oxidative ring cleavage, oxidation of arenols to quinones, etc. are other oxidative
reactions.
REDUCTIVE REACTIONS
Bioreductions are also capable of generating polar functional groups such as hydroxy and
amino which can undergo further biotransformation or conjugation. A number of reductive
reactions are exact opposite of oxidation. For example:
Alcohol dehydrogenation Carbonyl reduction
N-Oxidation Amine oxide reduction
Thus, in this sense, bioreduction comprises one-half of reversible reactions. Such
reactions may be catalysed by –
 Same enzyme (true reversible reaction), or
 Different enzymes (apparent reversible reaction).
Since reversible reactions usually lead to conversion of inactive metabolites into active
drug, they may result in delay of drug removal from the body and hence prolongation of
action.
Reduction of Carbonyls (Aldehydes and Ketones)

Depending on their reactivity towards bioreduction, carbonyls can be divided into 3
categories –
1. The aliphatic aldehydes and ketones.
2. The aromatic aldehydes and ketones.
3. The esters, acids and amides.

The order of reactivity of these categories of drugs in undergoing reduction is –
1>2>3
i.e. aliphatic aldehydes and ketones undergo extensive bioreduction whereas esters, acids and
amides are least reactive.

Few aldehydes undergo reduction because such a reaction is usually reversible, and
secondly, they are susceptible towards oxidation which yields more polar products. Several
ketones undergo reduction as it results in more polar metabolites. Reduction of aldehydes
and ketones yields primary and secondary alcohols respectively. The reaction is catalysed by
non-microsomal enzymes called as aldo-keto-reductases.
A representative example of compounds undergoing reductive reactions is given below.
Aliphatic aldehydes e.g. chloral hydrate.
Aliphatic ketones e.g. methadone.
Alicyclic ketones e.g. naltrexone.
Aromatic ketones e.g. acetophenone.
Reduction of Alcohols and Carbon-Carbon Double Bonds

These two reductions are considered together because the groups are interconvertible by
simple addition or loss of a water molecule. Before an alcohol is reduced, it is dehydrated to
C=C bond, e.g. bencyclane (antispasmodic).
Reduction of norethindrone, an , -unsaturated carbonyl compound, results in both

reduction of C=C double bond and formation of alcohol.
Reduction of N-compounds (Nitro, Azo and N-Oxide)

The N-containing functional groups that commonly undergo bioreduction are nitro, azo and
N-oxide. It is important to note that such a reaction is reverse of oxidation.
Reduction of nitro group proceeds via formation of nitroso and hydroxylamine
intermediates to yield amines.
For example, reduction of nitrazepam.
Reduction of azo compounds yields primary amines via formation of hydrazo intermediate
(-NH-NH-) which undergoes cleavage at N-N bond.
An important example of azo reduction is prontosil. It is reduced to the active form –

sulphanilamide.
Aliphatic and aromatic tertiary amine N-oxides are reduced to the corresponding amines,
e.g. imipramine N-oxide to imipramine.
Miscellaneous Reductive Reactions

1. Reductive Dehalogenation: This reaction involves replacement of halogen attached
to the carbon with the H-atom, e.g. halothane.
The C-F bond is resistant to reduction.

2. Reduction of Sulphur Containing Functional Groups: An example of S-S reductive
cleavage is disulphiram.
Sulphoxides are sometimes reduced to sulphides, e.g. sulindac.
HYDROLYTIC REACTIONS
These reactions differ from oxidative and reductive reactions in 3 respects:
1. The reaction does not involve change in the state of oxidation of the substrate.
2. The reaction results in a large chemical change in the substrate brought about by loss
of relatively large fragments of the molecule.
3. The hydrolytic enzymes that metabolise xenobiotics are the ones that also act on
endogenous substrates. Moreover, their activity is not confined to liver as they are
found in many other organs like kidney, intestine, etc.
A number of functional groups are hydrolysed viz. esters, ethers, amides, hydrazides, etc.
Hydrolysis of Esters and Ethers

Esters on hydrolysis yield alcohol and carboxylic acid. The reaction is catalysed by esterases.
The ester substrates undergoing hydrolysis can be classified as under:
Organic esters with both large acidic and alcoholic groups on hydrolysis results in
metabolites with complete loss of activity. Esters where one of the groups is relatively large,
retain much of their activity when hydrolysed since such a group is generally a
pharmacophore (having pharmacological activity). In many cases, such esters are prodrugs
which rely on hydrolysis for their transformation into active form, e.g. chloramphenicol
palmitate.
Aromatic esters are hydrolysed by arylesterases and aliphatic esters by carboxylesterases.
Examples of various classes of esters undergoing hydrolysis are given below.
Organic acid (carboxylic acid) esters
Esters with a large acidic (and small alcohol) group e.g. clofibrate.
Esters with large alcoholic (and small acidic) group e.g. aspirin.
Esters with large acidic and alcoholic groups (generally amine alcohols) e.g.
succinylcholine.
Inorganic Acid Esters

Phosphates e.g. stilbestrol diphosphate.
Sulphates e.g. isopropyl methanesulphonate.
Nitrates e.g. pentaerythritol tetranitrate
Ethers undergoing hydrolysis are glycosides such as digoxin and digitoxin and O-
glucuronides.
Hydrolysis of Amides (C-N bond cleavage)

Amides are hydrolysed slowly in comparison to esters. The reaction, catalysed by amidases,
involves C-N cleavage to yield carboxylic acid and amine.
Primary amides are rare. Secondary amides form the largest group of amide drugs.
Examples of amide hydrolysis are given below.
Secondary amides with aliphatic substituent on N-atom e.g. procainamide (hydrolysed
slowly in comparison to procaine)
Secondary amides with aromatic substituent on N-atom (anilides) e.g. lidocaine.
Tertiary amides (N-atom contained in a ring) e.g. carbamazepine.
Hydrazides are also a class of amides e.g. isocarboxazide.
Hydrolytic Cleavage of Non-aromatic Heterocycles

Nonaromatic heterocycles also contain amide functions, e.g. lactams (cyclic amides). Several
lactams that undergo hydrolysis are:
1. Four-membered lactams (ß-lactam) e.g. penicillins.
2. Five-membered lactams e.g. succinimides.
3. Six-membered lactams e.g. thalidomide.
4. Seven-membered lactams e.g. chlordiazepoxide
Hydrolytic Dehalogenation
Chlorine atoms attached to aliphatic carbons are dehalogenated easily, e.g. DDT.
Miscellaneous Hydrolytic Reactions

These reactions include hydration of epoxides and arene oxides, hydrolysis of sulphonyl
ureas, carbamates, hydroxamates and of glucuronide and sulphate conjugates.
PHASE I I REACTIONS
Phase II reactions involve transfer of a suitable endogenous moiety such as glucuronic acid,
sulphate, glycine, etc. in presence of enzyme transferase to drugs or metabolites of phase I
reactions having suitable functional groups to form highly polar, readily excretable and
pharmacologically inert conjugates.

Phase I I r eactions ar e the real dr ug detoxi cation pathwaysbecause –
1. The conjugates/products of phase II reactions are absolutely free of pharmacological
activity.
2. The conjugates/products of phase II reactions are highly polar and thus easily
excretable either in bile or urine.
3. Tissue-reactive and carcinogenic metabolites formed as a result of phase I reaction are
rendered harmless by conjugation with moieties such as glutathione.
The moieties transferred to the substrates (called as conju gatin g r eagents) in a phase II
reaction possess 3 characteristics:
1. They are simple endogenous molecules such as carbohydrates, proteins and fats.
2. They are of large molecular size.
3. They are strongly polar or ionic in nature in order to render the substrate water-
soluble.
Two outstanding characteristics of conjugation reactions are –
1. The reaction involves an initial activation step – either
(a) The drug is activated e.g. conjugation with amino acids and acetylation
reaction; or
(b) The conjugating reagent is activated e.g. glucuronidation, sulphation and
methylation.
2. The reaction is capacity-limited – the limited capacity of conjugation reactions is
attributed to –
(a) Limited amount of conjugating agent, for example, glycine.
(b) Limited ability to synthesise the active nucleotide intermediate.
(c) Limited amount of enzyme conjugate transferase.
Thus, when doses of drugs are higher than normal levels of conjugating molecules,
saturation of metabolism occurs and the unconjugated drug/metabolite precipitates toxicity.
The order of capacities of important conjugation reactions is –
Glucur onidation > Amin o Acid Conjugation > Sul phation and Glutathi one Conju gation
The increase in the molecular weight of the drug following conjugation with glucuronic
acid, sulphate and glutathione is 176, 80 and 300 Daltons respectively.
The molecular weight of the conjugate is important in dictating its route of excretion –
 High molecular weight conjugates (>350) are excreted predominantly in bile
 Low molecular weight conjugates (<250) are excreted in urine.

Thus, glutathione conjugates are always excreted in bile.
Table 5.3 compares the various phase II reactions.
TABLE 5.3
Phase II Reactions and their Characteristics
Conjugation Conjugating Conjugating Agent Activated Functional Groups
Reaction Agent Transferring Enzyme Intermediate Combined with
Glucuronidation Glucuronic acid UDP-glucuronyl UDPGA -OH, -COOH, -NH2, -SH
transferase
Sulphation Sulphate Sulphotransferase PAPS -OH, -NH2
Amino acid Glycine Acyl transferase Acyl CoA -COOH, -NH2
conjugation
Glutathione Glutathione Gluthaione-S- - Alkyl halides, alkyl nitrates,
transferase epoxides, lactones, etc.
Acetylation Acetyl CoA N-acetyl transferase Acetyl CoA -NH2, -SO2NH2, hydrazines
Methylation L-methionine Methyl transferase S-adenosyl -OH, -NH2, -SH
methionine
CONJUGATION WITH GLUCURONIC ACID

Also called as glucuronidation, it is the most common and most important phase II reaction
for several reasons:
1. Readily available source of conjugating moiety, D-glucuronic acid which is derived
from D-glucose.
2. Several functional groups viz. alcohols, acids, amines, etc. can combine easily with D-
glucuronic acid.
3. Quantitatively, conjugation with D-glucuronic acid occurs to a high degree.
4. All mammals have the common ability to produce glucuronides,
5. The free carboxyl function of glucuronic acid has a pKa in the range 3.5 to 4.0 and
hence ionisable at both plasma and urine pH thereby greatly increasing the water
solubility of the conjugated substrate.
6. The glucuronidation
function oxidases, theenzymes are in
major phase closemetabolising
I drug association enzyme
with thesystem;
microsomal
thus, amixed
rapid
conjugation of phase I metabolites is possible.
7. Lastly, glucuronidation can take place in most body tissues since the glucuronic acid
donor, UDPGA is produced in processes related to glycogen synthesis and thus, will
never be deficient unlike those involved in other phase II reactions.
Glucuronide formation occurs in 2 steps –
1. Synthesis of an activated coenzyme uridine-5'-diphospho- -D-glucuronic acid
(UDPGA) from UDP-glucose (UDPG). The coenzyme UDPGA acts as the donor of
glucuronic acid. UDPG is synthesized by interaction of -D-glucose-1-phosphate
with uridine triphosphate (UTP).
2. Transfer of the glucuronyl moiety from UDPGA to the substrate RXH in presence of
enzyme UDP-glucuronyl transferase to form the conjugate. In this step, the -
configuration of glucuronic acid undergoes inversion and thus, the resulting product is
-D-glucuronide (also called as glucosiduronic acid or glucopyranosiduronic acid
conjugate).
The steps involved in glucuronide synthesis are depicted below:
where X = O, COO, NH or S.
An example of glucuronidation of benzoic acid is shown below.
A large number of functional groups are capable of forming oxygen, nitrogen and sulphur
glucuronides. Carbon glucuronides have also been detected in a few cases.
Oxygen or O-Glucuronides
Xenobiotics with hydroxyl and/or carboxyl functions form O-glucuronides.
1. Hydroxyl Compounds: These form ether glucuronides. Several examples of such
compounds are given below.
Aliphatic alcohols e.g. chloramphenicol, trichloroethanol
Alicyclic alcohols e.g. hydroxylated hexobarbital
Arenols (phenols) e.g. morphine, paracetamol
Benzylic alcohols e.g. methyl phenyl carbinol
Enols e.g. 4-hydroxy coumarin
N-hydroxyl
N-hydroxyl amines
amides e.g.
e.g. N-hydroxy dapsone aminofluorine
N-hydroxy-2-acetyl
2. Carboxyl Compounds: These form ester glucuronides
Aryl acids e.g. salicylic acid
Arylalkyl acids e.g. fenoprofen
Nitrogen or N-Glucuronides
Xenobiotics with amine, amide and sulphonamide functions form N-glucuronides.
Aliphatic 2o amines e.g. desipramine
Aliphatic 3o amines e.g. tripelennamine
Nonaromatic 3o heterocyclic amines e.g. cyproheptadiene

Amides e.g. meprobamate 141/413
Sulphonamides e.g. sulphadimethoxine
Sulphur or S-Glucuronides
Thiols (SH) form thioether glucuronides e.g. thiophenol.
Carbon or C-Glucuronides
Xenobiotics with nucleophilic carbon atoms such as phenylbutazone form C-glucuronides.
Certain endogenous compounds such as steroids, bilirubin, catechols and thyroxine also
form glucuronides.
CONJUGATION WITH SULPHATE MOIETIES

Sulphation is similar to glucuronidation but it is catalysed by nonmicrosomal enzymes and
occurs less commonly as the moiety that transfers sulphate to the substrate is easily depleted.
This process is thus, easily saturable in comparison to glucuronidation.
 Sulphation is dominant at low substrate concentration, whereas
 Glucuronidation is dominant at high substrate concentration.
Like glucuronidation, sulphation also occurs in 2 steps:
1. Synthesis of an activated coenzyme 3'-phosphoadenosine-5'- phosphosulphate (PAPS)
which acts as a donor of sulphate to the substrate. This also occurs in two steps —
(a) An initial interaction between the sulphate and the adenosine triphosphate
(ATP) to yield adenosine-5'-phosphosulphate (APS), followed by
(b) Activation of APS to PAPS.
2. Transfer of sulphate group from PAPS to the substrate RXH in presence of enzyme
sulphotransferase (sulphokinase) and subsequent liberation of 3'-phosphoadenosine-5'-
phosphate (PAP).
The steps are summarized in the equations below:
where X = O, NH
Functional groups capable of forming sulphate conjugates include phenols, alcohols,

arylamines, N-hydroxylamines and N-hydroxyamides. The reaction product is a sulphate
ester, also called as ethereal sulphate.
Examples of compounds undergoing sulphation are:
Phenols e.g. paracetamol, salbutamol
Alcohols e.g. aliphatic alcohols C-1 to C-5
Arylamines e.g. aniline.
Sulphoconjugates can be tissue reactive, e.g. the O-sulphate conjugate of N-hydroxy
phenacetin covalently binds to hepatic and renal tissues.
Endogenous substances can also undergo sulphation, e.g. steroids, biologic amines, etc.
CONJUGATION WITH ALPHA AMINO ACIDS

This reaction also occurs to a limited extent because of limited availability of amino acids.
The reaction occurs in two steps:
1. Activation of carboxylic acid drug substrate with ATP and coenzyme A (CoA) to form
an acyl CoA intermediate. Thus, the reaction is a contrast of glucuronidation and
sulphation where the donor coenzyme is activated and not the substrate.
2. Acylation of the -amino acid by the acyl CoA in presence of enzyme N-acyl
transferase.
The reaction is summarized below.
where R’ = -CH2- (if glycine) or >CH-CH2-CH2-CONH2 (if glutamine)

Conjugation occurs commonly with glycine. Glutamine conjugation occurs to a lesser
extent. Conjugation with other amino acids like aspartic acid, serine and taurine is still
uncommon. The substrate is generally an acid (aromatic in particular) and the reaction
product is an amide.
Examples of drugs forming glycine or glutamine conjugates are:
Aliphatic acids e.g. isopropoxyacetic acid
Alicyclic acids e.g. cholic acid
Aryl acids e.g. salicylic acid
Arylacetic acids e.g. phenylacetic acid
Heterocyclic aryl acids e.g. nicotinic acid.
Amino acid conjugation occurs extensively in the liver mitochondria and thus the reaction
can be used to estimate hepatic function. The diagnostic marker used is benzoic acid which
on conjugation with glycine yields hippuric acid. Hippuric acid is rapidly excreted in urine.
Thus, the rate and extent of urinary excretion of hippuric acid following oral or i.v.
administration of benzoic acid indicates functioning of liver. A decreased output indicates
hepatic disorder.
CONJUGATION WITH GLUTATHIONE AND

MERCAPTURIC ACID FORMATION
Glutathione ( -glutamyl cysteinyl glycine or GSH) is a tripeptide with a strongly nucleophilic
character due to the presence of a -SH (thiol) group in its structure.
Thus, it has great affinity for electrophilic substrates, a number of which are potentially
toxic compounds. It is important to note thatas

a highly
to react with tissue nucleophilic groups such electrophilic
-OH, -NH metabolite has a tendency
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar 2 and -SH and precipitate toxicities
143/413
such as tissue necrosis, carcinogenesis, mutagenesis, teratogenesis, etc. Conjugation with

glutathione protects the tissue from such reactive moieties and thus, the reaction is an
important detoxication route.
GSH conjugation differs from other conjugation reactions in that the process does not
require initial activation of the coenzyme or the substrate since the GSH, which is a
nucleophile itself, is highly reactive towards an electrophilic substrate. The interaction
between the substrate and the GSH is catalysed by enzyme glutathione-S-transferase to form
S-substituted glutathione conjugate. This conjugate is not excreted as such in the urine but
undergoes cleavage, first by the enzyme -glutamyl transpeptidase to release the free
glutamyl residue and cysteinyl glycine derivative; the latter is cleaved by enzyme cysteinyl
glycinase to produce free glycine and the cysteine conjugate. Finally, N-acetylation of this
conjugate by the enzyme N-acetylase yields S-substituted-N-acetyl cysteine products called
as mercapturic acids.
GSH conjugation occurs by one of the two mechanisms:

1. Nucleophilic substitution at an electron deficient carbon or heteroatom such as alkyl
halides, alkyl nitrates (e.g. glyceryl trinitrate), sulphates, sulphonates,
organophosphates, epoxides, lactones, etc.
RX + GSH R–S–G + H+ + X–
2. Nucleophilic addition at the electron deficient double bond such as the , -

unsaturated carbonyl compounds, e.g. ethacrynic acid.
R–CH=CH–R' + GSH RCH–S–G–CH2–R'
where R = electron withdrawing group.

The hepatotoxicity from paracetamol overdose is due to depletion of GSH.
ACETYLATION
This reaction is basically an acylation reaction and thus similar to conjugation with -amino
acids. The analogy also lies in the fact that both reactions yield amide products. Acetylation
however differs from -amino acid conjugation in that the substrates are exogenous amines
(and not carboxylic acids) and the acylating agent is endogenous acetyl CoA (CH3COSCoA).
The general sequence of reaction is similar to that for -amino acid conjugation. The
enzyme involved is the nonmicrosomal N-acetyl transferase.
Acetylation is an important metabolic pathway for drugs containing primary amino

groups. Alcohols (e.g. choline) and thiols (e.g. CoASH) also undergo acetylation but only
the endogenous ones.
Examples of drugs undergoing acetylation are –
Primary aliphatic amines e.g. histamine, mescaline.
Primary aromatic amines e.g. procainamide, PAS, PABA, dapsone.
Sulphonamides e.g. sulphanilamide, sulphapyridine.
Hydrazines/hydrazides e.g. hydralazine, isoniazid, phenelzine.
Acetylation may sometimes lead to toxic products, e.g. acetyl derivatives of some
sulphonamides (cause renal toxicity due to decreased water solubility of the metabolites
formed) and reactive arylacetamides.
One of the interesting facts about acetylation is pharmacogenetic difference in the rate at
which it proceeds in man, (called as acetylation polymorphism). The distribution of
population in acetylating certain substrates is bimodal viz. slow acetylator and rapid
acetylator phenotypes. As a result, large inter-ethnic group variations in the therapeutic and
toxic levels of drugs that undergo acetylation have been observed, e.g. isoniazid.
METHYLATION
This reaction differs from general characteristics of phase II reactions in several ways:
1. The metabolites formed are not polar or water-soluble.
2. The metabolites, in a number of instances, have equal or greater pharmacological
activity than the parent drug, e.g. morphine formed from normorphine.
3. The reaction is of lesser importance in metabolism of xenobiotics. It is more
important in the biosynthesis (e.g. adrenaline, melatonin) and inactivation of
endogenous amines (e.g. noradrenaline, serotonin, histamine).
Methylation can be considered as intermediate of phase I and phase II reactions. It can be
called as a phase I reaction as it is reverse of demethylation reaction and can be classed as a
phase II reaction because of its mechanism.
Methylation of substrates proceeds in two steps:
1. Synthesis of an activated coenzyme S-adenosyl methionine (SAM), the donor of
methyl group, from L-methionine and ATP.
2. Transfer of the methyl group from SAM to the substrate in presence of
nonmicrosomal enzyme methyl transferase.
where X = O, NH, S
Important methyl transferases that catalyse methylation of xenobiotics are catechol-O-
methyl transferase (COMT), phenyl-O-methyl transferase (POMT), phenyl ethanolamine-N-
methyl transferase (PNMT), nonspecific transferases, etc.
Examples of substrates undergoing methylation are:

O-Methylation
Phenols e.g. morphine
Catechols e.g. -methyl dopa, L-DOPA, isoprenaline
N-Methylation
Primary aliphatic amines e.g. norephedrine
Secondary alicyclic amines e.g. normorphine
Aromatic heterocycles e.g. nicotine, histamine
S-Methylation
Thiols e.g. propylthiouracil, 6-mercaptopurine
MISCELLANEOUS CONJUGATION REACTIONS

Some of the rare conjugation reactions are mentioned below.
Conjugation of Cyanide
The toxicity of cyanide ion is due to its ability to arrest enzymes involved in cellular
respiration and convert haemoglobin to cyanomethemoglobin which lacks the ability to
transport oxygen to tissues. Conjugation of cyanide ion involves transfer of sulphur atom
from thiosulphate to the cyanide ion in presence of enzyme rhodanese to form inactive
thiocyanate.
Conjugation with Ribose

Endogenous purine and pyrimidine bases conjugate with ribose to form nucleotides.
Conjugation with Taurine

Taurine, a -amino sulphonic acid, conjugates the endogenous bile acids to produce
components of bile.
METHODS FOR THE STUDY OF DRUG BIOTRANSFORMATION

I n Vi tro Methods
There are several approaches to in vitro drug metabolism studies. The enzyme sources in
these studies are human-derived systems currently under rapid development and evaluation.
These systems consist of –
Liver microsomes
Hepatocytes and cell lines heterologously expressing drug-metabolising enzymes

Liver slices, and
Individually cDNA-expressed enzymes in host cell microsomes.
In these studies, the extent of uptake of drug is determined from the steady-state
concentration in tissue and free concentration in the perfusate. The composition of the
perfusate and the rate of perfusion are important experimental determinants of the rate of
uptake of drug by the liver.
I n Vivo Methods
Investigations of biotransformation pathways in vivo require the collection and analysis of
appropriate biologic samples. The types of sample collected include urine, faeces, expired air,
blood/plasma, bile, milk, saliva, synovial fluid and tissues. These samples can be divided into
two groups –
1. Those requiring complete collection e.g. urine and faeces.
2. Those which are sampled at regular intervals of time e.g. blood.
The two approaches to identification of metabolites in the collected samples are –

1. Identification of metabolites in the biologic samples when reference compounds are
available.
2. Isolation and identification of all major metabolites regardless of the availability of
reference compounds. This approach requires a method of detecting metabolites such
as use of radiolabelled form of the drug. Radiolabelling is done at a metabolically
stable position. HPLC and TLC techniques are employed to detect and measure the
radiolabelled metabolites.
FACTORS AFFECTING BIOTRANSFORMATION OF DRUGS

The therapeutic efficacy, toxicity and biological half-life of a drug greatly depend upon its
metabolic rate. A number of factors may influence the rate of drug metabolism. They are:
1. Physicochemical properties of the drug
2. Chemical factors:
a. Induction of drug metabolising enzymes
b. Inhibition of drug metabolising enzymes
c. Environmental chemicals
3. Biological factors:
a. Species differences
b. Strain differences
c. Sex differences
d. Age
e. Diet
f. Altered physiologic factors:
i. Pregnancy
ii. Hormonal imbalance
iii. Disease states
g. Temporal factors:
i. Circadian rhythm
ii. Circannual rhythm
PHYSICOCHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF THE DRUG

Just as the absorption and distribution of a drug are influenced by its physicochemical
properties, so is its interaction with the drug metabolising enzymes. Molecular size and
shape, pKa, acidity/basicity, lipophilicity and steric and electronic characteristics of a drug
influence its interaction with the active sites of enzymes and the biotransformation processes
to which it is subjected. However, such an interrelationship is not clearly understood.
Stereochemical nature of drug also influences its metabolism. Biotransformation
requires interaction of a drug with an enzyme, which is an interaction where spatial
arrangement is critical. Many drugs that undergo metabolism exhibit stereoselective hepatic
clearance, for example, the oral clearance of verapamil, a drug with high intrinsic clearance,
displays profound stereoselectivity such that clearance ratio of +/- isomers is approximately
4.
CHEMICAL FACTORS
Induction of Drug Metabolising Enzymes
The phenomenon of increased drug metabolising ability of the enzymes (especially of
microsomal monooxygenase system) by several drugs and chemicals is called as enzyme
induction and the agents which bring about such an effect are known as enzyme inducers.
Most enzyme inducers have following properties –
1. They are lipophilic compounds.
2. They are substrate for the inducted enzyme system.
3. They have long elimination half-lives.
Mechanisms involved in enzyme induction are –
1. Increase in both liver size and liver blood flow.

2. Increase in both total and microsomal protein content.
3. Increased stability of enzymes.
4. Increased synthesis of cytochrome P-450.
5. Decreased degradation of cytochrome P-450.
6. Proliferation of smooth endoplasmic reticulum.
Two categories of inducers have been defined –

1. Phenobarbital type inducers: includes several drugs and pesticides which increase
the rate of metabolism of a large number of drugs. The most thoroughly studied
enzyme inducer is phenobarbital which can increase enzyme activity up to 4 times.
2. Polycyclic hydrocarbon type inducers: such as 3-methyl cholanthrene and cigarette
smoke which stimulate the metabolic rate of few drugs.
Some drugs such as carbamazepine, meprobamate, cyclophosphamide, rifampicin, etc.
stimulate their own metabolism, the phenomenon being called as auto-induction or self-
induction.
The most thoroughly studied enzyme inducer is phenobarbital which can increase enzyme
activity up to 4 times. An example which shows that enzyme induction can have serious
consequences in clinical practice is the inducing effect of phenobarbital on dicoumarol levels.
Extreme caution must be exercised when phenobarbital and dicoumarol are co-administered
to avoid either failure of the anticoagulant therapy or haemorrhagic crises.
Consequences of enzyme induction includes –

 Decrease in pharmacological activity of drugs
 Increased activity where the metabolites are active, and
 Altered physiologic status due to enhanced metabolism of endogenous compounds
such as sex hormones.
Some examples of inducers and drugs affected by them are given in Table 5.4.
TABLE 5.4
Inducers of Drug Metabolising Enzyme System and
Drugs Commonly
Affected by Them 148/413
Inducers Drugs with Enhanced Metabolism

Barbiturates Coumarins, phenytoin, cortisol, testosterone, oral contraceptives
Alcohol Pentobarbital, coumarins, phenytoin
Phenytoin Cortisol, coumarins, oral contraceptives, tolbutamide
Rifampicin Coumarins, oral contraceptives, tolbutamide, rifampicin
Cigarette Smoke Nicotine, amino azo dyes
Inhibition of Drug Metabolising Enzymes
A decrease in the drug metabolising ability of an enzyme is called as enzyme inhibition.
The process of inhibition may be direct or indirect.
1. Direct Inhibition: may result from interaction at the enzymic site, the net outcome being
a change in enzyme activity.
Direct enzyme inhibition can occur by one of the 3 mechanisms –
a. Competiti ve I nh ibi tion: results when structurally similar compounds compete for the
same site on an enzyme. Such an inhibition due to substrate competition is reversible
and can be overcome by high concentration of one of the substrates, e.g. methacholine
inhibits metabolism of acetylcholine by competing with it for cholinesterase.
b. Non-competiti ve I nhi bition: results when a structurally unrelated agent interacts with
the enzyme and prevents the metabolism of drugs. Since the interaction is not
structure-specific, metals like lead, mercury and arsenic and organophosphorus
insecticides inhibit the enzymes non-competitively. Isoniazid inhibits the metabolism
of phenytoin by the same mechanism.
c. Product I nhi bition: results when the metabolic product competes with the substrate
for the same enzyme. The phenomenon is also called as autoinhibition.
Certain specific inhibitors such as xanthine oxidase inhibitors (e.g. allopurinol) and
MAO inhibitors (e.g. phenelzine) also inhibit the enzyme activity directly. Direct enzyme
inhibition is usually rapid; a single dose of inhibitor may be sufficient to demonstrate enzyme
inhibition.
2. Indirect Inhibition: is brought about by one of the two mechanisms –
a. Repression: is defined as the decrease in enzyme content. It may be due to a fall in
the rate of enzyme synthesis as affected by ethionine, puromycin and actinomycin D
or because of rise in the rate of enzyme degradation such as by carbon tetrachloride,
carbon disulphide, disulphiram, etc.
b. Al ter ed Physi ology: due to nutritional deficiency or hormonal imbalance.
En zyme in hi bition is more important cli ni call y than enzyme in duction, especially for
drugs with narrow therapeutic index, e.g. anticoagulants, antiepileptics, hypoglycaemics,
since it results in prolonged pharmacological action with increased possibility of precipitation
of toxic effects.
Some examples of inhibitors and drugs affected by them are given in Table 5.5.
TABLE 5.5
Enzyme Inhibitors and Drugs Affected by them
Inhibitors Drugs with Decreased Metabolism
MAO inhibitors Barbiturates, tyramine
Coumarins Phenytoin
Allopurinol
PAS 6-Mercaptopurine
Phenytoin, hexobarbital
An important example of clinically significant enzyme inhibition is the effect of

phenylbutazone on warfarin plasma levels. Warfarin is used as racemic mixture, with the S
isomer being 5 times more active than the R isomer. Moreover, warfarin is eliminated from
the body almost exclusively by metabolism and the S isomer is metabolised more rapidly that
the R isomer. The effect of phenylbutazone on increased levels of warfarin can thus be
concluded as –
 Increase in R isomer levels is due to its displacement from the plasma proteins (little
increase in anticoagulant activity).
 Increase in S isomer levels is due to inhibition of metabolism, with tremendous
increase in anticoagulant activity and tendency to cause haemorrhage.
Environmental Chemicals
Several environmental agents influence the drug metabolising ability of enzymes.
 Halogenated pesticides such as DDT and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons contained
in cigarette smoke have enzyme induction effect.
 Organophosphate insecticides and heavy metals such as mercury, tin, nickel, cobalt
and arsenic inhibit drug metabolising ability of enzymes.
Other environmental factors that may influence drug metabolism are temperature, altitude,
pressure, atmosphere, etc.
BIOLOGICAL FACTORS
Species Differences
Screening of new therapeutic molecules to ascertain their activity and toxicity requires study
in several laboratory animal species. Differences in drug response due to species differences
are taken into account while extrapolating the data to man.
Species differences have been observed in both phase I and phase II reactions. In phase I
reactions, both qualitative and quantitative variations in the enzyme and their activity have
been observed. An example of this is the metabolism of amphetamine and ephedrine. In men
and rabbit, these drugs are predominantly metabolised by oxidative deamination whereas in
rats the aromatic oxidation is the major route. In phase II reactions, the variations are mainly
qualitative and characterized either by the presence of, or complete lack of certain
conjugating enzymes; for example, in pigs, the phenol is excreted mainly as glucuronide
whereas its sulphate conjugate dominates in cats. Certain birds utilize ornithine for
conjugating aromatic acids instead of glycine.
Strain Differences/Pharmacogenetics
Enzymes influencing metabolic reactions are under the genetic control. Just as the
differences in drug metabolising ability between different species are attributed to genetics,
so also are the differences observed between strains of the same animal species. A study of
inter-subject variability in drug response (due to differences in, for example, rate of
biotransformation) is called as pharmacogenetics . The inter-subject variations in drug
biotransformation may either be monogenically or polygenically controlled. A polygenic
control has been observed in studies in twins. In identical twins (monozygotic), very little or
no difference in the metabolism of phenylbutazone, dicoumarol and antipyrine was detected
but large variations were apparent in fraternal twins (dizygotic; twins developed from two
different eggs) for the same drugs.
Differences observed in the metabolism of a drug among different races are called as
ethnic variations. Such a variation may bemonomorphic or polymorphic. When a unimodal 150/413
frequency distribution is observed in the entire population, the variations are called as
continuous or monomorphic; for example, the entire human race acetylate PABA and PAS
to only a small extent. A polymodal distribution is indicative of discontinu ous var iation
(polymorphism ). An example of polymorphism is the acetylation of isoniazid (INH) in
humans. A bimodal population distribution was observed comprising of slow acetylator or
inactivator phenotypes (metabolise INH slowly) and rapid acetylator or inactivator
phenotypes (metabolise INH rapidly) (see Table 5.6.).
TABLE 5.6
Ethnic Variations in the N-Acetylation of Isoniazid
Ethnic Group % Slow Acetylators % Rapid Acetylators
Whites (USA and Canada) 45 55
Blacks (USA) 48 52
Latin Americans 67 33
American Indians 79 21
Japanese 87 13
Eskimos 95 05
Source : Kalow, W.: Pharmacogenetics: Heredity and the Response to Drugs, Saunders, Philadelphia, 1962.
Approximately equal percent of slow and rapid acetylators are found among whites and
blacks whereas the slow acetylators dominate Japanese and Eskimo populations. Dose
adjustments are therefore necessary in the latter groups since high levels of INH may cause
peripheral neuritis. Other drugs known to exhibit pharmacogenetic differences in metabolism
are debrisoquine, succinyl choline, phenytoin, dapsone and sulphadimidine.
Sex Differences
Sex related differences in the rate of metabolism could be attributed to regulation of such
processes by sex hormones since variations between male and female are generally observed
following puberty. Such sex differences are widely studied in rats; the male rats have greater
drug metabolising capacity. In humans, women metabolise benzodiazepines slowly than men
and several studies show that women on contraceptive pills metabolise a number of drugs at a
slow rate.
Age
Differences in the drug metabolic rate in different age groups are mainly due to variations in
the enzyme content, enzyme activity and haemodynamics.
 In neonates (upto 2 months), the microsomal enzyme system is not fully developed
and many drugs are biotransformed slowly; for example, caffeine has a half-life of 4
days in neonates
excreted in comparison
unchanged in urine bytothe
4 hours in adults.
neonates. A major with
Conjugation portion of this is
sulphate drug is
well
developed (paracetamol is excreted mainly as sulphate) but glucuronidation occurs to
a very small extent. As a result, hyperbilirubinaemia precipitates kernicterus and
chloramphenicol leads to cyanosis or Gray baby syndrome in new born. Similarly,
sulphonamides cause renal toxicity and paracetamol causes hepatotoxicity.
 Infants (between 2 months and one year) show almost a similar profile as neonates in
metabolising drugs with improvement in the capacity as age advances and enzyme
activity increases.
 Children (between one year and 12 years) and older infants metabolise several drugs
much more rapidly than adults as the rate of metabolism reaches a maximum
somewhere between 6 months and 12 years of age. As a result, they require large
mg/Kg doses in comparison to adults; for example, the theophylline half-life in

children is two-third of that in adults.
 In very elderly persons, the liver size is reduced, the microsomal enzyme activity is
decreased and hepatic blood flow also declines as a result of reduced cardiac output
all of which contribute to decreased metabolism of drugs. Drug conjugation however
remains unaffected.
Diet
The enzyme content and activity is altered by a number of dietary components. In general –
 Low protein diet decreases and high protein diet increases the drug metabolising
ability. This is because the enzyme synthesis is promoted by protein diet which also
raises the level of amino acids for conjugation with drugs.
 The protein-carbohydrate ratio in the diet is also important; a high ratio increases the
microsomal mixed function oxidase activity.
 Fat free diet depresses cytochrome P-450 levels since phospholipids, which are
important components of microsomes, become deficient.

 Dietary deficiency of vitamins (e.g. vitamin A, B 2, B3, C and E) and minerals such as
Fe, Ca, Mg, Cu and Zn retard the metabolic activity of enzymes.
 Grapefruit inhibits metabolism of many drugs and improve their oral availability.
 Starvation results in decreased amount of glucuronides formed than under normal
conditions.
 Malnutrition in women results in enhanced metabolism of sex hormones.
 Alcohol ingestion results in a short-term decrease followed by an increase in the
enzyme activity.
Altered Physiological Factors

Studies in animals have shown that the maternal drug metabolising ability (of
Pregnancy:
both phase I and phase II reactions) is reduced during the later stages of pregnancy. This was
suggested as due to high levels of steroid hormones in circulation during pregnancy. In
women, the metabolism of promazine and pethidine is reduced during pregnancy or when
receiving oral contraceptives. Higher rate of hepatic metabolism of anticonvulsants during
pregnancy is thought to be due to induction of drug metabolising enzymes by the circulating
progesterone.
Hormonal Imbalance: The influence of sex hormones on drug metabolism has already
been discussed. The effect of other hormones is equally complex. Higher levels of one
hormone may inhibit the activity of few enzymes while inducing that of others.
Adrenolectomy, thyroidectomy and alloxan induced diabetes in animals showed impairment
in the enzyme activity with a subsequent fall in the rate of metabolism. A similar effect was
observed with pituitary growth hormone. Stress related changes in ACTH levels also
influence drug biotransformation.
Disease States: As liver is the primary site for metabolism of most drugs, all pathologic
conditions associated with it result in enhanced half-lives of almost all drugs. Thus, a
reduction in hepatic drug metabolising ability is apparent in conditions such as hepatic
carcinoma, hepatitis, cirrhosis, obstructive jaundice, etc. Biotransformations such as glycine
conjugation of salicylates, oxidation of vitamin D and hydrolysis of procaine which occur in
kidney, are impaired in renal diseases. Congestive cardiac failure and myocardial infarction
which result in a decrease in the blood flow to the liver, impair metabolism of drugs having
high hepatic extraction ratio e.g. propranolol and lidocaine. In diabetes, glucuronidation is
reduced due to decreased availability of UDPGA.
Temporal Factors
Circadian Rhythm: Diurnal variations or variations in the enzyme activity with light
cycle is called as circadian rhythm in drug metabolism. It has been observed that the
enzyme activity is maximum during early morning (6 to 9 a.m.) and minimum in late
afternoon (2 to 5 p.m.) which was suggested to correspond with the high and low serum
levels of corticosterone (the serum corticosterone level is dependent upon the light-dark
sequence of the day). Clinical variation in therapeutic effect of a drug at different times of
the day is therefore apparent. The study of variations in drug response as influenced by time
is called as chronopharmacology . Time dependent change in drug kinetics is known as
chronokinetics. Drugs such as aminopyrine, hexobarbital and imipramine showed diurnal
variations in rats. The half-life of metyrapone was shown to be 2.5 times longer during the
night than in the day, in rats.
BIOACTIVATION AND TISSUE TOXICITY

Formation of highly reactive metabolites (from relatively inert chemical compounds) which
interact with the tissues to precipitate one or more of the several forms of toxicities such as
carcinogenesis and teratogenesis is called as bioactivation or toxicological activation. The
reactive, chemically unstable species, capable of toxication, are broadly divided into two
categories (see Fig. 5.4.) —
 Electrophiles
 Free radicals.
Fig. 5.4. Mechanisms of tissue toxicity by bioactivation of drugs

Electrophiles are species deficient in electron pair. The enzyme system through which
they are generated is cytochrome P-450. Carbon, nitrogen or sulphur-containing compounds
can be metabolically activated to yield electrophiles. Important electrophiles are epoxides
(e.g. epoxide of benzo(a)pyrene present in cigarette smoke which causes cancer),
hydroxylamines, nitroso and azoxy derivatives, nitrenium ions and elemental sulphur. The
mechanism by which electrophiles precipitate toxicity is through covalent binding to
nucleophilic tissue components such as macromolecules (proteins, nucleic acids and lipids) or
low molecular weight cellular constituents. Covalent binding to DNA is responsible for
carcinogenicity and tumour formation. The body’s defence against electrophiles is their
inactivation by conjugation with glutathione, the most abundant cellular nucleophile with -SH
group. An example of tissue toxicity due to electrophiles is hepatotoxicity of paracetamol
metabolites.
Free Radicals: are species containing an odd number of electrons. They may be
positively charged (cation radical), negatively charged (anion radical) or neutral (neutral
radical).
R.+ R.– R.
Cation Radical Anion Radical Neutral Radical
Free radicals are generally formed via NADPH cytochrome P-450 reductase or other
flavin containing reductases. Xenobiotics that on metabolic activation yield free radicals are
quinones, arylamines, nitroaryls and carbon tetrachloride. Endogenous compounds such as
epinephrine and DOPA can also generate free radicals. Most free radicals are organic. They
produce toxicity by peroxidation of cellular components. An important class of free radicals
is inorganic free radicals such as hydrogen peroxide (H 2O2) and superoxide anion (O 2-).
These oxidative moieties can cause tremendous tissue damage leading to mutations or cancer.
The potential toxicity of free radicals is far greater than that of the electrophiles. Cellular
defence mechanisms against free radicals include control imposed by membrane structure,
neutralization by glutathione, control exerted by non-enzymatic antioxidant scavengers such
as vitamins A, E and C and enzymatic inactivation of oxygen derived free radicals.
Generation of reactive metabolites is indicated by modification in enzyme activities,
formation of glutathione conjugates (or mercapturic acids) and depletion in tissue levels of
glutathione. Since the availability of glutathione in the body determine the threshold for
toxic response, thiols (e.g. N-acetyl cysteine) can be used to treat poisoning by drugs such as
paracetamol that yield reactive metabolites.
Table 5.7 lists some of the compounds whose metabolites are tissue reactive.
TABLE 5.7
Compounds and their Metabolic Reaction
that Generate Toxic Intermediates
Compounds Metabolic Pathway Toxicity
Benzo(a)pyrene Aromatic epoxidation Lung cancer
Aflatoxin B1 Olefin epoxidation Hepatic cancer
Thalidomide Hydrolytic cleavage of lactam Teratogenesis
Chlorinated hydrocarbons e.g. CHCl3 Oxidative dehalogenation Nephrotoxicity
QUESTIONS
1. Name and define the pharmacokinetic processes involved in the termination of drug action.
2. Why are drugs referred to as xenobiotics?
3. How does biotransformation of a drug differ from its chemical instability?
4. What will happen if a lipophilic drug that is absorbed into the systemic circulation is not metabolised?
5. What is the major function of metabolic reactions? What would be the consequence if biotransformation of
a drug leads to generation of a less soluble metabolite?
6. What are soft drugs? Why are they considered safe (w.r.t. the metabolites formed) and have short half-
lives?
7. What are the various sites of drug metabolism in the body? Why is liver considered the major site for such
a process?
8. Depending upon the relative activity of the metabolites formed, quote with examples the various end
products of biotransformation processes.
9. On what category of drugs do the microsomal and non-microsomal (soluble) enzymes act?
10. What are the characteristics of microsomal enzymes?
11. Classify the chemical pathways of drug metabolism.
12. Which metabolic reactions are considered phase III reactions?
13. Why are phase I reactions called as functionalisation reactions?
14. Why are oxidative reactions predominant in comparison to other phase I reactions?
15. Explain why the oxidative enzymes are called by different names —mixed function oxidases,
monooxygenases and hydroxylases.
16. How was the name cytochrome P-450 derived? Why is it considered to be the most important component
of mixed function oxidases?
17. Outline the steps involved in the oxidation of xenobiotics. What is the rate -limiting step in such a process?
18. Unlike aromatic hydroxylation, oxidation of olefins does not generate tissue reactive metabolites. Explain.
19. Why are secondary and tertiary alcohols resistant to oxidation?
20. Why is N-dealkylation of tertiary nitrogen rapid in comparison to that of secon dary nitrogen?
21. N-dealkylation of t-butyl group is not possible. Why?
22. Explain the analogy and distinction between N-dealkylation and oxidative deamination reactions.
23. What is the reason for hepatotoxicity of paracetamol, an otherwise safe drug, when consumed in large
doses? Why is it that the tissue at the greatest risk for toxicity is liver when a tissue reactive metabolite is
generated?
24. Cite examples of O-dealkylation reactions that yield active metabolites.
25. Why is it that drugs containing primary alcohol groups are rare?
26. Justify the statement - bioreductions are one-half of reversible reactions. Explain why such reactions may
prolong the drug action.
27. What is meant by true reversible and apparent reversible reactions?
28. In what respects the hydrolytic reactions differ from oxidative and reductive reactions?
29. Why does hydrolysis of esters with one large and one small moiety leads to metabolites that retain much of
their activity?
30. Phase II metabolic reactions are true detoxication reactions. Explain.
31. List the characteristics of moieties transferred to the substrate in conjugation reactions. Why are such
reactions capacity-limited?
32. What are the outstanding characteristics of conjugation reactions?
33. The molecular weight of the conjugate is important in dictating its route of excretion. Explain.
34. Explain why glucuronidation is the commonest and most important of all phase II reactions.
35. What is the similarity between glucuronidation, sulphation and methylation reactions? How does
conjugation with amino acids differ from them?
36. What aspect of conjugation with amino acids can be put to diagnostic use?
37. Why is it that glucuronidation can take place in most body tissues?
38. The type of conjugation reaction a drug/metabolite undergoes determines its route of excretion. Comment.
39. What is the special significance of glutathione conjugation in comparison to other phase II reactions? Why
not such a reaction requires initial activation of
coenzyme or the substrate? 155/413
40. Glutathione conjugates are not detectable in urine. Why?

41. How does acetylation reaction differ from conjugation with amino acids? What class of drugs undergo such
a reaction?
42. In what respects methylation reaction differ from conventional phase II reactions? What is the biochemical
importance of such a reaction?
43. Why is methylation reaction considered as intermediate of phase I and phase II reactions?
44. How is cyanide inactivated in the body?
45. What are the various methods for studying drug metabolism?
46. What are the possible mechanisms of enzyme induction and enzyme inhibition by xenobiotics? What are
their consequences? Why is enzyme inhibition considered more dangerous than enzyme induction?
47. Explain the mechanism responsible for warfarin toxicity due to phenylbutazone co-administration.
48. What is the interesting phenomenon observed with acetylation reactions in human race?
49. Define pharmacogenetics. What is the major cause of intersubject variability in drug response?
50. A drug eliminated primarily by hepatic biotransformation shows greater intersubject variability than those
eliminated by urinary excretion. Explain.
51. To what factors are the sex related differences in drug metabolism attributed?
52. Why do children require large mg/Kg doses of some drugs in comparison to adults?
53. Neonates are at greater risk from drug intoxication than infants and children. Explain?
54. How does diet influence drug metabolism?
55. Define chronokinetics. What factors govern the diurnal variations in drug metabolism?
56. Define toxicological activation. Classify tissue reactive metabolites and explain how they are generated.
57. What mechanisms are involved in carcinogenesis or tissue toxicity with electrophiles and free radicals?
58. What is the biochemical indication of generation of tissue reactive metabolites?
59. What is the body’s defence in inactivating potential carcinogens? How can dietary habits prevent tissue
toxicity?
60. What are the various methods for the study of drug biotransformation?
61. Outline metabolic pathways, with structures, for following drugs:
a. Diazepam
b. Ibuprofen
c. Lidocaine
d. Hexobarbital
6
Excretion of Drugs
Drugs and/or their metabolites are removed from the body by excretion. Excretion is defined
as the process whereby drugs and/or their metabolites are irreversibly transferred from
internal to external environment. Excretion of unchanged or intact drug is important in the
termination of its pharmacological action. The principal organs of excretion are kidneys.
Excretion of drug by kidneys is called as renal excretion. Excretion by organs other than
kidneys such as lungs, biliary system, intestine, salivary glands and sweat glands is known as
nonrenal excretion.
RENAL EXCRETION OF DRUGS

Almost all drugs and their metabolites are excreted by the kidneys to some extent or the
other. Some drugs such as gentamicin are exclusively eliminated by renal route only.
Agents that are excreted in urine are –
1. Water-soluble.
2. Non-volatile.
3. Small in molecular size (less than 500 Daltons).
4. The ones that are metabolised slowly.
The basic functional unit of kidney involved in excretion is the nephron. Each kidney
comprises of one million nephrons. Each nephron is made up of the glomerulus, the
proximal tubule, the loop of Henle, the distal tubule and the collecting tubule.
The principal processes that determine the urinary excretion of a drug are –
1. Glomerular filtration.
2. Active tubular secretion.
3. Active or passive tubular reabsorption.
These processes are depicted in Fig.6.1.
Fig. 6.1 A simplified diagram illustrating processes involved in the urinary excretion of
drugs
Glomerular filtration and active tubular secretion tend to increase the concentration of
drugs in lumen and hence facilitate excretion whereas tubular reabsorption decreases it and
prevents the movement of drug out of the body. Thus, the rate of excretion can be given by
equation:
Rate of Excretion = Rate of Filtration + Rate of Secretion – Rate of Reabsoprtion (6.1)
Glomerular Filtration
Glomerular filtration is a non-selective, unidirectional process whereby most compounds,
ionised or unionised, are filtered except those that are bound to plasma proteins or blood cells
and thus behave as macromolecules. The glomerulus also acts as a negatively charged
selective barrier promoting retention of anionic compounds. The driving force for filtration
through the glomerulus is the hydrostatic pressure of the blood flowing in the capillaries. Out
of the 25% of cardiac output or 1.2 litres of blood/min that goes to the kidneys via renal
artery, only 10% or 120 to 130 ml/min is filtered through the glomeruli, the rate being called
as the glomerular filtration rate (GFR). Though some 180 litres of protein and cell free
ultrafiltrate pass through the glomeruli each day, only about 1.5 litres is excreted as urine, the
remainder being reabsorbed from the tubules.
The GFR can be determined by an agent that is excreted exclusively by filtration and is
neither secreted nor reabsorbed in the tubules. The excretion rate value of such an agent is
120 to 130 ml/min. Creatinine, inulin, mannitol and sodium thiosulphate are used to estimate
GFR of which the former two are widely used to estimate renal function.
Active Tubular Secretion

It is a carrier-mediated process which requires energy for transportation of compounds
against the concentration gradient. The system is capacity-limited and saturable. Two active
tubular secretion mechanisms have been identified:
1. System for secretion of organic acids/anions like penicillins, salicylates,
glucuronides, sulphates, etc. It is the same system by which endogenous acids such as
uric acid are secreted.
2. System for secretion of organic bases/cations like morphine, mecamylamine,

hexamethonium and endogenous amines such as catecholamines, choline, histamine,
etc.
Both the systems are relatively non-selective and independent of each other but both can
be bidirectional i.e. agents may both be secreted as well as reabsorbed actively, for example,
uric acid.
Active secretion is unaffected by changes in pH and protein binding since the bound drug
rapidly dissociates the moment the unbound drug gets excreted. But in contrast to glomerular
filtration, it is dependent upon renal blood flow. Drugs undergoing active secretion have
excretion rate values greater than the normal GFR value of 130 ml/min; for example,
penicillin has renal clearance value of 500 ml/min. Such a high value is indicative of both
glomerular filtration as well as tubular secretion.
Agents that are used to measure active tubular secretion are the ones that are filtered as
well as secreted to such an extent that they are removed from the blood in a single pass
through the kidneys i.e. their clearance reflects the renal plasma flow rate which is 600 to 700
ml/min. Para amino hippuric acid (PAH), a highly polar agent and iodopyracet are used to
determine active secretion. Active secretion occurs predominantly in the proximal tubule
region of the nephron.
Two structurally similar drugs having similar ionic charge and employing the same
carrier-mediated process for excretion enter into competition. A drug with greater rate of
clearance will retard the excretion of the other drug with which it competes. The half-life of
both the drugs is increased since the total sites for active secretion are limited. This may
result in accumulation of drugs and thus, precipitation of toxicity. However, the principle of
competition can be exploited for therapeutic benefits. An interesting example of this is the
anionic agent probenecid. Probenecid inhibits the active tubular secretion of organic acids
such as penicillins, PAS, PAH, 17-keto steroids, etc. thus increasing their concentration in
plasma by at least two fold. A 50% reduction in penicillin G dose is suggested, especially
when the drug is meant to be consumed in large doses as in gonococcal infections. The
actively secreted and filtered probenecid, if unionised in tubular fluid, is highly lipid soluble
and therefore will get reabsorbed passively. Inhibition of drug secretion by probenecid is
undesirable in case of nitrofurantoin since the latter is used as a urinary tract antiseptic
(organic bases can also interfere with tubular secretion of cationic drugs but are not in
therapeutic use). While inhibiting the active secretion of anionic drugs on one hand,
probenecid is known to suppress the carrier-mediated reabsorption of the endogenous
metabolite, uric acid and is thus of therapeutic value as a uricosuric agent in the treatment of
gout. Just as probenicid is a competitive inhibitor of organic anion transport, cimetidine is a
competitive inhibitor of organic cation transport.
Tubular Reabsorption
Tubular reabsorption occurs after the glomerular filtration of drugs. It takes place all along
the renal tubule. Reabsorption of a drug is indicated when the excretion rate values are less
than the GFR of 130 ml/min. An agent such as glucose that is completely reabsorbed after
filtration has a clearance value of zero. Contrary to tubular secretion, reabsorption results in
an increase in the half-life of a drug .
Tubular reabsorption can either be an:
1. Active process, or
2. Passive process.
Active tubular reabsorption is commonly seen with high threshold endogenous
substances or nutrients that the body needs to conserve such as electrolytes, glucose,
vitamins, amino acids, etc. Uric acid is also actively reabsorbed (inhibited by the uricosuric
agents). Very few drugs are known to undergo reabsorption actively e.g. oxopurinol.
Passive tubular reabsorption is common for a large number of exogenous substances
including drugs. The driving force for such a process i.e. the concentration gradient is
established by the back diffusion or reabsorption of water along with sodium and other
inorganic ions. Understandably, if a drug is neither secreted nor reabsorbed, its concentration
in the urine will be 100 times that of free drug in plasma due to water reabsorption since less
than 1% of glomerular filtrate is excreted as urine.
The primary determinant in the passive reabsorption of drugs is their lipophilicity.
Lipophilic substances are extensively reabsorbed while polar molecules are not. Since a
majority of drugs are weak electrolytes (weak acids or weak bases), diffusion of such agents
through the lipoidal tubular membrane depend upon the degree of ionisation which in turn
depends on three factors:
1. pH of the urine.
2. pKa of the drug.
3. Urine flow rate.
Urine pH: It is an important factor in the sense that it is not constant like the plasma pH
but varies between 4.5 to 7.5, the two extremes. Thus, a large pH gradient may exist between
urine and plasma.
The pH of the urine is dependent upon diet, drug intake and pathophysiology of the
patient. Food rich in carbohydrates result in higher urinary pH whereas proteins lower it.
Drugs such as acetazolamide and antacids such as sodium bicarbonate produce alkaline urine
while ascorbic acid makes it acidic. More significant alteration in urine pH is brought about
by i.v. infusion of solutions of sodium bicarbonate and ammonium chloride which are used in
the treatment of acid-base imbalance. Respiratory and metabolic acidosis and alkalosis result
in acidification and alkalinisation of the urine respectively.
The relative amount of ionised and unionised drug in the urine at a particular pH and the
percent of drug ionised at this pH can be computed from the Henderson-Hasselbach
equations:
for weak acids,
Ionised Drug
pH pKa log (6.2)
Unionised Drug
pH - pK a
10 (6.3)
% Drug Ionised pH - pK a
100
1 10
for weak bases,
Unionised Drug
pH pKa log (6.4)
Ionised Drug
10 pK a - pH (6.5)
% Drug Ionised pK a - pH
100
1 10
The concentration ratio R of the drug in urine to that in plasma (U : P) can be given by
equations derived by Shore et al:
for weak acids,
pH urine - pK a
U 1 10
Ra (6.6)
pH plasma - pK a
P 1 10
for weak bases,
pK a - pH urine
Rb U 1 10 pK - pH (6.7)
P 1 10 a plasma
Note : Th e above equati ons fr om 6.2 to 6.7 are identical to equati ons 2.10 to 2.15 of chapter 2.
The relationship between drug pK a, urine pH, degree of ionisation and renal clearance is
illustrated in Table 6.1. Table 6.1 shows percent drug ionised and renal clearance values (in
ml/min) of several acidic and basic drugs at various values of urine pH, assuming that the
drug does not bind to plasma proteins, urine flow of 1 ml/min, plasma pH 7.4 and that
equilibrium is achieved by diffusion of unionised drug only. The renal clearance values ClR
are computed by use of equation 6.8.
TABLE 6.1
Percent Drug Ionised and Renal Clearance Values (in ml/min)
Drugs pKa Nature Urine pH Values
4.5 6.3 7.5
% Ionised ClR % Ionised ClR % Ionised ClR
Acids
A 2.0 Strong 99.7 0.001 99.99 0.8 100.0 1.26
B 6.0 Weak 3.0 0.04 66.6 0.115 97.0 1.25
C 10.0 V. Weak 0.0 0.99 0.02 0.99 0.3 1.0
Bases
D 12.0 Strong 100.0 794.3 100.0 12.6 99.99 0.79
E 8.0 Weak 99.9 635.2 98.0 10.26 76.0 0.83
V. Weak 24.0 1.32 0.0 1.0 0.0 1.0
F 4.0
U
ClR Urine flow rate (6.8)
P
Drug pKa: The significance of pH dependent excretion for any particular compound is
greatly dependent upon its pKa and lipid solubility. A characteristic of drugs, pKa values
govern the degree of ionisation at a particular pH. A polar and ionised drug will be poorly
reabsorbed passively and excreted rapidly ( see Table 6.1). Reabsorption is also affected by
the lipid solubility of drug; an ionised but lipophilic drug will be reabsorbed while an
unionised but polar one will be excreted.
The combined effect of urine pH and drug pK a and lipid solubility on reabsorption of
drugs is summarized as follows:
1. An acidic drug such as penicillin or a basic drug such as gentamicin which is polar
in its unionised form, is not reabsorbed passively, irrespective of the extent of
ionisation in urine. Excretion of such drugs is independent of pH of urine and its
flow rate. Their rate of excretion is the sum of rate of filtration and rate of active
secretion.
2. Very weakly acidic, nonpolar drugs (pK a > 8.0) such as phenytoin or very weakly
basic, nonpolar drugs (pKa < 6.0) such as propoxyphene are mostly unionised
throughout the entire range of urine pH and are therefore extensively reabsorbed
passively at all values of urine pH. The rate of excretion of such drugs is always
low and insensitive to urine pH.
3. A strongly acidic drug (pKa < 2.0) such as cromoglycic acid or a strongly basic
drug (pKa > 12.0) such as guanethidine, is completely ionised at all values of urine
pH and are, therefore, not reabsorbed. Their rate of excretion is always high and
insensitive to pH of urine.
4. Only for an acidic drug in the pK range 3.0 to 8.0 (e.g. several NSAIDs) and for a
basic drug in the pKa range a6.0 to 12.0 (e.g. morphine analogs, tricyclic
antidepressants, etc.) the extent of reabsorption is greatly dependent upon urine pH
and varies from negligible to almost complete; for example, the amount of
dexamphetamine excreted in the urine varies from 3 to 55% of the administered
dose as the urine pH varies from 8.0 to 5.0. Fig. 6.2 illustrates the influence of
urine pH on drug excretion.
Fig. 6.2. Influence of urinary pH on excretion of weakly acidic and weakly basic drugs. Bold arrows
indicate that the process is predominant.
The toxicity due to overdosage of drugs whose excretion is sensitive to pH change can be
treated by acidification or alkalinisation of the urine with ammonium chloride or sodium
bicarbonate respectively. Thus, crystalluria caused by precipitation of sulphonamides in the
renal tubules and subsequent kidney damage can be overcome by alkalinising the urine.
Excretion of basic drugs can be promoted by acidification of urine. The therapeutic activity
of the urinary antiseptic hexamine also depends on the urine pH. It is not converted to active
form i.e. formaldehyde unless the urine is acidic.
Urine Flow Rate: In addition to urine pH and drug pK a, the rate of urine flow also
influences the extent of reabsorption. Polar drugs whose excretion is independent of urine
pH and are not reabsorbed, are unaffected by urine flow rate. An increase in urine flow in
case of such drugs will only produce more dilute urine. Only those drugs whose reabsorption
is pH-sensitive, for example, weak acids and weak bases, show dependence on urine flow
rate. For such agents, reabsorption is inversely proportional to the urinary flow. These
compounds can be divided into two types based on their extent of reabsorption in relation to
that of water:
1. Drugs which are reabsorbed to an extent equal to or greater than the reabsorption of
water e.g. phenobarbital. In such cases, the relationship between renal clearance and
urinary excretion is linear.
2. Drugs which are reabsorbed to an extent lower than the reabsorption of water e.g.
theophylline and many more drugs. In these cases, the relationship between renal
clearance and urinary excretion is convex curvilinear.
Urine flow rate can be increased by forced diuresis. Forced diuresis is the increase in
urine flow induced by large fluid intake or 162/413
administration of mannitol or other diuretics. The
principle can be used in an intoxicated person to remove excessive drug by promoting its
excretion and decreasing the time for reabsorption.
Both urine pH control and forced diuresis can be used to treat toxicity with drug overdose
when –
1. Urinary excretion is the major route for elimination of drug.
2. The drug is extensively reabsorbed passively from the renal tubules.
3. The reabsorption is sensitive to urine pH (and urine flow rate).
Apart from the foregoing discussion on the passive reabsorption of drugs, the process is
also important in the reabsorption of low threshold substances such as urea, certain
phosphates and sulphates, etc.
CONCEPT OF CLEARANCE
The clearance concept was first introduced to describe renal excretion of endogenous
compounds in order to measure the kidney function. The term is now applied to all organs
involved in drug elimination such as liver, lungs, the biliary system, etc. and referred to as
hepatic clearance, pulmonary clearance, biliary clearance and so on. The sum of individual
clearances by all eliminating organs is called as total body clearance or total systemic
clearance. It is sometimes expressed as a sum of renal clearance and nonrenal clearance.
Clearance is defined as the hypothetical volume of body fluids containing drug from
which the drug is removed or cleared completely in a specific period of time . It is expressed
in ml/min and is a constant for any given plasma drug concentration. In comparison to
apparent volume of distribution which relates plasma drug concentration to the amount of
drug in the body, clearance relates plasma concentration to the rate of drug elimination.
Elimination rate
Clearance (Cl) (6.9)
Renal Clearance (ClR): It can be defined as the volume of blood or plasma which is
completely cleared of the unchanged drug by the kidney per unit time . It is expressed
mathematically as:
Rate of urinary excretion
ClR (6.10)
Physiologically speaking, renal clearance is the ratio of “sum of rate of glomerular

filtration and active secretion minus rate of reabsorption” to “plasma drug concentration
C”.
ClR Rate of filtration Rate of secretion- Rate of reabsorption (6.11)

C
TABLE 6.2
Relationship between Renal Clearance Values
and Mechanism of Clearance
Renal Clearance Renal Clearance Mechanism of Renal Clearance Example(s)
(ml/min) Ratio
0 (least value) 0 Drug filtered and reabsorbed completely Glucose
< 130 Above 0, Below 1 Drug filtered and reabsorbed partially Lipophilic drugs
130 (GFR) 1 Drug is filtered only Creatinine, Inulin 163/413
> 130 >1 Drug filtered as well as secreted actively Polar, ionic drugs
650 (Highest value) 5 Clearance equal to renal plasma flow rate Iodopyracet, PAH
The contribution of each of the above physiologic processes in clearing a drug cannot be
determined by direct measurement. It can however be determined by comparing the
clearance values obtained for a drug with that of an agent such as creatinine or inulin which is
cleared by glomerular filtration only. The ratio of these two values is called as renal
clearance ratio or excretion ratio.
ClR of drug
Renal Clearance Ratio (6.12)
ClR of creatinine
Thus, depending upon whether the drug is only filtered, filtered and secreted or filtered
and reabsorbed, the clearance ratio will vary (Table 6.2.). The renal clearance values range
from zero to 650 ml/min and the clearance ratio from zero to five.
FACTORS AFFECTING RENAL EXCRETION

OR RENAL CLEARANCE
Apart from the three physiologic processes that govern the urinary excretion, other factors
influencing renal clearance of drugs and metabolites are:
1. Physicochemical properties of the drug
2. Plasma concentration of the drug
3. Distribution and binding characteristics of the drug
4. Urine pH
5. Blood flow to the kidneys
6. Biological factors
7. Drug interactions
8. Disease states
Physicochemical Properties of the Drug

Important physicochemical factors affecting renal excretion of a drug are - molecular size,
pKa and lipid solubility. The molecular weight of a drug is very critical in its urinary
elimination. An agent of small molecular size can be easily filtered through the glomerulus.
Compounds of weights below 300 Daltons, if water-soluble, are readily excreted by the
kidneys. Drugs in the molecular weight range 300 to 500 Daltons can be excreted both in
urine and bile. Molecules of size greater than 500 Daltons are excreted in urine to a lesser
extent (see table 6.3).
The influence of drug pKa on excretion has already been discussed. Urinary excretion of
an unchanged drug is inversely related to its lipophilicity. This is because, a lipophilic drug
is passively reabsorbed to a large extent.
Stereochemical nature of the drug may also influence renal clearance. If a drug exhibits
stereoselective protein binding then the drug enantiomers would exhibit differential filtration
rates. Active tubular secretion being an active process may also demonstrate stereoselectivity
for some drugs. Indeed, numerous drugs such as chloroquine, disopyramide and terbutaline
have been found to be stereoselectively secreted by the kidneys. Active tubular reabsorption
also demonstrates these effects as in the case of certain endogenous substances such as
glucose and amino acids. Passive reabsorption is unaffected.
Plasma Concentration of the Drug
Glomerular filtration and reabsorption are directly affected by plasma drug concentration
since both are passive processes. A drug that is not bound to plasma proteins and excreted by
filtration only, shows a linear relationship between rate of excretion and plasma drug
concentration. In case of drugs which are secreted or reabsorbed actively, the rate process
increases with an increase in plasma concentration to a point when saturation of carrier
occurs. In case of actively reabsorbed drugs, excretion is negligible at low plasma
concentrations. Such agents are excreted in urine only when their concentration in the
glomerular filtrate exceeds the active reabsorption capacity, e.g. glucose. With drugs that are
actively secreted, the rate of excretion increases with increase in plasma concentration up to a
saturation level. These situations are depicted in Fig. 6.3.
Fig. 6.3. Renal clearance and rate of excretion of a drug in relation to its plasma concentration as
affected by the physiologic processes — filtration, active reabsorption and active
secretion
Distribution and Binding Characteristics of the Drug
Clearance is inversely related to apparent volume of distribution of drugs. A drug with large
Vd is poorly excreted in urine. Drugs restricted to blood compartment have higher excretion
rates.
Drugs that are bound to plasma proteins behave as macromolecules and thus cannot be
filtered through the glomerulus. Only unbound or free drug appear in the glomerular filtrate.
An earlier equation given for renal clearance is:
Urine drug concentration
ClR Urine flow rate (6.8)
Since only free drug can be excreted in the urine, the fraction of drug bound to plasma
proteins is important and can be computed from equation:
Cu
fu (6.13)
C
where, fu = fraction of unbound drug in plasma,
Cu = concentration of unbound drug in plasma, and
C = total plasma concentration of drug.
Thus, equation 6.8 can be written as:
Cl R f . Urine flow rate
u
(6.14)
Drugs extensively bound to proteins have long half-lives because the renal clearance is
small and urine flow rate is just 1 to 2 ml/min. The renal clearance of oxytetracycline which
is 66% unbound is 99 ml/min while that of doxycycline (7% unbound) is just 16 ml/min.
Actively secreted drugs are much less affected by protein binding, e.g. penicillins. The
free fraction of such drugs are filtered as well as secreted actively and dissociation of drug-
protein complex occurs rapidly.
The influence of urine pH on renal clearance has already been discussed.
Blood Flow to the Kidneys

The renal blood flow is important in case of drugs excreted by glomerular filtration only and
those that are actively secreted. In the latter case, increased perfusion increases the contact of
drug with the secretory sites and enhances their elimination. Renal clearance in such
instances is said to be perfusion rate-limited.
Biological Factors
Age, sex, species and strain differences, differences in the genetic make-up, circadian
rhythm, etc. alter drug excretion. Renal excretion is approximately 10% lower in females
than in males. The renal function of newborns is 30 to 40% less in comparison to adults and
attains maturity between 2.5 to 5 months of age. In old age, the GFR is reduced and tubular
function is altered, the excretion of drugs is thus slowed down and half-life is prolonged.
Drug Interactions
Any drug interaction that results in alteration of protein-drug binding characteristics, renal
flood flow, active secretion, urine pH and intrinsic clearance and forced diuresis would alter
renal clearance of a drug.
Alteration in P-D binding: The renal clearance of a drug extensively bound to plasma
proteins is increased after displacement with another drug. An interesting example of
this is gentamicin induced nephrotoxicity by furosemide. Furosemide does not
precipitate this effect by its diuretic effect but by displacing gentamicin from binding
sites. The increased free antibiotic concentration accelerates its renal clearance.
Al ter ation of U r in e pH : Acidification of urine with ammonium chloride, methionine
or ascorbic acid enhances excretion of basic drugs. Alkalinisation of urine with
citrates, tartarates, bicarbonates and carbonic anhydrase inhibitors promote excretion
of acidic drugs.
Competi ti on f or Acti ve Secretion : Phenylbutazone competes with hydroxyhexamide,
the active metabolite of antidiabetic agent acetohexamide, for active secretion and
thus prolongs its action.
Probenicid is a competitive inhibitor of organic anion transport system.
Cimetidine is competitive inhibitor of organic cation transport system.
F orced D iu resis: All diuretics increase elimination of drugs whose renal clearance
gets affected by urine flow rate.
Disease States—Renal Impairment

Renal dysfunction greatly impairs the elimination of drugs especially those that are
primarily excreted by the kidneys. Some of the causes of renal failure are hypertension,
diabetes mellitus, hypovolemia (decreased blood supply to the kidneys), pyelonephritis
(inflammation of kidney due to infections, etc.), nephroallergens (e.g. nephrotoxic serum) and
nephrotoxic agents such as aminoglycosides, phenacetin and heavy metals such as lead and
mercury.
Uraemia, characterized by impaired glomerular filtration and accumulation of fluids and

protein metabolites, also impairs renal clearance of drugs. In both these conditions, the half-
lives of drugs are increased. As a consequence, drug accumulation and toxicity may result.
Determination of renal function is therefore important in such conditions in order to monitor
the dosage regimen.
RENAL FUNCTION AND RENAL FAILURE

Renal function can be determined by measuring the GFR. Both endogenous and exogenous
substances have been used as markers to measure GFR. In order to be useful as a marker,
the agent should entirely get excreted in unchanged form by glomerular filtration only and
should be physiologically and pharmacologically inert . The rate at which these markers are
excreted in urine reflects the GFR and changes in GFR reflects renal dysfunction. Inulin (the
exogenous fructose polysaccharide) and serum creatinine level have been used successfully
for such purposes.
Inulin clearance provides an accurate measure of GFR but has the disadvantage of being
a tedious method. Clinically, creatinine clearance is widely used to assess renal function.
Creatinine is an endogenous amine produced as a result of muscle catabolism. It is
excreted unchanged in the urine by glomerular filtration only. An advantage of this test is
that it can be correlated to the steady-state concentration of creatinine in plasma and needs no
collection of urine. The method involves determination of serum creatinine levels. Since
creatinine production varies with age, weight and gender, different formulae are used to
calculate creatinine clearance from the serum creatinine values.
For Children (between 1 to 20 years),
0.7
0.48 H W
Cl (6.15)
cr
Scr 70
For Adults (above 20 years),
140 - Age W
Males, Clcr (6.16)
72 Scr
140 - Age W
Females, Clcr (6.17)
85 Scr
0.9 . Cl cr of Male
where, Clcr = creatinine clearance in ml/min,
Scr = serum creatinine in mg%,
H = height in cms, and
W = weight in Kg.
Age is measured in years.
A direct method for determining creatinine clearance is determination of the amount of
creatinine excreted in urine in 24 hours (to calculate the rate of creatinine excretion) and the
mean of serum creatinine from blood samples taken just before and immediately after the
urine collection period. Following formula is used:
Rate of creatinine excretion
R
Cl Serum creatinine in mg % (6.18)
The normal creatinine clearance value is 120 to 130 ml/min. A value of 20 to 50 ml/min
denotes moderate renal failure and values below 10 ml/min indicate severe renal impairment.
The renal function, RF is calculated by equation 6.19.
Clcr of patient
RF (6.19)
Cl of a normal person
cr
Dose Adjustment in Renal Failure

Generally speaking, drugs in patients with renal impairment have altered pharmacokinetic
profile. Their renal clearance and elimination rate are reduced, the elimination half-life is
increased and the apparent volume of distribution is altered. Thus, dose must be altered
depending upon the renal function in such patients. However, except for drugs having low
therapeutic indices, the therapeutic range of others is sufficiently large and dosage adjustment
is not essential.
Dosage regimen need not be changed when
The fraction of drug excreted unchanged, f is 0.3, and
u
 The renal function RF is 0.7 of normal.
The above generalization is based on the assumption that the metabolites are inactive and
binding characteristics and drug availability are unaltered and so is the renal function in
kidney failure conditions. When the fu value approaches unity and RF approaches zero,
elimination is extremely slowed down and dosing should be reduced drastically. The
significance of nonrenal clearance increases in such conditions.
The required dose in patients with renal impairment can be calculated by the simple
formula:
Drug dose in renal impairment Normal dose x RF (6.20)
The dosing interval in hours can be computed from the following equation:
Normal interval in hours
Dosing interval (6.21)
RF
When the drug is eliminated both by renal and nonrenal mechanisms, the dose to be
administered in patients with renal failure is obtained from equation 6.22.
Drug dose Normal dose RF x Fraction excreted in urine Fraction eliminated nonrenally (6.22)
Dialysis and Haemoperfusion
In severe renal failure, the patients are put on dialysis to remove toxic waste products and
drugs and their metabolites which accumulate in the body.
Dialysis is a process in which easily diffusible substances are separated from poorly
diffusible ones by the use of semipermeable membrane.
There are two procedures for dialysis:
1. Peritoneal dialysis, and
2. Haemodialysis.
In the former, the semipermeable membrane is the natural membrane of the peritoneal
cavity. The method involves introduction of the dialysate fluid into the abdomen by inserting
the catheter and draining and discarding the same after a certain period of time. In
haemodialysis, the semipermeable membrane is an artificial membrane. Since the system is
outside the body, it is also called as extracorporeal dialysis. The equipment is referred to as
artificial kidney or haemodialyser. Apart from the removal of toxic waste from the body,
haemodialysis is also useful in the treatment of overdose or poisoning situations where rapid
removal of drug becomes necessary to save the life of the patient. Patients of kidney failure
require dialysis of blood every 2 days. Each treatment period lasts for 3 to 4 hours.
Factors that govern the removal of substances by haemodialysis are:
Water Solubility: Only water-soluble substances are dialyzed; lipid soluble drugs such
as glutethimide cannot be removed by dialysis.
Molecular Weight: Molecules with size less than 500 Daltons are dialyzed easily, e.g.
many unbound drugs; drugs having large molecular weight such as vancomycin cannot
be dialyzed.
Protein Binding: Drugs bound to plasma proteins or blood cells cannot be dialyzed
since dialysis is a passive diffusion process.
Volume of Distribution: Drugs with large volume of distribution are extensively
distributed throughout the body and therefore less easily removed by dialysis, e.g.
digoxin.
The Fig. 6.4 shows schematic representation of haemodialysis.
Fig. 6.4. Diagrammatic representation of a haemodialyser. The blood and the dialysate flow
counter-currently.
The dialyzing fluid contains sodium, potassium, calcium, chloride and acetate ions, and
dextrose and other constituents in the same concentration as that in plasma. The unwanted
metabolites in the patient’s blood such as urea, uric acid, creatinine, etc. diffuse into the
dialysate until equilibrium. Since the volume of dialysate is much greater than that of blood
and since it is replenished with fresh fluid from time to time, almost complete removal of
unwanted substances from the blood is possible. Drugs which can be removed by
haemodialysis are barbiturates, aminoglycosides, chloral hydrate, lithium, etc.
The rate at which a drug is removed by the dialyser depends upon the flow rate of blood to
the machine and its performance. The term dialysance, also called as dialysis clearance, is
used to express the ability of machine to clear the drug from blood. It is defined in a manner
similar to clearance by equation:
Q C in - C out
Cl d (6.23)
C in
where, Cld = dialysance or dialysis clearance

Q = blood flow rate to dialyser
Cin = concentration of drug in blood entering the dialyser
C out= concentration of drug in blood leaving the dialyser
In haemoperfusion, the blood is passed through a bed of adsorbent such as charcoal or

resin; as a result, drugs and other unwanted molecules are adsorbed while plasma proteins are
not. The method is also useful in treating severe drug intoxication. The limitation of
haemoperfusion is that it also removes the blood platelets, white cells and endogenous
steroids.
NON-RENAL ROUTES OF DRUG EXCRETION

Drugs and their metabolites may also be excreted by routes other than the renal route, called
as the extrarenal or nonrenal routes of drug excretion. The various such excretion
processes are:
1. Biliary excretion
2. Pulmonary excretion
3. Salivary excretion
4. Mammary excretion
5. Skin/dermal excretion
6. Gastrointestinal excretion
7. Genital excretion
Biliary Excretion of Drugs—Enterohepatic Cycling

The hepatic cells lining the bile canaliculi produce bile. The production and secretion of bile
are active processes. The bile secreted from liver, after storage in the gall bladder, is secreted
in the duodenum. In humans, the bile flow rate is a steady 0.5 to 1 ml/min. Bile is important
in the digestion and absorption of fats. Almost 90% of the secreted bile acids are reabsorbed
from the intestine and transported back to the liver for re-secretion. The rest is excreted in
faeces.
Being an active process, bile secretion is capacity-limited and subject to saturation. The
process is exactly analogous to active renal secretion. Different transport mechanisms exist
for the secretion of organic anions, cations and neutral polar compounds. A drug, whose
biliary concentration is less than that in plasma, has a small biliary clearance and vice versa.
In some instances, the bile to plasma concentration ratio of drug can approach 1000 in which
cases, the biliary clearance can be as high as 500 ml/min or more.
Compounds that are excreted in bile have been classified into 3 categories on the basis of
their bile/plasma concentration ratios:
Group A compounds whose ratio is approximately 1, e.g. sodium, potassium and
chloride ions and glucose.
Group B compounds whose ratio is >1, usually from 10 to 1000, e.g. bile salts, bilirubin
glucuronide, creatinine, sulphobromophthalein conjugates, etc.
Group C compounds with ratio < 1, e.g. sucrose, inulin, phosphates, phospholipids and
mucoproteins.
Drugs can fall in any of the above three categories.
Several factors influence secretion of drugs in bile –
1. Physicochemical Properties of the Drug

The most important factor governing the excretion of drugs in bile is their molecular
weight. Its influence on biliary excretion is summarized in the Table 6.3.
Polarity is the other physicochemical property of drug influencing biliary excretion.
Greater the polarity, better the excretion. Thus, metabolites are more excreted in bile than the
parent drugs because of their increased polarity. The molecular weight threshold for biliary
excretion of drugs is also dependent upon its polarity. A threshold of 300 Daltons and greater
than 300 Daltons is necessary for organic cations (e.g. quaternaries) and organic anions
respectively. Nonionic compounds should also be highly polar for biliary excretion, e.g.
cardiac glycosides.
TABLE 6.3
Influence of Molecular Weight on Excretion Behaviour of Drugs
Molecular Weight of Excretion Pattern
Drug/Metabolite
Below 300 Daltons Excreted mainly in urine; less than 5% is excreted in bile
Above 500 Daltons Excreted mainly in bile; less than 5% is excreted in urine
Between 300 to 500 Daltons Excreted both in urine and in bile; a decrease in one excretory route is
compensated by excretion through the other route
2. Nature of Biotransformation Process
A metabolic
drug reactionexcretion
favours biliary that greatly
of increases the polarityThus,
the metabolite. as wellphase
as theIImolecular weight
reactions, of
mainly
glucuronidation and conjugation with glutathione, result in metabolites with increased
tendency for biliary excretion (increase the molecular weight by 176 and 300 Daltons
respectively). Examples of drugs excreted in the bile as glucuronides are morphine,
chloramphenicol and indomethacin. Stilbestrol glucuronide is almost entirely excreted in
bile. Glutathione conjugates are exclusively excreted via bile and are not observable in the
urine because of their large molecular size. Conjugation with amino acids and acetylation
and methylation reactions do not result in metabolites with greatly increased molecular
weight and therefore have little influence on biliary excretion of xenobiotics. For a drug to
be excreted unchanged in the bile, it must have a highly polar functional group such as -
COOH (cromoglycic acid), -SO3H (amaranth), -NH4+ (oxyphenonium), etc. Clomiphene
citrate, an ovulation inducer, is almost completely removed from the body via
biliary excretion.
3. Other Factors
Miscellaneous factors influencing biliary excretion of drugs include sex and species
differences, protein-drug binding, disease states, drug interactions, etc.
Substances having high molecular weight show good excretion in bile in case of rats,
dogs, and hen and poor excretion in rabbits, guinea pigs and monkeys. The route is more
important for the excretion of drugs in laboratory animals than in man. Protein bound drugs
can
flowalso be is
rate excreted in the
reduced bile since
thereby the secretion
decreasing is an
biliary active process.
excretion In cholestasis,
of drugs. Agents suchthe bile
as
phenobarbital stimulate biliary excretion of drugs, firstly, by enhancing the rate of
glucuronidation, and secondly, by promoting bile flow. The route of drug administration also
influences biliary drug excretion. Orally administered drugs which during absorption process
go to the liver, are excreted more in bile in comparison to parenterally administered drugs.
Food also has a direct influence on biliary excretion of drugs. Protein and fat rich food
increase bile flow.
The efficacy of drug excretion by the biliary system and hepatic function can be tested by
an agent that is exclusively and completely eliminated unchanged in the bile, e.g.
sulphobromophthalein. This marker is excreted within half an hour in the intestine when the
hepatic function is normal. A delay in its excretion is indicative of hepatic and biliary
malfunction. The marker is also useful in
determining hepatic blood flow rate. 171/413
The ability of liver to excrete the drug in the bile is expressed by biliary clearance
(equation 6.24).
Biliary clearance rate
Biliary clearance (6.24a)
Bile flow x Biliary drug clearance (6.24b)

Just as the major portion of bile salts excreted in intestine is reabsorbed, several drugs which
are excreted unchanged in bile are also absorbed back into the circulation. Some drugs which
are excreted as glucuronides or as glutathione conjugates are hydrolysed by the intestinal or
bacterial enzymes to the parent drugs which are then reabsorbed. The reabsorbed drugs are
again carried to the liver for resecretion via bile into the intestine. This phenomenon of drug
cycling between the intestine and the liver is called as enterohepatic cycling or
enterohepatic circulation of drugs (Fig. 6.5.).
Fig. 6.5. Enterohepatic cycling of drugs

Such a recycling process continues until the drug is biotransformed in the liver or is
excreted in the urine or both. The drugs which are secreted via bile in the intestine but not
reabsorbed, are finally excreted in the faeces.
Enterohepatic circulation is important in the conservation of important endogenous
substances such as vitamin B 12, vitamin D3, folic acid, several steroid hormones and bile
salts. The process results in prolongation of half-lives of several drugs (e.g. carbenoxolone)
which are extensively excreted in bile. The half-life of agents such as DDT, which are
resistant to biotransformation and are highly lipophilic, may increase to several days due to
such a recycling phenomenon. The prolonged therapeutic activity of oral contraceptives
(upto 12 hours) is also due to such a recirculation. Other examples of drugs undergoing
enterohepatic circulation are cardiac glycosides, rifampicin, chlorpromazine and
indomethacin. Drug interactions affecting enterohepatic cycling occur when agents such as
antibiotics kill the intestinal microflora and thus retard hydrolysis of drug conjugates and
their subsequent reabsorption, or the unabsorbable ion exchange resins such as
cholestyramine which bind strongly to the acidic and neutral drugs (e.g. digitoxin) and thus
prevent their reabsorption. The principle of adsorption onto the resins in the GIT can
however be used to treat pesticide poisoning by promoting their faecal excretion.
Biliary excretion of drugs can be assessed by giving the drugs parenterally and detecting
their presence in faeces. This also rules out the doubt about the incomplete absorption of
such drugs when given orally and observed in faeces.
Pulmonary Excretion
Gaseous and volatile substances such as the general anaesthetics (e.g. halothane) are absorbed
through the lungs by simple diffusion. Similarly, their excretion by diffusion into the expired
air is possible. Factors influencing pulmonary excretion of a drug include pulmonary blood
flow, rate of respiration, solubility of the volatile substance, etc. Gaseous anaesthetics such
as nitrous oxide which are not very soluble in blood are excreted rapidly. Generally intact
gaseous drugs are excreted but metabolites are not. Compounds like alcohol which have high
solubility in blood and tissues are excreted slowly by the lungs. The principle involved in the
pulmonary excretion of benzene and halobenzenes is analogous to that of steam distillation.
Salivary Excretion
Excretion of drugs in saliva is also a passive diffusion process and therefore predictable on
the basis of pH-partition hypothesis. The pH of saliva varies from 5.8 to 8.4. The mean
salivary pH in man is 6.4. Unionised, lipid soluble drugs at this pH are excreted passively in
the saliva. Equations analogous to 6.3, 6.5, 6.6 and 6.7 can be written for drugs with known
pKa at the salivary pH and percent ionisation and saliva/plasma drug concentration ratio
(S/P) can be computed.
for weak acids,
pHsaliva - pK a
S 1 10 f plasma
Ra pH plasma - pK a
x (6.25)
P 1 10 f saliva
for weak bases,

pKa - pHsaliva
S 1 10 f plasma
Rb pKa - pHplasma
x (6.26)
P 1 10 f saliva
where, fplasma and fsaliva are free drug fractions in plasma and in saliva respectively.
The S/P ratios have been found to be less than 1 for weak acids and greater than 1 for
weak bases i.e. basic drugs are excreted more in saliva as compared to acidic drugs. The
salivary concentration of some drugs reaches as high as 0.1%. Since the S/P ratio is fairly
constant for several drugs, their blood concentration can be determined by detecting the
amount of drug excreted in saliva, e.g. caffeine, theophylline, phenytoin, carbamazepine, etc.
Some drugs are actively secreted in saliva, e.g. lithium, the concentration of which is
sometimes 2 to 3 times that in plasma. Penicillin and phenytoin are also actively secreted in
saliva.
Fig. 6.6. Salivary cycling of drugs

The bitter after taste in the mouth of a patient on medication is an indication of drug
excretion in saliva. In few instances, the 173/413
process is responsible for side effects such as black
hairy tongue in patients receiving antibiotics, gingival hyperplasia due to phenytoin, etc.
Some basic drugs inhibit saliva secretion and are responsible for dryness of mouth.
Drugs excreted in saliva can undergo cycling in a fashion similar to enterohepatic cycling,
e.g. sulphonamides, antibiotics, clonidine, etc. (Fig. 6.6.).
Mammary Excretion
Excretion of a drug in milk is important since it can gain entry into the breast-feeding infant.
Milk consists of lactic secretions originating from the extracellular fluid and is rich in fats
and proteins. About 0.5 to 1 litre/day of milk is secreted in lactating mothers
Excretion of drugs in milk is a passive process and is dependent upon pH-partition
behaviour, molecular weight, lipid solubility and degree of ionisation. The pH of milk varies
from 6.4 to 7.6 with a mean pH of 7.0. Free, unionised, lipid soluble drugs diffuse into the
mammary alveolar cells passively. The extent of drug excretion in milk can be determined
from milk/plasma drug concentration ratio (M/P). Since milk is acidic in comparison to
plasma, as in the case of saliva, weakly basic drugs concentrate more in milk and have M/P
ratio greater than 1. The opposite is true for weakly acidic drugs. It has been shown that for
acidic drugs, excretion in milk is inversely related to the molecular weight and partition
coefficient and that for basic drugs, is inversely related to the degree of ionisation and
partition coefficient. Drugs extensively bound to plasma proteins, e.g. diazepam, are less
secreted in milk. Since milk contains proteins, drugs excreted in milk can bind to it. The
amount of drug excreted in milk is generally less than 1% and the fraction consumed by the
infant is too less to reach therapeutic or toxic levels. But some potent drugs such as
barbiturates, morphine and ergotamine may induce toxicity in infants. Some examples of
toxicity to breast-fed infants owing to excretion of drug in milk are –
Chloramphenicol: Possible bone marrow suppression.
Diazepam: Accumulation and sedation.
Heroin: Prolonged neonatal dependence.
Methadone: Possible withdrawal syndrome if breast-feeding is stopped suddenly.
Propylthiouracil: Suppression of thyroid function.
Tetracycline: Permanent staining of infant teeth.
Wherever possible, nursing mothers should avoid drugs. If medication is unavoidable, the
infant should be bottle-fed.
Skin Excretion
Drugs excreted through the skin via sweat also follow pH-partition hypothesis. Passive
excretion of drugs and their metabolites through skin is responsible to some extent for the
urticaria and dermatitis and other hypersensitivity reactions. Compounds such as benzoic
acid, salicylic acid, alcohol and antipyrine and heavy metals like lead, mercury and arsenic
are excreted in sweat.
Gastrointestinal Excretion
Excretion of drugs into the GIT usually occurs after parenteral administration when the
concentration gradient for passive diffusion is favourable. The process is reverse of GI
absorption of drugs. Water soluble and ionised form of weakly acidic and basic drugs is
excreted in the GIT, e.g. nicotine and quinine are excreted in stomach. Orally administered
drugs can also be absorbed and excreted in the GIT. Drugs excreted in the GIT are
reabsorbed into the systemic circulation and undergo recycling.
Genital Excretion 174/413
Reproductive tract and genital secretions may contain the excreted drugs. Some drugs have
been detected in semen.
Drugs can also get excreted via the lachrymal fluid.
A summary of drugs excreted by various routes is given in Table 6.4.
TABLE 6.4
Excretion Pathways, Transport Mechanisms and Drugs Excreted
Excretory Route Mechanism Drugs Excreted
Urine Glomerular filtration, active secretion, Free, hydrophilic, unchanged

active/passive reabsorption drugs/metabolites/conjugates of MW < 500
Bile Active secretion Hydrophilic, unchanged drugs/metabolites/conjugates of
MW 500
Lung Passive diffusion Gaseous and volatile, blood and tissue insoluble drugs
Saliva Passive diffusion, active transport Free, unionised, lipophilic drugs, some polar drugs
Milk Passive diffusion Free, unionised, lipophilic drugs (generally basic)
Sweat Passive diffusion Free, unionised, lipophilic drugs
Intestine Passive diffusion Water-soluble, ionised drugs
QUESTIONS
1. What physicochemical properties of a drug/metabolite govern its excretion in urine?
2. Name the principal processes involved in urinary excretion of drugs. How do the excretion rate
values correlate with the contribution of each of these processes in drug excretion? Quote with
examples the markers used to estimate these parameters.
3. Secretion of an exogenous compound in tubules is an active process but reabsorption is
generally a passive phenomenon. Explain?
4. Unlike glomerular filtration, active secretion of a drug is unaffected by protein binding.
Explain.
5. How can the principle of competitive inhibition of tubular secretion be put to therapeutic use?
6. How is the driving force for passive reabsorption of drugs from tubules established?
7. Discuss the factors influencing passive reabsorption of drugs from tubules.
8. Based on the extent of ionisation or pK a of a drug, reabsorption of which drugs is affected and
which remain unaffected by a change in urine pH?
9. How can the principle of urine pH control and forced diuresis be utilized to treat drug
intoxication? To which drugs is such an approach applicable?
10. how
Define
canclearance andthe
one estimate renal clearanceofratio
mechanism ofclearance
renal a drug. Based on the renal clearance ratio values,
of a drug?
11. List the factors influencing renal excretion of drugs.
12. What criteria are necessary for an agent to be useful as a marker to measure kidney function?
Why is creatinine clearance preferred over inulin clearance in estimating renal function?
13. Based on fraction of drug excreted unchanged and renal excretion values, in what situations
does dose adjustment becomes necessary in renal failure? What assumptions are made when
adjusting a dose in renal failure patient?
14. What factors govern removal of a substance by haemodialysis?
15. What are the various nonrenal routes of drug excretion?
16. Discuss the factors influencing biliary excretion of drugs.

17. How are drugs excreted in bile classified
on the basis of bile/plasma ratio? 175/413
18. Metabolites and conjugated forms are excreted more in bile than the parent drugs. Why?
19. How can the efficiency of biliary system be tested?
20. Explain enterohepatic circulation of drugs. What is the significance of such a cycling? How
can interaction at the cycling level be used therapeutically to treat pesticide poisoning?
21. Oral contraceptives show double-peak phenomenon after oral administration. Give reasons.
22. What factors determine the pulmonary excretion of drugs?
23. Why should a nursing mother refrain from smoking and taking medication?
24. What is the reason for bitter after taste of medicaments in a patient on drug therapy?
25. What is the cause of hypersensitivity skin reactions with some drugs?
26. The normal dose of a drug is 200 mg. If the fraction excreted unchanged in urine is 0.75, what
would be the dose for a patient whose creatinine clearance is 13 ml/min? Calculate the new
dosing interval if the normal dosing frequency is every two hours.
Answer : Dose = 65 mg; Dosing interval = 20 hours.
27. Estimate the creatinine clearance of a 30 years old, 70 Kg man with serum creatinine value 2.0
mg%. What is the renal function value of such a patient?

Answer : Clcr = 53.5 ml/min; RF = 0.4.
28. The pKa of an acidic drug is 6.0. Determine the % drug ionised in plasma pH 7.4 and urine pH
6.0. Calculate the U/P ratio and compare it with the value obtained when urine pH is 7.4. At
what pH more of such a drug is expected to be excreted in urine?
Answer : % ionised at pH 7.4 = 96.2; % ionised at pH 6.0 = 50; U/P when urine pH 6.0 = 0.076;
U/P ratio when urine pH 7.4 = 1.0; the drug will be excreted more when urine pH is 7.4.
29. Calculate the dialysis clearance if the blood flow rate to the dialyser is 50 ml/min and
concentration of drug entering and leaving the dialyser is 100 and 20 mcg/ml respectively.
Answer : Dialysis clearance = 40 ml/min.
30. Given in the table below are four fluoroquinolone antibiotics along with their fractions excreted
unchanged in urine and the renal function of the patient to whom they are to be administered.
Rank the situations from most important to least important for considering a change in dosage
regimen and name the situation for which you recommend a change in usual dosage regimen.
Assume that all drugs are administered in same doses of 1000 mg/day, have similar therapeutic
indices and inactive metabolites. ( Hint: Use equation 6.22).
Situation Drug fu RF
A Pefloxacin 0.15 0.1

B Ciprofloxacin 0.40 0.3
C Norfloxacin 0.70 0.5
D Ofloxacin 0.80 0.7
Answer : B > C > D > A.
7
Pharmacokinetic Drug Interactions
Drug interactions are said to occur when the pharmacological activity of a drug is altered by
the concomitant use of another drug or by the presence of some other substance. The drug
whose activity is affected by such an interaction is called as the object drug and the agent
which precipitates such an interaction is referred to as the precipitant.
Drug interactions include –

1. Drug-drug interactions.
2. Food-drug interactions, for example, inhibition of metabolism of several
drugs by grapefruit juice.
3. Chemical-drug interactions, for example, interaction of a drug with
alcohol, tobacco or environmental chemicals.
4. Drug-laboratory test interaction, for example, alteration of diagnostic
laboratory test results by the presence of drug.
5. Drug-disease interactions, for example, worsening of disease condition by
the drug.
The net effect of a drug interaction is –

Generally quantitative i.e. increased or decreased effect.
Seldom qualitative i.e. rapid or slower effect.
Precipitation of newer or increased adverse-effects.
Most interactions are specific types of adverse reactions with altered efficacy of the
drug, for example an enhanced pharmacological activity (e.g. haemorrhagic tendency of
warfarin when phenylbutazone is given subsequently) or a decrease in the therapeutic activity
resulting in loss of efficacy like that of tetracycline when concomitantly administered with
food, antacids or mineral supplements containing heavy metal ions. Drug interactions are
thus –
Mostly undesirable.
Rarely desirable (beneficial) – for e.g., enhancement of activity of penicillins when
administered with probenecid.
Factors Contributing to Drug Interactions

Some of the more important risk factors that lead to drug interactions include –
1. Multiple drug therapy – is very common in most acute and chronic care settings, for
e.g., therapy in patient suffering from hypertension and congestive heart failure
includes antihypertensives as well as digitalis which together may lead to abnormal
heart rhythms. Concurrent use of non-prescription drugs, for e.g. aspirin as well as
herbal medications also lead to drug interactions. Theoretically, the possibility for
drug interactions to occur is over 50% when a patient is receiving five medications,
and the probability increases to 100% when seven drugs are used.
2. Multiple prescribers - Some individuals go to more than one physician, and it is
common for a patient to be treated by one or more specialists in addition to a family
doctor. It is frequently difficult for one prescriber to become aware of all the
medications that have been prescribed 177/413
by others for a particular patient, and many
difficulties arise from such situations. For example, one doctor may prescribe an
anxiolytic for a patient while another prescribes an antihistamine having sedative
properties with the possible consequence of an excessive depressant effect.
3. Multiple pharmacological effects of drug - Most drugs used in current therapy exhibit
more than one type of pharmacological action and have the capacity to influence
many physiological systems. Therefore, two concomitantly administered drugs will
often affect some of the same systems, for e.g. antihistamines (secondary effect is
sedation) enhance the sedative effect of tranquillizers.
4. Multiple diseases/Predisposing illness – Some patients take several drugs owing to
their suffering from more than one disease, for e.g. a patient with both diabetes and
hypertension. Multiple therapies in such individuals generally result in drug
interactions, for e.g., oral hypoglycaemics and beta-blockers can result in decreased
response to antidiabetic drug resulting in elevated blood sugar levels.
5. Poor patient compliance – this results when a patient does not take medication in the
manner intended by the doctor; which may be due to inadequate instructions from the
doctor or pharmacist, confusion regarding taking several medicines, etc. all of which
may lead to either underdosing or overdosing, and a consequent drug interaction.
6. Advancing age of patient – Increased tendency of drug interaction episodes in elderly
is generally due to decrease in liver function in such individuals.
7. Drug related factors - Clinically significant interactions are most likely to occur
between drugs that have potent effects, a narrow therapeutic index and a steep dose-
response curve (e.g., cytotoxic, antihypertensive, and hypoglycemic drugs, digoxin,
warfarin, etc.).
Mechanisms of Drug Interactions

The three mechanisms by which an interaction can develop are —
1. Pharmaceutical Interaction – Also called as incompatibility , it is a physicochemical
interaction that occurs when drugs are mixed in i.v. infusions causing precipitation or
inactivation of active principles, for example, ampicillin, chlorpromazine and
barbiturates interact with dextran in solutions and are broken down or form chemical
complexes.
2. Pharmacokinetic Interactions – These interactions are those in which the
absorption, distribution, metabolism and/or excretion of the object drug are altered by
the precipitant and hence such interactions are also called as ADM E in teractions. The
r esul tant eff ect is altered plasma concentr ati on of th e object drug. Pharmacokinetic
interactions can thus be classified as –
(i) Absorpti on in ter acti ons – are those where the absorption of the object drug is
altered. The net effect of such an interaction is –
Faster or slower drug absorption
More, or, less complete drug absorption.
Major mechanisms of absorption interactions are –
Complexation and adsorption.
Alteration in GI pH.
Alteration in gut motility.
Inhibition of GI enzymes.
Alteration of GI microflora.
Malabsorption syndrome.
(ii) Di stri bution interactions – are those where the distribution pattern of the object
drug is altered. The major mechanism for distribution interaction is alteration in
protein-drug binding.
(iii)M etaboli sm i nteractions – are those where the metabolism of the object drug is
altered. Mechanisms of metabolism interactions include –
Enzyme induction – increased rate of metabolism
Enzyme inhibition – decreased rate of metabolism. It is the most significant
interaction in comparison to other interactions and can be fatal.
(iv) Excr etion in teractions – are those where the excretion pattern of the object drug
is altered. Major mechanisms of excretion interactions are –
Alteration in renal flood flow – e.g. NSAIDs (reduce renal blood flow) with
lithium.
Alteration of urine pH – e.g. antacids with amphetamine.
Competition for active secretion – e.g. probenicid and penicillin.
Forced diuresis.
3. Pharmacodynamic
at its site of action isInteractions – are
altered by the those in which
precipitant. Such the activity ofmay
interactions the be
object drug
direct or
indirect.
(i) Di r ect pharmacodynami c in ter acti on is the one in which drugs having similar or
opposing pharmacological effects are used concurrently. The three consequences
of direct interactions are –
(a) Antagonism : The interacting drugs have opposing actions, e.g. acetylcholine
and noradrenaline have opposing effects on heart rate.
(b) Addition or Summation: The interacting drugs have similar actions and the
resultant effect is the sum of individual drug responses, e.g. CNS depressants
like sedatives, hypnotics, etc.
(c) Synergism or Potentiation: It is enhancement of action of one drug by
another, e.g. alcohol enhances the analgesic activity of aspirin.
(ii) I ndi r ect pharmacodynami c in ter acti ons are situations in which both the object
and the precipitant drugs have unrelated effects but the latter in some way alters
the effects of the former , for example, salicylates decrease the ability of the
platelets to aggregate thus impairing the haemostasis if warfarin induced bleeding
occurs.
Th e resul tant eff ect of all pharmacodynamic i nteractions is thus alt er ed dru g acti on
wit hout a change in pl asma concentr ation.
Of the various types of interactions, the pharmacokinetic interactions are most common
and often result in differences in pharmacological effects. Several examples of such
interactions are known but few are clinically significant. Clinically important effects are
precipitated by drugs having low therapeutic indices, e.g. digoxin or those having poorly
defined therapeutic end-points, e.g. antipsychotics.
The net effect of all pharmacokinetic interactions is reflected in the altered duration and
intensity of pharmacological action of the drug due to variation in the plasma concentration
precipitated by altered ADME. All factors which influence the ADME of a drug affect its
pharmacokinetics. The same has already been dealt with in sufficient details in the respective
chapters. A summary of some of the important pharmacokinetic interactions is given in
Table 7.1.
Fig. 7.1. Major sites of pharmacokinetic interactions

Interactions Affecting Absorption of Drugs
Altered absorption after oral administration is very common. The interaction may result in a
change in the rate of absorption (an increase or a decrease), a change in the amount of drug
absorbed (an increase or a decrease) or both. Several mechanisms may be involved in the
alteration of drug absorption from the GIT. In general, drugs that are not absorbed
completely/rapidly are more susceptible to changes in GI absorption. A decrease in the rate
of absorption is clinically significant in acute conditions such as pain where the drug is
administered in a single dose but is of little importance for drugs used in chronic therapy.
An alteration in parenteral drug absorption is rare but can occur when an adrenergic agent
such as adrenaline or a cholinergic drug such as methacholine is extravascularly injected
concomitantly with another drug. These agents alter the systemic absorption of the latter due
to vasoconstriction or vasodilation.
Interactions Affecting Distribution of Drugs

Though several factors govern the distribution of drugs to various tissues, clinically
significant interactions result due to competition between drugs for binding to proteins/tissues
and displacement of one drug by the other. Competitive displacement, which results when
two drugs are capable of binding to the same site on the protein, causes the most significant
interactions. Greater risk of interactions exists when the displaced drug is highly protein
bound (more than 95%), has a small volume of distribution and has a narrow therapeutic
index (e.g. tolbutamide, warfarin and phenytoin), and when the displacer drug has a higher
degree of affinity than the drug to be displaced. In such situations, displacement of even a
small percent of drug results in a tremendous increase in the free form of the drug, which
precipitates increased therapeutic or toxic effects.
Drugs may also be displaced from binding sites in tissues. An interesting example of this
is oral hypoglycaemics such as the sulphonyl ureas (tolbutamide, glibenclamide, etc.). These
agents exert their therapeutic effects by displacing insulin from protein binding sites in
pancreas, plasma and other regions resulting in its elevated levels.
Interactions Affecting Metabolism of Drugs

The most important and the most common cause of pharmacokinetic interactions is alteration
in the rate of biotransformation of drugs. Major problems arise when one drug either induces
or inhibits the metabolism of another drug. Even the environmental chemicals can bring
about such an effect. The influence of enzyme inducers and inhibitors become more
pronounced when drugs susceptible to first-pass hepatic metabolism are given concurrently.
The metabolic pathway usually affected is phase I oxidation. Enzyme inducers reduce the
blood level and clinical efficacy of co-administered drugs but may also enhance the toxicity
of drugs having active metabolites. In contrast to enzyme induction, which is usually not
hazardous, enzyme inhibition leads to accumulation of drug to toxic levels and serious
adverse effects may be precipitated.
Interactions Affecting Excretion of Drugs

Clinically significant renal excretion interactions occur when an appreciable amount of drug
or its active metabolite(s) are eliminated in the urine. Excretion pattern can be affected by
alteration in GFR, renal blood flow, passive tubular reabsorption, active tubular secretion and
urine pH. An interesting pharmacokinetic interaction that results due to the pharmacodynamic
drug effect is between thiazide diuretics and lithium. Owing to the influence of former on the
renal tubular transport of sodium, the lithium ions are retained in the body resulting in its
toxicity.
Biliary excretion, the other major mechanism of drug excretion, is altered by agents that
inhibit biliary transport or modify bile flow rate.
TABLE 7.1
List of Some of the Important Pharmacokinetic (ADME) Interactions
Object Drug(s) Precipitant Drug(s) Influence on Object Drug(s)
ABSORPTION INTERACTIONS
1. Complexation and Adsorption
Tetracycline, Antacids, food and mineral Formation of poorly soluble and
fluoroquinolones like supplements containing Al, Mg, unabsorbable complex with such heavy
ciprofloxacin, penicillamine Fe, Zn, Bi and Ca ions metal ions
Cephalixin, Cholestyramine Reduced absorption due to adsorption and
sulphamethoxazole, binding
trimethoprim, warfarin and
thyroxine
2. Alteration of GI pH
Sulphonamides, aspirin Antacids Enhanced dissolution and absorption rate
Ferrous sulphate Sodium bicarbonate, calcium Decreased dissolution and hence absorption
carbonate
Ketoconazole, tetracycline, Antacids Decreased dissolution and bioavailability
atenolol
3. Alteration of Gut Motility
Aspirin, diazepam, levodopa, Metoclopramide Rapid gastric emptying; increased rate of
lithium carbonate, absorption
paracetamol, mexiletine
Levodopa, lithium carbonate, Anticholinergics (atropine) Delayed gastric emptying; decreased rate of
mexiletine absorption
4. Inhibition of GI Enzymes (see metabolism interactions)
5. Alteration of GI Microflora
Digoxin Antibiotics (erythromycin, Increased bioavailability due to destruction
tetracycline) of bacterial flora that inactivates digoxin in
lower intestine
Oral contraceptives Antibiotics (ampicillin) Decreased reabsorption of drugs secreted as
conjugates via bile in the intestine
6. Malabsorption Syndrome
Vitamin A, B12, digoxin Neomycin (and colchicines) Inhibition of absorption due to
malabsorption/steatorrhoea caused by
neomycin
DISTRIBUTION INTERACTIONS
Competitive Displacement Interactions

Di splaced dru g(s) Di splacer(s)
Anticoagulants (warfarin) Phenylbutazone, chloral hydrate, Increased clotting time; increased risk of
salicylates haemorrhage
Tolbutamide Sulphonamides Increased hypoglycaemic effect
Methotrexate Sulphonamides, salicylic acid Increased methotrexate toxicity
Phenytoin Valproic acid Phenytoin toxicity
METABOLISM INTERACTIONS
1. Enzyme Induction
Corticosteroids, oral Barbiturates Decreased plasma levels; decreased
contraceptives, coumarins, efficacy of object drugs
phenytoin, tolbutamide,
tricyclic antidepressants
Corticosteroids, oral Phenytoin -do-
contraceptives, theophylline,
cyclosporin
Oral contraceptives, oral Rifampicin -do-
hypoglycaemics, coumarins
2. Enzyme Inhibition
Tyramine rich food (cheese, MAO inhibitors (phenelzine, Enhanced absorption of unmetabolised
liver, yeast products) pargyline, etc.) tyramine; increased pressor activity;
potentially fatal risk of hypertensive crisis
Drugs that undergo extensive Grapefruit juice Enhanced absorption of drugs; increased
first-pass hepatic metabolism risk of toxicity
(e.g. propranolol, calcium
channel blockers, etc)
Folic acid Phenytoin Decreased absorption of folic acid due to
inhibition of an enzyme responsible for its
absorption
Tricyclic antidepressants Chlorpromazine, haloperidol Increased plasma half-life of tricyclics;
increased risk of sudden death from cardiac
Coumarins Metronidazole, phenylbutazone disease in anticoagulant

Increased such patients activity; risk of
haemorrhage
Oral hypoglycaemics Phenylbutazone, Hypoglycaemia may be precipitated
sulphaphenazole,
chloramphenicol
Alcohol Disulphiram, metronidazole, Disulphiram like reactions due to increase
tinidazole in plasma acetaldehyde levels
AZT, mercaptopurine Xanthine oxidase inhibitors Increased toxicity of antineoplastics
(allopurinol)
Alcohol, benzodiazepines, Cimetidine Increased blood levels of object drugs
warfarin, phenytoin,
theophylline, phenobarbital
EXCRETION INTERACTIONS
1. Changes in Active Tubular Secretion
Penicillin, cephalosporin, Probenicid (acid) Elevated plasma levels of acidic drugs; risk
nalidixic acid, PAS, of toxic reactions
methotrexate, dapsone
Procainamide, ranitidine Cimetidine (base) Increased plasma levels of basic object
drugs; risk of toxicity
Acetohexamide Phenylbutazone Increased hypoglycaemic effect
2. Changes in Urine pH
Amphetamine, tetracycline, Antacids, thiazides, Increased passive reabsorption of basic
quinidine acetazolamide drugs; increased risk of toxicity
3. Changes in Renal Blood Flow
Lithium bicarbonate NSAIDs (inhibitors of Decreased renal clearance of lithium; risk
prostaglandin synthesis; the of toxicity
latter control renal blood flow
partially by vasoconstriction)
Reducing the Risk of Drug Interactions – Principles of Drug Interactions Management

The consequences of drug interactions may be –
Major – life threatening
Moderate – deterioration of patient’s status
Minor – bothersome or little effect.
The risk of drug interactions is a challenge that embraces a number of considerations.
The following are guidelines to reduce and manage drug interactions.
1. Identify patient risk factors such as age, the nature of the patient's medical problem
(e.g., impaired renal function), dietary habits, smoking, and problems such as
alcoholism influence the effect of certain drugs.
2. Take thorough drug history and maintain complete patient medication records.
3. Keep knowledge about actions (both primary and secondary pharmacological actions)
of drugs being utilized.
4. Consider therapeutic alternatives.
5. Avoid complex therapeutic regimens where possible.
6. Educate the patient to comply with instructions for administering medications. They
should be encouraged to ask questions about their therapy and to report any excessive
or unexpected responses.
7. Monitor therapy: Any change in patient behavior should be suspected as drug-related
until that possibility is excluded.
8. Individualize therapy: priority should be assigned to the needs and clinical response of
the individual patient, rather than to the usual dosage recommendations, standard
treatment, and monitoring guidelines.
9. Involve the patient as a partner in health care. If the optimal benefits of therapy are to
be achieved with minimal risk, each participant must be knowledgeable about and
diligent in fulfilling his responsibilities.
QUESTIONS
1. Define drug interactions. Explain how drug interactions are of great concern in drug therapy.
2. What are the various categories of drug interactions?
3. Quote examples of beneficial drug interactions.
4. Enlist and discuss the factors that contribute drug interactions.
5. What are the two major mechanisms by which drug-drug interactions can develop? Which one
is the most common of the two?
6. Define pharmacodynamic interactions. What are the three consequences of direct
pharmacodynamic interactions?
7. What is the basic difference between pharmacodynamic and pharmacokinetic drug interactions?
8. What type of interaction is called pharmaceutical incompatibility?
9. What are ADME interactions? Enumerate some of the major causes of each of these
interactions.
10. What are the various ways of reducing risk of drug interactions?
Pharmacokinetics:
8 Basic Considerations
The duration of drug therapy ranges from a single dose of a drug taken for relieving an
acute condition such as headache to drugs taken life-long for chronic conditions such as
hypertension, diabetes, asthma or epilepsy. The frequency of administration of a drug in
a particular dose is called as dosage regimen. Depending upon the therapeutic objective
to be attained, the duration of drug therapy and the dosage regimen are decided.
Rational and optimal therapy with a drug depends upon –
1. Choice of a suitable drug, and
2. A balance between the therapeutic and the toxic effects.
Both, the therapeutic and the toxic effects, depend upon the concentration of drug at
the site of action which is difficult to measure. However, it corresponds to a specific
concentration of drug in plasma which can be measured with accuracy. The drug fails to
elicit a therapeutic response when the concentration is below the effective level and
precipitates adverse reactions when above the toxic level. The plasma drug concentration
between these two limits is called as the therapeutic concentration range or
therapeutic window (the ratio of maximum safe concentration to minimum effective
concentration of the drug is called as the therapeutic index). Thus, in order to achieve
therapeutic success, plasma concentration of the drug should be maintained within the
therapeutic window. For this, knowledge is needed not only of the mechanisms of drug
absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion, but also of the kinetics of these
processes i.e. pharmacokinetics. Pharmacokinetics is defined as the kinetics of drug
absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion (KADME) and their relationship with
the pharmacological, therapeutic or toxicological response in man and animals . There
are two aspects of pharmacokinetic studies –

1. Theoretical aspect – which involves development of pharmacokinetic models to
predict drug disposition after its administration. Statistical methods are
commonly applied to interpret data and assess various parameters.
2. Experimental aspect – which involves development of biological sampling

techniques, analytical methods for measurement of drug (and metabolites)
concentration in biological samples and data collection and evaluation.
Several relevant terms can now be defined –

 Clinical Pharmacokinetics is defined as the application of pharmacokinetic
principles in the safe and effective management of individual patient.
 Population Pharmacokinetics is defined as the study of pharmacokinetic
differences of drugs in various population groups.
 Toxicokinetics is defined as the application of pharmacokinetic principles to
the design, conduct and interpretation of drug safety evaluation studies.
Plasma Drug Concentration-Time Profile

A direct relationship exists between the concentration of drug at the biophase (site of
action) and the concentration of drug in plasma. Two categories of parameters can be
evaluated from a plasma concentration time profile –
 Pharmacokinetic parameters, and
 Pharmacodynamic parameters.
A typical plasma drug concentration-time curve obtained after a single oral dose of a
drug and showing various pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic parameters is depicted
in Fig. 8.1. Such a profile can be obtained by measuring the concentration of drug in
plasma samples taken at various intervals of time after administration of a dosage form
and plotting the concentration of drug in plasma (Y-axis) versus the corresponding time at
which the plasma sample was collected ( X-axis).
Fig. 8.1. A typical plasma concentration-time profile showing pharmacokinetic and

pharmacodynamic parameters, obtained after oral administration of single dose of a drug.
Pharmacokinetic Parameters
The three important pharmacokinetic parameters that describe the plasma level-time
curve and useful in assessing the bioavailability of a drug from its formulation are –
1. Peak Plasma Concentration (Cmax)

The point of maximum concentration of drug in plasma is called as the peak and the
concentration of drug at peak is known as peak plasma concentration. It is also called
as peak height concentration and maximum drug concentration. Cmax is expressed
in mcg/ml. The peak plasma level depends upon –

 The administered dose
 Rate of absorption, and

Rate of elimination.
The peak represents the point of time when absorption rate equals elimination rate of
drug. The portion of curve to the left of peak represents absorption phase i.e. when the
rate of absorption is greater than the rate of elimination. The section of curve to the
right of peak generally represents elimination phase i.e. when the rate of elimination
exceeds rate of absorption. Peak concentration is often related to the intensity of
pharmacological response and should ideally be above minimum effective concentration

(MEC) but less than the maximum safe concentration (MSC).
2. Time of Peak Concentration (tmax)
The time for drug to reach peak concentration in plasma (after extravascular
administration) is called as the time of peak concentration. It is expressed in hours and
is useful in estimating the rate of absorption. Onset time and onset of action are
dependent upon tmax. This parameter is of particular importance in assessing the
efficacy of drugs used to treat acute conditions like pain and insomnia which can be
treated by a single dose.
3. Area Under the Curve (AUC)

It represents the total integrated area under the plasma level-time profile and
expresses the total amount of drug that comes into the systemic circulation after its
administration. AUC is expressed in mcg/ml X hours. It is the most important parameter
in evaluating the bioavailability of a drug from its dosage form as it represents the extent
of absorption. AUC is also important for drugs that are administered repetitively for the
treatment of chronic conditions like asthma or epilepsy.
Pharmacodynamic Parameters
The various pharmacodynamic parameters are –
1. Minimum Effective Concentration (MEC)
It is defined as the minimum concentration of drug in plasma required to produce the
therapeutic effect. It reflects the minimum concentration of drug at the receptor site to
elicit the desired pharmacological response. The concentration of drug below MEC is
said to be in the sub-therapeutic level.
In case of antibiotics, the term minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) is used. It

describes the minimum concentration of antibiotic in plasma required to kill or inhibit
the growth of microorganisms.
2. Maximum Safe Concentration (MSC)
Also called as minimum toxic concentration (MTC), it is the concentration of drug

in plasma above which adverse or unwanted effects are precipitated . Concentration of
drug above MSC is said to be in the toxic level.
3. Onset of Action
The beginning of pharmacological response is called as onset of action. It occurs
when the plasma drug concentration just exceeds the required MEC.
4. Onset Time
It is the time required for the drug to start producing pharmacological response. It
corresponds to the time for the plasma concentration to reach MEC after administration
of drug.
5. Duration of Action
The time period for which the plasma concentration of drug remains above the MEC
level is called as duration of drug action. It is also defined as the difference between
onset time and time for the drug to decline back to MEC.
6. Intensity of Action
It is the maximum pharmacological response produced by the peak plasma
concentration of drug. It is also called as peak response.
7. Therapeutic Range
The drug concentration between MEC and MSC represents the therapeutic range. It
is also known as therapeutic window.
8. Therapeutic Index
The ratio of MSC to MEC is called as therapeutic index. It is also defined as the ratio of
dose required to produce toxic or lethal effects to dose required to produce therapeutic
effect.
Rate, Rate Constants and Orders of Reactions

Pharmacokinetics is the mathematical analysis of processes of ADME. The movement
of drug molecules from the site of application to the systemic circulation, through various
barriers, their conversion into another chemical form and finally their exit out of the body
can be expressed mathematically by the rate at which they proceed, the order of such
processes and the rate constants.
The velocity with which a reaction or a process occurs is called as its rate. The
manner in which the concentration of drug (or reactants) influences the rate of reaction
or process is called as the order of reaction or order of process. Consider the
following chemical reaction:
Drug A Drug B (8.1)

The rate of forward reaction is expressed as –
- dA
(8.2)
dt
Negative sign indicates that the concentration of drug A decreases with time t. As the
reaction proceeds, the concentration of drug B increases and the rate of reaction can also
be expressed as:
dB
(8.3)
dt
Experimentally, the rate of reaction is determined by measuring the decrease in
concentration of drug A with time t.
If C is the concentration of drug A, the rate of decrease in C of drug A as it is changed
to B can be described by a general expression as a function of time t.

dC
K Cn (8.4)
dt
where, K = rate constant
n = order of reaction
If n = 0, its a zero-order process, if n = 1, it is a first-order process and so on. The
three commonly encountered rate processes in a physiological system are —
 Zero-order process
 First-order process
 Mixed-order process.
The pharmacokinetics of most drugs can be adequately described by zero- and first-
order processes of which the latter are more important.
Zero-Order Kinetics (Constant Rate Processes)

If n = 0, equation 8.4 becomes:
dC
K0 C0 - K0 (8.5)
dt
where Ko = zero-order rate constant (in mg/min)
From equation 8.5, the zero-order process can be defined as the one whose rate is
independent of the concentration of drug undergoing reaction i.e. the rate of reaction
cannot be increased further by increasing the concentration of reactants .
Rearrangement of equation 8.5 yields:
dC K 0 dt (8.6)
Integration of equation 8.6 gives:
C - C0 K0 t (8.7)
or simply, C C0 K 0 t
where Co = concentration of drug at t = 0, and
C = concentration of drug yet to undergo reaction at time t.

Equation 8.7 is that of a straight line and states that the concentration of reactant
decreases linearly with time. A plot of C versus t yields such a straight line having slope
– Ko and y-intercept Co (Fig.8.2.).
Fig. 8.2. Graphs of zero-order kinetics (equations 8.5 and 8.7)
Zero-Order Half-Life
Half-life (t½) or half-time is defined as the time period required for the concentration
of drug to decrease by one-half. When t = t½, C = Co/2 and the equation 8.7 becomes:
C0
C0 K 0 t1/2 (8.8)
2
Solving 8.8, we get:
C0 0.5 C 0
t1/2 (8.9)
2 K0 K0
Equation 8.9 shows that the t ½ of a zero-order process is not constant but proportional
to the initial concentration of drug C o and inversely proportional to the zero-order rate
constant Ko. Since the zero-order t½ changes with the decline in drug concentration, it is
of little practical importance. Zero-order equations do not require logarithmic
transformations.
Examples of zero-order processes are –
1. Metabolism/protein-drug binding/enzyme or carrier-mediated transport under
saturated conditions. The rate of metabolism, binding or transport of drug remains
constant as long as its concentration is in excess of saturating concentration.
2. Administration of a drug as a constant rate i.v. infusion.
3. Controlled drug delivery such as that from i.m. implants or osmotic pumps.
First-Order Kinetics (Linear Kinetics)

If n = 1, equation 8.4 becomes:
dC
KC (8.10)
dt
where K = first-order rate constant (in time–1 or per hour)
From equation 8.10, it is clear that a first-order process is the one whose rate is
directly proportional to the concentration of drug undergoing reaction i.e. greater the
concentration, faster the reaction. It is because of such proportionality between rate of

reaction and the concentration of drug that a first-order process is said to follow linear
kinetics (Fig. 8.3.).
Fig. 8.3. Graph of first-order kinetics showing linear relationship between rate of reaction
and concentration of drug (equation 8.10).
Rearrangement of equation 8.10 yields:
dC
K dt (8.11)
C
Integration of equation 8.11 gives:
ln C ln C0 - Kt (8.12)
Equation 8.12 can also be written in exponential form as:
C C 0 e - Kt (8.13)
where e = natural (Naperian) log base.
Since equation 8.13 has only one exponent, the first-order process is also called as
monoexponential rate process. Thus, a first-order process is characterized by
logarithmic or exponential kinetics i.e. a constant fraction of drug undergoes reaction
per unit time.
Since ln = 2.303 log, equation 8.12 can be written as:
Kt
log C log C 0 - (8.14)
2.303
or log C log C0 - 0.434 Kt (8.15)

A semilogarithmic plot of equation 8.14 yields a straight line with slope = –K/2.303
and y-intercept = log C o (Fig. 8.4.).
Fig. 8.4. Regular and semilog graphs of first-order kinetics
First-Order Half-Life
Substituting the value of C = C o/2 at t½ in equation 8.14 and solving it yields:
0.693
t1/2 (8.16)
K
Equation 8.16 shows that, in contrast to zero-order process, the half-life of a first-order
process is a constant and independent of initial drug concentration i.e. irrespective of
what the initial drug concentration is, the time required for the concentration to decrease
by one-half remains the same (see Fig. 8.4.). The t½ of a first-order process is an
important pharmacokinetic parameter.

Most pharmacokinetic processes viz. absorption, distribution and elimination follow
first-order kinetics.
Mixed-Order Kinetics (Nonlinear Kinetics)

In some instances, the kinetics of a pharmacokinetic process changes from predominantly
first-order to predominantly zero-order with increasing dose or chronic medication. A
mixture of both first-order and zero-order kinetics is observed in such cases and therefore
the process is said to follow mixed-order kinetics. Since deviations from an originally
linear pharmacokinetic profile are observed, the rate process of such a drug is called as
nonlinear kinetics. Mixed order kinetics is also termed as dose-dependent kinetics as it
is observed at increased or multiple doses of some drugs. Nonlinearities in

pharmacokinetics have been observed in –
 Drug absorption (e.g. vitamin C)
 Drug distribution (e.g. naproxen), and
 Drug elimination (e.g. riboflavin).
The phenomena is seen when a particular pharmacokinetic process involves presence
of carriers or enzymes which are substrate specific and have definite capacities and can
get saturated at high drug concentrations (i.e. capacity-limited). The kinetics of such
capacity-limited processes can be described by the Michaelis-Menten kinetics.
PHARMACOKINETIC PARAMETERS
The predictive capability of a pharmacokinetic model lies in the proper selection and
development of mathematical functions called parameters that govern a pharmacokinetic
process. In practice, pharmacokinetic parameters are determined experimentally from a
set of drug concentrations collected over various times known as data. Parameters are
also called as variables. Variables are of two types –
1. I ndependent variabl es which are not affected by any other parameter, for example
time.
2. Dependent variables, which change as the independent variables change, for
example, plasma drug concentration.
Certain points, which are important to note regarding application of parameters in

pharmacokinetic studies, include –
 The number of parameters needed to describe the pharmacokinetic model depends
upon the complexity of the pharmacokinetic process and on the route of drug
administration.
 More the number of parameters more are the difficulties in accurate estimation of
these parameters.
 For the pharmacokinetic parameters to be valid, the number of data points should
always exceed the number of parameters in the pharmacokinetic model.
PHARMACOKINETIC ANALYSIS OF MATHEMATICAL DATA :
PHARMACOKINETIC MODELS
Drug movement within the body is a complex process. The major objective is therefore
to develop a generalized and simple approach to describe, analyse and interpret the data
obtained during in vivo drug disposition studies. The two major approaches in the
quantitative study of various kinetic processes of drug disposition in the body are (see
Fig. 8.5) –
 Model approach, and
 Model-independent approach (also called as non-compartmental analysis).
Fig. 8.5. Various approaches used for quantitative study of kinetic processes
Pharmacokinetic Model Approach
In this approach, models are used to describe changes in drug concentration in the body
with time. A model is a hypothesis that employs mathematical terms to concisely describe
quantitative relationships. Pharmacokinetic models provide concise means of
expressing mathematically or quantitatively, the time course of drug(s) throughout the
body and compute meaningful pharmacokinetic parameters.
Appli cations of Pharmacokin eti c M odels –
Pharmacokinetic models are useful in —
1. Characterizing the behaviour of drugs in patients.

2. Predicting the concentration of drug in various body fluids with any dosage
regimen.
3. Predicting the multiple-dose concentration curves from single dose experiments.
4. Calculating the optimum dosage regimen for individual patients.
5. Evaluating the risk of toxicity with certain dosage regimens.
6. Correlating plasma drug concentration with pharmacological response.

7. Evaluating the bioequivalence/bioinequivalence between different formulations of
the same drug.
8. Estimating the possibility of drug and/or metabolite(s) accumulation in the body.
9. Determining the influence of altered physiology/disease state on drug ADME.
10. Explaining drug interactions.
Caution must however be exercised in ensuring that the model fits the experimental
data; otherwise, a new, more complex and suitable model may be proposed and tested.
Types of Pharmacokinetic Models

Pharmacokinetic models are of three different types –
1. Compartment models – are also called as empir ical models, and

2. Physiol ogical models – are realistic models.
3. Di str ibu ted parameter models – are also realistic models.
Compartment Models
Compartmental analysis is the traditional and most commonly used approach to
pharmacokinetic characterization of a drug. These models simply interpolate the
experimental data and allow an empirical formula to estimate the drug concentration with
time.
Since compartments are hypothetical in nature, compartment models are based on
certain assumptions –
1. The body is represented as a series of compartments arranged either in series or
parallel to each other, that communicate reversibly with each other.
2. Each compartment is not a real physiologic or anatomic region but a fictitious or
virtual one and considered as a tissue or group of tissues that have similar drug
distribution characteristics (similar blood flow and affinity). This assumption is
necessary because if every organ, tissue or body fluid that can get equilibrated
with the drug is considered as a separate compartment, the body will comprise of
infinite number of compartments and mathematical description of such a model
will be too complex.
3. Within each compartment, the drug is considered to be rapidly and uniformly

distributed i.e. the compartment is well-stirred.
4. The rate of drug movement between compartments (i.e. entry and exit) is
described by first-order kinetics.
5. Rate constants are used to represent rate of entry into and exit from the
compartment.
Depending upon whether the compartments are arranged parallel or in a series,

compartment models are divided into two categories —
 Mammillary model
 Catenary model.
Mammillary Model
This model is the most common compartment model used in pharmacokinetics. It
consists of one or more peripheral compartments connected to the central compartment in
a manner similar to connection of satellites to a planet (i.e. they are joined parallel to the
central compartment). The central compartment (or compartment 1) comprises of
plasma and highly perfused tissues such as lungs, liver, kidneys, etc. which rapidly
equilibrate with the drug. The drug is directly absorbed into this compartment (i.e.
blood). Elimination too occurs from this compartment since the chief organs involved in
drug elimination are liver and kidneys, the highly perfused tissues and therefore
presumed to be rapidly accessible to drug in the systemic circulation. The peripheral
compartments or tissue compartments (denoted by numbers 2, 3, etc.) are those with
low vascularity and poor perfusion. Distribution of drugs to these compartments is
through blood. Movement of drug between compartments is defined by characteristic
first-order rate constants denoted by letter K ( see Fig. 8.6). The subscript indicates the
direction of drug movement; thus, K 12 (K-one-two) refers to drug movement from

compartment 1 to compartment 2 and reverse for K21.
Fig. 8.6. Various mammillary compartment models. The rate constant K01 is basically
Ka, the first-order absorption rate constant and K 10 is KE, the first-order elimination rate
constant.
The number of rate constants which will appear in a particular compartment model is
given by R.
For intravenous administration, R = 2n – 1 (8.17)
For extravascular administration, R = 2n (8.18)

where n = number of compartments.
Catenary Model
In this model, the compartments are joined to one another in a series like compartments
of a train (Fig. 8.7). This is however not observable physiologically/anatomically as the
various organs are directly linked to the blood compartment. Hence this model is rarely
used.
Fig. 8.7. A catenary model
The compartment modelling approach has several advantages and applications —

1. It is a simple and flexible approach and thus widely used. Fundamentally, the
principal use of this approach is to account for the mass balance of drug in
plasma, drug in extravascular tissues and the amount of drug eliminated after its
administration. It often serves as a ―first-model‖.
2. It gives a visual representation of various rate processes involved in drug
disposition.
3. It shows how many rate constants are necessary to describe these processes.
4. It enables the pharmacokineticist to write differential equations for each of the
rate processes in order to describe drug-concentration changes in each
compartment.
5. It enables monitoring of drug concentration change with time with a limited
amount of data. Only plasma concentration data or urinary excretion data is

sufficient.
6. It is useful in predicting drug concentration-time profile in both normal
physiological and in pathological conditions.
7. It is important in the development of dosage regimens.
8. It is useful in relating plasma drug levels to therapeutic and toxic effects in the
body.
9. It is particularly useful when several therapeutic agents are compared. Clinically,
drug data comparisons are based on compartment models.
10. Its simplicity allows for easy tabulation of parameters such as V d, t½, etc.
Disadvantages of compartment modelling include —

1. The compartments and parameters bear no relationship with the physiological
functions or the anatomic structure of the species; several assumptions have to be
made to facilitate data interpretation.
2. Extensive efforts are required in the development of an exact model that predicts
and describes correctly the ADME of a certain drug.
3. The model is based on curve fitting of plasma concentration with complex
multiexponential mathematical equations.
4. The model may vary within a study population.
5. The approach can be applied only to a specific drug under study.
6. The drug behaviour within the body may fit different compartmental models
depending upon the route of administration.
7. Difficulties generally arise when using models to interpret the differences
between results from human and animal experiments.

8. Owing to their simplicity, compartmental models are often misunderstood,
overstretched or even abused.
Because of the several drawbacks of and difficulties with the classical

compartment modelling, newer approaches have been devised to study the time course of
drugs in the body. They are — physiological models and noncompartmental methods.
Physiological Models
These models are also known as physiologically-based pharmacokinetic models (PB-PK
models). They are drawn on the basis of known anatomic and physiological data and thus
present a more realistic picture of drug disposition in various organs and tissues. The
number of compartments to be included in the model depends upon the disposition
characteristics of the drug. Organs or tissues such as bones that have no drug penetration
are excluded. Since describing each organ/tissue with mathematic equations makes the
model complex, tissues with similar perfusion properties are grouped into a single
compartment. For example, lungs, liver, brain and kidney are grouped as rapidly
equilibrating tissues (RET) while muscles and adipose as slowly equilibrating tissues
(SET). Fig. 8.8 shows such a physiological model where the compartments are arranged
in a series in a flow diagram.
Fig. 8.8. Schematic representation of a physiological pharmacokinetic model. The term

Q indicates blood flow rate to a body region. HPT stands for other highly perfused
tissues and PPT for poorly perfused tissues. Km is rate constant for hepatic elimination
and Ke is first-order rate constant for urinary excretion.
Since the rate of drug carried to a tissue organ and tissue drug uptake are
dependent upon two major factors –
 Rate of blood flow to the organ, and
 Tissue/blood partition coefficient or diffusion coefficient of drug that governs its
tissue permeability,
The physiological models are further categorized into two types –
1. Blood flow rate-limited models – These models are more popular and commonly
used than the second type, and are based on the assumption that the drug
movement within a body region is much more rapid than its rate of delivery to
that region by the perfusing blood. These models are therefore also called as
per fu sion r ate-li mited models. This assumption is however applicable only to the
highly membrane permeable drugs i.e. low molecular weight, poorly ionised and
highly lipophilic drugs, for example, thiopental, lidocaine, etc.
2. Membrane permeation rate-limited models – These models are more complex

and applicable to highly polar, ionised and charged drugs, in which case the cell
membrane acts as a barrier for the drug that gradually permeates by diffusion.
These models are therefore also called as dif fu sion-l imi ted models. Owing to the
time lag in equilibration between the blood and the tissue, equations for these
models are very complicated.
Physiological modelling has several advantages over the conventional compartment

modelling –
1. Mathematical treatment is straightforward.
2. Since it is a realistic approach, the model is suitable where tissue drug

concentration and binding are known.
3. Data fitting is not required since drug concentration in various body regions can
be predicted on the basis of organ or tissue size, perfusion rate and experimentally
determined tissue-to-plasma partition coefficient.
4. The model gives exact description of drug concentration-time profile in any organ
or tissue and thus better picture of drug distribution characteristics in the body.
5. The influence of altered physiology or pathology on drug disposition can be easily

predicted from changes in the various pharmacokinetic parameters since the
parameters correspond to actual physiological and anatomic measures.
6. The method is frequently used in animals because invasive methods can be used
to collect tissue samples.
7. Correlation of data in several animal species is possible and with some drugs, can
be extrapolated to humans since tissue concentration of drugs is known.
8. Mechanism of ADME of drug can be easily explained by this model.
Disadvantages of physiological modelling include —

1. Obtaining the experimental data is a very exhaustive process.
2. Most physiological models assume an average blood flow for individual subjects
and hence prediction of individualized dosing is difficult.
3. The number of data points is less than the pharmacokinetic parameters to be
assessed.
4. Monitoring of drug concentration in body is difficult since exhaustive data is
required
Table 8.1 briefly compares features of compartment and physiological models.
TABLE 8.1. Comparison of features of compartment and physiological models
Compartment Modelling Physiological Modelling
1. Hypothetical/empirical approach – no Realistic approach since it is based on
relation with real physiology or physiological and anatomic information.
anatomy
2. Experimentally simple and flexible Difficult experimentally since exhaustive
approach as far as data collection is data collection is required.
concerned
3. Owing to itsthe
and is often simplicity, it is widely used
―first model‖. Less commonly used owing to
complexity.
4. Complex multiexponential Mathematical treatment is
mathematical treatment is necessary for straightforward.
curve fitting.
5. Data fitting is required for predicting Data fitting is not necessary since drug
drug concentration in a particular concentration in various tissues is
compartment. practically determined.
6. Used when there is little information Used where tissue drug concentration
about the tissues. and binding are known.
7. Easy to monitor time course of drug in Exhaustive data is required to monitor
8. body with limited

Extrapolation fromdata.
data to humans and time course ofof
Extrapolation drug in body.
animal data to humans
vice versa is not possible. is easy on the basis of tissue
concentration of drugs.
9. Mechanism of drug’s ADME cannot be Easy to explain drug’s ADME
explained. mechanisms.
10. Effect of pathological condition on drug Effect of pathology on drug ADME can
ADME cannot be determined. be easily determined.
11. Frequently used for data comparison of Less commonly used for data
various drugs. comparisons.
Distributed Parameter Model

This model is analogous to physiological model but has been designed to take into
account –
 Variations in blood flow to an organ, and
 Variations in drug diffusion in an organ.
Such a model is thus specifically useful for assessing regional differences in drug
concentrations in tumours or necrotic tissues.
The distributed parameter model differs from physiological models in that the
mathematical equations are more complex and collection of drug concentration data is
more difficult.
Noncompartmental Analysis
The noncompartmental analysis, also called as the model-independent method, does
not require the assumption of specific compartment model. This method is, however,
based on the assumption that the drugs or metabolites follow linear kinetics, and on this
basis, this technique can be applied to any compartment model.
The noncompartmental approach, based on the statistical moments theory, involves
collection of experimental data following a single dose of drug. If one considers the time
course of drug concentration in plasma as a statistical distribution curve, then:
AUMC
MRT (9.19)
AUC
where MRT = mean residence time
AUMC = area under the first-moment curve
AUC = area under the zero-moment curve
AUMC is obtained from a plot of product of plasma drug concentration and time (i.e.
C.t) versus time t from zero to infinity (Fig. 8.9). Mathematically, it is expressed by
equation:
AUMC C t dt (9.20)
0
AUC is obtained from a plot of plasma drug concentration versus time from zero to
infinity. Mathematically, it is expressed by equation:
AUC C dt (9.21)
0
Practically, the AUMC and AUC can be calculated from the respective graphs by the
trapezoidal rule (the method involves dividing the curve by a series of vertical lines into
a number of trapezoids, calculating separately the area of each trapezoid and adding them
together).
Fig. 8.9. AUC and AUMC plots

MRT is defined as the average amount of time spent by the drug in the body before
being eliminated. In this sense, it is the statistical moment analogy of half-life, t½. In
effect, MRT represents the time for 63.2% of the intravenous bolus dose to be eliminated.
The values will always be greater when the drug is administered in a fashion other than
i.v. bolus.
Applications of noncompartmental technique includes –
1. It is widely used to estimate the important pharmacokinetic parameters like
bioavailability, clearance and apparent volume of distribution.
2. The method is also useful in determining half-life, rate of absorption and first-
order absorption rate constant of the drug.
Advantages of noncompartmental method include —
1. Ease of derivation of pharmacokinetic parameters by simple algebraic equations.

2. The same mathematical treatment can be applied to almost any drug or metabolite
provided they follow first-order kinetics.
3. A detailed description of drug disposition characteristics is not required.
Disadvantages of this method include –
1. It provides limited information regarding the plasma drug concentration-time

profile. More often, it deals with averages.
2. The method does not adequately treat non-linear cases.
QUESTIONS
1. In addition to mechanisms of drug ADME, explain how the knowledge about the
kinetics of these processes is also important.
2. Define pharmacokinetics. Name and define the three pharmacokinetic parameters
that describe a typical plasma level-time curve.
3. On what parameters/variables are Cmax, tmax and AUC dependent? What is the
importance of these parameters in expressing pharmacodynamic behaviour of a

drug?
4. What are the various pharmacodynamic parameters?
5. Quote examples of zero-order rate processes.
6. In contrast to zero-order process, the half-life of a first-order process is considered to
be an important pharmacokinetic parameter. Why?
7. Why are first-order processes said to follow linear kinetics?
8. What are mixed-order processes? By what other names such processes are identified?
Quote examples of such processes.
9. Define pharmacokinetic parameters? What are its various types? What are important
considerations for parameters to be applicable in pharmacokinetic studies?
10. What are the various approaches to quantitative study of kinetic processes of drug
disposition?
11. What are pharmacokinetic models? What is the importance and utility of developing
such models? Discuss briefly the types of pharmacokinetic models.
12. What assumptions are made in the development of compartment models? Discuss
the applications, advantages and disadvantages of such an approach.
13. In compartment modelling, elimination is presumed to occur from central
compartment only. Why?
14. Elaborate the types of compartment models. In comparison to a mammillary model,
the catenary model is less useful. Explain.
15. What are the advantages of physiological models over compartment models? On
what assumptions are such models based?

16. What are the various types of physiological models?
17. What is the significance of distributed parameter model?
18. On what theory is the noncompartmental analysis of pharmacokinetic data based?
Discuss the merits and demerits of such an approach.
19. The half-life for first-order photolysis of cefotaxime solution containing 150 mg
drug is 50 minutes.
a. How long will it take for the drug to decompose to 20% of its original amount?
Answer : 116 minutes.
b. If one ml aliquot taken after 90 min of exposure to light was found to contain
0.43 mg of cefotaxime, what was the original volume of the solution?
Answer : 100 ml.
20. The following data for decomposition of two drugs, A and B are given in the table
below :
Time (hours) Drug A (mg) Drug B (mg)
0.5 379 181.2
1.0 358 164.0
1.5 337 148.6
2.0 316 134.6
3.0 274 110.4
4.0 232 90.6

6.0 148 61.0
8.0 64 41.0
a. Determine (by plotting or otherwise) the rate of decomposition of both drugs.
Answer : Drug A = zero-order, and Drug B = first-order.
b. What is the rate constant for decomposition?
Answer : Drug A = 42 mg/hour, and Drug B = 0.198/hour.
c. What is their half-life?
Answer : Drug A = 4.76 hours, and Drug B = 3.5 hours.
d. What were the original amounts of drug before decomposition?
Answer : Drug A = 400 mg, and Drug B = 200 mg.
e. If the original quantities of drug taken were 800 mg for A and 400 mg for B then
what will be their new half-lives?
Answer : Drug A = 9.52 hours, and Drug B = t ½ will remain unchanged i.e. 3.5
hours.
f. Write equations for the line that best fits the experimental data for both drugs.
Answer: Drug A : C = 400 – 42t, and
Drug B : log C = log 200 – 0.198t/2.303.
9 Compartment Modelling
The time course of drug concentration determined after its administration can be satisfactorily
explained by assuming the body as a single well mixed compartment with first-order
disposition processes. In case of other drugs, two or more body compartments may be
postulated to describe mathematically the data collected.
ONE-COMPARTMENT OPEN MODEL

(Instantaneous Distribution Model)
The one-compartment open model is the simplest model. Owing to its simplicity, it is based
on following assumptions –
1. The body is considered as a single, kinetically homogeneous unit that has no barriers
to the movement of drug.
2. Final distribution equilibrium between the drug in plasma and other body fluids (i.e.
mixing) is attained instantaneously and maintained at all times. This model thus
applies only to those drugs that distribute rapidly throughout the body.
3. Drugs move dynamically, in (absorption) and out (elimination) of this compartment.
4. Elimination is a first-order (monoexponential) process with first-order rate constant.
5. Rate of input (absorption) > rate of output (elimination).
6. The anatomical reference compartment is plasma and concentration of drug in
plasma
plasma isdrug
representative of drug
concentration concentration
reflects in all body
a proportional tissues
change i.e. any
in drug change in
concentration
throughout the body.
However, the model does not assume that the drug concentration in plasma is equal to that
in other body tissues. The term open indicates that the input (availability) and output
(elimination) are unidirectional and that the drug can be eliminated from the body . Fig. 9.1
shows such a one-compartment model. One-compartment open model is generally used to
describe plasma levels following administration of a single dose of a drug.
Fig. 9.1 Representation of one-compartment open model showing input and output
processes.
Depending upon the rate of input, several one-compartment open models can be defined:
 One-compartment open model, i.v. bolus administration.
 One-compartment open model, continuous i.v. infusion.
 One-compartment open model, e.v. administration, zero-order absorption.
 One-compartment open model, e.v. administration, first-order absorption.
One-Compartment Open Model

Intravenous Bolus Administration
When a drug that distributes rapidly in the body is given in the form of a rapid intravenous
injection (i.e. i.v. bolus or slug), it takes about one to three minutes for complete circulation
and therefore the rate of absorption is neglected in calculations. The model can be depicted
as follows:
The general expression for rate of drug presentation to the body is:
dX
Rate in (availabil ity) - Rate out (elimination) (9.1)
dt
Since rate in or absorption is absent, the equation becomes:

dX
Rate out (9.2)
dt
If the rate out or elimination follows first-order kinetics, then:
dX
KΕX (9.3)
dt
where, KE = first-order elimination rate constant, and
X = amount of drug in the body at any time t remaining to be eliminated.
Negative sign indicates that the drug is being lost from the body.
Estimation of Pharmacokinetic Parameters

For a drug that follows one-compartment kinetics and administered as rapid i.v. injection, the
decline in plasma drug concentration is only due to elimination of drug from the body (and
not due to distribution), the phase being called as elimination phase. Elimination phase can
be characterized by 3 parameters—
1. Elimination rate constant
2. Elimination half-life
3. Clearance.
Elimination Rate Constant: Integration of equation 9.3 yields:
ln X = ln Xo – KE t (9.4)
where, Xo = amount of drug at time t = zero i.e. the initial amount of drug injected.
Equation 9.4 can also be written in the exponential form as:
X = Xo e–KEt (9.5)
The above equation shows that disposition of a drug that follows one-compartment
kinetics is monoexponential.
Transforming equation 9.4 into common logarithms (log base 10), we get:
KE t
log X log X 0 - (9.6)
2.303
Since it is difficult to determine directly the amount of drug in the body X, advantage is taken
of the fact that a constant relationship exists between drug concentration in plasma C (easily
measurable) and X; thus:
X = Vd C (9.7)
where, Vd = proportionality constant popularly known as the apparent volume of distribution.

It is a pharmacokinetic parameter that permits the use of plasma drug concentration in place
of amount of drug in the body. The equation 9.6 therefore becomes:
KE t
log C log C0 - (9.8)
2.303
where, Co = plasma drug concentration immediately after i.v. injection.
Equation 9.8 is that of a straight line and indicates that a semilogarithmic plot of log C
versus t will be linear with Y-intercept log Co. The elimination rate constant is directly
obtained from the slope of the line (Fig. 9.2b). It has units of min –1. Thus, a linear plot is
easier to handle mathematically than a curve which in this case will be obtained from a plot
of C versus t on regular (Cartesian) graph paper (Fig. 9.2a).
Fig. 9.2 (a) Cartesian plot of a drug that follows one-compartment kinetics and given by
rapid i.v. injection, and (b) Semilogarithmic plot for the rate of elimination in a
one-compartment model.
Thus, Co, KE (and t½) can be readily obtained from log C versus t graph. The elimination
or removal of the drug from the body is the sum of urinary excretion, metabolism, biliary
excretion, pulmonary excretion, and other mechanisms involved therein. Thus, KE is an
additive property of rate constants for each of these processes and better called as overall
elimination rate constant.
KE = Ke + Km + Kb + Kl + ...... (9.9)
The fraction of drug eliminated by a particular route can be evaluated if the number of rate
constants involved and their values are known. For example, if a drug is eliminated by
urinary excretion and metabolism only, then, the fraction of drug excreted unchanged in urine
F and fraction of drug metabolized F can be given as: 211/413
e m
Ke
Fe (9.10a)
KE
Km
Fm (9.10b)
KE
Elimination Half-Life: Also called as biological half-life, it is the oldest and the best
known of all pharmacokinetic parameters and was once considered as the most important
characteristic of a drug. It is defined as the time taken for the amount of drug in the body as
well as plasma concentration to decline by one-half or 50% its initial value . It is expressed
in hours or minutes. Half-life is related to elimination rate constant by the following
equation:
0.693
t1/2 (9.11)
KE
Elimination half-life can be readily obtained from the graph of log C versus t as shown in
Fig 9.2.
Today, increased physiologic understanding of pharmacokinetics shows that half-life is a
secondary parameter that depends upon the primary parameters clearance and apparent
volume of distribution according to following equation:
0.693 Vd
t1/2 (9.12)
ClT
Apparent Volume of Distribution: The two separate and independent pharmacokinetic

characteristics of a drug are –
1. Apparent volume of distribution, and
2. Clearance.
Since these parameters are closely related with the physiologic mechanisms in the body,
they are called as primary parameters.
Modification of equation 9.7 defines apparent volume of distribution:
Amount of drug in the body X
Vd (9.13)
Plasma drug concentration C
Vd is a measure of the extent of distribution of drug and is expressed in liters. The best
and the simplest way of estimating Vd of a drug is administering it by rapid i.v. injection,
determining the resulting plasma concentration immediately and using the following
equation:
X0 i.v. bolus dose
Vd (9.14)
C0 C0
Equation 9.14 can only be used for drugs that obey one-compartment kinetics. This is
because the Vd can only be estimated when distribution equilibrium is achieved between
drug in plasma and that in tissues and such equilibrium is established instantaneously for a
drug that follows one-compartment kinetics. A more general, more useful noncompartmental
method that can be applied to many compartment models for estimating the V is:
d
For drugs given as i.v. bolus,
X0
Vd (area) (9.15a)
K E AUC
For drugs administered extravascularly (e.v.),

FX
Vd (area) K E AUC
0 (9.15b)
where, Xo = dose administered, and F = fraction of drug absorbed into the systemic
circulation. F is equal to one i.e. complete availability when the drug is administered
intravenously.
Clearance: Difficulties arise when one applies elimination rate constant and half-life as
pharmacokinetic parameters in an anatomical/physiological context and as a measure of drug
elimination mechanisms. A much more valuable alternative approach for such applications is
use of clearance parameters to characterize drug disposition. Clearance is the most important
parameter in clinical drug applications and is useful in evaluating the mechanism by which a
drug is eliminated by the whole organism or by a particular organ.
Just as Vd is needed to relate plasma drug concentration with amount of drug in the body,
clearance is a parameter to relate plasma drug concentration with the rate of drug elimination
according to following equation:
Rate of elimination
Clearance (9.16)
dX
or Cl dt (9.17)
C
Clearance
fraction is defined
of apparent as of
volume thedistribution)
theoretical volume of body
from which fluidiscontaining
the drug completelydrug (i.e. in
removed that
a
given period of time. It is expressed in ml/min or liters/hour. Clearance is usually further
defined as blood clearance (Clb), plasma clearance (Clp) or clearance based on unbound or
free drug concentration (Clu) depending upon the concentration C measured for the right side
of the equation 9.17.
Total Body Clearance: Elimination of a drug from the body involves processes occurring
in kidney, liver, lungs and other eliminating organs. Clearance at an individual organ level
is called as organ clearance. It can be estimated by dividing the rate of elimination by each
organ with the concentration of drug presented to it. Thus,
Renal Clearance ClR Rate of elimination by kidney (9.18a)

C
Rate of elimination by liver
Hepatic Clearance ClH (9.18b)
C
Rate of elimination by other organs
Other Organ Clearance ClOthers (9.18c)
C
The total body clearance, ClT, also called as total systemic clearance, is an additive
property of individual organ clearances. Hence,
Total Systemic Clearance ClT Cl R Cl H ClOthers (9.18d)

Because of the additivity of clearance, the relative contribution by any organ in

eliminating a drug can be easily calculated. Clearance by all organs other than kidney is
sometimes known as nonrenal clearance ClNR. It is the difference between total clearance
and renal clearance.
According to an earlier definition (equation 9.17),
dX
ClT dt (9.17)
C
Substituting dX/dt = KEX from equation 9.3 in above equation, we get:
KE X
ClT (9.19)
C
Since X/C = Vd (from equation 9.13), the equation 9.19 can be written as:
ClT K E Vd (9.20a)
Parallel equations can be written for renal and hepatic clearances as:
Cl R K e Vd (9.20b)
ClH K m Vd (9.20c)
Since KE = 0.693/t½ (from equation 9.11), clearance can be related to half-life by the
following equation:
0.693 Vd
Cl T (9.21)
t1/2
Identical equations can be written for ClR and ClH in which cases the t½ will be urinary
excretion half-life for unchanged drug and metabolism half-life respectively. Equation 9.21.
shows that as ClT decreases, as in renal insufficiency, t½ of the drug increases. As the ClT
takes into account Vd, changes in Vd as in obesity or oedematous condition will reflect
changes in ClT.
The noncompartmental method of computing total clearance for a drug that follows one-
compartment kinetics is:
X0
For drugs given as i.v. bolus ClT (9.22a)
AUC
For drugs given e.v. ClT F X0 (9.22b)

AUC
For a drug given by i.v. bolus, the renal clearance Cl R may be estimated by determining
the total amount of unchanged drug excreted in urine, Xu and AUC.
X
Cl R u (9.23)
t1/2
Organ Clearance: The best way of understanding clearance is at individual organ level.
Such a physiologic approach is advantageous in predicting and evaluating the influence of
pathology, blood flow, P-D binding, enzyme activity, etc. on drug elimination. At an organ
level, the rate of elimination can be written as:
Rate of elimination Rate of presentation Rate of exit

= - (9.24)
by an organ to the organ from the organ
Rate of presentation (input) = Organ blood flow X Entering concentration

(9.25)
= QC
in
Rate of exit (output) = Organ blood flow X Exiting concentration
(9.26)
= Q C out
Substitution of equations 9.25 and 9.26 in equation 9.24 yields:

Rate of elimination = Q C in Q C out
(also called as Rate of extraction) = Q (Cin Cout ) (9.27)
Division of above equation by concentration of drug that enters the organ of elimination
Cin yields an expression for clearance of drug by the organ under consideration. Thus:
Rate of extraction Clorgan Q(Cin - Cout ) Q (9.28)

Cin Cin
where, ER = (Cin – Cout)/Cin is called as extraction ratio. It has no units and its value
ranges from zero (no elimination) to one (complete elimination). Based on ER values, drugs
can be classified into 3 groups:
1. Drugs with high ER (above 0.7),
2. Drugs with intermediate ER (between 0.7 to 0.3), and
3. Drugs with low ER (below 0.3).
ER is an index of how efficiently the eliminating organ clears the blood flowing through it
of drug. For example, an ER of 0.6 tells that 60% of the blood flowing through the organ will
be completely cleared of drug. The fraction of drug that escapes removal by the organ is
expressed as:
F = 1 - ER (9.29)
where, F = systemic availability when the eliminating organ is liver.
Hepatic Clearance: For certain drugs, the nonrenal clearance can be assumed as equal to
hepatic clearance ClH. It is given as:
ClH ClT - ClR (9.30)
An equation parallel to equation 9.28 can also be written for hepatic clearance:
(9.31)
ClH Q H ER H
where, QH = hepatic blood flow (about 1.5 liters/min), and
ERH = hepatic extraction ratio.
The hepatic clearance of drugs can be divided into two groups:
1. Drugs with hepatic blood flow rate-limited clearance, and
2. Drugs with intrinsic capacity-limited clearance.
1. Hepatic Blood Flow: When ERH is one, ClH approaches its maximum value i.e.
hepatic blood flow. In such a situation, hepatic clearance is said to be perfusion rate-limited
or flow-dependent. Alteration in hepatic blood flow significantly affects the elimination of
drugs with high ERH e.g. propranolol, lidocaine, etc. Such drugs are removed from the blood
as rapidly as they are presented to the liver (high first-pass hepatic metabolism). Indocyanine
green is so rapidly eliminated by the human liver that its clearance is often used as an
indicator of hepatic blood flow rate. First-pass hepatic extraction is suspected when there is
lack of unchanged drug in systemic circulation after oral administration. Maximum oral
availability F for such drugs can be computed from equation 9.29. An extension of the same
equation is the noncompartmental method of estimating F:
AUC oral
F 1 ER H (9.32)
AUC i.v.
TABLE 9.1
Influence of Blood Flow Rate and Protein Binding on Total Clearance of Drugs with
High and with Low ER Values
Changes in Total Clearance due to
Drugs with
Blood Flow Blood Flow Binding Binding
High ER (above 0.7) No change No change
Low ER (below 0.3) No change No change
where, = increase, and = decrease
On the contrary, hepatic blood flow has very little or no effect on drugs with low ER H e.g.
theophylline. For such drugs, whatever concentration of drug present in the blood perfuses
liver, is more than what the liver can eliminate (low first-pass hepatic metabolism). Similar
discussion can be extended to the influence of blood flow on renal clearance of drugs. This is
illustrated in Table 9.1. Hepatic clearance of a drug with high ER is independent of protein
binding.
2. Intrinsic Capacity Clearance: Denoted as Clint, it is defined as the inherent ability
of an organ to irreversibly remove a drug in the absence of any flow limitation . It depends,
in this case, upon the hepatic enzyme activity. Drugs with low ERH and with elimination
primarily by metabolism are greatly affected by changes in enzyme activity. Hepatic
clearance of such drugs is said to be capacity-limited, e.g. theophylline. The t½ of such
drugs show great intersubject variability. Hepatic clearance of drugs with low ER is
independent of blood flow rate but sensitive to changes in protein binding.
The hepatic and renal extraction ratios of some drugs and metabolites are given in Table
9.2.
TABLE 9.2
Hepatic and Renal Extraction Ratio of Some Drugs and Metabolites
Extraction Ratio
High Intermediate Low
Hepatic Extraction Propranolol Aspirin Diazepam
Lidocaine Codeine Phenobarbital
Nitroglycerine Nortriptyline Phenytoin
Morphine Quinidine Procainamide
Isoprenaline Theophylline
Renal Extraction Some penicillins Some penicillins Digoxin
Hippuric acid Procainamide Furosemide
Several sulphates Cimetidine Atenolol
Several glucuronides Tetracycline
Intravenous Infusion
Rapid i.v. injection is unsuitable when the drug has potential to precipitate toxicity or when
maintenance of a stable concentration or amount of drug in the body is desired. In such a
situation, the drug (for example, several antibiotics, theophylline, procainamide, etc.) is
administered at a constant rate (zero-order) by i.v. infusion. In contrast to the short duration
of infusion of an i.v. bolus (few seconds), the duration of constant rate infusion is usually
much longer than the half-life of the drug.
Advantages of zero-order infusion of drugs include—
1. Ease of control of rate of infusion to fit individual patient needs.
2. Prevents fluctuating maxima and minima (peak and valley) plasma level, desired
especially when the drug has a narrow therapeutic index.
3. Other drugs, electrolytes and nutrients can be conveniently administered
simultaneously by the same infusion line in critically ill patients.
The model can be represented as follows:
At any time during infusion, the rate of change in the amount of drug in the body, dX/dt is
the difference between the zero-order rate of drug infusion Ro and first-order rate of
elimination, –KEX:
dX
R0 KEX (9.33)
dt
Integration and rearrangement of above equation yields:
R0 -K t
X (1 e E ) (9.34)
KE
Since X = Vd C, the equation 9.34 can be transformed into concentration terms as follows:
R0 -K E t R0 -K E t
C (1 e ) (1 e ) (9.35)
K E Vd ClT
At the start of constant rate infusion, the amount of drug in the body is zero and hence,
there is no elimination. As time passes, the amount of drug in the body rises gradually
(elimination rate less than the rate of infusion) until a point after which the rate of elimination
equals the rate of infusion i.e. the concentration of drug in plasma approaches a constant
value called as steady-state , plateau or infusion equilibrium (Fig. 9.3.).
Fig. 9.3. Plasma concentration-time profile for a drug given by constant rate i.v. infusion (the
two curves indicate different infusion rates R o and 2Ro for the same drug)
At steady-state, the rate of change of amount of drug in the body is zero, hence, the
equation 9.33 becomes:
Zero R 0 K E X ss
or K E X ss R0
(9.36)
Transforming to concentration terms and rearranging the equation:

R0 R0 Infusion rate
Css i.e. (9.37)
K V Cl Clearance
E d T
where, Xss and Css are amount of drug in the body and concentration of drug in plasma at
steady-state respectively. The value of KE (and hence t½) can be obtained from the slope of
straight line obtained after a semilogarithmic plot (log C versus t) of the plasma
concentration-time data gathered from the time when infusion is stopped (Fig. 9.3).
Alternatively, KE can be calculated from the data collected during infusion to steady-state as
follows:
Substituting Ro/ClT = Css from equation 9.37 in equation 9.35 we get:
-KE t
C Css (1 - e ) (9.38)
Rearrangement yields:
Css - C
e-KEt (9.39)
Css
Transforming into log form, the equation becomes:

Css - C - KEt
log (9.40)
Css 2.303
A semilog plot of (Css – C)/Css versus t results in a straight line with slope –KE/2.303
(Fig. 9.4).
Fig. 9.4 Semilog plot to compute KE from infusion data upto steady-state
The time to reach steady-state concentration is dependent upon the elimination half-life
and not infusion rate. An increase in infusion rate will merely increase the plasma
concentration attained at steady-state (Fig. 9.3). If n is the number of half-lives passed since
the start of infusion (t/t½), equation 9.38 can be written as:
C Css 1 - (1/2) n (9.41)
The percent of Css achieved at the end of each t ½ is the sum of Css at previous t½ and the
concentration of drug remaining after a given t ½ (Table 9.3).
TABLE 9.3
Percent of Css attained at the end of a given t ½
Half-life % Remaining % Css Achieved
1 50 50
2 25 50 + 25 = 75
3 12.5 75 + 12.5 = 87.5
4 6.25 87.5 + 6.25 = 93.75
5 3.125 93.75 + 3.125 = 96.875
6 1.562 96.875 + 1.562 = 98.437
7 0.781 98.437 + 0.781 = 99.218
For therapeutic purpose, more than 90% of the steady-state drug concentration in the
blood is desired which is reached in 3.3 half-lives. It takes 6.6 half-lives for the
concentration to reach 99% of the steady-state. Thus, the shorter the half-life (e.g. penicillin
G, 30 min), sooner is the steady-state reached.
Infusion Plus Loading Dose: It takes a very long time for the drugs having longer half-
lives before the plateau concentration is reached (e.g. phenobarbital, 5 days). Thus, initially,
such drugs have subtherapeutic concentrations. This can be overcome by administering an
i.v. loading dose large enough to yield the desired steady-state immediately upon injection
prior to starting the infusion. It should then be followed immediately by i.v. infusion at a rate
enough to maintain this concentration (Fig. 9.5).
Fig. 9.5 Intravenous infusion with loading dose. As the amount of bolus dose remaining in
the body falls, there is a complementary rise resulting from the infusion
Recalling once again the relationship X = V dC, the equation for computing the loading
dose Xo,L can be given:
X 0,L Css Vd (9.42)
Substitution of Css = Ro/KEVd from equation 9.37 in above equation yields another
expression for loading dose in terms of infusion rate:
R0
X 0,L (9.43)
KE
The equation describing the plasma concentration-time profile following simultaneous i.v.
loading dose (i.v. bolus) and constant rate i.v. infusion is the sum of two equations describing
each process (i.e. modified equation 9.5 and 9.35):
X 0,L -K t R0
C e E (1 e -KE t ) (9.44)
Vd K E Vd
If we substitute CssVd for Xo,L (from equation 9.42) and CssKEVd for Ro (from equation
9.37) in above equation and simplify it, it reduces to C = C ss indicating that the concentration
of drug in plasma remains constant (steady) throughout the infusion time.
Assessment of Pharmacokinetic Parameters
The first-order elimination rate constant and elimination half-life can be computed from a
semilog plot of post-infusion concentration-time data. Equation 9.40 can also be used for the
same purpose. Apparent volume of distribution and total systemic clearance can be estimated
from steady-state concentration and infusion rate (equation 9.37). These two parameters can
also be computed from the total area under the curve (Fig. 9.3) till the end of infusion:
R 0T R 0T
AUC Css T (9.45)
K E Vd ClT
where, T = infusion time.
The above equation is a general expression which can be applied to several
pharmacokinetic models.

Extravascular Administration
When a drug is administered by extravascular route (e.g. oral, i.m., rectal, etc.), absorption is
a prerequisite for its therapeutic activity. Factors that influence drug absorption have already
been discussed in chapter 2. The rate of absorption may be described mathematically as a
zero-order or first-order process. A large number of plasma concentration-time profiles can
be described by a one-compartment model with first-order absorption and elimination.
However, under certain conditions, the absorption of some drugs may be better described by
assuming zero-order (constant rate) kinetics. Differences between zero-order and first-order
kinetics are illustrated in Fig. 9.6.
Fig. 9.6 Distinction between zero-order and first-order absorption processes. Figure a is
regular plot, and Figure b a semilog plot of amount of drug remaining to be
absorbed (ARA) versus time t.
Zero-order
of amount absorption
remaining to beisabsorbed
characterized
(ARA),by and
a constant rate ARA
its regular of absorption. It isisindependent
versus t plot linear with
slope equal to rate of absorption while the semilog plot is described by an ever-increasing
gradient with time. In contrast, the first-order absorption process is distinguished by a
decline in the rate with ARA i.e. absorption rate is dependent upon ARA; its regular plot is
curvilinear and semilog plot a straight line with absorption rate constant as its slope.
After e.v. administration, the rate of change in the amount of drug in the body dX/dt is the
difference between the rate of input (absorption) dX ev/dt and rate of output (elimination)
dXE/dt.
dX/dt = Rate of absorption – Rate of elimination

dX dXev dX E (9.46a)
dt dt dt
For a drug that follows one-compartment kinetics, the plasma concentration-time profile is
characterized by absorption phase, post-absorption phase and elimination phase (Fig. 9.7.).
Fig. 9.7 The absorption and elimination phases of the plasma concentration-time profile
obtained after extravascular administration of a single dose of a drug.
During the absorption phase, the rate of absorption is greater than the rate of elimination
dXev dX E
(9.46b)
dt dt
At peak plasma concentration, the rate of absorption equals the rate of elimination and the
change in amount of drug in the body is zero.
dXev dX E
(9.46c)
dt dt
During the post-absorption phase, there is some drug at the extravascular site still
remaining to be absorbed and the rate of elimination at this stage is greater than the
absorption rate.
dXev dX E
(9.46d)
dt dt
After completion of drug absorption, its rate becomes zero and the plasma level time curve
is characterized only by the elimination phase.
Zero-Order Absorption Model

This model is similar to that for constant rate infusion.
The rate of drug absorption, as in the case of several controlled drug delivery systems, is
constant and continues until the amount of drug at the absorption site (e.g. GIT) is depleted.
All equations that explain the plasma concentration-time profile for constant rate i.v. infusion
are also applicable to this model.
First-Order Absorption Model

For a drug that enters the body by a first-order absorption process, gets distributed in the
body according to one-compartment kinetics and is eliminated by a first-order process, the
model can be depicted as follows:
The differential form of the equation 9.46a is:

dX Ka Xa - K E X (9.47)
dt
where, Ka = first-order absorption rate constant, and
Xa = amount of drug at the absorption site remaining to be absorbed i.e. ARA.
Integration of equation 9.47 yields:
Ka F X0 -K t -K t
X e E -e a (9.48)
(K a - K E )
Transforming into concentration terms, the equation becomes:

K a F X0 -K E t -K a t
C V (K - K ) e -e (9.49)
d a E
where F = fraction of drug absorbed systemically after e.v. administration. A typical plasma
concentration-time profile of a drug administered e.v. is shown in Fig. 9.7.
Assessment of Pharmacokinetic Parameters

Cmax and tmax: At peak plasma concentration, the rate of absorption equals rate of
elimination i.e. KaXa = KEX and the rate of change in plasma drug concentration dC/dt =
zero. This rate can be obtained by differentiating equation 9.49.
dC Ka F X0 -K t
- K E e -KE t K a e a = Zero (9.50)
dt Vd (K a - K E )
On simplifying, the above equation becomes:
-K t -K t
KE e E Ka e a (9.51)
Converting to logarithmic form,

KEt Ka t
log K E - log K a - (9.52)
2.303 2.303
where t is t max. Rearrangement of above equation yields:
2.303log (K a /K E )
t max (9.53)
K -K
a E
The above equation shows that as K a becomes larger than KE, tmax becomes smaller
since (Ka – KE) increases much faster than log K a/KE. Cmax can be obtained by
substituting equation 9.53 in equation 9.49. However, a simpler expression for the same is:
F X 0 -K E t max
C max e (9.54)
Vd
It has been shown that at C max, when Ka = KE, t max = 1/KE. Hence, the above equation
further reduces to:
F X 0 -1 0.37 F X 0
C max e (9.55)
Vd
Vd
Since FXo/Vd represents Co following i.v. bolus, the maximum plasma concentration that
can be attained after e.v. administration is just 37% of the maximum level attainable with i.v.
bolus in the same dose. If bioavailability is less than 100%, still lower concentration will be
attained.
Elimination Rate Constant: This parameter can be computed from the elimination phase
of the plasma level time profile. For most drugs administered e.v., absorption rate is
significantly greater than the elimination rate i.e. K at >> KEt. Hence, one can say that e–Kat
approaches zero much faster than does e –KEt. At such a stage, when absorption is complete,
the change in plasma concentration is dependent only on elimination rate and equation 9.49
reduces to:
Ka F X0 -K t
C e E (9.56)
Vd (K a K E )
Transforming into log form, the equation becomes:

K a F X0 KEt
log C log Vd (K a K E ) 2.303 (9.57)
A plot of log C versus t yields a straight line with slope –KE/2.303 (half-life can then be
computed from KE). KE can also be estimated from urinary excretion data ( see the section
on urinary excretion data).
Absorption Rate Constant: It can be calculated by the method of residuals. The
technique is also known as feathering , peeling and stripping. It is commonly used in
pharmacokinetics to resolve a multiexponential curve into its individual components. For a
drug that follows one-compartment kinetics and administered e.v., the concentration of drug
in plasma is expressed by a biexponential equation 9.49.
C K a F X0 -K t -K t
e E -e a (9.49)
Vd (K a - K E )
If KaFXo/Vd(Ka-KE) = A, a hybrid constant, then:

C A e-KE t - A e-Ka t (9.58)
During the elimination phase, when absorption is almost over, Ka >> KE and the value of
second exponential e–Kat approaches zero whereas the first exponential e –KEt retains some
finite value. At this time, the equation 9.58 reduces to:
-K t

C A e E (9.59)
In log form, the above equation is:

 KEt
log C log A - (9.60)
2.303

where C represents the back extrapolated plasma concentration values. A plot of log C
versus t yields a biexponential curve with a terminal linear phase having slope –KE/2.303
(Fig. 9.8). Back extrapolation of this straight line to time zero yields y-intercept equal to log
A.
Fig. 9.8 Plasma concentration-time profile after oral administration of a single dose of a
drug. The biexponential curve has been resolved into its two components—
absorption and elimination.
Subtraction of true plasma concentration values i.e. equation 9.58 from the extrapolated
plasma concentration values i.e. equation 9.59 yields a series of residual concentration values
Cr :

( C - C) C A e -Ka t (9.61)
In log form, the equation is:
Ka t
log C log A - (9.62)
2.303
A plot of log Cr versus t yields a straight line with slope –Ka/2.303 and Y-intercept log A
(Fig. 9.8). Absorption half-life can then be computed from Ka using the relation 0.693/Ka.
Thus, the method of residuals enables resolution of the biexponential plasma level-time curve
into its two exponential components. The technique works best when the difference between
Ka and KE is large (Ka/KE 3). In some instances, the KE obtained after i.v. bolus of the
same drug is very large, much larger than the K a obtained by the method of residuals (e.g.
isoprenaline) and if KE/Ka 3, the terminal slope estimates K a and not KE whereas the slope
of residual line gives KE and not Ka. This is called as flip-flop phenomenon since the slopes
of the two lines have exchanged their meanings.
Ideally, the extrapolated and the residual lines intersect each other on y-axis i.e. at time t =
zero and there is no lag in absorption. However, if such an intersection occurs at a time
greater than zero, it indicates time lag. It is defined as the time difference between drug
administration and start of absorption. It is denoted by symbol to and represents the
beginning of absorption process. Lag time should not be confused with onset time.
The above method for the estimation of Ka is a curve-fitting method. The method is best
suited for drugs which are rapidly and completely
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar absorbed and follow one-compartment 225/413
kinetics even when given i.v. However, if the absorption of the drug is affected in some way
such as GI motility or enzymatic degradation and if the drug shows multicompartment
characteristics after i.v. administration (which is true for virtually all drugs), then K a
computed by curve-fitting method is incorrect even if the drug were truly absorbed by first-
order kinetics. The Ka so obtained is at best, estimate of first-order disappearance of drug
from the GIT rather than of first-order appearance in the systemic circulation.
Wagner-Nelson Method for Estimation of K a
One of the better alternatives to curve-fitting method in the estimation of K a is Wagner-
Nelson method. The method involves determination of Ka from percent unabsorbed-time
plots and does not require the assumption of zero- or first-order absorption.
After oral administration of a single dose of a drug, at any given time, the amount of drug
absorbed into the systemic circulation X A, is the sum of amount of drug in the body X and
the amount of drug eliminated from the body XE. Thus:
XA X XE (9.63)
The amount of drug in the body is X = VdC. The amount of drug eliminated at any time t
can be calculated as follows:
X E K E Vd [AUC] 0t (9.64)
Substitution of values of X and XE in equation 9.63 yields:

XA Vd C K E Vd [AUC] 0t (9.65)
The total amount of drug absorbed into the systemic circulation from time zero to infinity
XA can be given as:
XA Vd C K E Vd [AUC] 0 (9.66)
Since at t = , C = 0, the above equation reduces to:
X A K E Vd [AUC] 0 (9.67)
The fraction of drug absorbed at any time t is given as:

X A Vd C K E Vd [AUC] t0
XA K E Vd [AUC] 0
C K E [AUC] t0
(9.68)
K E [AUC] 0
Percent drug unabsorbed at any time is therefore:
XA C K E [AUC] t0
%ARA 1- 100 1 100 (9.69)
XA K E [AUC] 0
Fig. 9.9 Semilog plot of percent ARA versus t according to Wagner-Nelson method.
Similar plot is obtained for Loo-Reigelman method
The method requires collection of blood samples after a single oral dose at regular
intervals of time till the entire amount of drug is eliminated from the body. KE is obtained
from log C versus t plot and [AUC]o t and [AUC]o are obtained from plots of C versus t. A
semilog plot of percent unabsorbed (i.e. percent ARA) versus t yields a straight line whose
slope is –Ka/2.303 (Fig.9.9). If a regular plot of the same is a straight line, then absorption is
zero-order.
Ka can similarly be estimated from urinary excretion data ( see the relevant section). The
biggest disadvantage of Wagner-Nelson method is that it applies only to drugs with one-
compartment characteristics. Problem arises when a drug that obeys one-compartment model
after e.v. administration shows multicompartment characteristics on i.v. injection.
Effect of Ka and KE on Cmax, tmax and AUC

A summary of the influence of changes in K a at constant KE and of KE at constant Ka on
Cmax, tmax and AUC of a drug administered e.v. is shown in Table 9.4.
TABLE 9.4
Influence of Ka and KE on Cmax, tmax and AUC
Parameters Influence when KE is constant Influence when Ka is constant
affected Smaller Ka Larger Ka Smaller KE Larger KE
Cmax
tmax Long Short Long Short
AUC No Change No Change
where, = increase and = decrease.
Apparent Volume of Distribution and Clearance: For a drug that follows one-
compartment kinetics after e.v. administration, V d and ClT can be computed from equation
9.15b and 9.22b respectively where F is the fraction absorbed into the systemic circulation.
F X0
Vd (9.15b)
K E AUC
F X0
ClT (9.22b)
AUC
URINARY EXCRETION DATA

(Disposition Viewed from Urine only)
In the absence of plasma level-time data, useful information can still be obtained from urine
data regarding elimination kinetics of a drug. The method has several advantages in the
analysis of a pharmacokinetic system:
1. The method is useful when there is lack of sufficiently sensitive analytical techniques
to measure concentration of drugs in plasma with accuracy.
2. The method is non-invasive and therefore better subject compliance is assured.
3. The method is more convenient since it involves collection of urine samples in
comparison to drawing of blood periodically.
4. A less sensitive analytical method is required for determining urine drug concentration
as compared to plasma concentrations. If urine drug concentrations are low, assaying
of larger sample volumes is relatively easy.
5. First-order elimination, excretion and absorption rate constants and fraction excreted
unchanged can be computed from such data. First-order metabolism or extra-renal
excretion rate constant can also be calculated subsequently from the difference (K E –
Ke) = Km.
6. Direct measurement of bioavailability, both absolute and relative, is possible without
the necessity of fitting the data to a mathematical model.
7. When coupled with plasma level-time data, it can also be used to estimate renal
clearance of unchanged drug according to following equation:
Total amount of drug excreted unchanged
ClR (9.70)
Area under the plasma level - time curve
If Vd is known, total systemic clearance and nonrenal clearance can also be calculated.
One cannot, however, compute Vd and ClT from urine data alone. One must also
remember that urinary excretion data is not an accurate substitute for the plasma level data.
At best, the data can be employed as a rough estimate of the pharmacokinetic parameters.
Moreover, if the drug product provides a very slow drug release or if the drug has a very long
biological half-life, the resulting low urinary drug concentration may be too dilute to be
assessed with accuracy. In the latter case, i.e. for drugs with long t ½, urine may have to be
collected for several days to account for total drug excreted.
Criteria for Obtaining Valid Urinary Excretion Data

1. A significant amount of drug must be excreted unchanged in the urine (at least 10%).
2. The analytical method must be specific for the unchanged drug; metabolites should
not interfere.
3. Water-loading should be done by taking 400 ml of water after fasting overnight, to
promote diuresis and enable collection of sufficient urine samples.
4. Before administration of drug, the bladder must be emptied completely after 1 hour
from water-loading and the urine sample taken as blank. The drug should then be
administered with 200 ml of water and should be followed by 200 ml given at hourly
intervals for the next 4 hours. 228/413
5. Volunteers must be instructed to completely empty their bladder while collecting

urine samples.
6. Frequent sampling should be done in order to obtain a good curve.
7. During sampling, the exact time and volume of urine excreted should be noted.
8. An
drugindividual collection
and ideally should beperiod should less.
considerably not exceed one biological half-life of the
9. Urine samples must be collected for at least 7 biological half-lives in order to
ensure collection of more than 99% of excreted drug.
10. Changes in urine pH and urine volume may alter the urinary excretion rate.
TABLE 9.5
Urinary Excretion Data following i.v. Bolus of 100 mg of a Drug
Observations Treatment of data
Sample Time of Volume Conc. of Urine Midpoint Amount Excret. Cumul. Amount
urine of urine unchanged collection of urine excreted rate amount remaining
collection collected drug in interval collection in time (mg/H) excreted to be
t (hrs) (ml) urine dt (or t) t* interval Xut (mg) excreted
(mcg/ml) dXu/dt (Xu – Xut)
or Xu (mg)
(mg)
0 0 - - - - - - 0 66.7
1 0–2 140 250 2 1 35.0 17.5 35.0 31.7
2 2–4 150 100 2 3 15.0 7.5 50.0 16.7
3 4–6 90 80 2 5 7.2 3.6 57.2 9.5
4 6–8 200 20 2 7 4.0 2.0 61.2 5.5
5 8 –12 310 10 4 10 3.1 0.8 64.3 2.4
6 12 – 24 600 04 12 18 2.4 0.2 [66.7] -
Xu
The urine data can be set as shown in the Table 9.5. Observations include times of urine
collection, volumes collected and concentration of unchanged drug in each sample. These
data are treated to derive further information.
Determination of KE from Urinary Excretion Data

The first-order elimination (and excretion) rate constants can be computed from urine data by
two methods:
1. Rate of excretion method, and
2. Sigma-minus method.
Rate of Excretion Method: The rate of urinary drug excretion dXu/dt is proportional to
the amount of drug in the body X and written as:
dX u
KeX (9.71)
dt
where Ke = first-order urinary excretion rate constant. According to first-order disposition
kinetics, X = Xo e–KEt (equation 9.5). Substituting it in above equation yields:
dX u -K E t
(9.72)
e 0
dt K X e
where Xo = dose administered (i.v. bolus). Transforming to log form the equation becomes:
dX u KEt
log log K e X 0 - (9.73)
dt 2.303
The above equation states that a semilog plot of rate of excretion versus time yields a
straight line with slope –KE/2.303 (Fig. 9.10). It must therefore be remembered that the
slope of such an excretion rate versus time plot is related to elimination rate constant K E and
not to excretion rate constant Ke. The excretion rate constant can be obtained from the Y-
intercept (log Ke Xo). Elimination half-life and nonrenal elimination rate constant can then
be computed from KE and Ke.
An advantage of excretion rate method is that for drugs having long half-lives, urine may
be collected for only 3 to 4 half-lives. Moreover, there is no need to collect all urine samples
since collection of any two consecutive urine samples yield points on the rate plot from
which a straight line can be constructed.
Fig. 9.10 Semilog plot of excretion rate versus mid-point time of urine collection
period for computing elimination rate constant after i.v. bolus
administration.
Sigma-Minus Method: A disadvantage of rate of excretion method in estimating KE is
that fluctuations in the rate of drug elimination are observed to a high degree and in most
instances, the data are so scattered that an estimate of half-life is difficult. These problems
can be minimized by using the alternative approach called as sigma-minus method.
From an earlier equation:

dX u
K e X 0 e -K E t (9.72)
dt
Integration of equation 9.72 yields:
K E X0
Xu (1 - e -K E t ) (9.74)
KE
where Xu = cumulative amount of drug excreted unchanged in urine at any time t. As time
approaches infinity i.e. after 6 to 7 half-lives, the value e –KE becomes zero and therefore
the cumulative amount excreted at infinite time Xu can be given by equation:

KeX0
Xu (9.75)
KE
Substitution of equation 9.75 in equation 9.74 and rearrangement yields:

-KE t
X -X X e (9.76)
u u u
Converting to logarithms, we get:

KEt
log (X u - X u ) log X u - (9.77)
2.303
where (Xu – Xu) = amount remaining to be excreted i.e. ARE at any given time. A
semilog plot of ARE versus t yields a straight line with slope -K E/2.303. The method is,
therefore, also called as ARE plot method. A disadvantage of this method is that total urine
collection has to be carried out until no unchanged drug can be detected in the urine i.e. upto
7 half-lives, which may be tedious for drugs having long t½.
The equations until now for computing KE from the urinary excretion data apply to a drug
that fits one-compartment model and given as i.v. bolus. Similarly, data obtained during
constant rate i.v. infusion can be used to evaluate the elimination rate constant. The equation
that describes the urinary excretion rate of unchanged drug when administered as i.v. bolus
also applies when it is administered as i.v. infusion. Thus:
dX u
KeX (9.71)
dt
For a drug given as i.v. infusion, the amount of drug in the body X is given by equation
(described earlier):
X R 0 (1 e -K E t ) (9.34)
KE
Substitution of equation 9.34 in equation 9.71 and integration of the same yields:
KeR 0t KeR 0 -K E t
Xu 2
(1 e ) (9.78)
KE KE
When the drug has been infused for a period long enough to attain steady-state in the
plasma, the term e–KEt approaches zero and the above equation reduces to:
KeR 0t KeR 0
Xu 2
(9.79)
K E K E
A regular plot of cumulative amount of drug excreted X u versus t yields a curvilinear plot
the linear portion of which has a slope K eRo/KE. Extrapolation of linear segment to time
axis yields x-intercept equal to 1/KE since when Xu = 0, t= 1/KE (Fig. 9.11).
Fig. 9.11. Regular plot of Xu versus t during constant rate i.v. infusion
Relationships for rate of excretion when the drug is administered e.v. can also be given
similarly. Thus:
dX u
KeX (9.71)
dt
For a drug given e.v. and absorbed by a first-order process, X is given as:
Ka F X0 -K t -K t
X e E -e a (9.48)
(K a - K E )
Substitution of equation 9.48 in equation 9.71 and integration of the same yields:
-Ka t
K eKa F X0 1 e-KE t K Ee
Xu (9.80)
KE Ka (K E Ka ) K a (K E Ka )
At time infinity, the equation 9.80 reduces to:
K e F X0
Xu (9.81)
KE
Substitution of equation 9.81 in equation 9.80 and subsequent rearrangement yields:

Xu -K t
ARE (X u - X u ) (K a e -K E t K E e a ) (9.82)
(K E K a )
A semilog plot of (Xu – Xu) versus t results in a biexponential curve and if K a > KE, the
slope of the terminal linear portion of the curve will define K E of the drug. The absorption
rate constant Ka can be estimated by the method of residuals using the same data i.e. equation
9.82.
Urinary excretion data after oral administration can also be treated according to Wagner-
Nelson method to calculate K a by construction of % ARA plots. The method requires urine
collection for sufficiently long time to ensure accurate estimation of KE but need not be
collected to time infinity. The equation derived to relate % ARA with urinary excretion rate
is:
XA dXu /dt K E Xu
% ARA 1 100 1 100 (9.83)
XA K E Xu
A semilog plot of % ARA versus t yields a straight line with slope –Ka/2.303.
Accurate determination of Ka from urinary excretion data is possible only for drugs with
slow rate of absorption since for drugs with rapid absorption, collection of urine samples at
very short intervals of time is difficult.
MULTICOMPARTMENT MODELS
(Delayed Distribution Models)
One-compartment model adequately describes pharmacokinetics of many drugs.
Instantaneous distribution equilibrium is assumed in such cases and decline in the amount of
drug in the body with time is expressed by an equation with a monoexponential term (i.e.
elimination). However, instantaneous distribution is not truly possible for an even larger
number of drugs and drug disposition is not monoexponential but bi- or multi-exponential.
This is because the body is composed of a heterogeneous group of tissues each with different
degree of blood flow and affinity for drug and therefore different rates of equilibration.
Ideally, a true pharmacokinetic model should be the one with a rate constant for each tissue
undergoing equilibrium, which is difficult mathematically. Multicompartment models are
thus based on following assumptions –
1. Blood/plasma and the highly perfused tissues such as tissues such as brain, heart,
lung, liver and kidneys constitute the central compartment.
2. Other tissues with similar distribution characteristics are pooled together to constitute
peripheral compartments tissues on the basis of similarity in their distribution
characteristics.
3. Intravenously administered medications are introduced directly into the central
compartment.
4. Irreversible drug elimination, either by hepatic biotransformation or renal excretion,
takes place only from the central compartment.
5. Reversible distribution occurs between central and peripheral compartments, with a
finite time required for distribution equilibrium to be attained.
6. After drug equilibration between drug and the peripheral compartments, elimination
of drug follows first-order kinetics.
7. All rate processes involving passage of drug in and out of individual compartment are
first-order processes and plasma level-time curve is best described by sum of series of
exponential terms each corresponding to first-order rate processes associated with a
given compartment.
8. The peripheral compartment is usually inaccessible to direct measurement and is not a
site of drug elimination or clearance
Multicompartment characteristics of a drug are best understood by giving it as i.v.

bolus and observing the manner in which the plasma concentration declines with time. The
number of exponentials required to describe such a plasma level-time profile determines the
number of kinetically homogeneous compartments into which a drug will distribute.
TWO-COMPARTMENT OPEN MODEL

The commonest of all multicompartment models
into 2 iscategories
model, the body tissues are broadly classified a two-compartment
– model. In such a
1. Central Compartment or Compartment 1 comprising of blood and highly perfused

tissues like liver, lungs, kidneys, etc. that equilibrate with the drug rapidly.
Elimination usually occurs from this compartment.
2. Peripheral or Tissue Compartment or Compartment 2 comprising of poorly
perfused and slow equilibrating tissues such as muscles, skin, adipose, etc. and
considered as a hybrid of several functional physiologic units.
Classification of a particular tissue, for example brain, into central or peripheral
compartment depends upon the physicochemical properties of the drug. A highly lipophilic
drug can cross the BBB and brain would then be included in the central compartment. In
contrast, a polar drug cannot penetrate the BBB and brain in this case will be a part of
peripheral compartment despite the fact that it is a highly perfused organ.
The plasma concentration for a drug that follows a two-compartment model declines
biexponentially as the sum of two first-order processes – distribution and elimination.
Depending upon the compartment from which the drug is eliminated, the two-
compartment model can be categorized into 3 types:
1. Two-compartment model with elimination from central compartment.
2. Two-compartment model with elimination from peripheral compartment.
3. Two-compartment model with elimination from both the compartments.
In the absence of information, elimination is assumed to occur exclusively from central
compartment.
Two-Compartment Open Model

Intravenous Bolus Administration
The model can be depicted as shown below with elimination from the central compartment.
After the i.v. bolus of a drug that follows two-compartment kinetics, the decline in plasma
concentration is biexponential indicating the presence of two disposition processes viz.
distribution and elimination. These two processes are not evident to the eyes in a regular
arithmetic plot but when a semilog plot of C versus t is made, they can be identified (Fig.
9.12). Initially, the concentration of drug in the central compartment declines rapidly; this is
due to the distribution of drug from the central compartment to the peripheral compartment.
The phase during which this occurs is therefore called as the distributive phase. After
sometime, a pseudo-distribution equilibrium is achieved between the two compartments
following which the subsequent loss of drug from the central compartment is slow and
mainly due to elimination. This second, slower rate process is called as the post-
distributive or elimination phase. In contrast to the central compartment, the drug
concentration in the peripheral compartment first increases and reaches a maximum. This
corresponds with the distribution phase. Following peak, the drug concentration declines
which corresponds to the post-distributive phase (Fig.9.12).
Fig. 9.12. Changes in drug concentration in the central (plasma) and the peripheral
compartment after i.v. bolus of a drug that fits two-compartment model.
Let K12 and K21 be the first-order distribution rate constants depicting drug transfer
between the central and the peripheral compartments and let subscript c and p define central
and peripheral compartment respectively. The rate of change in drug concentration in the
central compartment is given by:
dCc
K 21Cp K12Cc K E Cc (9.84)
dt
Extending the relationship X = VdC to the above equation, we have
dCc K 21X p K12 X c K EXc
(9.85)
dt Vp Vc Vc
where Xc and Xp are the amounts of drug in the central and peripheral compartments
respectively and Vc and Vp are the apparent volumes of the central and the peripheral
compartment respectively. The rate of change in drug concentration in the peripheral
compartment is given by:
dCc
K12C c K 21C p (9.86)
dt
K12 X c K 21X p
Vc Vp (9.87)
Integration of equations 9.85 and 9.87 yields equations that describe the concentration of
drug in the central and peripheral compartments at any given time t:
X0 K 21 α αt K 21 β βt
Cc e e (9.88)
Vc β α α β
X0 K12 αt K12 βt
Cp e e (9.89)
Vp β α α β
where Xo = i.v. bolus dose, and are hybrid first-order constants for the rapid
distribution phase and the slow elimination phase respectively which depend entirely upon
the first-order constants K12, K21 and KE.
The constants K12 and K21 that depict reversible transfer of drug between compartments
are called
between as microconstants
hybrid or are
and microconstants transfer constants.
given as: The mathematical relationships
α β K12 K 21 KE (9.90)
αβ K 21K E (9.91)
Equation 9.88 can be written in simplified form as:
Cc Ae -αα Be βt
(9.92)
Cc Distribution exponent Elimination exponent

where A and B are also hybrid constants for the two exponents and can be resolved
graphically by the method of residuals.
X 0 K 21 α K 21 α
A C0
Vc β α β α (9.93)
X 0 K 21 β K 21 β
B C0
Vc α β α β (9.94)
where Co = plasma drug concentration immediately after i.v. injection.
Method
drug oftwo
that fits Residuals: The biexponential
compartment model can bedisposition curve
resolved into its obtained after
individual i.v. bolus
exponents byofthea
method of residuals. Rewriting the equation 9.92:
Cc Ae -αα Be βt
(9.92)
As apparent from the biexponential curve given in Fig. 9.12., the initial decline due to
distribution is more rapid than the terminal decline due to elimination i.e. the rate constant
>> ß and hence the term e – t approaches zero much faster than does e – t. Thus, equation
9.92 reduces to:

βt
C Be (9.95)
In log form, the equation becomes:

βt
log C log B (9.96)
2.303
where C = back extrapolated plasma concentration values. A semilog plot of C versus t
yields the terminal linear phase of the curve having slope – /2.303 and when back
extrapolated to time zero, yields y-intercept log B (Fig. 9.13.).The t ½ for the elimination
phase can be obtained from equation t½ = 0.693/ .
Subtraction of extrapolated plasma concentration values of the elimination phase (equation
9.95) from the corresponding true plasma concentration values (equation 9.92) yields a series
of residual concentration values C r.
αt
Cr C C Ae (9.97)
In log form, the equation becomes:

αt
log Cr log A (9.98)
2.303
A semilog plot of Cr versus t yields a straight line with slope – /2.303 and Y-intercept log
A (Fig. 9.13).
Fig. 9.13. Resolution of biexponential plasma concentration-time curve by the method of

residuals for a drug that follows two-compartment kinetics on i.v. bolus
administration.
Assessment of Pharmacokinetic Parameters: All the parameters of equation 9.92 can be
resolved by the method of residuals as described above. Other parameters of the model viz.
K12, K21, KE, etc. can now be derived by proper substitution of these values.
C0 A B (9.99)
αβC0
KE (9.100)
Aβ Bα
A B (β - α) 2
K12 (9.101)
C 0 (A β B α)
Aβ Bα
K 21 (9.102)
C0
It must be noted that for two-compartment model, KE is the rate constant for elimination
of drug from the central compartment and is the rate constant for elimination from the
entire body. Overall elimination t½ should therefore be calculated from .
Area under the plasma concentration-time curve can be obtained by the following
equation:
A B
AUC (9.103)
α β
The apparent volume of central compartment Vc is given as:
Vd X0 X0 (9.104)
C0 K E AUC
Apparent volume of peripheral compartment can be obtained from equation:

V c K12
Vp (9.105)
K 21
The apparent volume of distribution at steady-state or equilibrium can now be defined as:
Vd, ss Vc Vp (9.106)
It is also given as:

X0
Vd,area (9.107)
β AUC
Total systemic clearance is given as:
Cl T βVd (9.108)
The pharmacokinetic parameters can also be calculated by using urinary excretion data:
dXu
K e Vc (9.109)
dt
An equation identical to equation 9.92 can be derived for rate of excretion of unchanged
drug in urine:
dX u
K e A e- α t K e B e- β t (9.110)
dt
The above equation can be resolved into individual exponents by the method of residuals
as described for plasma concentration-time data.
Renal clearance is given as:
Cl R K e Vc (9.111)

Intravenous Infusion
The model can be depicted as shown below with elimination from the central
compartment.
The plasma or central compartment concentration of a drug that fits two-compartment

model when administered as constant rate (zero-order) i.v. infusion, is given by equation:
R0 KE β αt KE α βt
C 1 e e (9.112)
Vc K E β α α β
At steady-state (i.e. at time infinity), the second and the third term in the bracket becomes
zero and the equation reduces to:
R0
Css (9.113)
Vc K E
Now VcKE = Vdß. Substituting this in equation 9.113, we get:
R0 R0
Css (9.114)
Vd β ClT
The loading dose Xo,L to obtain Css immediately at the start of infusion can be calculated
from equation:
R0
X 0,L Css Vc (9.115)
KE

Extravascular Administration – First-Order Absorption
The model can be depicted as follows:
For a drug that enters the body by a first-order absorption process and distributed
according to two-compartment model, the rate of change in drug concentration in the central
compartment is described by 3 exponents —an absorption exponent, and the two usual
exponents that describe drug disposition.
The plasma concentration at any time t is given by equation:
-Ka t t t
C Ne
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/biopharmaceutics-brahmankar Le Me 239/413
(9.116)
C Absorption exponent Distribution exponent Elimination exponent

where Ka, and have usual meanings. L, M and N are coefficients.
The 3 exponents can be resolved by stepwise application of method of residuals assuming
Ka > > as shown in Fig. 9.14. The various pharmacokinetic parameters can then be
estimated.
Fig. 9.14. Semilog plot of C versus t of a drug with two-compartment characteristics

when administered extravascularly. The various exponents have been resolved by
the method of residuals.
Besides the method of residuals, K a can also be estimated by Loo-Riegelman method for
a drug that follows two-compartment characteristics. This method is in contrast to the
Wagner-Nelson method for determination of K a of a drug with one-compartment
characteristics. The Loo-Riegelman method requires plasma drug concentration-time data
both after oral and i.v. administration of the drug to the same subject at different times in
order to obtain all the necessary kinetic constants. Despite its complexity, the method can be
applied to drugs that distribute in any number of compartments.
QUESTIONS
1. In one-compartment open model, what do you infer from plasma being called as reference
compartment?
2. In compartment modelling, what does the term open mean?
3. Disposition of a drug that follows one-compartment kinetics is a monoexponential
process. Explain.
4. Why do first-order rate equations require logarithmic transformations?
5. With examples, explain what you understand by primary and secondary parameters.
6. The expression Vd = Xo/Co can only be used to estimate the apparent volume of
distribution of a drug that follows one-compartment kinetics when administered as i.v.
bolus. Why?
7. Clearance is a more important parameter than half-life or elimination rate constant in
expressing elimination characteristics of a drug. Explain.
8. Define clearance, total body clearance and organ clearance. What are the advantages of
expressing clearance at an individual organ level?
9. Define and explain extraction ratio. How is it related to oral availability of a drug? What
is the influence of blood flow rate and protein binding on total clearance of drugs with
high and those with low ER values?
10. What are the rate-limiting steps in the hepatic clearance of drugs? Based on ERH values,
to which drugs do they apply?
11. What are the advantages of administering a drug by constant rate i.v. infusion?
12. Compute mathematically the number of half-lives required to attain 90% of steady-state
concentration after i.v. infusion ( Hint : use equation 9.41).
13. Prove mathematically that when an i.v. loading dose is followed immediately by a
constant rate infusion, the plasma concentration remains steady as long as the infusion is
continued.
14. On what parameters does the time to reach steady-state depend?
15. How can the steady-state be attained rapidly? When is it advisable? Give expressions for
calculating such doses for a drug that fits one-compartment model.
16. Compare the absorption characteristics of drugs absorbed by zero-order with those
absorbed by a first-order process after e.v. administration.
17. Show that after e.v. administration, the C that can be attained is no more than 37% of
max
maximum level attainable with the same dose given as i.v. bolus. Why is this so?
18. What are the applications and limitations of method of residuals?
19. What is flip-flop phenomenon and when is it observed?
20. Under what circumstances is the value of K a computed from method of residuals
incorrect?
21. What are the merits and demerits of Wagner-Nelson method in computing K a?
22. What is the influence of K a and KE on Cmax, tmax and AUC?
23. What criteria are necessary for obtaining a valid urinary excretion data? What are the
advantages
parameters? and disadvantages of such a method in assessment of pharmacokinetic
24. What are the two methods for calculating KE from urinary excretion data? Compare their
merits and demerits.
25. Why are urine samples required to be collected for at least 7 biological half-lives when
using sigma-minus method whereas only two consecutive urine samples are sufficient in
case of rate of excretion method?
26. Determination of Ka using urinary excretion data is not suitable for rapidly absorbed
drugs. Why?
27. How are body tissues classified in a two-compartment model? Depending upon the
drug’s lipophilicity, in which compartment brain should be included?
28. What is the cause of initial rapid decline and of subsequent slower decline in plasma
levels after administration of a drug that follows two-compartment kinetics?
29. The parameter KE has different meanings for one- and two-compartment models.
Explain.
30. If theand
10.0 plasma concentration
5.5 mcg/ml of 4viomycin
at 2 and after i.v. bolus
hours respectively, administration
assuming was found
one-compartment to be
kinetics,
calculate:
a. the half-life of the drug
Answer : 2.3 hours.
b. the concentration of drug in plasma at time zero
Answer : 18.2 mcg/ml.
c. the Vd if dose administered was 300 mg
Answer : 16.5 liters.
d. the total systemic clearance

Answer : 82.2 ml/min.
e. the renal clearance if fraction excreted unchanged in urine is 0.8
Answer : 65.8 ml/min.
31. A 70 Kg patient is to be given oubain by i.v. infusion. The drug has a half-life of 22
hours, apparent Vd 15.7 liters and the desired steady-state plasma concentration is 0.0002
mcg/ml. Assuming one-compartment kinetics, calculate:
a. the time required to reach 90% of C ss
Answer : 73 hours.
b. the infusion rate to achieve the desired Css
Answer : 0.1 mcg/hour.
c. the loading dose to attain C ss rapidly
Answer : 3.14 mcg.
d. the concentration of drug in plasma after 48 hours from the start of infusion
Answer : 0.00014 mcg/ml and when loading dose is given, 0.00018 mcg/ml.
32. The equation that best fits the pharmacokinetics of paracetamol after oral administration
of 500 mg dose is:
C = 1.18 (e–0.24t – e–1.6t)
Assuming one-compartment kinetics, determine—
a. peak time
Answer : 1.4 hours.
b. peak plasma concentration
c. elimination half-life of the drug
Answer : 2.88 hours.
d. apparent Vd if fraction bioavailable is 0.4
Answer : 200 liters.
e. concentration of drug in plasma after 3 hours of administration

33. The equation that best fits the plasma level time curve of azlocillin after an i.v. bolus dose
of 2000 mg (assuming one-compartment kinetics) is:
C = 143 e–0.87t
a. What is the apparent Vd?

Answer : 14 liters.
b. What is the elimination t½ of the drug?
Answer : 0.8 Hours.
c. What will be the plasma drug concentration after 6 hours?
d. How much of the drug will be left in the body after 6 hours?
Answer : 10.8 mg.
e. When should the next dose be administered if the drug becomes ineffective when the
plasma level falls below 50 mcg/ml?
Answer : after 1.2 hours.
f. What will be the therapeutic index of the drug if the therapeutic range is 50 to 500
mcg/ml?
Answer : TI = 10.
g. How much dose should be administered to attain an instantaneous plasma concentration
of 500 mcg/ml?
Answer : 7000 mg.
h. For how long will the plasma level lie in the therapeutic window if the above dose is
given as i.v. bolus?
Answer : 2.6 hours.
34. The amount of drug excreted in urine after an i.v. dose of 400 mg of norfloxacin was as
follows:
t (hours) Xu (mg) dXu/dt (mg/H) t*
0 0
2 49.05
4 80.0
After completing the table and using rate of excretion method, determine —
a. the elimination rate constant and half-life of the drug.
Answer : KE = 0.2303/hour and t½ = 3 hours.
b. urinary excretion rate constant
Answer : Ke = 0.077/hour.
c. fraction of drug excreted unchanged in urine
Answer : 33.4%
d. whether the drug can be used for urinary tract infections?
35. The half-life of propranolol in a 60 Kg patient is 4 hours and V d is 5.5 liter/Kg.
a. Determine the total systemic clearance of the drug
Answer : ClT = 953 ml/min.

b. What will be its renal clearance if fraction excreted unchanged in urine is 0.047?
Answer : ClR = 44.8 ml/min.
c. Comment on the mechanism of renal excretion of drug.
d. If the drug is eliminated only by hepatic and renal routes, what will be the hepatic
extraction ratio if blood flow to the liver is 1.5 liter/min?
Answer : ERH = 0.6054.
e. If the blood flow rate to the liver reduces to 0.8 liter/min in situations of CCF, what will
be the new hepatic and total systemic clearance values?
Answer : ClH = 484.4 ml/min and ClT = 529.2 ml/min.
f. What is the % decrease in the overall clearance of the drug?
Answer : 44.5%.
36. Following a 650 mg i.v. bolus dose of a drug to a 65 Kg subject, the plasma drug
concentration was found to decline biexponentially. The equation that best described the
drug kinetics was:
C = 67 e–14t + 33 e–3t
where t is in hours and C is in mcg/ml. Calculate the following:
a. The volume of the central compartment.
Answer : Vc = 6.5 liters.
b. The volume of the peripheral compartment.
Answer : Vp = 3.95 liters.
c. The apparent Vd at steady-state.

Answer : Vd,ss = 10.45 liters.
d. Volume of distribution by area.
Answer : Vd,area = 13.7 liters.
e. The microconstants K12 and K21
Answer : K12 = 4.035/hour and K21 = 6.63/hour.
f. The elimination rate constant for the disposal of drug from the central compartment.
Answer : KE = 6.33/hour.
g. The overall elimination half-life

Answer : t½ = 0.231 hours.
h. The total systemic clearance of the drug (use Vd,area for calculation).
Answer : ClT = 686.2 ml/min.
i. The plasma level of the drug after 30 minutes of i.v. dose.
j. The infusion rate if the drug is to be given as constant rate i.v. infusion (desired C ss is 20
mcg/ml).
Answer : Ro = 823 mg/hour.
k. The loading dose to attain the C ssrapidly.
Answer : Xo,L = 130 mg.

37. Estimation of Ka for a drug that follows multicompartment kinetics by Loo-
Riegelman method requires plasma concentration-time profile both after oral and i.v.
administration. Explain.
38. How does

method? Loo-Riegelman
Discuss their meritsmethod for estimation of K a differ from Wagner-Nelson
and demerits.
10
Nonlinear Pharmacokinetics
In most cases, at therapeutic doses, the change in the amount of drug in the body or the
change in its plasma concentration due to absorption, distribution, binding, metabolism or
excretion, is proportional to its dose, whether administered as a single dose or as multiple
doses. In such situations, the rate processes are said to follow first-order or linear
kinetics and all semilog plots of C versus t for different doses, when corrected for dose
administered, are superimposable. This is called as principle of superposition. The
important pharmacokinetic parameters viz. F, Ka, K E, V d, Cl R and ClH which describe
the time-course of a drug in the body remain unaffected by the dose i.e. the
pharmacokinetics is dose-independent.
In some instances, the rate process of a drug’s ADME are dependent upon carrier or
enzymes that are substrate-specific, have definite capacities, and susceptible to saturation
at high drug concentration. In such cases, an essentially first-order kinetics transform
into a mixture of first-order and zero-order rate processes and the pharmacokinetic
parameters change with the size of the administered dose. The pharmacokinetics of such
drugs are said to be dose-dependent . Other terms synonymous with it are mixed-order,
nonlinear and capacity-limited kinetics . Drugs exhibiting such a kinetic profile are
sources of variability in pharmacological response.
There are several tests to detect nonlinearity in pharmacokinetics but the simplest ones
are –
1. Determination of steady-state plasma concentration at different doses. If the
steady-state concentrations are directly proportional to the dose, then linearity in
the kinetics exists. Such proportionality is not observable when there is
nonlinearity.
2. Determination of some of the important pharmacokinetic parameters such as
fraction bioavailable, elimination half-life or total systemic clearance at different
doses of the drug. Any change in these parameters which are usually constant, is
indicative of nonlinearity.
CAUSES OF NONLINEARITY
Nonlinearities can occur in drug absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion.
Drug Absorption
Nonlinearity in drug absorption can arise from 3 important sources –
1. When absorption is solubility or dissolution rate-limited e.g. griseofulvin. At
higher doses, a saturated solution of the drug is formed in the GIT or at any other
extravascular site and the rate of absorption attains a constant value.
2. When absorption involves carrier-mediated transport systems e.g. absorption of
riboflavin, ascorbic acid, cyanocobalamin, etc. Saturation of the transport system
at higher doses of these vitamins results in nonlinearity.
3. When presystemic gut wall or hepatic metabolism attains saturation e.g.

propranolol, hydralazine and verapamil. Saturation of presystemic metabolism of
these drugs at high doses leads to increased bioavailability.
The parameters affected will be F, Ka, Cmax and AUC. A decrease in these
parameters is observed in the former two cases and an increase in the latter case. Other
causes of nonlinearity in drug absorption are changes in gastric emptying and GI blood
flow and other physiologic factors. Nonlinearity in drug absorption is of little
consequence unless availability is drastically affected.
Drug Distribution
Nonlinearity in distribution of drugs administered at high doses may be due to –
1. Saturation of binding sites on plasma proteins e.g. phenylbutazone and naproxen.
There is a finite number of binding sites for a particular drug on plasma proteins
and, theoretically, as the concentration is raised, so too is the fraction unbound.
2. Saturation of tissue binding sites e.g. thiopental and fentanyl. With large single
bolus doses or multiple dosing, saturation of tissue storage sites can occur.
In both cases, the free plasma drug concentration increases but V d increases only in
the former case whereas it decreases in the latter. Clearance is also altered depending
upon the extraction ratio of the drug. Clearance of a drug with high ER is greatly
increased due to saturation of binding sites. Unbound clearance of drugs with low ER is
unaffected and one can expect an increase in pharmacological response.
Drug Metabolism
The nonlinear kinetics of most clinical importance is capacity-limited metabolism since
small changes in dose administered can produce large variations in plasma concentration
at steady-state. It is a major source of large intersubject variability in pharmacological
response.
Two important causes of nonlinearity in metabolism are –
1. Capacity-limited metabolism due to enzyme and/or cofactor saturation. Typical
examples include phenytoin, alcohol, theophylline, etc.
2. Enzyme induction e.g. carbamazepine, where a decrease in peak plasma
concentration has been observed on repetitive administration over a period of
time. Autoinduction characterized in this case is also dose-dependent. Thus,
enzyme induction is a common cause of both dose- and time-dependent kinetics.
Saturation of enzyme results in decreased ClH and therefore increased Css. Reverse is
true for enzyme induction. Other causes of nonlinearity in biotransformation include
saturation of binding sites, inhibitory effect of the metabolite on enzyme and pathologic
situations such as hepatotoxicity and changes in hepatic blood flow.
Drug Excretion
The two active processes in renal excretion of a drug that are saturable are –
1. Active tubular secretion e.g. penicillin G. After saturation of the carrier system, a
decrease in renal clearance occurs.
2. Active tubular reabsorption e.g. water soluble vitamins and glucose. After
saturation of the carrier system, an increase in renal clearance occurs.
Other sources of nonlinearity in renal excretion include forced diuresis, changes in
urine pH, nephrotoxicity and saturation of binding sites.
Biliary secretion, which is also an active process, is also subject to saturation e.g.
tetracycline and indomethacin.
MICHAELIS MENTEN EQUATION

The kinetics of capacity-limited or saturable processes is best described by Michaelis-
Menten equation:
dC Vmax C
(10.1)
dt Km C
Where, –dC/dt = rate of decline of drug concentration with time,

Vmax = theoretical maximum rate of the process, and
Km = Michaelis constant.
Three situations can now be considered depending upon the values of Km and C:
1. When Km = C
Under this situation, the equation 10.1 reduces to:
dC Vmax
(10.2)
dt 2
i.e. the rate of process is equal to one-half its maximum rate (Fig. 10.1).
Fig. 10.1 A plot of Michaelis-Menten equation (elimination rate dC/dt versus

concentration C). Initially, the rate increases linearly (first-order) with
concentration, becomes mixed-order at higher concentration and then reaches

maximum (Vmax) beyond which it proceeds at a constant rate (zero-order).
2. When Km >> C
Here, Km + C Km and the equation 10.1 reduces to:

dC Vmax C
(10.3)
dt Km
The above equation is identical to the one that describes first-order elimination of a
drug where Vmax/Km = KE. This means that the drug concentration in the body that
results from usual dosage regimens of most drugs is well below the K m of the
elimination process with certain exceptions such as phenytoin and alcohol.
3. When Km << C
Under this condition, Km + C C and the equation 10.1 will become:

dC
Vmax (10.4)
dt
The above equation is identical to the one that describes a zero-order process i.e. the
rate process occurs at a constant rate Vmax and is independent of drug concentration e.g.
metabolism of ethanol.
Estimation of Km and Vmax

The parameters of capacity-limited processes like metabolism, renal tubular secretion and
biliary excretion can be easily defined by assuming one-compartment kinetics for the
drug and that elimination involves only a single capacity-limited process.

The parameters Km and Vmax can be assessed from the plasma concentration-time
data collected after i.v. bolus administration of a drug with nonlinear elimination
characteristics.
Rewriting equation 10.1.
dC Vmax C
(10.1)
dt Km C
Integration of above equation followed by conversion to log base 10 yields:

C0 - C Vmax
log C log C 0 (10.5)
2.303 K m 2.303 K m
A semilog plot of C versus t yields a curve with a terminal linear portion having slope

–Vmax/2.303Km and when back extrapolated to time zero gives Y-intercept log C 0 (see
Fig. 10.2). The equation that describes this line is:


Vmax
log C log C 0 (10.6)
2.303 K m
Fig. 10.2 Semilog plot of a drug given as i.v. bolus with nonlinear elimination and that
fits one-compartment kinetics.
At low plasma concentrations, equations 10.5 and 10.6 are identical. Equating the two
and simplifying further, we get:

C0 - C C0
log (10.7)
2.303 K m C0
Km can thus be obtained from above equation. Vmax can be computed by

substituting the value of Km in the slope value.
An alternative approach of estimating Vmax and Km is determining the rate of change

of plasma drug concentration at different times and using the reciprocal of the equation
10.1. Thus:
1 Km 1
(10.8)
dC/dt Vmax C m Vmax
where Cm = plasma concentration at midpoint of the sampling interval. A double

reciprocal plot or the Lineweaver-Burke plot of 1/(dC/dt) versus 1/Cm of the above
equation yields a straight line with slope = K m/Vmax and y-intercept = 1/Vmax.
A disadvantage of Lineweaver-Burke plot is that the points are clustered. More
reliable plots in which the points are uniformly scattered are Hanes-Woolf plot (equation
10.9) and Woolf-Augustinsson-Hofstee plot (equation 10.10).
Cm Km Cm
(10.9)
dC/dt Vmax Vmax
dC dC/dt K m
Vmax (10.10)
dt Cm
The above equations are rearrangements of equation 10.8. Equation 10.9 is used to
plot Cm/(dC/dt) versus Cm and equation 10.10 to plot dC/dt versus (dC/dt)/Cm. The
parameters K m and Vmax can be computed from the slopes and y-intercepts of the two
plots.
Km and Vmax from Steady-State Concentration

When a drug is administered as a constant rate i.v. infusion or in a multiple dose regimen,
the steady-state concentration C ss is given in terms of dosing rate DR as:
DR C ss Cl T (10.11)
where DR = Ro when the drug is administered as zero-order i.v. infusion and it is equal
to FXo/ when administered as multiple oral dosage regimen (F is fraction bioavailable,
Xo is oral dose and is dosing interval).
At steady-state, the dosing rate equals rate of decline in plasma drug concentration and
if the decline (elimination) is due to a single capacity-limited process (for e.g.
metabolism), then;
Vmax Css
DR (10.12)
Km Css
A plot of C ss versus DR yields a typical hockey-stick shaped curve as shown in Fig.

10.3.
Fig. 10.3 Curve for a drug with nonlinear kinetics obtained by plotting the steady-state
concentration versus dosing rates.
To define the characteristics of the curve with a reasonable degree of accuracy, several
measurements must be made at steady-state during dosage with different doses.
Practically, one can graphically compute Km and Vmax in 3 ways:
1. Lineweaver-Burke Plot/Klotz Plot
Taking reciprocal of equation 10.12, we get:

1 Km 1
(10.13)
DR Vmax Css Vmax
Equation 10.13 is identical to equation 10.8 given earlier. A plot of 1/DR versus 1/C ss
yields a straight line with slope K m/Vmax and y-intercept 1/Vmax (see Fig. 10.4).
Fig. 10.4 Lineweaver-Burke/Klotz plot for estimation of Km and Vmax at steady-state

concentration of drug.
2. Direct Linear Plot

Here, the graph is considered as shown in Fig. 10.5. A pair of C ss viz. Css,1 and
Css,2 obtained with two different dosing rates DR 1 and DR2 is plotted. The points Css,1
and DR1 are joined to form a line and a second line is obtained similarly by joining C ss,2
and DR2. The point where these two lines intersect each other is extrapolated on DR axis
to obtain Vmax and on x-axis to get Km.
Fig. 10.5 Direct linear plot for estimation of Km and Vmax at steady-state
concentrations of a drug given at different dosing rates.
3. The third graphical method of estimating Km and Vmax involves rearranging
equation 10.12 to yield:
K m DR
DR Vmax (10.14)
Css
A plot of DR versus DR/C ss yields a straight line with slope -Km and Y-intercept
Vmax.
Km and Vmax can also be calculated numerically by setting up simultaneous
equations as shown below:
Vmax Css,1
DR 1 (10.15)
Km Css,1
Vmax Css,2
DR 2 (10.16)
Km Css,2
Combination of the above two equations yields:

DR 2 - DR1
Km
DR1 DR 2 (10.17)
Css,1 Css,2
After having computed Km, its subsequent substitution in any one of the two
simultaneous equations will yield Vmax.
It has been observed that Km is much less variable than Vmax. Hence, if mean Km
for a drug is known from an earlier study, then instead of two, a single measurement of
Css at any given dosing rate is sufficient to compute Vmax.
There are several limitations of K m and Vmax estimated by assuming one-
compartment system and a single capacity-limited process. More complex equations will
result and the computed Km and Vmax will usually be larger when:
1. The drug is eliminated by more than one capacity-limited process.
2. The drug exhibits parallel capacity-limited and first-order elimination processes.
3. The drug follows multicompartment kinetics.
However, Km and Vmax obtained under such circumstances have little practical
applications in dosage calculations.
Drugs that behave nonlinearly within the therapeutic range (for example, phenytoin
shows saturable metabolism) yield less predictable results in drug therapy and possess
greater potential in precipitating toxic effects.
QUESTIONS
1. Define dose-dependent kinetics. Quote simple tests by which it can be detected in a
rate process.
2. Why are drugs that show nonlinearity in pharmacokinetics considered sources of
variability in pharmacological response?
3. What processes of drug ADME are known to show nonlinearity? Give examples.
4. When administered at high doses, how does the pharmacokinetic parameters — t½,
Vd, Cmax, etc. change for drugs known to undergo capacity-limited elimination?
5. What are the limitations in calculating Km and Vmax by assuming one-compartment

model and a single capacity-limited process?
6. Using the following data of a drug having K m of 0.2 mcg/ml and V max of 1.0
mcg/ml/hour, determine the concentrations at which the drug shows first-order, zero-
order and mixed-order metabolic rates.
Concentration (mcg/ml) 0.02 0.2 20.0
Metabolic Rate (mcg/ml/H) 0.1 0.5 1.0
7. Theophylline was administered to a patient at dosing rates of 600 mg/day and 1200
mg/day and the respective steady-state concentrations were found to be 9.8 mg/L
and 28.6 mg/l. Find Km and Vmax. Determine the dosing rate to achieve a Css of
15 mg/l.
Answer : Km = 31.14 mg/l, Vmax = 2507 mg/day and DR = 815 mg/day.
11
Bioavailability and Bioequivalence
The therapeutic effectiveness of a drug depends upon the ability of the dosage form to
deliver the medicament to its site of action at a rate and amount sufficient to elicit the
desired pharmacological response. This attribute of the dosage form is referred to as
physiological availability, biological availability or simply, bioavailability. For most
drugs, the pharmacological response can be related directly to the plasma levels. Thus,
the term bioavailability is defined as the rate and extent (amount) of absorption of
unchanged drug from its dosage form. It is an absolute term. The rate or rapidity with
which a drug is absorbed is an important consideration when a rapid onset of action is
desired as in the treatment of acute conditions such as asthma attack, pain, etc. A slower
absorption rate is, however, desired when the aim is to prolong the duration of action or
to avoid the adverse effects. On the other hand, extent of absorption is of special
significance in the treatment of chronic conditions like hypertension, epilepsy, etc.
If the size of the dose to be administered is same, then bioavailability of a drug from
its dosage form depends upon 3 major factors:
1. Pharmaceutical factors related to physicochemical properties of the drug and
characteristics of the dosage form.
2. Patient related factors.
3. Route of administration.
The former two factors have been dealt with comprehensively in Chapter 2 on
Absorption of Drugs. The influence of route of administration on drug's bioavailability is
generally in the following order with few exceptions:
Parenteral > Or al > Rectal > T opical
Within the parenteral route, intravenous injection of a drug results in 100%
bioavailability as the absorption process is bypassed. However, for reasons of stability
and convenience, most drugs are administered orally. In such cases, the dose available to
the patient, called as the bioavailable dose, is often less than the administered dose. The
amount of drug that reaches the systemic circulation (i.e. extent of absorption) is called
as systemic availability or simply availability . The term bioavailable fraction F, refers
to the fraction of administered dose that enters the systemic circulation.
Bioavailab le dose
F (11.1)
Administered dose
Objectives of Bioavailability Studies

Bioavailability studies are important in the —
1. Primary stages of development of a suitable dosage form for a new drug entity to
obtain evidence of its therapeutic utility.
2. Determination of influence of excipients, patient related factors and possible
interaction with other drugs on the efficiency of absorption.
3. Development of new formulations of the existing drugs.

4. Control of quality of a drug product during the early stages of marketing in order
to determine the influence of processing factors, storage and stability on drug
absorption.
5. Comparison of availability of a drug substance from different dosage forms or
from the same dosage form produced by different manufacturers.
CONSIDERATIONS IN I N - V I V O BIOAVAILABILITY STUDY DESIGN

Bioavailability —Absolute versus Relative
When the systemic availability of a drug administered orally is determined in comparison
to its intravenous administration, it is called as absolute bioavailability. It is denoted by
symbol F. Its determination is used to characterize a drug‘s inherent absorption
properties from the e.v. site. Intravenous dose is selected as a standard because the drug
is administered directly into the systemic circulation (100% bioavailability) and avoids
absorption step. Intramuscular dose can also be taken as a standard if the drug is poorly
water-soluble. An oral solution as reference standard has also been used in certain cases.
However, there are several drawbacks of using oral solution as a standard instead of an
i.v. dose —
1. Limits the pharmacokinetic treatment to one-compartment model only; one cannot
apply the most applicable two-compartment kinetics to the data and all
pharmacokinetic parameters cannot be assessed.
2. Differentiation between the fraction of dose unabsorbed and that metabolised is
difficult.
3. If the rate of oral absorption is not sufficiently greater than the rate of elimination,
the true elimination rate constant cannot be computed.
At best, when oral solution is used in conjunction with i.v. route, one can distinguish
the dissolution rate limitation in drug absorption from solid dosage forms.
When the systemic availability of a drug after oral administration is compared with
that of an oral standard of the same drug (such as an aqueous or non-aqueous solution or
a suspension), it is referred to as relative or comparative bioavailability. It is denoted
by symbol F r. In contrast to absolute bioavailability, it is used to characterize absorption
of a drug from its formulation. F and Fr are generally expressed in percentages.
Single Dose versus Multiple Dose Studies

The dose to be administered for a bioavailability study is determined from preliminary
clinical experiments. Single dose bioavailability studies are very common. They are
easy, offer less exposure to drugs and are less tedious. However, it is difficult to predict
the steady-state characteristics of a drug and inter-subject variability with such studies.
Moreover, sufficiently long sampling periods are necessary in order to get reliable
estimates of terminal half-life, which is needed for correct calculation of the total AUC.
The better alternative is thus, multiple dose study which offers several advantages —
1. More accurately reflects the manner in which the drug will be used clinically.
2. Allows blood levels to be measured at the same concentrations encountered

therapeutically.
3. Easy to predict the peak and valley characteristics of drug since the bioavailability
is determined at steady-state.
4. Requires collection of fewer blood samples.
5. The drug blood levels are higher due to cumulative effect which makes its
determination possible even by the less sensitive analytic methods.
6. Can be ethically performed in patients because of the therapeutic benefit to the
patient.
7. Small inter-subject variability is observed in such a study which allows use of
fewer subjects.
8. Better evaluation of the performance of a controlled-release formulation is
possible.
9. Nonlinearity in pharmacokinetics, if present, can be easily detected.
10. Eliminates the need for a long wash-out period between doses. Moreover, the
switch-over from one formulation to the other is possible at steady state.
Limitations of multiple-dose studies include –

1. Tedious, requires more time to complete.
2. More difficult and costly to conduct (requires prolonged monitoring of subjects).
3. Poor compliance by subjects.
4. Greater exposure of subjects to the test drug, increasing the potential for adverse
reactions.
In multiple dose study, one must ensure that the steady-state has been reached. For
this, the drug should be administered for 5 to 6 elimination half-lives before collecting
the blood samples.
Human Volunteers—Healthy Subjects versus Patients

Ideally, the bioavailability study should be carried out in patients for whom the drug is
intended to be used because of apparent advantages—
1. The patient will be benefited from the study.
2. Reflects better the therapeutic efficacy of a drug.
3. Drug absorption pattern in disease states can be evaluated.
4. Avoids the ethical quandary of administering drugs to healthy subjects.
Patients of
drawbacks areusing
generally preferred
patients in multiple
as volunteers dose bioavailability
are equally large —disease, studies. The
other drugs,
physiologic changes, etc. may modify the drug absorption pattern. Stringent study
conditions such as fasting state required to be followed by the subject is also difficult. In
short, establishing a standard set of conditions necessary for a bioavailability study is
difficult with patients as volunteers. Such studies are therefore usually performed in
young (20 to 40 years), healthy, male adult volunteers (body weight within a narrow
range; ± 10%), under restricted dietary and fixed activity conditions. Female volunteers
are used only when drugs such as oral contraceptives are to be tested. The number of
subjects to be selected depends upon the extent of inter-subject variability but should be
kept to a minimum required to obtain a reliable data. The consent of volunteers must be
obtained and they must be informed about the importance of the study, conditions to be
followed during the study and possible hazards if any, prior to starting the study.
Medical examination
abnormality shouldThe
or disease. be performed
volunteersinmust
order be
to exclude subjects
instructed with any
to abstain kindany
from of
medication for at least a week and to fast overnight prior to and for a minimum of 4 hours
after dosing. The volume and type of fluid and the standard diet to be taken must also be
specified. Drug washout period for a minimum of ten biological half-lives must be
allowed for between any two studies in the same subject.
Measurement of Bioavailability
The methods useful in quantitative evaluation of bioavailability can be broadly divided
into two categories — pharmacokinetic methods and pharmacodynamic methods.
I. Pharmacokinetic Methods
These are very widely used and based on the assumption that the pharmacokinetic
profile reflects the therapeutic effectiveness of a drug. Thus, these are indirect methods.
The two major pharmacokinetic methods are:
1. Plasma level-time studies.
2. Urinary excretion studies.
II. Pharmacodynamic Methods

These methods are complementary to pharmacokinetic approaches and involve direct
measurement of drug effect on a (patho)physiological process as a function of time. The
two pharmacodynamic methods involve determination of bioavailability from:
1. Acute pharmacological response.
2. Therapeutic response.
Plasma Level—Time Studies

Unless determination of plasma drug concentration is difficult or impossible, it is the
most reliable method and method of choice in comparison to urine data. The method is
based on the assumption that two dosage forms that exhibit superimposable plasma level-
time profiles in a group of subjects should result in identical therapeutic activity.
With single dose study, the method requires collection of serial blood samples for a
period of 2 to 3 biological half-lives after drug administration, their analysis for drug
concentration and making a plot of concentration versus corresponding time of sample
collection to obtain the plasma level-time profile. With i.v. dose, sampling should start
within 5 minutes of drug administration and subsequent samples taken at 15 minute
intervals. To adequately describe the disposition phase, at least 3 sample points should
be taken if the drug follows one-compartment kinetics and 5 to 6 points if it fits two-
compartment model. For oral dose, at least 3 points should be taken on the ascending
part of the curve for accurate determination of Ka. The points for disposition or
descending phase of the curve must be taken in a manner similar to that for i.v. dose.
The 3 parameters of plasma level-time studies which are considered important for
determining bioavailability are:
1. Cmax: The peak plasma concentration that gives an indication whether the
drug is sufficiently absorbed systemically to provide a therapeutic response. It is
a function of both the rate and extent of absorption. Cmax will increase with an
increase in the dose, as well as with an increase in the absorption rate.
2. tmax: The peak time that gives an indication of the rate of absorption. It
decreases as the rate of absorption increases.
3. AUC: The area under the plasma level-time curve that gives a measure of the
extent of absorption or the amount of drug that reaches the systemic circulation.
The extent of bioavailability can be determined by following equations:
AUC oral Div
F (11.2)
AUC iv Doral
AUC test Dstd
Fr (11.3)
AUC std D test
where D stands for dose administered and subscripts iv and oral indicate the route of
administration. Subscripts test and std indicate the test and the standard doses of the
same drug to determine relative availability. The rate of absorption can be computed
from one of the several methods discussed in Chapter 9.
With multiple dose study, the method involves drug administration for at least 5
biological half-lives with a dosing interval equal to or greater than the biological half-life
(i.e. administration of at least 5 doses) to reach the steady-state. A blood sample should
be taken at the end of previous dosing interval and 8 to 10 samples after the
administration of next dose. The extent of bioavailability is given as:
Fr AUC test Dstd test

(11.4)
AUC std D test std
where [AUC] values are area under the plasma level-time curve of one dosing interval in
a multiple dosage regimen, after reaching the steady-state (Fig. 11.1) and is the dosing
interval.
Bioavailability can also be determined from the peak plasma concentration at steady-
state Css,max according to following equation:
Css,max test Dstd test
Fr (11.5)
Css,max std
D test std
The rate of absorption is not important in the multiple dosing methods.
Fig. 11.1 Determination of AUC and C ss,max on multiple dosing upto steady-state
Urinary Excretion Studies

This method of assessing bioavailability is based on the principle that the urinary
excretion of unchanged drug is directly proportional to the plasma concentration of drug .
As a rule of thumb, determination of bioavailability using urinary excretion data should
be conducted only if at least 20% of administered dose is excreted unchanged in the
urine. The study is particularly useful for –
 Drugs extensively excreted unchanged in the urine – for example, certain thiazide
diuretics and sulphonamides.
 Drugs that have urine as the site of action - for example, urinary antiseptics such
as nitrofurantoin and hexamine.
The method has several advantages and disadvantages as discussed in Chapter 9.
Concentration of metabolites excreted in urine is never taken into account in
calculations since a drug may undergo presystemic metabolism at different stages
before being absorbed. The method involves –
 Collection of urine at regular intervals for a time-span equal to 7 biological half-
lives.
 Analysis of unchanged drug in the collected sample.
 Determination of the amount of drug excreted in each interval and cumulative
amount excreted.
For obtaining valid results, following criteria must be met further –
 At each sample collection, total emptying of the bladder is necessary to avoid
errors resulting from addition of residual amount to the next urine sample.
 Frequent sampling of urine is also essential in the beginning in order to compute
correctly the rate of absorption.
 The fraction excreted unchanged in urine must remain constant.
The three major parameters examined in urinary excretion data obtained with a single
dose study are:
1. (dXu/dt)max: The maximum urinary excretion rate, it is obtained from the
peak of plot between rate of excretion versus midpoint time of urine collection
period. It is analogous to the Cmax derived from plasma level studies since the
rate of appearance of drug in the urine is proportional to its concentration in
systemic circulation. Its value increases as the rate of and/or extent of absorption
increases (see Fig. 11.2).
2. (tu)max: The time for maximum excretion rate, it is analogous to the tmax of
plasma level data. Its value decreases as the absorption rate increases.
3. Xu : The cumulative amount of drug excreted in the urine , it is related to the
AUC of plasma level data and increases as the extent of absorption increases.
Fig. 11.2 Plot of urinary excretion rate versus time. Note that the curve is analogous to
a typical plasma level-time profile obtained after oral administration of a
single dose of drug.
The extent of bioavailability is calculated from equations given below:
X D
F u oral iv
(11.6)
Xu iv
D oral
Xu test Dstd
Fr (11.7)
Xu std
D test
With multiple dose study to steady-state, the equation for computing bioavailability is:
X u, ss test Dstd test

Fr (11.8)
X u, ss std
D test std
where (Xu,ss) is the amount of drug excreted unchanged during a single dosing interval
at steady-state.
In practice, estimation of bioavailability by urinary excretion method is subject to
a high degree of variability, and is less reliable than those obtained from plasma
concentration-time profiles. It is thus not recommended as a substitute for blood
concentration data; rather, it should be used in conjunction with blood level data for
confirmatory purposes.
Bioavailability can also be determined for a few drugs by assay of biologic fluids
other than plasma and urine. In case of theophylline, salivary excretion can be used
whereas for cephalosporin antibiotics, appearance of drug in CSF and bile can be
determined. Caution must however be exercised to account for salivary and enterohepatic
cycling of the drugs.
Acute Pharmacological Response Method

When bioavailability measurement by pharmacokinetic methods is difficult, inaccurate or
non-reproducible, an acute pharmacological effect such as a change in ECG or EEG
readings, pupil diameter, etc. is related to the time course of a given drug. Bioavailability
can then be determined by construction of pharmacological effect-time curve as well as
dose-response graphs. The method requires measurement of responses for at least 3
biological half-lives of the drug in order to obtain a good estimate of AUC.
Disadvantages of this method include –
1. The pharmacological response tends to be more variable and accurate
correlation between measured response and drug available from the formulation
is difficult.
2. The observed response may be due to an active metabolite whose concentration
is not proportional to the concentration of parent drug responsible for the
pharmacological effect.
Therapeutic Response Method

Theoretically the most definite, this method is based on observing the clinical response to
a drug formulation given to patients suffering from disease for which it is intended to be
used. However, the method has several drawbacks –
1. Quantitation of observed response is too improper to allow for reasonable
assessment of relative bioavailability between two dosage forms of the same
drug.
2. Bioequivalence studies are usually conducted using a crossover design in
which each subject receives each of the test dosage forms, and it is assumed
that the physiological status of the subject does not change significantly over
the duration of the study.
3. Unless multiple-dose protocols are employed, a patient who required the drug
for a disease would be able to receive only a single dose of the drug every few
days or perhaps each week.
4. Many patients receive more than one drug, and the results obtained from a
bioavailability study could be compromised because of a drug–drug
interaction.
Because of the above considerations, the general conclusion is that most
bioavailability/bioequivalence studies should be carried out in healthy subjects. However,
for drugs that are not designed to be absorbed into the systemic circulation and are active
at the site of administration, clinical studies in patients are the only means to determine
bioequivalence. Such studies are usually conducted using a parallel, rather than a
crossover design. Examples include studies of topical antifungal agents, drugs used in the
treatment of acne and agents such as sucralfate used in ulcer therapy.
In Vitro Drug Dissolution Rate and Bioavailability

The physicochemical property of most drugs that has greatest influence on their
absorption characteristics from the GIT is dissolution rate. The best way of assessing
therapeutic efficacy of drugs with a slow dissolution rate is in vivo determination of
bioavailability which is usually done whenever a new formulation is to be introduced into
the market. However, monitoring batch-to-batch consistency through use of such in vivo
tests is extremely costly, tedious and time consuming besides exposing the healthy
subjects to hazards of drugs. It would therefore be always desirable to substitute the in
vivo bioavailability tests with inexpensive in vitro methods. The simple in vitro
disintegration test is unreliable. The best available tool today which can at least
quantitatively assure about the biologic availability of a drug from its formulation is its
in vitr o dissolu tion test .
In Vitro Drug Dissolution Testing Models

For an in vitro test to be useful, it must predict the in vivo behaviour to such an extent that
in vivo bioavailability test need not be performed. Despite attempts to standardize the
test performance, the in vitro dissolution technique is still by no means a perfect
approach. The efforts are mainly aimed at mimicking the environment offered by the
biological system.
There are several factors that must be considered in the design of a dissolution test.
They are –
 F actor s relati ng to the dissolu tion apparatu ssuch as—the design, the size of the
container (several mL to several litres), the shape of the container (round
bottomed or flat), nature of agitation (stirring, rotating or oscillating methods),
speed of agitation, performance precision of the apparatus, etc.
 F actors relatin g to the dissoluti on f lu id
such as—composition (water, 0.1N HCl,
phosphate buffer, simulated gastric fluid, simulated intestinal fluid, etc.),
viscosity, volume (generally larger than that needed to completely dissolve the
drug under test), temperature (generally 37 oC) and maintenance of sink (drug
concentration in solution maintained constant at a low level) or non-sink

conditions (gradual increase in the drug concentration in the dissolution medium).
 Pr ocess par ameters such as method of introduction of dosage form, sampling
techniques, changing the dissolution fluid, etc.
The ideal featur es of a dissolution apparatus are:
1. The fabrication, dimensions, and positioning of all components must be precisely

specified and reproducible, run-to-run.
2. The apparatus must be simple in design, easy to operate and useable under a
variety of conditions.
3. The apparatus must be sensitive enough to reveal process changes and
formulation differences but still yield repeatable results under identical
conditions.
4. The apparatus, in most cases, should permit controlled variable intensity of mild,
uniform, non-turbulent liquid agitation.
5. Nearly perfect sink conditions should be maintained.
6. The apparatus should provide an easy means of introducing the dosage form into
the dissolution medium and holding it, once immersed, in a regular reliable
fashion.
7. The apparatus should provide minimum mechanical abrasion to the dosage form
during the test period to avoid disruption of the microenvironment surrounding
the dissolving form.
8. Evaporation of the solvent medium must be eliminated, and the medium must be
maintained at a fixed temperature within a specified narrow range. Most
apparatuses are thermostatically controlled at around 37°C.
9. Samples should be easily withdrawn for automatic or manual analysis without
interrupting the flow characteristics of the liquid.
10. The apparatus should be capable of allowing the evaluation of disintegrating, non-
disintegrating, dense or floating tablets or capsules, and finely powdered drugs.
11. The apparatus should allow good inter-laboratory agreement.
The dissolution apparatus has evolved gradually and considerably from a simple
beaker type to a highly versatile and fully automated instrument. The devices can be
classified in a number of ways. Based on the absence or presence of sink conditions,
there are two principal types of dissolution apparatus:
1. Closed-compartment apparatus: It is basically a limited-volume apparatus
operating under non-sink conditions. The dissolution fluid is restrained to the size of the
container, e.g. beaker type apparatuses such as the rotating basket and the rotating paddle
apparatus.
2. Open-compartment (continuous flow-through) apparatus: It is the one in
which the dosage form is contained in a column which is brought in continuous contact
with fresh, flowing dissolution medium (perfect sink condition).
A third type called as dialysis systems are used for very poorly aqueous soluble drugs
for which maintenance of sink conditions would otherwise require large volume of
dissolution fluid. Only the official or compendial methods (USP methods) will be
discussed here briefly.
Rotating Basket Apparatus (Apparatus 1)

First described by Pernarowski et al, it is basically a closed-compartment, beaker type
apparatus comprising of a cylindrical glass vessel with hemispherical bottom of one litre
capacity partially immersed in a water bath to maintain the temperature at 37 oC. A
cylindrical basket made of 22 mesh to hold the dosage form is located centrally in the
vessel at a distance of 2 cm from the bottom and rotated by a variable speed motor
through a shaft (Fig. 11.3a). The basket should remain in motion during drawing of
samples. All metal parts like basket and shaft are made of SS 316.
Rotating Paddle Apparatus (Apparatus 2)

The assembly is same as that for apparatus 1 except that the rotating basket is replaced
with a paddle which acts as a stirrer (Fig. 11.3b). The method was first described by
Levy and Hayes. The dosage form is allowed to sink to the bottom of the vessel. Sinkers
are recommended to prevent floating of capsules and other floatable forms. A small,
loose, wire helix may be attached to such preparations to prevent them from floating.
Reciprocating Cylinder Apparatus (Apparatus 3)

This apparatus consists of a set of cylindrical flat-bottomed glass vessels equipped
with reciprocating cylinders (Fig. 11.3c). The apparatus is particularly used for
dissolution testing of controlled release bead-type (pellet) formulations.
Flow-Through Cell Apparatus (Apparatus 4)

The flow-through apparatus consists of a reservoir for the dissolution medium and a
pump that forces dissolution medium through the cell holding the test sample. It may be
used in either –
 Closed-mode where the fluid is recirculated and, by necessity, is of fixed
volume, or
 Open-mode when there is continuous replenishment of the fluids.
The material under test (tablet, capsules, or granules) is placed in the vertically
mounted dissolution cell, which permits fresh solvent to be pumped (between 240 and
960 mL/h) in from the bottom (Fig. 11.3d). Advantages of this apparatus include –
1. Easy maintenance of sink conditions for dissolution which is often required for
drugs having limited aqueous solubility.
2. Feasibility of using large volume of dissolution fluid.
3. Feasibility for automation of apparatus.
Paddle Over Disc Apparatus (Apparatus 5)

This apparatus is used for evaluation of transdermal products and consists of a sample
holder or disc that holds the product. The disc is placed at the bottom of apparatus 2
(rotating paddle apparatus; see fig. 11.3e) and the apparatus operated in the usual way.
Cylinder Apparatus (Apparatus 6)

This apparatus is also used for evaluation of transdermal products and is similar to
apparatus 1 (Fig. 11.3f). Instead of basket, a stainless steel cylinder is used to hold the
sample. The sample is mounted on an inert porous cellulosic material and adhered to the
cylinder.
Reciprocating Disc Apparatus (Apparatus 7)
This apparatus is used for evaluation of transdermal products as well as non-
disintegrating controlled-release oral preparations. The samples are placed on disc-shaped
holders (Fig. 11.3g) using inert porous cellulosic support which reciprocates vertically
by means of a drive inside a glass container containing dissolution medium. The test is
0
carried out at 32 C and reciprocating frequency of 30 cycles/min.
Fig. 11.3 Schematic representation of official USP dissolution apparatus - (a)

Apparatus 1 - rotating basket apparatus, (b) Apparatus 2 - rotating paddle
apparatus, (c) Apparatus 3 – reciprocating cylinder apparatus, (d) Apparatus

4 – flow through cell apparatus, (e) Apparatus 5 – paddle over disc
apparatus, (f) Apparatus 6 – cylinder apparatus, and (g) Apparatus 7 –
reciprocating disc apparatus
Table 11.1 lists the various types of dissolution apparatus and their applications, and table
11.2 summarises the dissolution methodology to be adopted for immediate-release
products on the basis of BCS.
Table 11.1.
Compendial Dissolution Apparatus Types and Their Applications
Apparatus Name Drug Formulation Tested
Apparatus 1 Rotating basket Conventional Tablets
Apparatus 2 Rotating paddle Tablets, capsules, controlled release products,
suspensions
Apparatus 3 Reciprocating cylinder Controlled release formulations
Apparatus 4 Flow-through cell Formulations containing poorly soluble drugs
Apparatus 5 Paddle over disc Transdermal formulations
Apparatus 6 Cylinder Transdermal formulations
Apparatus 7 Reciprocating disc Controlled release formulations
Table 11.2.
Dissolution Methodology for Immediate-Release Products Based on BCS
BCS Class Dissolution Methodology
I Single point if NLT 85% Q in 15 minutes
Multiple point if Q < 85% in 15 minutes
II Multiple point
III Same as class I
1V Same as class II
Dissolution Acceptance Criteria

On the basis of dissolution profile data, criteria for acceptance/passing of test results are
based on Q values as given in table 11.3. The value of Q is defined as percentage of drug
content dissolved in a given time period. This value is generally specified in USP
monograph of a given drug product. Three stages viz. S 1, S 2 and S3 of dissolution testing
are allowed as given in table 11.3.
In the first stage of the USP dissolution test consists of testing six dosage units. If
all of the dosage units are greater than or equal to Q+5%, then the dissolution test criteria
are met and the test is passed. However, if this criterion is not met, six additional dosage
units are tested and compared to the acceptance criteria for the twelve dosage units. To
pass at the second stage, the average of the twelve dosage units must be equal to or
greater than Q and no dosage unit can be less than Q-15%. If both of the above criteria
are not met at the second stage, the final stage of testing is performed. Twelve additional
dosage units are evaluated, providing a total of twenty four results. To pass at this final
stage of testing, the average of the twenty four dosage units must be equal to or greater
than Q, not more than two dosage units can be less than Q - 15 %, and no dosage unit can
be less than Q-25%.
Table 11.3.
Dissolution Acceptance Criteria
Stage Number of Dosage Acceptance Criteria
Units Tested
S1 6 No dosage unit is less than Q+5%
S2 6 Average of the twelve dosage units (S 1 + S2) Q% and no

dosage unit is less than Q-15%
S3 12 Average of the twenty four dosage units (S1 + S2 + S3)
Q% and not more than two dosage units are less than Q-
15% and no dosage unit is less than Q-25%
Objectives of Dissolution Profile Comparison

Comparison of in vitro dissolution profiles of test drug product and approved drug
product are useful for –
 Development of bioequivalent drug products.
 Demonstrating equivalence after change in formulation of drug product.
 Biowaiver of drug product of lower dose strength in proportion to higher dose

strength drug product containing same active ingredient and excipients.
Method for Comparison of Dissolution Profile

A model independent method for comparison of two dissolution profiles is based on
determination of dif ference factor f 1 and simi lari ty factor f 2 which are calculated using
following formulae –
n
Rt - Tt
t 1
f1 n
100 (11.9)
Rt
t 1
0.5
n
1 2
f2 50 log 1 Rt - Tt 100 (11.10)
n t 1
where
n = number of dissolution time points
Rt = dissolution value of the reference drug product at time t
Tt = dissolution value of the test drug product at time t
The guidelines adopted for in terpr etin g f 1 and f 2 values are given in table 11.4.
Table 11.4.
Comparison of Dissolution Profile
Difference factor f 1 Similarity factor f2 Inference
0 100 Dissolution profiles are identical
15 50 Similarity or equivalence of two profiles
The evaluation of similarity between dissolution profiles is based on following

conditions –
 Minimum of three dissolution time points are measured.

 Number of drug products tested for dissolution is 12 for both test and reference.
 Not more than one mean value of > 85% dissolved for each product.
 Standard deviation of mean of any product should not be more than 10% from
second to last dissolution time point.
In Vitro—In Vivo Correlation (IVIVC)

A simple in vitro dissolution test on the drug product will be insufficient to predict its
therapeutic efficacy. Convincing correlation between in vitro dissolution behaviour of a
drug and its in vivo bioavailability must be experimentally demonstrated to guarantee
reproducibility of biologic response. I n vitro-in vivo corr elation is defined as the
predictive mathematical model that describes the relationship between an in-vitro
property (such as the rate and extent of dissolution) of a dosage form and an in-vivo
response (such as the plasma drug concentration or amount of drug absorbed).
The main objective of developing and evaluating an IVIVC is to enable the

dissolution test to serve as a surrogate (alternate) for in vivo bioavailability studies in
human beings.
The applications of developing such an IVIVC are —

1. To ensure batch-to-batch consistency in the physiological performance of a drug
product by use of such in vitro values.
2. To serve as a tool in the development of a new dosage form with desired in vivo
performance.
3. To assist in validating or setting dissolution specifications (i.e. the dissolution
specifications are based on the performance of product in vivo).
There are two basic approaches by which a correlation between dissolution testing
and bioavailability can be developed:
1. By establishing a relationship, usually linear, between the in vitro dissolution and
the in vivo bioavailability parameters.
2. By using the data from previous bioavailability studies to modify the dissolution
methodology in order to arrive at meaningful in vitro-in vivo correlation.
Though the former approach is widely used, the latter still holds substance, since to
date, there is no single dissolution rate test methodology that can be applied to all drugs.
Some of the often used quantitative linear in vitro-in vivo correlations are –
1. between
Correlations Based on
dissolution the Plasma
parameters such Level Here linear
Data: drug
as percent relationships
dissolved, rate of
dissolution, rate constant for dissolution, etc. and parameters obtained from
plasma level data such as percent drug absorbed, rate of absorption, C max, t max,
Ka, etc. are developed; for example, percent drug dissolved versus percent drug
absorbed plots.
2. Correlation Based on the Urinary Excretion Data: Here, dissolution

parameters are correlated to the amount of drug excreted unchanged in the urine,
cumulative amount of drug excreted as a function of time, etc.
3. Correlation Based on the Pharmacological Response: An acute
pharmacological effect such as LD50 in animals is related to any of the
dissolution parameters.
Statistical moments theory can also be used to determine the relationship such as
mean dissolution time (in vitro) versus mean residence time (in vivo).
Though examples of good correlations are many, there are instances when positive
correlation is difficult or impossible; for example, in case of corticosteroids, the systemic
availability may not depend upon the dissolution characteristics of the drug. Several
factors that limit such a correlation include variables pertaining to the drug such as
dissolution methodology, physicochemical properties of the drug such as particle size,
physiologic variables like presystemic metabolism, etc.
I n vitro-I n vivo Correlation Levels

Three IVIVC levels have been defined and categorised in descending order of usefulness.
Level A – The highest category of correlation, it represents a point-to-point
relationship between in vitro dissolution and the in vivo rate of absorption (or in
vivo dissolution) i.e. the in vitro dissolution and in vivo absorption rate curves are
superimposable and the mathematical description for both curves is the same.
Advantages of level A correlation are as follows –
1. A point-to-point correlation is developed. The in vitro dissolution curve
serves as a surrogate for in vivo performance. Any change in
manufacturing procedure or modification in formula can be justified
without the need for additional human studies.
2. The in vivo
procedure dissolutiondosage
for predicting servesform‘s
as inperformance.
vivo indicating quality control
Level B – Utilises the principles of statistical moment analysis. The mean in vitro
dissolution time is compared to either the mean residence time or the mean in vivo
dissolution time. However, such a correlation is not a point-to-point correlation
since there are a number of in vivo curves that will produce similar mean residence
time values. It is for this reason that one cannot rely upon level B correlation to
justify changes in manufacturing or modification in formula. Moreover, the in vitro
data cannot be used for quality control standards.
Level C – It is a single point correlation. It relates one dissolution time point (e.g.
t50%, etc.) to one pharmacokinetic parameter such as AUC, t max or Cmax. This level is
generally useful only as a guide in formulation development or quality control
owing to its obvious limitations.
Multiple Level C – It is correlation involving one or several pharmacokinetic
parameters to the amount of drug dissolved at various time points.
Biopharmaceutics Classification System (BCS) and In vitro-In vivo Correlation

(IVIVC)
The Biopharmaceutics Classification System (BCS) is a fundamental guideline for

determining the conditions under which in-vitro in-vivo correlations are expected. Table
11.5 indicates whether IVIVC is expected or possible for various drug categories when
formulated as controlled-release preparations. The importance of BCS in formulation
design and drug delivery is further highlighted in table 11.8.
Table 11.5.
Biopharmaceutics Drug Classification System for Extended Release Drug Products
Class Solubility Permeability IVIVC
Ia High and site independent High and site independent IVIVC Level A expected
Ib High and site independent Dependent on site and IVIVC Level C expected
narrow absorption window
IIa Low and site independent High and site independent IVIVC Level A expected
IIb Low and site independent Dependent on site and Little or no IVIVC
narrow absorption window
Va: Acidic Variable Variable Little or no IVIVC
Vb: basic Variable Variable IVIVC Level A expected
BCS-Based Biowaiver to I n Vivo Bioavailability/Bioequivalence Studies

According to BCS, in vivo bioavailability and bioequivalence studies need not be
conducted for drug products under following circumstances -
 Rapid and similar dissolution.
 High solubility.
 High permeability.
 Wide therapeutic window.
 Excipients used in dosage form are same as those present in approved drug
product.
BIOEQUIVALENCE STUDIES
Need/Objectives for Biequivalence Studies
If a new product is intended to be a substitute for an approved medicinal product as a
pharmaceutical equivalent or alternative, the equivalence with this product should be
shown or justified. In order to ensure clinical performance of such drug products,
bioequivalence studies should be performed. Bioequivalence studies are conducted if
there is:
 A risk of bio-inequivalence and/or
 A risk of pharmacotherapeutic failure or diminished clinical safety.
Some of the important terms relevant in this context will be defined.

Equivalence: It is a relative term that compares drug products with respect to a
specific characteristic or function or to a defined set of standards. There are several types
of equivalences.
Chemical Equivalence: It indicates that two or more drug products contain the same
labelled chemical substance as an active ingredient in the same amount.
Pharmaceutical Equivalence: This term implies that two or more drug products are
identical in strength, quality, purity, content uniformity and disintegration and dissolution
characteristics; they may however differ in containing different excipients.
Bioequivalence: It is a relative term which denotes that the drug substance in two or
more identical dosage forms, reaches the systemic circulation at the same relative rate
and to the same relative extent i.e. their plasma concentration-time profiles will be
identical without significant statistical differences.
When statistically significant differences are observed in the bioavailability of two or
more drug products, bio-inequivalence is indicated.
Therapeutic Equivalence: This term indicates that two or more drug products that
contain the same therapeutically active ingredient elicit identical pharmacological effects
and can control the disease to the same extent.
Types of Bioequivalence Studies

Bioequivalence can be demonstrated either –
 In vivo, or
 In vitro.
I n vivo Bioequivalence Studies
The following sequence of criteria is useful in assessing the need for in vivo studies:
1. Oral immediate release products with systemic action
 Indicated for serious conditions requiring assured response
 Narrow therapeutic margin
 Pharmacokinetics complicated by absorption < 70% or absorption window,
nonlinear kinetics, presystemic elimination > 70%
 Unfavourable physiochemical properties, e.g. low solubility, metastable
modifications, instability, etc.
 Documented evidence for bioavailability problems
 No relevant data available, unless justification by applicant that in vivo study is
not necessary.
2. Non-oral immediate release products.
3. Modified release products with systemic action.
In vivo bioequivalence studies are conducted in the usual manner as discussed for
bioavailability studies, i.e. the pharmacokinetic and the pharmacodynamic methods.
I n vitro Bioequivalence Studies

If none of the above criteria is applicable, comparative in vitro dissolution studies will
suffice. In vitro studies, i.e. dissolution studies can be used in lieu of in vivo
bioequivalence under certain circumstances, called as biowai vers (exempti ons) –
1. The drug product differs only in strength of the active substance it contains,
provided all the following conditions hold –
 Pharmacokinetics are linear

 The qualitative composition is the same
 The ratio between active substance and the excipients is the same, or (in
the case of small strengths) the ratio between the excipients is the same
 Both products are produced by the same manufacturer at the same

production site
A bioavailability or bioequivalence study has been performed with the
original product
 Under the same test conditions, the in vitro dissolution rate is the same.
2. The drug product has been slightly reformulated or the manufacturing method has
been slightly modified by the original manufacturer in ways that can convincingly
be argued to be irrelevant for the bioavailability.
3. The drug product meets all of the following requirements –
 The product is in the form of solution or solubilised form (elixir, syrup,
tincture, etc.)
 The product contains active ingredient in the same concentration as the
approved drug product.

The product contains no excipients known to significantly affect
absorption of the active ingredient.
4. An acceptable IVIVC and the in vitro dissolution rate of the new product is
equivalent with that of the already approved medicinal product.
Moreover,
 The product is intended for topical administration (cream, ointment, gel,
etc.) for local effect.
 The product is for oral administration but not intended to be absorbed
(antacid or radio-opaque medium).
 The product is administered by inhalation as a gas or vapour.
The criteria for drug products listed above indicate that bioavailabil ity and
bioequi valence are self -evident.
Bioequivalence Experimental Study Design

The various types of test designs that are usually employed in clinical trials,
bioavailability and bioequivalence studies are discussed below.
1. Completely randomised designs

In a completely randomised design, all treatments (factor levels) are randomly allocated
among all experimental subjects.
M ethod of r andomisati on
Label all subjects with the same number of digits, for e.g., if there are 20 subjects,
number them from 1 to 20. Randomly select non-repeating random numbers (like simple
randomisation) with among these labels for the first treatment, and then repeat for all
other treatments.
Advantages
1) The design is extremely easy to construct.
2) It can accommodate any number of treatments and subjects.
3) The design is easy and simple to analyse even though the sample sizes might not
be the same for each treatment.
Disadvantages
1) Although the design can be used for any number of treatments, it is best suited for
situations in which there are relatively few treatments.
2) All subjects
variability must
will tendbeto as homogeneous
inflate the randomaserror
possible.
term, Any extraneous
making sources
it difficult of
to detect
differences among the treatment (or factor level) mean responses.
2. Randomised block designs

First, subjects are sorted into homogeneous groups, called blocks and the treatments are
then assigned at random within the blocks.
M ethod of Randomisation
Subjects having similar background characteristics are formed as blocks. Then treatments
are randomised within each block, just like the simple randomisation. Randomisations for
different blocks are done independent of each other.
Advantages
1) With effective and systematic way of grouping, it can provide substantially more
precise results than a completely randomised design of comparable size.
2) It can accommodate any number of treatments or replications.
3) Different treatments need not have equal sample size.
4) The statistical analysis is relatively simple. The design is easy to construct.
5) If an entire treatment or block needs to be dropped from the analysis for some
reason, such as spoiled results, the analysis is not thereby complicated.
6) Variability in experimental units can be deliberately introduced to widen the
range of validity of the experimental results without sacrificing the precision of
results.
Disadvantages
1) Missing observations within a block require more complex analysis.
2) The degrees of freedom of experimental error are not as large as with a
completely randomised design.
3. Repeated measures, cross-over and carry-over designs

This is essentially a randomised block design in which the same subject serves as a block.
The same subject is utilized for each of the treatments under study. Since we take
repeated measures on each subject we get the design name ―repeated measures design‖.
The study may involve several treatments or a single treatment evaluated at different
points in time. The administration of two or more treatments one after the other in a
specified or random order to the same group of patients is called a crossover design or
chan ge-over design . The drawback of crossover studies is the potential for distortion due
to carry-over, that is, residual effects from preceding treatments. To prevent carry-over
effects, one must always allow for a wash-out period during which most of the drug is
eliminated from the body – generally about 10 elimination half-lives.
Example: clinical trials to monitor safety and side effects.
M ethod of Randomisation
Complete randomisation is used to randomise the order of treatments for each subject.
Randomisations for different subjects are independent of each other.
Advantages
1) They provide good precision for comparing treatments because all sources of
variability between subjects are excluded from the experimental error.
2) It
canis be
economic
utilized on
forsubjects. This is particularly important when only a few subjects
the experiments.
3) When the interest is in the effects of a treatment over time, it is usually desirable
to observe the same subject at different points in time rather than observing
different subjects at the specified points in time.
Disadvantages
1) There may be an order effect, which is connected with the position in the
treatment order.
2) There may be a carry-over effect, which is connected with the preceding
treatment or treatments.
4. Latin square
Completely designs design, randomised block design and repeated measures design
randomised
are experiments where the person/subject/volunteer remains on the treatment from the
start of the experiment until the end and thus are called as conti nuous trial . In a Latin
square, however, each subject receives each treatment during the course of the
experiment. A Latin square design is a two-factor design (subjects and treatments are the
two factors) with one observation in each cell . Such a design is useful compared the
earlier ones when three or more treatments are to be compared and carry-over effects are
balanced. In a Latin square design, rows represent subjects, and columns represent
treatments. A r x r Latin square design is a square with r rows and r columns such that
each of the r2 cells contain one and only one of the r letters representing the treatments,
and each letter appears once and only once in ever row and every column. A Latin square
is called standard if the first row and the first column consist of the r letters in
alphabetical order.
Randomised, balanced, cross-over Latin square design are commonly used for
bioequivalence studies.
Advantages
1) It minimizes the inter-subject variability in plasma drug levels.
2) Minimizes the carry-over effects which could occur when a given dosage form
influences the bioavailability of a subsequently administered product (intra-
subject variability).
3) Minimizes the variations due to time effect.
4) Treatment effects can be studied from a small-scale experiment. This is
particularly helpful in preliminary or pilot studies.
5) Makes it possible to focus more on the formulation variables which is the key to
success for any bioequivalence study.
Disadvantages
1) The use of Latin square design will lead to a very small number of degrees of
freedom for experimental error when only a few treatments are studied. On the
other hand, when many treatments are studied, the degrees of freedom for
experimental error maybe larger than necessary.
2) The randomisation required is somewhat more complex than that for earlier
designs considered.
3) The study takes a long time since an appropriate washout period between two
administrations is essential which may be very long if the drug has a long t½.
4) When the number of formulations to be tested is more, the study becomes more
difficult and subject dropout rates are also high. This can be overcome by use of
a balanced incomplete block design in which a subject receives no more than 2
formulations.
An example of a typical Latin square design is given in table 11.6.
Table 11.6.
Latin Square Cross-over Design for 6 (or 12) Subjects to
Compare Three Different Formulations, A, B and C
Subject Study Washout Study Washout Study
number period I period period II period period III
1, 7 A B C
2, 8 B C A
3, 9 C A B
4, 10 A C B
5, 11 C B A
6, 12 B A C
Bioequivalence Study Protocol

The elements of in vivo bioequivalence study protocol are listed in table 11.7.
TABLE 11.7.
Elements of Bioequivalence Study Protocol
1. Title c. Inclusion/exclusion criteria
a. Principal investigator i. Inclusion criteria
b. Project number and date ii. Exclusion criteria
2. Study objective d. Restrictions/prohibitions
3. Study design 5. Clinical procedures
a. Design a. Dosage and drug administration
b. Drug Products b. Biological sampling schedule
i. Test product(s) c. Activity of subjects
ii. Reference product 6. Ethical considerations
c.
Dosage regimen a.Basic principles
d.
Sample collection schedule b.Institutional review board
e.
Housing c.Informed consent
f.
Fasting/meals schedule d.Indications for subject withdrawal
g.
Analytical methods e.Adverse reactions and emergency procedures
4. Study population 7. Facilities
a. Subjects 8. Data analysis
b. Subject selection a. Analytical validation procedure
i. Medical history b. Statistical treatment of data

ii. Physical examination 9. Drug accountability
iii. Laboratory tests 10. Appendix
The in vivo bioequivalence study requires determination of relative bioavailability

after administration of a single dose of test and reference formulations by the same route,
in equal doses, but at different times. The reference product is generally a previously
approved product, usually the innovator‘s product or some suitable reference standard.
The study is performed in fasting, young, healthy, adult male volunteers to assure
homogeneity in the population and to spare the patients, elderly or pregnant women from
rigors of such a clinical investigation. Homogeneity in the study population permits
focus on formulation factors.
As for bioavailability studies, either plasma level or urinary excretion studies may be
performed to assess bioequivalence between drug products. In vitro-in vivo correlation
can also be established for the formulations.
It is always easier to establish bioequivalence between existing drug products than
determination of pharmacokinetics of a new drug or bioavailability of a new dosage form
since —
1. The human volunteers used for the study of both products are same and all
pharmacokinetic parameters can be assumed to be same for both drug
formulations and there is no need to investigate nonlinearity.
2. The study protocol for all subjects is uniform, the efficiency of drug absorption
from both formulations can be considered as same and thus differences in
absorption pattern can be ascribed to differences in drug release from the two
dosage form.
Statistical Interpretation of Bioequivalence Data

After the data has been collected, statistical methods must be applied to determine the
level of significance of any observed difference in the rate and/or extent of absorption in
order to establish bioequivalence between two or more drug products. The commonly
adopted approaches to determine statistical differences are -
1. Analysis of variance (ANOVA) is a statistical procedure used to test the data for
differences within and between treatment and control groups. A statistical
difference between the pharmacokinetic parameters obtained from two or more
drug products is considered statistically significant if there is a probability of less
than 1 in 20 or 0.05 ( p 0.05). The probability p is used to indicate the level of
statistical significance. If p 0.05, the differences between the two drug products
are not considered statistically significant.
2. Confidence interval approach – Also called as two on e-sided test pr ocedur e, it
is used to demonstrate if the bioavailability from the test product is too low or
high in comparison to the reference product. The 90% confidence limits are
estimated for the sample means based on Student’s t distribution of data. A 90%
confidence interval about the ratio of means of the two drug products must be
within 20% for bioavailability parameters such AUC or Cmax i.e. the difference
between the bioavailabilities of the test product should not be greater than ± 20%
of the average of reference product (between 80 and 120%). When log

transformed data are used, the 90% confidence interval is set at 80-125%. These
confidence limits are also termed as bioequi valence i nterval .
METHODS FOR ENHANCEMENT OF BIOAVAILABILITY

As far as the definition of bioavailability is concerned, a drug with poor bioavailability is
the one with -
 Poor aqueous solu bil ity and/or slow di ssolu tion rate in biological fluids.
 Poor permeability through the biomembrane owing to inadequate partition
coefficient or lipophilicity or large molecular size such as that of protein or
peptide drugs such as insulin.
Both solubility as well as permeability of a drug depends upon its
physicochemical characteristics as discussed in Chapter 2.
Based on the intestinal permeability and solubility of drugs, Amidon et al
developed Biopharmaceutics Classification System (BCS) which classifies the drugs
into one of the 4 groups as shown in the table 11.8. The table also shows the approaches
employed to overcome formulation challenges in each class of drugs.
TABLE 11.8.
The Biopharmaceutics Classification System for Drugs
Class Solubility Permeability Absorption Examples Challenges in Drug
Pattern Delivery
I High High Well Diltiazem No major challenges for
Propranolol immediate release forms but
absorbed CR forms need to limit drug
Metoprolol release or dissolution since
absorption of released drug
is rapid.
II Low High Variable Nifedipine Formulations are designed
Carbamazepine to overcome solubility or
dissolution problems by
Naproxen various means (see later
sections of this chapter).
III High Low Variable Insulin Approaches are employed to
Metformin enhance permeability (see
later sections of this
Cimetidine chapter).
IV Low Low Poorly Taxol Combination of strategies
Chlorthiazide used for Class II and Class
absorbed III drugs are employed to
Furosemide improve both dissolution
and permeability.
Class V drugs: are those that are metabolically or chemically unstable thus limiting their bioavailability.
The various approaches to overcome these problems are aimed at enhancing their stability by use of
methods such as –
 Prodrug design.
 Enteric coating (protection from stomach acid).
 Enzyme inhibition or lymphatic delivery (to prevent presystemic metabolism).
 Lipid technologies.
Class I dru gs (high solubility/high permeability) are well absorbed orally since they
have neither solubility nor permeability limitation.
Class I I drugs (low solubility/high permeability) show variable absorption owing to
solubility limitation.
Class I I I drugs (high solubility/low permeability) also show variable absorption
owing
Class Ito
V permeability limitation. permeability) are poorly absorbed orally owing to
dr ugs (low solubility/low
both solubility and permeability limitations.
Class V drugs – are the ones that do not come under the purview of BCS
classification but includes drugs whose absorption is limited owing to their poor
stability in GI milieu –
 Gastric instability (omeprazole).
 Complexation in GI lumen.
 First pass metabolism – by intestinal enzymes (peptide drugs), hepatic
enzymes, microbial enzymes, etc.
control The BCS classification

absorption of a drug rate
– solubility, dissolution depends upon its three
and permeability that key parameters
correlates that
with three
respective dimensionless parameters – dose number, dissolution number and absorption
number (see table 11.9 and figure 11.4).
TABLE 11.9.
Drug Properties that Determine BCS Classification
Drug property influencing Corresponding Significance
absorption Dimensionless parameter
Solubility : A drug with high Dose number: It is the Ideally, dose ratio should be
below 1 if full dissolution is to
solubility is the strength
largest dosage one whoseis mass
uptakeofvolume
drug divided by ml
of 250 an be possible in principle.
soluble in 250 ml or less of and the drug‘s solubility. Obviously, higher doses will
raise the ratio and absorption
water over a pH range of 1-
less likely.
8.
Dissolution rate: A drug Di ssoluti on number: It is Ideally, dissolution number
product with rapid the ratio of mean residence should exceed 1. In the case of
dissolution is the one when time to mean dissolution solid dosage forms, a
> 85% of the labelled time. combination of inadequate
solubility or diffusivity, or
amount of drug substance
excessive particle size or
dissolves within 30 minutes
density can increase the time
using
in USP apparatus
a volume I orml
of < 900 II needed for full dissolution and
reduce this ratio.
buffer solutions.
Permeability: A drug with Absorption number: It is Ideally, absorption number

high permeability is the one the ratio of the mean should exceed 1. Longer
having extent of absorption residence time of drug in absorption times resulting from
greater than 90% of the the GIT to the absorption lower permeability will reduce
this ratio.
administered dose given that time.
the drug is stable in the
gastrointestinal environment
Fig. 11.4 Classification of Drugs on BCS basis
Solubility Determination – Methods for determining drug solubility are –

pH-solubility profile of test drug in aqueous media with a pH range of 1 to 7.5.
Shake-flask or titration method.
Permeability Determination – The methods are further classified as –

Determination of extent of absorption in humans:
Mass-balance pharmacokinetic studies.
Absolute bioavailability studies.
Intestinal permeability methods:
In vivo intestinal perfusions studies in humans.
In vivo or in situ intestinal perfusion studies in animals.
In vitro permeation experiments with excised human or animal intestinal tissue.
In vitro permeation experiments across epithelial cell monolayers.
Dissolution Determination – Methods for determining drug product dissolution are –

USP apparatus I (basket) at 100 rpm or USP apparatus II (paddle) at 50 rpm.
Dissolution media (900 ml): 0.1 N HCl or simulated gastric fluid, pH 4.5 buffer, and
pH 6.8 buffer or simulated intestinal fluid.
Compare dissolution profiles of test and reference products using a similarity factor
(f2).
Besides identifying the challenges in formulation design, the BCS is designed to guide
decisions with respect to in vitro and in vivo correlations (IVIVC).
The three conceptual appr oaches in overcomin g the bioavailabil ity pr oblems of
drugs are:
1. The Pharmaceutical Approach which involves modification of formulation,
manufacturing process or the physicochemical properties of the drug without
changing the chemical structure.
2. The Pharmacokinetic Approach in which the pharmacokinetics of the drug is
altered by modifying its chemical structure. This approach is further divided into
two categories –
 Development of new chemical entity (NCE) with desirable features
 Prodrug design.
3. The Biological Approach whereby the route of drug administration may be
changed such as changing from oral to parenteral route.
The second approach of chemical structure modification has a number of drawbacks
of being very expensive and time consuming, requires repetition of clinical studies and a
long time for regulatory approval. Moreover, the new chemical entity may suffer from
another pharmacokinetic disorder or bear the risk of precipitating adverse effects. Only
the pharmaceutical approach will be dealt herewith.
The pharm aceuti cal attempts, whether optimising the formulation, manufacturing
process or physicochemical properties of the drug, are mainly aimed at altering the
biopharmaceutic properties of drug in one of the several ways –
A. En hancement of dr ug solubil ity or dissoluti on r ate, as it is the major rate-
limiting step in the absorption of most drugs. This approach applies to class II
drugs according to BCS.
B. Enhancement of drug permeability. This approach applies to class III drugs

according to BCS.
C. En hancement of dru g stabil ity . This approach applies to class V drugs according
to BCS.
D. En hancement of gastr oin testin al r etenti on . This approach can apply to class II,
III or V drugs.
BIOAVAILABILITY ENHANCEMENT THROUGH ENHANCEMENT OF

DRUG SOLUBILITY OR DISSOLUTION RATE
There are several ways by which drug solubility or the dissolution rate can be enhanced.
Some of the widely used methods are discussed briefly.
1. Micronization: The process involves reducing the size of the solid drug particles
to 1 to 10 microns commonly by spray drying or by use of air attrition methods (fluid
energy or jet mill). The process is also called as micro-milling . Examples of drugs
whose bioavailability have been increased by micronization include griseofulvin and
several steroidal and sulpha drugs.
2. Nanonisation: It‘s a process whereby the drug powder is converted to

nanocrystals of sizes 200 - 600 nm, e.g. amphotericin B. The main production
technologies currently in use to produce drug nanocrystals yield as a product a dispersion
of drug nanocrystals in a liquid, typically water (called nanosuspension). There are three
basic technologies currently in use to prepare nanoparticles:
i. Pearl milling
ii. Homogenisation in water (wet milling as in a colloid mill)
iii. Homogenisation in non-aqueous media or in water with water-miscible
liquids.
3. Supercritical Fluid Recrystallization: Another novel nanosizing and

solubilisation technology whose application has increased in recent years is particle size
reduction via supercritical fluid (SCF) processes. Supercritical fluids (e.g. carbon
dioxide) are fluids whose temperature and pressure are greater than its critical
temperature (Tc) and critical pressure (Tp), allowing it to assume the properties of both a
liquid and a gas. At near-critical temperatures, SCFs are high compressible, allowing
moderate changes in pressure to greatly alter the density and mass transport
characteristics of a fluid that largely determine its solvent power. Once the drug particles
are solubilised within SCF, they may be recrystallised at greatly reduced particle sizes.
4. Use of Surfactants: Surfactants are very useful as absorption enhancers and

enhance both dissolution rate as well as permeability of drug. They enhance dissolution
rate primarily by promoting wetting and penetration of dissolution fluid into the solid
drug particles. They are generally used in concentration below their critical micelle
concentration (CMC) values since above CMC, the drug entrapped in the micelle
structure fails to partition in the dissolution fluid. Nonionic surfactants like polysorbates
are widely used. Examples of drugs whose bioavailability have been increased by use of
surfactants in the formulation include steroids like spironolactone.
5. Use of Salt Forms: Salts have improved solubility and dissolution characteristics
in comparison to the original drug. It is generally accepted that a minimum difference of
3 units between the pKa value of the group and that of its counterion is required to form
stable salts. Alkali metal salts of acidic drugs like penicillins and strong acid salts of basic
drugs like atropine are more water-soluble than the parent drug. Factors that influence
salt selection are physical and chemical properties of the salt, safety of counterion,
therapeutic indications and route of administration.
Salt formation does have its limitations –
It is not feasible to form salts of neutral compounds.
It may be difficult to form salts of very weak bases or acids.

The salt may be hygroscopic, exhibit polymorphism or has poor processing
characteristics.
Conversion of salt to free acid or base form of the drug on surface of solid
dosage form that prevents or retards drug release.
Precipitation of unionised drug in the GI milieu that has poor solubility.
6. Use of Precipitation Inhibitors: A significant increase in free drug concentration
above equilibrium solubility results in supersaturation, which can lead to drug
precipitation or crystallization. This can be prevented by use of inert polymers such

HPMC, PVP, PVA, PEG, etc. which act by one or more of the following mechanisms -
 Increase the viscosity of crystallization medium thereby reducing the
crystallization rate of drugs.
 Provide a steric barrier to drug molecules and inhibit crystallization through
specific intermolecular interactions on growing crystal surfaces.
 Adsorb onto faces of host crystals, reduce the crystal growth rate of the host
and produce smaller crystals.
7. Alteration of pH of the Drug Microenvironment: This can be achieved in two
ways—in situ salt formation, and addition of buffers to the formulation e.g. buffered
aspirin tablets.
8. Use of Amorphs, Anhydrates, Solvates and Metastable Polymorphs:
Depending upon the internal structure of the solid drug, selection of proper form of drug
with greater solubility is important. In general, amorphs are more soluble than metastable
polymorphs, anhydrates are more soluble than hydrates and solvates are more soluble
than non-solvates.
9. Solvent Deposition: In this method, the poorly aqueous soluble drug such as
nifedipine is dissolved in an organic solvent like alcohol and deposited on an inert,
hydrophilic, solid matrix such as starch or microcrystalline cellulose by evaporation of
solvent.
10. Precipitation: In this method, the poorly aqueous soluble drug such as
cyclosporine is dissolved in a suitable organic solvent followed by its rapid mixing with a
non-solvent to effect precipitation of drug in nanosize particles. The product so prepared
is also called as hydrosol .
11. Selective Adsorption on Insoluble Carriers: A highly active adsorbent such as
the inorganic clays like bentonite can enhance the dissolution rate of poorly water-soluble
drugs such as griseofulvin, indomethacin and prednisone by maintaining the
concentration gradient at its maximum. The two reasons suggested for the rapid release
of drugs from the surface of clays are —the weak physical bonding between the adsorbate
and the adsorbent, and hydration and swelling of the clay in the aqueous media.
12. Solid Solutions: The three means by which the particle size of a drug can be
reduced to submicron level are —
 Use of solid solutions,
 Use of eutectic mixtures, and
 Use of solid dispersions.
In all these cases, the solute is frequently a poorly water-soluble drug acting as the
guest and the solvent is a highly water-soluble compound or polymer acting as a host or
carrier.
A solid solution is a binary system comprising of a solid solute molecularly dispersed
in a solid solvent. Since the two components crystallize together in a homogeneous one
phase system, solid solutions are also called as molecular dispersions or mixed crystals.
Because of reduction in particle size to the molecular level, solid solutions show greater
aqueous solubility and faster dissolution than eutectics and solid dispersions. They are
generally prepared by fusion method whereby a physical mixture of solute and solvent
are melted together followed by rapid solidification. Such systems, prepared by fusion,
are often called as melts e.g. griseofulvin-succinic acid (Fig. 11.5). The griseofulvin
from such solid solution dissolves 6 to 7 times faster than pure griseofulvin.
Fig. 11.5 Binary phase diagram for continuous solid solution of A and B. TA and TB
are melting points of pure A and pure B respectively.
If the diameter of solute molecules is less than 60% of diameter of solvent molecules
or its volume less than 20% of volume of solvent molecule, the solute molecule can be
accommodated within the intermolecular spaces of solvent molecules e.g. digitoxin-PEG
6000 solid solution. Such systems show faster dissolution. When the resultant solid
solution is a homogeneous transparent and brittle system, it is called as glass solution.
Carriers that form glassy structure are citric acid, urea, PVP and PEG and sugars such as
dextrose, sucrose and galactose.
Solid solutions can be classified on two basis –
A. Miscibility between the drug and the carrier – on this basis the solid solutions
are divided into two categories –
1. Conti nu ous soli d solu tion is the one in which both the drug and the carrier are
miscible in all proportions. Such a solid solution is not reported in
pharmaceutical literature.
2. Discontinuous solid solution is the one where solubility of each of the

component in the other is limited (see fig. 11.5).
B. Distribution of drug in carrier structure – on this basis the solid solutions are
divided into two categories –
1. Substi tuti onal crystall in e soli d solu tion is the one in which the drug molecules
substitute for the carrier molecules in its crystal lattice. This happens when the
drug and carrier molecules are almost of same size.
2. I nterstitial crystalli ne solid soluti on is the one in which the drug molecules
occupy the interstitial spaces in the crystal lattice of carrier molecules. This
happens when the size of drug molecule is 40% or less than the size of carrier
molecules (fig. 11.6).
Fig. 11.6 Types of crystalline solid solution
The two mechanisms suggested for enhanced solubility and rapid dissolution of
molecular dispersions are:
When the binary mixture is exposed to water, the soluble carrier dissolves rapidly
leaving the insoluble drug in a state of microcrystalline dispersion of very fine
particles, and
When the solid solution, which is said to be in a state of randomly arranged solute
and solvent molecules in the crystal lattice, is exposed to the dissolution fluid, the
soluble carrier dissolves rapidly leaving the insoluble drug stranded at almost
molecular level.
Fig. 11.7 shows a comparison between the dissolution rates of different forms of
griseofulvin.
Fig. 11.7 Dissolution rates of griseofulvin as coarse particles, as micronized

particles and as eutectic and solid solution with succinic acid.
13. Eutectic Mixtures: These systems are also prepared by fusion method. Eutectic
melts differ from solid solutions in that the fused melt of solute-solvent show complete
miscibility but negligible solid-solid solubility i.e. such systems are basically intimately
blended physical mixture of two crystalline components. A phase diagram of two-
component system is shown in Fig. 11.8. When the eutectic mixture is exposed to water,
the soluble carrier dissolves leaving the drug in a microcrystalline state which solubilises
rapidly.
Fig. 11.8 Simple binary phase diagram showing eutectic point E. The eutectic
composition at point E of substances A and B represents the one having lowest
melting point.
Examples of eutectics include paracetamol-urea, griseofulvin-urea, griseofulvin-
succinic acid, etc. Solid solutions and eutectics, which are basically melts, are easy to
prepare and economical with no solvents involved. The method, however, cannot be
applied to:
 Drugs which fail to crystallize from the mixed melt.
 Drugs which are thermolabile.
 Carriers such as succinic acid that decompose at their melting point. The
eutectic product is often tacky, intractable or irregular crystal.
14. Solid Dispersions: These are generally prepared by solvent or co-precipitation
method whereby both the guest solute and the solid carrier solvent are dissolved in a
common volatile liquid solvent such as alcohol. The liquid solvent is removed by
evaporation under reduced pressure or by freeze-drying which results in amorphous
precipitation of guest in a crystalline carrier. Thus, the basic difference between solid
dispersions and solid solutions/eutectics is that the drug is precipitated out in an
amorphous form in the former as opposed to crystalline form in the latter ; e.g.
amorphous sulphathiazole in crystalline urea. Such dispersions are often called as co-
evaporates or co-precipitates . The method is suitable for thermolabile substances but
has a number of disadvantages like higher cost of processing, use of large quantities of
solvent, difficulty in complete removal of solvent, etc. The carriers used are same as for
eutectics or solid solutions. With glassy materials, the dispersions formed are called as
glass dispersions or glass suspensions. Fig. 11.9 shows comparative dissolution rates of
griseofulvin from PVP dispersions. Other polymers such as PEG and HPMC are also
employed to prepare solid dispersions of poorly water-soluble drugs such as nifedipine

and itraconazole.
Fig. 11.9 Dissolution rate enhancement of griseofulvin by solid dispersion technique.
Preparation of solid dispersions also presents several limitations –

 Since the carrier is hydrophilic and the drug is hydrophobic, it is difficult to
find a common solvent to dissolve both components.
 The product is often soft, waxy and possesses poor compressibility and
flowability.
 Physical instability of the solid dispersion.
 Difficulty in preparation of a reproducible product.
15. Molecular Encapsulation with Cyclodextrins: The beta- and gamma-

cyclodextrins and several of their derivatives are unique in having the ability to form
molecul ar i nclu sion complexes with hydrophobic drugs having poor aqueous solubility.
These bucket-shaped oligosaccharides produced from starch are versatile in having a
hydrophobic cavity of size suitable enough to accommodate the lipophilic drugs as

guests; the outside of the host molecule is relatively hydrophilic (Fig. 11.10). Thus, the
molecularly encapsulated drug has greatly improved aqueous solubility and dissolution
rate. There are several examples of drugs with improved bioavailability due to such a
phenomenon — thiazide diuretics, barbiturates, benzodiazepines and a number of
NSAIDs.
Fig. 11.10 Functional and structural feature of a cyclodextrin molecule showing an

encapsulated drug.
16. Spherical Crystallization: add some text

DRUG PERMEABILITY ACROSS BIOMEMBRANE
On several occasions, the rate-limiting step in drug absorption is transport through the
intestinal epithelium owing to poor permeability. Several approaches besides the use of
lipophilic prodrugs that increase the drug permeation rate are discussed below.
1. Lipid Technologies: With an increase in the number of emerging hydrophobic

drugs, several lipid-based formulations have been designed to improve their
bioavailability by a combination of various mechanisms briefly summarized as follows:
 Physicochemical —Enhanced dissolution and solubility.

 Physiological —potential mechanisms include -
Enhancement of effective luminal solubility by stimulation of secretion of
bile salts, endogenous biliary lipids including phospholipids and cholesterol
which together form mixed micelles and facilitate GI solubilization of drug.
Reduction in gastric emptying rate thereby increasing the time available for
dissolution and absorption.
Increase in intestinal membrane permeability.
Decreased intestinal blood flow.
Decreased luminal degradation.
Increased uptake from the intestinal lumen into the lymphatic system (and a
reduction in first-pass hepatic and GI metabolism).
The various lipid-based dosage forms include – lipid solutions and suspensions,
micelle solubilization, coarse emulsions, microemulsions, multiple emulsions, self-
emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS), self-microemulsifying drug delivery
systems (SMEDDS), nanoparticles and liposomes.
The reasons for the increasing interest in lipid-based systems are due to the
several advantages they offer and include:
 Physicochemical advantages: such as
 Solubilisation of drugs with low aqueous solubility
 Stabilisation of labile drugs against hydrolysis or oxidation.
 Phar maceutical advantages: such as
 Better characterization of lipidic excipients
 Formulation versatility and the choice of different drug delivery
systems
 Opportunity for formulation as sustained release product.
 Pharm acoki netic advantages: such as
 Improved understanding of the manner in which lipids enhance oral
bioavailability
 Reduced plasma profile variability
 Potential for drug targeting applications.
 Phar macodynamic advantages: such as
 Reduced toxicity
 Consistency in drug response.
a. L ipi d solu tion s and suspensions: Some lipophilic drugs such as steroids
have appreciable solubility in triacylglycerols alone. It is therefore
comparatively straightforward to administer the drug in an oily liquid (e.g.
encapsulated) and thereby achieve satisfactory absorption. One disadvantage
of this formulation approach, however, is that oil alone rarely provides the
solubilizing power to dissolve the required dose in a reasonable quantity of
oil. This limits the option of using a simple drug/oil formulation system.
b. Coarse emul sion s, micr oemul sion s, SEDD S and SM ED DS: The ability of
oil to accommodate a hydrophobic drug in solution can be improved by the
addition of surfactants. The surfactants also perform the function of
dispersing the liquid vehicle on dilution in gastrointestinal fluid. Hence, the
drug is present in fine droplets of the oil/surfactants mixture which spread
readily in the gastro-intestinal tract. Self-emulsifying/microemulsifying
systems are formed using an oily vehicle (or a mixture of a hydrophilic
phase and a lipophilic phase) a surfactant with a high HLB and if required, a
co-surfactant. Unlike emulsions, the resultant liquid is almost clear. These
pre-concentrates form spontaneously an emulsion/microemulsion in aqueous
media (e.g. gastro-intestinal tract).
c. Soli d lipi dstate

the liquid nanoparti
of the cles: To overcome
oil droplets, thelipid
the liquid disadvantages
is replaced associated with
by a solid lipid
leading to the formation of solid lipid nanoparticles. In contrast to
emulsions, the particles consist of a solid core made from solid lipids. They
are characterized by a mean diameter between approx. 100 to 1000 nm.
There are two basic production techniques for solid lipid nanoparticles –
 Homogenization of melted lipids at elevated temperature, and
 Homogenization of a suspension of solid lipids at or below room

temperature.
d. Liposomes: Liposomes are broadly defined as lipid bilayers surrounding an
aqueous space. Liposoluble drugs can be embedded in the ―fatty‖ regions,
while hydrophilic substances are held in the aqueous internal spaces of these
globular vesicles.
2. Ion Pairing: The ion pairing approach involves co-administration of a

hydrophilic or polar drug with a suitable lipophilic counterion, which consequently
improves the partitioning of the resultant ion-pair (relatively more lipophilic) into the
intestinal membrane. In fact, the approach seems to increase the oral bioavailability of
ionizable drugs, such as atenolol, by approximately 2-fold. However, it is important that a
counterion possess high lipophilicity, sufficient aqueous solubility, physiological
compatibility, and metabolic stability.
3. Penetration Enhancers: Compounds which facilitate the transport of drugs
across the biomembrane are called as penetrati on/perm eation enh ancer s or promoters.
This method is used mainly in cases of hydrophilic drugs which are expected to have
difficulty in penetrating the lipid structure of the biomembrane. Penetration enhancers act
interaction of its lipid part with the polar component of membrane phospholipids.
Penetration enhancers can be divided into three categories –
1. Substances that act very quickly have a strong effect and cause injury to the
membrane (which is reversible), e.g. fatty acids such as oleic, linoleic and
arachidonic and their monoglycerides.
2. Substances that act quickly, cause temporary injury but have average activity, e.g.
salicylates and certain bile salts.
3. Substances having average to strong activity but cause sustained histological
changes, e.g. SLS, EDTA and citric acid.

DRUG STABILITY
The various ways by which improvement of stability of drug in the GIT has a positive
impact on bioavailability are discussed below.
1. Enteric Coating: Enteric-coated systems utilize polymeric coatings that are
insoluble in the gastric media and therefore, prevent or retard drug release in the stomach.
Such systems release the drug in the alkaline milieu of intestine. Bioavailability of drugs
that are unstablesuch

benzimidizoles in the
as gastric milieu,
omeprazole canfor
be e.g. erythromycin,
improved penicillin
by enteric coating.V, pancreatin and
2. Complexation: Complexation, in certain instances, can be used to increase the

stability of drug in the GI milieu, particularly those of ester drugs and thus enhance their
oral availability. Generally speaking, β-cyclodextrins are potential carriers for achieving
such objectives but other complexing agents, such as caffeine, sodium salicylate, sodium
benzoate, and nicotinamide, may also be used.
3. Use of Metabolism Inhibitors: Co-administration of a drug with low

bioavailability and its metabolism inhibitor, which can selectively inhibit any of the
contributing processes, would result in increased fractional absorption and hence a higher
bioavailability. In fact, this approach seems to be a promising alternative to overcome the
enzymatic barriers to oral delivery of metabolically labile drugs such as peptides and
proteins. Current novel approaches in this area include:
 Bioadhesive deli very systems that can reduce the drug degradation between the
delivery system and absorbing membrane by providing intimate contact with GI
mucosa.
 Controlled- release microencapsulated systems that can provide simultaneous
delivery of a drug and its specific enzyme inhibitor at the desired site for required
period of time.
 I mmobil ization of enzyme inhi bitors on mucoadhesive delivery systems.
Interestingly, the intestinal wall metabolism ( prehepatic metaboli sm ) may also be

inhibited by co-administration of certain drugs and diet, which act by selectively
inhibiting an enzyme present in enterocytes. An illustrative example is that of
cyclosporin, which undergoes extensive intestinal metabolism, resulting in low
bioavailability ranging between 30–40%. Studies have shown that co-administration of
ketoconazole and grapefruit juice, which contains the inhibitory components, can
significantly decrease the presystemic metabolism (both act via selective inhibition of
intestinal, not hepatic, CYP3A4) and consequently increase the oral bioavailability of
cyclosporin. In a differential manner, however, ketoconazole moderately inhibits P-gp,
whereas grapefruit juice activates P-gp-mediated efflux of cyclosporine, which is a well-
characterized substrate of P-gp, thereby partially counteracting the CYP3A4-inhibitory
effects of grapefruit juice.
Grapefruit juice is reported to be a powerful inhibitor of enzyme CYP3A4 and is

known to enhance the bioavailability of several drugs. It could be argued that extraction
of such components from grapefruit juice (thought to be flavonoids) and their inclusion
as excipient in the dosage form would lead to not only more complete but also more
consistent systemic levels by counteracting inconsistencies brought about by enzyme
inhibitors in food and drink.
Co-administration of a drug that can selectively inhibit an enzyme in the liver

may lead to increased bioavailability of another drug. For example, co-administration of
erythromycin can result in inhibition of hepatic metabolism and thereby significantly
increase the oral bioavailability of cyclosporin. As a matter of fact, this attribute of
erythromycin appears to be selective, which permits a noninvasive measurement of the in
vivo hepatic CYP3A4 activity, popularly known as erythromycin breath test. Many
examples also exist related to the inhibitory effects of diet on hepatic first-pass
metabolism.
BIOAVAILABILITY ENHANCEMENT THROUGH GASTROINTESTINAL

RETENTION
Gastro-retentive drug delivery systems (GRDDS) are designed on the basis of delayed
gastric emptying and CR principles, and are intended to restrain and localize the drug
delivery device in the stomach or within the upper parts of the small intestine until the
entire drug is released. Excipients that are bioadhesive or that swell on hydration when
incorporated in an oral dosage form, can promote gastro-retention and absorption by –
 Increased contact with epithelial surfaces
 Prolonging residence time in the stomach
 Delaying intestinal transit.
Cellulose ethers, gums of natural origin, and synthetic acrylic acid polymers have
been evaluated for such purposes. The range of materials available and their differing
viscoelastic and rheological

to develop delivery behaviours
units with balancedmean that itso
properties is that
possible, by judicious
adhesion, density, admixture,
hydration,
drug release rate, etc. can be tailored to the drug in question and the physiological
characteristics of the target delivery site.
QUESTIONS
1. Define bioavailability. What are the objectives of bioavailability studies?
2. Enumerate the factors affecting bioavailability of a drug from its dosage form.
3. In a bioavailability study, explain how determination of both rate and extent of
absorption are important.
4. Define absolute and relative bioavailability. What is the basic difference between
the two?
5. What are the limitations of using oral solution as a standard for determining absolute
bioavailability?
6. Compare single dose with multiple dose bioavailability studies.
7. Discuss the merits and demerits of using healthy subjects and patients as volunteers
for bioavailability studies.
8. What should be the duration of washout period between any two bioavailability
studies in the same subject? Why?
9. Name the methods for determining bioavailability of a drug from its dosage form.
10. Which is the method of choice in bioavailability determination? On what principle
is such a study based?
11. Explain with significance the parameters used in bioavailability determination by
plasma level studies.
12. In multiple dose study, bioavailability determination is done at steady-state and one
dosing interval. Explain.
13. Why is determination of absorption rate not considered important in the multiple
dosing method?
14. What is the principle behind assessment of bioavailability using urinary excretion
studies?
15. Determination of metabolites in urine is not used as a measure of bioavailability?
Why?
16. Why should the volunteers be instructed to completely empty their bladders while
giving urine samples?
17. Why should frequent sampling of urine/plasma be done initially after drug
administration in bioavailability determination?
18. Name the parameters examined in urinary excretion data to determine
bioavailability. What is their analogy with parameters of plasma level studies?
19. What are the drawbacks of using acute pharmacological response and therapeutic
response as measures of bioavailability?
20. What is the reliable alternative to in vivo bioavailability studies in monitoring
batch-to-batch consistency in pharmaceutical manufacturing?
21. What factors should be considered in the design of dissolution testing models?
22. What are the ideal features expected from dissolution apparatus?
23. What are various compendial dissolution apparatus designs? Discuss briefly stating
their applications.
24. What is the importance of similarity factor f2 in dissolution profile comparison?
25. Define Q value. What is the dissolution acceptance criterion as per USP?
26. What are the objectives and approaches in developing in vitro- in vivo correlation?
27. Discuss the various methods of developing quantitative linear in vitro-in vivo
relationships.
28. What are various levels in in vitro-in vivo correlations?
29. Discuss the significance of biopharmaceutic classification system in determining
IVIVC?
30. Define the terms ‗high solubility‘ and high permeability‘ according to BCS.
31. What are various drug properties and their corresponding dimensionless parameters
that form the basis of BCS classification?
32. What criteria are necessary for BCS biowaiver for in vivo
bioavailability/bioequivalence studies?
33. Discuss the objectives for conductance of bioequivalence studies.

34. Define the following — equivalence, chemical equivalence, pharmaceutical
equivalence, bioequivalence and clinical equivalence.
35. What are the various types of bioequivalence studies?
36. Under what circumstances an in vivo bioequivalence studies need to be conducted?
37. Why are bioequivalence studies always performed in healthy human volunteers?
38. What are the circumstances for biowaiver of an in vivo bioequivalence study?
39. Discuss with advantages and disadvantages the various methods of bioequivalence
experimental study design.
40. Draw a typical Latin square design for conducting bioequivalence study in 6
subjects for 3 three different formulations.
41. Enlist the elements of a bioequivalence study protocol.
42. Why is it easy to establish bioequivalence between dosage forms in comparison to
determination of pharmacokinetics or bioavailability of a new formulation?
43. What are the generally accepted, statistical rules for establishing bioequivalence
between formulations?
44. How are drugs classified according to biopharmaceutic classification system?
45. What are the various approaches aimed at enhancing bioavailability of a drug from
its dosage form?
46. Discuss the methods aimed at enhancing bioavailability through enhancement of
drug solubility or dissolution rate.

drug permeability.
drug stability.
49. What are the various means by which the particle size of a drug can be reduced to
submicron level?
50. How are solid solutions classified?
51. What is the basic difference between solid solutions and solid dispersions? Give
reasons for the faster dissolution of the former.
52. Solid solutions dissolve faster than eutectics. Why?
53. Discuss the methods aimed at enhancing bioavailability through gastroretention.
54. A new drug undergoes both degradation in gastric fluids as well as extensive
presystemic hepatic metabolism. In order to obtain optimum oral bioavailability,
which of the following formulations will you prefer: solution, suspension, tablet,
enteric-coated tablet, SR tablet or enteric-coated microspheres? Why? Rank them in
order of decreasing bioavailability.
55. Following data is obtained for 4 formulations of pentoxifylline in volunteers of
average weight 50 Kg.
Drug Product Dose (mg/kg) AUC (mcg.hr/l)
i.v. solution 1.2 450
oral solution 4.0 822
oral capsule 4.0 736
oral S.R. tablet 8.0 1040
a. What is the absolute bioavailability of the drug from capsule and SR tablet?
Answer : Capsule = 49% and SR tablet = 34.6%.
b. What is the relative bioavailability of capsule and SR tablet against oral solution?
Answer : Capsule = 89.5% and SR tablet = 63.2%.

c. Which solid formulation shows better bioavailability?
d. Are the two solid formulations bioequivalent?
e. What could be the possible reasons for poor bioavailability from SR tablets?
56. 50
Themg
three
oralpharmacokinetic
formulations ofparameters fromcompanies,
two different urinary excretion
of whichdata
A of
is athe
drug given as
innovator‘s
product, are as follows:
Parameters Formulation
A B
(dXu/dt)max (mg/hr) 6.0 8.0
(tu)max (hour) 2.0 1.0
Xu, (mg) 39.1 35.9
a. What is the relative availability of formulation B against A?

Answer: 92.0%.
b. Are the two formulations bioequivalent?
c. If the drug is meant for the treatment of an acute condition, which one of the two
formulations is better?
12. Applications of Pharmacokinetic Principles

The time course of drug concentration in the body after its administration can be defined by a
number of pharmacokinetic parameters. Often, the information gained about the
pharmacokinetics of one drug helps in anticipating the pharmacokinetics of another. The
knowledge of pharmacokinetic behaviour of a drug coupled with important
pharmacodynamic parameters like therapeutic index can be put to several applications:
1. Design and development of new drugs with greatly improved therapeutic
effectiveness and fewer or no toxic effects
2. Design and development of an optimum formulation for better use of the drug
3. Design and development of controlled/targeted release formulation
4. Design an appropriate multiple dosage regimen
5. Select the appropriate route for drug administration
6. Select the right drug for a particular illness
7. Predict and explain drug-food and drug-drug interactions

8. Therapeutic drug monitoring in individual patients
9. Dosage adjustment in situations of altered physiology and drug interactions.
The applications of pharmacokinetic principles are mainly aimed at achieving the
therapeutic objective. The therapeutic objective is often control or cure of the condition in
shortest possible time with minimum side effects by the use of least amount of drug. New
drug development or chemical modification is frequently done to improve pharmacokinetic
properties and increase efficacy. Drug product design is aimed at optimising bioavailability
or better control/cure of illness through controlled- or targeted-release. Proper choice of
route of administration is necessary to ensure that the drug moves to the site of action at a
sufficiently rapid rate and amount. Selection of a suitable drug is based on achieving optimal
therapy by balancing the desirable and undesirable effects. Co-administration of several
drugs to a patient may lead to changes in the pharmacokinetic profile of a drug which is
indicative of interactions between drugs. Such an understanding of interaction makes
possible more rational use of drugs that have to be co-administered.
Clinically, the two most important applications of pharmacokinetic principles are:
1. Design of an optimal dosage regimen, and
2. Clinical management of individual patient and therapeutic drug monitoring.
Such applications permit the physician to use certain drugs more safely and sensibly.
DESIGN OF DOSAGE REGIMENS

Dosage r egimen is defined as the manner in which a drug is taken. For some drugs like
analgesics, hypnotics, antiemetics, etc., a single dose may provide effective treatment.
However, the duration of most illnesses is longer than the therapeutic effect produced by a
single dose. In such cases, drugs are required to be taken on a repetitive basis over a period
of time depending upon the nature of illness. Thus, for successful therapy, design of an
optimal multiple dosage regimen is necessary. An optimal mu lti ple dosage r egim en is the
one in which the drug is administered in suitable doses (by a suitable route), with sufficient
frequency that ensures maintenance of plasma concentration within the therapeutic window
(without excessive fluctuations and drug accumulation) for the entire duration of therapy.
For some drugs like antibiotics, a minimum effective concentration should be maintained at
all times and for drugs with narrow therapeutic indices like phenytoin, attempt should be
made not to exceed toxic concentration.
Approaches to Design of Dosage Regimen
The various approaches employed in designing a dosage regimen are –

1. Empir i cal Dosage Regimen – is designed by the physician based on empirical clinical
data, personal experience and clinical observations. This approach is, however, not
very accurate.
2. I ndi vidu ali zed Dosage Regim en – is the most accurate approach and is based on the
pharmacokinetics of drug in the individual patient. The approach is suitable for
hospitalised patients but is quite expensive.
3. Dosage Regimen on Populati on A ver ages – This is the most often used approach.
The method is based on one of the two models –
(a) F ixed model – here, population average pharmacokinetic parameters are used
directly to calculate the dosage regimen.
(b) Adaptive model – is based on both population average pharmacokinetic
parameters of the drug as well as patient variables such as weight, age, sex,
body surface area and known patient pathophysiology such as renal disease.
In designing a dosage regimen based on population averages —
1. It is assumed that all pharmacokinetic parameters of the drug remain constant during
the course of therapy once a dosage regimen is established. The same becomes invalid
if any change is observed.
2. The calculations are based on open one-compartment model which can also be
applied to two compartment model if is used instead of KE, and Vd,ss instead of Vd
while calculating the regimen.
Irrespective of the route of administration and complexity of pharmacokinetic equations,
the two major parameters that can be adjusted in developing a dosage regimen are —
1. The dose size — the quantity of drug administered each time, and
2. The dosing frequency — the time interval between doses.
Both parameters govern the amount of drug in the body at any given time.
Dose Size
The magnitude of both therapeutic and toxic responses depends upon dose size. Dose size
calculation also requires the knowledge of amount of drug absorbed after administration of
each dose. Greater the dose size, greater the fluctuations between Css,max and Css,min
during each dosing interval and greater the chances of toxicity (Fig. 12.1). For drugs
administered chronically, dose size calculation is based on average steady state blood levels
and is computed from equation 12.8.
Fig. 12.1 Schematic representation of influence of dose size on plasma concentration-time

profile after oral administration of a drug at fixed intervals of time.
Dosing Frequency
The dose interval (inverse of dosing frequency) is calculated on the basis of half-life of the
drug. If the interval is increased and the dose is unchanged, Cmax, C min and Cav decrease
but the ratio C max/Cmin increases. Opposite is observed when dosing interval is reduced or
dosing frequency increased. It also results in greater drug accumulation in the body and
toxicity (Fig. 12.2).
Fig. 12.2 Schematic representation of the influence of dosing frequency on plasma

concentration-time profile obtained after oral administration of fixed doses of a
drug.
A proper balance between both dose size and dosing frequency is often desired to attain
steady-state concentration with minimum fluctuations and to ensure therapeutic efficacy and
safety. The same cannot be obtained by giving larger doses less frequently. However,
administering smaller doses more frequently results in smaller fluctuations.
Generally speaking, every subsequent dose should be administered at an interval equal to

half-life of the drug. A rule of thumb is that –
 For drugs with wide therapeutic index such as penicillin, larger doses may be
administered at relatively longer intervals (more than the half-life of drug) without
any toxicity problem
 For drugs with narrow therapeutic index such as digoxin, small doses at frequent
intervals (usually less than the half-life of the drug) is better to obtain a profile
with least fluctuations which is similar to that observed with constant rate infusion
or controlled-release system.
Drug Accumulation During Multiple Dosing

Consider the amount of drug in the body-time profile shown in Fig. 12.3. obtained after i.v.
multiple dosing with dosing interval equal to one t½.
After the administration of first dose X o at = 0, the amount of drug in the body will be X
= 1X . At the next dosing interval when X = ½X , the amount of drug remaining in the
body,oadministration of the next i.v. dose raises the body
o content to X = Xo + ½X o i.e. drug
accumulation occurs in the body. Thus, accumulation occurs because drug from previous
doses has not been removed completely. As the amount of drug in the body rises gradually
due to accumulation, the rate of elimination also rises proportionally until a steady-state or
plateau is reached when the rate of drug entry into the body equals the rate of exit. The
maximum and minimum values of X i.e. X ss,max and Xss,min approach respective
asymptotes at plateau. It is interesting to note that at plateau, Xss,min = 1X o and Xss,max =
2Xo i.e. Xss,min equals the amount of drug in the body after the first dose and X ss,max
equals twice the first dose. Also (Xss,max – Xss,min) = Xo and Xss,max/Xss,min = 2. All
this applies
degree only when is =
of accumulation t½ and
greater anddrug is administered intravenously. When
vice-versa. < t½, the
Thus, the extent to which a drug accumulates in the body during multiple dosing is
independent of dose size, and is a function of –
 Dosing interval, and
 Elimination half-life.
The extent to which a drug will accumulate with any dosing interval in a patient can be
derived from information obtained with a single dose and is given by accumulation index
Rac as:
1
R ac
1- e
-K E (12.1)
Fig.12.3 Accumulation of drug in the body during multiple dose regimen of i.v. bolus with
dosing interval equal to one half-life of the drug. Approximately 5 half-lives are
required for attainment of steady-state.
Time to Reach Steady-State During Multiple Dosing

The time required to reach steady-state depends primarily upon the half-life of the drug.
Provided Ka >> KE, the plateau is reached in approximately 5 half-lives. This is called as
plateau pri nciple. It also means that the rate at which the multiple dose steady-state is
reached is determined only by K E. The time taken to reach steady-state is independent of

dose size, dosing interval and number of doses.
Maximum and Minimum Concentration During Multiple Dosing

If n is the number of doses administered, the Cmax and Cmin obtained on multiple dosing
after the nth dose is given as:
-nK E
1 e
Cn, max C0 (12.2)
1 e- K E
1 e-nK E -K E -K E
Cn, min C0 -K E
e Cn, max e (12.3)
1 e
The maximum and minimum concentration of drug in plasma at steady-state are found by
following equations:
C0
Css, max 1 - e- K E (12.4)
-K E
C0 e -K E (12.5)
Css, min -K E
Css, max e
1 e
where Co = concentration that would be attained from instantaneous absorption and
distribution (obtained by extrapolation of elimination curve to time zero). Equations 12.2 to
12.5 can also be written in terms of amount of drug in the body. Fraction of dose absorbed,
F, should be taken into account in such equations.
Fluctuation is defined as the ratio Cmax/Cmin. Greater the ratio, greater the fluctuation.
Like accumulation, it depends upon dosing frequency and half-life of the drug. It also
depends upon the rate of absorption. The greatest fluctuation is observed when the drug is
given as i.v. bolus. Fluctuations are small when the drug is given extravascularly because of
continuous absorption.
Average Concentration and Body Content on Multiple Dosing to Steady-State

The average drug concentration at steady-state Css,av is a function of –
 The maintenance dose Xo,
 The fraction of dose absorbed F,
 The dosing interval and
 Clearance ClT (or Vd and KE or t½) of the drug.
F X0
Css, av (12.6)
ClT
1.44 F X0 AUC (single dose)
(12.7)
Vd
where the coefficient 1.44 is the reciprocal of 0.693 in equation 12.7. AUC is the area under
the curve following a single maintenance dose. Equation 12.7 can be used to calculate
maintenance dose of a drug to achieve a desired concentration. Since X = Vd C, the body
content at steady-state is given as:
X 1.44 F X0 t1/2 (12.8)

ss, av 301/413
These average values are not arithmetic mean of C ss,max and Css,min since the plasma
drug concentration declines exponentially.
Loading and Maintenance Doses

A drug does not show therapeutic activity unless it reaches the desired steady-state. It takes
about 5 half-lives to attain it and therefore the time taken will be too long if the drug has a
long half-life. Plateau can be reached immediately by administering a dose that gives the
desired steady-state instantaneously before the commencement of maintenance doses X o.
Such an initial or first dose intended to be therapeutic is called as priming dose or loading
dose Xo,L. A simple equation for calculating loading dose is:
Css, av Vd
X 0, L (12.9)
F
After e.v. administration, Cmax is always smaller than that after i.v. administration and
hence loading dose is proportionally smaller. For drugs having low therapeutic indices, the
loading dose may be divided into smaller doses to be given at various intervals before the
first maintenance dose. When Vd is not known, loading dose may be calculated by the
following equation:
X 0, L 1
-K a -K E
(12.10)
X0 1- e 1- e
The above equation applies when K a >> KE and drug is distributed rapidly. When the
drug is given i.v. or when absorption is extremely rapid, the absorption phase is neglected and
the above equation reduces to accumulation index:
X 0, L 1
-K E
R ac (12.11)
X 1- e0
The ratio of loading dose to maintenance dose Xo,L/Xo is called as dose ratio. As a rule,
when = t ½, dose ratio should be equal to 2.0 but must be smaller than 2.0 when > t½ and
greater when < t½. Fig. 12.4. shows that if loading dose is not optimum, either too low or
too high, the steady-state is attained within approximately 5 half-lives in a manner similar to
when no loading dose is given.
Fig. 12.4 Schematic representation of plasma concentration-time profiles that result when
dose ratio is greater than 2.0, equal to 2.0 and smaller than 2.0.
The foregoing discussion and the equations expressed until now apply only to drugs that
follow one-compartment kinetics with first-order disposition. Equations will be complex for
multicompartment models.
Maintenance of Drug within the Therapeutic Range
The easeupon
depends or difficulty
— in maintaining drug concentration within the therapeutic window
1. The therapeutic index of the drug
2. The half-life of the drug
3. Convenience of dosing.
It is extremely difficult to maintain such a level for a drug with short half-life (less than 3
hours) and narrow therapeutic index e.g. heparin, since the dosing frequency has to be
essentially less than t½. However, drugs such as penicillin (t½ = 0.9 hours) with high
therapeutic index may be given less frequently (every 4 to 6 hours) but the maintenance dose
has to be larger so that the plasma concentration persists above the minimum inhibitory level.
A drug with intermediate t½ (3 to 8 hours) may be given at intervals t½ if therapeutic
index is low and those with high indices can be given at intervals between 1 to 3 half-lives.
Drugs with half-lives greater than 8 hours are more convenient to dose. Such drugs are
usually administered once every half-life. Steady-state in such cases can be attained rapidly
by administering a loading dose. For drugs with very long half-lives (above 24 hours) e.g.
amlodipine, once daily dose is very convenient.
Design of Dosage Regimen from Plasma Concentrations

If the therapeutic range, apparent V d and clearance or half-life of a drug is known, then
dosage regimen can be designed to maintain drug concentration within the specified
therapeutic range. The latter is defined by lower limit (Clower) and an upper limit (C upper).
The maximum dosing interval, which ideally depends upon the therapeutic index (can be
defined as a ratio of Cupper to Clower) and elimination half-life of the drug, can be expressed
by equation 12.12, a modification of equation 12.5.
2.303log Cupper / Clower
max
(12.12)
KE
Since KE = 0.693/t½, the above equation can also be written as:
max 3.32 t1/2 log Cupper / Clower (12.13)
Understandably, the dosing interval selected is always smaller than max. The maximum
maintenance dose Xo,max that can be given every max is expressed as:
Vd Cupper Clower
X0, max (12.14)
F
After a convenient dosing interval , smaller than max has been selected, the maintenance
dose is given as:
X0,max
X0 (12.15)
max
Administration of Xo every produces an average steady-state concentration defined by

equation 12.7. The value of Css,av can also be calculated from the therapeutic range
according to equation 12.16.
Cupper Clower
Css, av (12.16)
2.303 log Cupper / Clower
INDIVIDUALIZATION
Because of reasonable homogeneity in humans, the dosage regimens are calculated on
population basis. However, same dose of a drug may produce large differences in
pharmacological response in different individuals. This is called as intersubject variability.
In other words, it means that the dose required to produce a certain response varies from
individual to individual. Rational drug therapy requires individualization of dosage regimen
to fit a particular patient's needs. This requires knowledge of pharmacokinetics of drugs. The
application of pharmacokinetic principles in the dosage regimen design for the safe and
effective management of illness in individual patient is called as clinical pharmacokinetics.
The two sources of variability in drug responses are:
1. Pharmacokinetic variability which is due to differences in drug concentration at the
site of action (as reflected from plasma drug concentration) because of interindividual
differences in drug absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion.
2. Pharmacodynamic variability which is attributed to differences in effect produced
by a given drug concentration.
The major cause for variations is pharmacokinetic variability. Differences in the plasma
levels of a given drug in the same subject when given on different occasions is called as
intrasubject variability. It is rarely encountered in comparison to interindividual variations.
The differences in variability differ for different drugs. Some drugs show greater variability
than the others. The major causes of intersubject pharmacokinetic variability are genetics,
disease, age, body-weight and drug-drug interactions.
Less important causes are 304/413
pharmaceutical formulation, route of administration, environmental factors and patient

noncompliance.
The main objective of individualization is aimed at optimising the dosage regimen. An
inadequate therapeutic response calls for a higher dosage whereas drug related toxicity calls
for a reduction in dosage. Thus, in order to aid individualization, a drug must be made
available in dosage forms of different dose strengths. The number of dose strengths in
which a drug should be made available depends upon 2 major factors—
1. The therapeutic index of the drug, and
2. The degree of inter-subject variability.
Smaller the therapeutic index and greater the variability, more the number of dose
strengths required.
Based on the assumption that all patients require the same plasma drug concentration
range for therapeutic effectiveness, the steps involved in the individualization of dosage
regimen are:
1. Estimation of pharmacokinetic parameters in individual patient and determining their
deviation from the population values to evaluate the extent of variability. Greater the
accountability of variations, better the chances of attaining the desired therapeutic
objective.
2. Attributing the variability to some measurable characteristic such as hepatic or renal
disease, age, weight, etc.
3. Designing the new dosage regimen from the collected data.
The design of new dosage regimen involves:
1. Adjustment of dosage, or
2. Adjustment of dosing interval, or
3. Adjustment of both dosage and dosing interval.
Dosing of Drugs in Obese Patients

The apparent volume of distribution of a drug is greatly affected by changes in body weight
since the latter is directly related to the volume of various body fluids. The ideal body weight
(IBW) for men and women can be calculated from following formulae:
IBW (men) = 50 Kg ± 1 Kg/2.5 cm above or below 150 cm in height (12.17)
IBW (women) = 45 Kg ± 1 Kg/2.5 cm above or below 150 cm in height (12.18)
Any person whose body weight is more than 25% above the IBW is considered obese. In
such patients, the lean-to-adipose tissue ratio is small because of greater proportion of body
fat which alters the Vd of drugs. The ECF of adipose tissue is small in comparison to lean
tissue in obese patients.
Following generalizations can be made regarding drug distribution and dose adjustment in
obese patients:
1. For drugs such as digoxin that do not significantly distribute in the excess body space,
Vd do not change and hence dose to be administered should be calculated on IBW
basis.
2. For polar drugs such as antibiotics (gentamicin) which distribute in excess body space
of obese patients to an extent less than that in lean tissues, the dose should be lesser
on per Kg total body weight basis but more than that on IBW basis.
3. In case of drugs such as caffeine, theophylline, lidocaine and lorazepam which

distribute to the same extent in both lean and adipose tissues, the V d is larger in obese
patients but same on per Kg total body weight basis; hence, dose should be
administered on total body weight basis.
4. For drugs such a phenytoin, diazepam and thiopental which are lipid soluble and
distribute more in adipose tissues, the V d is larger per Kg body weight in obese
patients and hence they require larger doses, more than that on total body weight
basis.
Changes in dose based on alteration of V d is also attributed to modification of clearance
and half-life of the drug.
Dosing of Drugs in Neonates, Infants and Children

The usual dosage regimen calculated on population basis refers to that for adults. Neonates,
infants and children require different dosages than adults because of differences in body
surface area, TBW and ECF on per Kg body weight basis. The dose for such patients are
calculated on the basis of their body surface area and not on body weight basis because the
body surface area correlates better with dosage requirement, cardiac output, renal blood flow
and glomerular filtration in children. A simple formula in comparison to DuBois and DuBois
for computing surface area (SA) in square meters is Mosteller’s equation:
1/ 2
2 Height X Weight
SA (in m ) (12.19)
60
Infants and children require larger mg/Kg doses than adults because:
1. Their body surface area per Kg body weight is larger, and hence
2. Larger volume of distribution (particularly TBW and ECF).
The child’s maintenance dose can be calculated from adult dose by using the following
equation:
SA of Child in m2
Child' s Dose X AdultDose (12.20)
1.73
where 1.73 is surface area in m2 of an average 70 Kg adult. Since the surface area of a child
is in proportion to the body weight according to equation 12.21,
SA (in m2) = Body Weight (in Kg)0.7 (12.21)
The following relationship can also be written for child’s dose:

0.7
Weight of Child in Kg
Child' s Dose X AdultDose (12.22)
70
As the TBW in neonates is 30% more than that in adults,

1. The Vd for most water-soluble drugs is larger in infants, and
2. The Vd for most lipid-soluble drugs is smaller.
Accordingly, the dose should be adjusted.
Dosing of Drugs in Elderly

Drug dose should be reduced in elderly patients because of a general decline in body function
with age. The lean body mass decreases and body fat increases by almost 100% in elderly
persons as compared to adults. Because of smaller volume of body water, higher peak
alcohol levels are observed in elderly subjects than in young adults. Vd of a water-soluble
drug may decrease and that of a lipid-soluble drug like diazepam increases with age. Age
related changes in hepatic and renal function greatly alters the clearance of drugs. Because of
progressive decrease in renal function, the dosage regimen of drugs that are predominantly
excreted unchanged in urine should be reduced in elderly patients.
A general equation that allows calculation of maintenance dose for a patient of any age
(except neonates and infants) when maintenance of same C ss,av is desired is:
0.7
Weight in Kg 140 Age in years
Patient's Dose X AdultDose (12.23)
1660
Dosing of Drugs in Hepatic Disease
Disease is a major source of variations in drug response. Both pharmacokinetics and

pharmacodynamics of many drugs are altered by diseases other than the one which is being
treated.
The influence of hepatic disorder on drug availability and disposition is unpredictable
because of the multiple effects that liver disease produces—effects on drug metabolising
enzymes, on drug binding and on hepatic blood flow. Hence, a correlation between altered
drug pharmacokinetics and hepatic function is often difficult. For example, unlike excretion,
there are numerous pathways by which a drug may be metabolised and each is affected to a
different extent in hepatic disease. Generally speaking, drug dosage should be reduced in
patients with hepatic dysfunction since clearance is reduced and availability is increased in
such a situation.
Dosing of Drugs in Renal Disease

In patients with renal failure, the half-life of a drug is increased and its clearance drastically
decreased if it is predominantly eliminated by way of excretion. Hence, dosage adjustment
should take into account the renal function of the patient and the fraction of unchanged drug
excreted in urine. One such method was discussed in chapter 6 on Excretion of Drugs.
There are two additional methods for dose adjustment in renal insufficiency if the V d
change is assumed to be negligible. These methods are based on maintaining the same
average steady-state concentration during renal dysfunction as that achieved with the usual
multiple dosage regimen and normal renal function. The adjustments are based on equations
12.6 and 12.7.
1. Dose adjustment based on total body clearance: Rewriting equation 12.6, the
parameters to be adjusted in renal insufficiency are shown below:
= F X X X0
Css, av 1
(12.6)
Cl T
to be kept assumed decreased needs

normal constant due to disease adjustment
If ClT', Xo' and ' represent the values for the renal failure patient, then the equation for
dose adjustment is given as:
X0 X'0
Css, av (12.24)
ClT Cl'T '
Rearranging in terms of dose and dose interval to be adjusted, the equation is:
' '
X 0
' ClT X 0 (12.25)
ClT
From above equation, the regimen may be adjusted by reduction in dosage or increase in
dosing interval or a combination of both.
2. Dose adjustment based on elimination rate constant or half-life: Rewriting
equation 12.7, the parameters to be adjusted in renal insufficiency are:
= X X X0
Css, av 1.44 F t1/2
(12.7)
Vd
to be kept assumed decreased needs

normal constant due to disease adjustment
If t½', Xo' and ' represent the values for the renal failure patient, then:
'
t1/2 X0 t1/2 X'0 (12.26)
Css, av '
Rearranging the above equation in terms of dose and dose interval to be adjusted, we get:
X '0 t1/2 X0
' '
(12.27)
t1/2 τ
Because of prolongation of half-life of a drug due to reduction in renal function, the time
taken to achieve the desired plateau takes longer, the more severe the dysfunction. Hence,
such patients sometimes need loading dose.
MONITORING DRUG THERAPY

Management of drug therapy in individual patient often requires evaluation of response of the
patient to the recommended dosage regimen. This is known as monitoring of drug therapy.
It is necessary to ensure that the therapeutic objective is being attained and failure to do so
requires readjustment of dosage regimen.
Depending upon the drug and the disease to be treated, management of drug therapy in
individual patient can be accomplished by:
1. Monitoring therapeutic effects — therapeutic monitori ng
2. Monitoring pharmacological actions — pharmacodynamic monitori ng
3. Monitoring plasma drug concentration — phar macokinetic moni torin g.
Therapeutic Monitoring
In this approach, the management plan involves monitoring the incidence and intensity of
both the desired therapeutic effects and the undesired adverse effects. A direct measure of
the desired effect is considered as a therapeutic endpoint e.g. prevention of an anticipated
attack of angina or shortening of duration of pain when attack occurs through the use of
sublingual glyceryl trinitrate. In certain cases, definition of therapeutic endpoint may not be
clear and onset of toxicity is used as a dosingguide i.e. dosage regimen is titrated to a toxic
endpoint e.g. excessive dryness of mouth with atropine when used as an antispasmodic
agent.
Pharmacodynamic Monitoring
In some instances, the pharmacological actions of a drug can be measured and used as a
guide to therapeutic process. The response observed may or may not correlate exactly with
the therapeutic effect e.g. blood glucose lowering with insulin, lowering of blood pressure
with antihypertensives, enhancement of haemoglobin levels with haematinics, etc.
Pharmacokinetic Monitoring
This approach involves monitoring the plasma drug concentration within a target
concentration range (called as tar get concentr ation str ategy) and based on the principle that
free drug at the site of action is in equilibrium with the drug in plasma. The strategy is
particularly useful when:
1. Therapeutic endpoints are difficult to define or are lacking e.g. control of seizures
with phenytoin.
2. The objective is to maintain the therapeutic effect in order to obtain optimum drug
use.
3. The probability of therapeutic failure is high as with drugs having low therapeutic
indices, erratic absorption, pharmacokinetic variability or when the drug is used in
multiple drug therapy.
Successful application of this approach requires complete knowledge of pharmacokinetic
parameters of the drug, the situation in which these parameters are likely to be altered and the
extent to which they could be altered, and a sensitive, specific and accurate analytical method
for determination of drug concentration. Examples of drugs monitored by this method
include digoxin, phenytoin, gentamicin, theophylline, etc. The strategy is very useful in
individualizing therapy in patients with hepatic or renal impairment when dose adjustments
are necessary.
QUESTIONS
1. Enlist various applications of pharmacokinetic principles.
2. What do you understand by therapeutic objective? What are the various ways of
attaining it?
3. Define optimal dosage regimen. What does it mean for a drug with narrow therapeutic
index such as phenytoin and for drugs like antibiotics?
4. What assumptions are made in the design of a dosage regimen?

5. Name the two parameters that are generally adjusted in developing a dosage regimen.
6. It is safer to administer a drug with a narrow therapeutic index in small doses at
frequent intervals. Explain.
7. On what parameters does extent of drug accumulation on multiple dosing depend?
Does dose size have a bearing on it?
8. State the plateau principle. Which parameters govern attainment of steady-state?
9. Define fluctuation of plasma level. Why are fluctuations smaller when the drug is
given e.v. whereas larger when administered as multiple i.v. boluses?
10. The C is not an arithmetic mean of C and C . Why?
ss,av ss,max ss,min
11. Define dose ratio. Why is it always smaller for extravascularly administered drugs in
comparison to those given intravenously?
12. On what factors do maintenance of drug concentration within the therapeutic range
depend?
13. How is dosing interval determined on the basis of half-life and therapeutic index of the
drug?
14. What are the two major sources of variability in drug response?
15. Quote some of the more important causes of intersubject variability in drug response.
16. Enlist the steps involved in individualization of dosage regimen.
17. How does obesity influence Vd of a drug and hence its dose size?
18. The dose for neonates, infants and children should be calculated on body surface area
basis rather than on the basis of body weight. Explain.
19. Why do neonates, infants and children require larger mg/Kg body weight doses than
adults?
20. Give possible reasons for reduction in dose of a drug in elderly patients.
21. Unlike renal function, why is it difficult to establish a correlation between hepatic
dysfunction and altered drug pharmacokinetics?
22. Why does it take longer to attain the steady-state in a renal failure patient in
comparison to a patient with normal renal function?
23. What do you understand by monitoring of drug therapy? When does it become
necessary?
24. What are the various ways of monitoring drug therapy in individual patient?
25. What parameters are monitored in therapeutic drug monitoring?
26. On what principle is pharmacokinetic drug monitoring based? When does such a
strategy become useful?
27. What criteria are necessary for successful pharmacokinetic drug monitoring?
28. The loading dose is calculated on the basis of apparent V d of a drug whereas
maintenance dose is determined from its t ½. Explain.
29. Atenolol is to be administered orally to a 50 Kg patient suffering from hypertension.
The typical parameters of the drug on population basis are:
F Vd ClT Therapeutic Range
0.4 1.23 litre/Kg 118.4 ml/min 0.2 to 1.3 mcg/ml
Design a dosage regimen to attain and maintain the plasma concentration within the
therapeutic range. Assume rapid absorption.
Answer: Css,av = 0.588 mcg/ml, max = 16.21 hours, Xo,max = 169.12mg. It is
convenient to administer the drug once every 12 hours. Therefore, X o in such a situation
should be 125.3 mg. Loading dose is 90.4 mg.
30. Diltiazem is administered in a dose of 60 mg q.i.d. The oral availability of the drug is
50%, Vd is 30 litres and elimination half-life is 4 hours.
a. Determine the maximum and minimum amounts of drug in the body after 4 doses.
Answer: X4,max = 45.7 mg and X4,min = 16.16 mg.

b. Calculate the maximum and minimum amounts of drug in the body at steady-state.
Answer: Xss,max = 46.4 mg and Xss,min = 16.4 mg.

c. What is the accumulation index?
Answer: Rac = 1.55.
d. What is the average amount of drug in the body at steady-state?
Answer: Xss,av = 28.8 mg.
e. If the desired Css,av is 0.099 mcg/ml, is there any need to administer the loading dose?
31. Netilmicin is to be administered to a 70 Kg patient at a rate of 2 mg/Kg every 12 hours
by multiple i.m. injections. The drug has a half-life of 2.2 hours and Vd of 0.2 l/Kg.
a. Determine Css,max, Css,min and Css,av.
Answer: Css,max = 10.2 mcg/ml, Css,min = 0.23 mcg/ml and C ss,av = 2.64 mcg/ml.
b. If the t½ increases to 5 hours in renal insufficiency, what should be the new dose or the
new dosing interval?
Answer : New dose ( unchanged) = 0.88 mg/Kg, new dosing interval (dose unchanged) =
27.3 hours.
c. If the drug is to be injected once every 24 hours, in renal insufficiency, what should be
the new dose?
Answer: 1.76 mg/Kg.
d. If netilmicin is to be given to a child weighing 12 Kg with normal renal function, what
should be the dose?
Answer: 3.4 mg/Kg.
e. If the same drug is to be administered to an elderly patient of 85 years and 55 Kg body
weight, determine the dose.
Answer: 1.4 mg/Kg.
32. Procainamide is to be administered to a 65 Kg arrhythmic patient as 500 mg tablets
every 4 hours. The drug has a half-life of 3 hours, Vd of 2 litre/Kg and oral availability
of 0.85.
a. Calculate the steady-state concentration of procainamide.
Answer: Css,av = 3.53 mcg/ml.
b. Determine whether the patient is adequately dosed (therapeutic range is 4 to 12 mcg/ml)
c. What changes would you recommend in the dosage regimen?
Answer: Desired C = 7.3 mcg/ml which can be attained by increasing the
ss,av
maintenance dose to 1000 mg or 2 tablets every 4 hours.
33. Two aminoglycoside antibiotics along with some of their parameters are listed in the
table below:
Drug t½ Fe TI Route Normal Normal
dose interval
Streptomycin 3 hrs 0.5 1.25 i.m. 7.5 mg/Kg 12 hrs
Gentamicin 2 hrs 0.9 20.00 i.m. 1.0 mg/Kg 8 hrs
These drugs are to be administered to a uremic patient. Suggest the changes that
should be made in the dosage regimen—keeping the dose constant and prolonging the
interval or decreasing the dose and maintaining the dosage interval or changing both.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each approach.
13. Drug Concentration and Pharmacological Response
The empirical approach in optimisation of drug therapy was based on relating

pharmacological response to the dose administered. There are several drawbacks of such
an approach—tedious, time consuming, costly, etc. Moreover, poor correlation may be
observed between drug dosage and response since a given dose or a dosing rate can result
in large deviations in plasma drug concentration which in most cases are attributable to
formulation factors and drug’s elimination characteristics. It is well understood that the
response correlates better with the plasma drug concentration or with the amount of drug
in the body rather than with the administered dose. Thus, it is easy and more appropriate
to design dosage regimens by application of pharmacokinetic principles. The approach is
based on the principle that the response produced is proportional to the concentration of
drug at the site of action which in turn is reflected in the concentration of drug in plasma.
The mathematical relationship between plasma drug concentration and pharmacological
response are called as pharmacokinetic-pharmacodynamic modelling (PK/PD
modelling).
Problems in Developing PK/PD Relationship

The factors that complicate development of concentration-response relationships are:
1. Delay in Drug Distribution: Most sites of action are located in the extravascular
tissues and equilibration with drug takes a long time. This results in delay in
observation of response. Long delays may occur when the therapeutic response is
an indirect measure of drug effect —for example, the anticoagulant effect of
dicoumarol is due to indirect inhibition and depletion of clotting factors. Often,
the therapeutic action in several such cases outlasts the plasma drug concentration
e.g. reserpine.
2. Protein Binding: Ideally, the pharmacological response should be correlated with
the concentration of unbound drug in plasma since its activity is elicited only by
the free form. However, quantification of unbound drug is difficult and thus, if
the relationship is based on total plasma drug concentration, any variation in the
degree of binding will obscure it.
3. Active Metabolites: The metabolites of some drugs such as imipramine and
amitriptyline are active which obscure the concentration-response relationship if it
is based on the concentration of parent drug. Some drugs such as propranolol
form active metabolites on first-pass hepatic metabolism and thus, result in
greater response when administered orally than when given intravenously.
4. Tolerance: The effectiveness of some drugs decreases with chronic use due to
development of acquired tolerance. Tolerance may be pharmacokinetic i.e.
through enhanced metabolism e.g. carbamazepine or pharmacodynamic i.e.
through diminished response after some period of chronic use e.g. nitroglycerine.
5. Racemates: Several drugs are administered as racemic mixture of two optically
active enantiomers of which usually one is active; for example, the S(+) isomer of
ibuprofen. Hence, a difference in the ratio of active to inactive isomer can lead to
large differences in pharmacological response.
Therapeutic Concentration Range
The therapeutic effectiveness of a drug depends upon its plasma concentration. There is
an optimum concentration range in which therapeutic success is most likely and
concentrations both above and below it are more harmful than useful. This concentration
range is called as therapeutic window or therapeutic range. Such a range is thus based
on the difference between pharmacological effectiveness and toxicity. The wider it is the
more is the ease in establishing a safe and effective dosage regimen. The therapeutic
ranges of several drugs have been developed. For many, the range is narrow and for
others, it is wide (see Table 13.1).
TABLE 13.1
Therapeutic Range for Some Drugs
Drug Disease Therapeutic Range
Digoxin Congestive cardiac failure 0.5 - 2.0 ng/ml
Gentamicin Infections 1.0 - 10.0 mcg/ml
Lidocaine Arrhythmias 1.0 - 6.0 mcg/ml
Phenytoin Epilepsy 10.0 - 20.0 mcg/ml
Propranolol Angina 0.02 - 0.2 mcg/ml
Salicylic acid Aches and pains 20.0 - 100.0 mcg/ml
Rheumatoid arthritis 100.0 - 300.0 mcg/ml
Theophylline Asthma 6.0 - 20.0 mcg/ml
Some drugs can be used to treat several diseases and will have different ranges for
different conditions e.g. salicylic acid is useful both in common aches and pains as well
as in rheumatoid arthritis. The upper limit of the therapeutic range may express loss of
effectiveness with no toxicity e.g. tricyclic antidepressants or reflect toxicity which may
be related to pharmacological effect of the drug e.g. hemorrhagic tendency with warfarin
or may be totally unrelated e.g. ototoxicity with aminoglycosides.
Concentration-Response Relationships – Pharmacodynamic Models

With most drugs, the response produced is reversible i.e. a reduction in concentration at
the site of action reverses the effect. The response produced by a drug can be classified
into two categories –
1. Gr aded response - is the one where intensity of effect increases with the dose or
concentration of drug. A majority of drugs produce graded response. The
response can be measured on a continual basis in such cases and establishing a
linear relationship between drug concentration and intensity of response is easy.
2. Quan tal Response – is the one where the drugs may either show their effect or
not at all i.e. the responses are not observed on a continuous basis, for example,
prevention of seizures by phenytoin. Such responses are also called as all-or-
none r esponses. Thus, establishing a concentration-response relationship in such
circumstances is difficult but can be developed in terms of the frequency with

which a particular event occurs at a given drug concentration.
Mathematical models that relate pharmacological effect to a measured drug
concentration in plasma or at the effector site can be used to develop quantitative
relationships. Such models are often called as pharmacodynamic models. Some of the
commonly used relationships or models are discussed below.
1. Linear Model: When the pharmacological effect (E) is directly proportional to the
drug concentration (C), the relationship may be written as:
E PC E0 (13.1)
where P is the slope of the line obtained from a plot of E versus C and E o is the
extrapolated y-intercept called as baseline effect in the absence of drug.
2. Non-linear/Logarithmic Model: If the concentration-effect relationship does not
conform to a simple linear function, a logarithmic transformation of the data is needed.
E P log C I (13.2)
where I is empirical constant. This transformation is popular because it expands the
initial part of the curve where response is changing markedly with a small change in
concentration and contracts the latter part where a large change in concentration produces
only a slight change in response. An important feature of this transformation is the linear
relationships between drug concentration and response at concentrations producing
effects of between 20 to 80% of the maximum effect (Fig. 13.1). Beyond this range, a
larger dose produces a larger concentration of drug in the body.
Fig. 13.1 A typical sigmoidal shape log drug concentration-effect relationship

3. Emax Model/Hyperbolic Model: Unlike earlier models, these models describe
non-linear concentration-effect relationships i.e. the response increases with an increase
in drug concentration at low concentrations and tends to approach
Fig. 13.2 A hyperbolic concentration-response relationship based on Emax model

maximum (asymptote) at high concentrations (Fig. 13.2). Such a plot is characteristic of
most concentration-response curves. None of the preceding models can account for the
maximal drug effect as the Emax models.
Michaelis-Menten equation for a saturable process (saturation of receptor sites by the
drug molecules) is used to describe such a model.
E maxC
E (13.3)
C50 C
where
Emax = maximum effect, and
C50 = the concentration at which 50% of the effect is produced.
When C << C 50, the equation reduces to a linear relationship. In the range 20 to 80%,
the Emax model approximates equation 13.2.
4. Hill Model/Sigmoid-Emax Model: In certain cases, the concentration-response

relationship is steeper or shallower than that predicted from equation 13.3. A better fit
may otherwise be obtained by considering the shape factor ‘h’, also called as Hill
coefficient, to account for deviations from a perfect hyperbola, and the equation so
obtained is called H ill equation (equation 13.4).
E maxCh
E h (13.4)
C50 Ch
If h = 1, a normal hyperbolic plot is obtained and the model is called E max model.
Larger the value of h, steeper the linear portion of the curve and greater its slope. Such a
plot is often sigmoidal and thus, the Hill model may also be called as sigmoid-E max
model (Fig. 13.3).
Fig. 13.3 Effect of shape factor n on the concentration-response curves
Onset/Duration of Effect-Concentration Relationships

The onset of action of a drug that produces quantal response occurs when a minimum
effective level of drug in the plasma C min is reached. The duration of action of such a
drug will depend upon how long the plasma concentration remains above the C min level.
The factors which influence duration of action of a drug are:
1. The dose size, and
2. The rate of drug removal from the site of action which in turn depends upon the
redistribution of drug to poorly perfused tissues and elimination processes.
An increase in dose promotes rapid onset of action by reducing the time required to
reach the Cmin and prolongs the duration of effect. The influence of dose on duration of
action can be explained as follows. Consider a drug that distributes rapidly (one-
compartment kinetics) and administered as i.v. bolus dose. The plasma drug
concentration is given by the equation:
Dose K Et
log C log (13.5)
Vd 2.303
The plasma concentration falls eventually to a level C min below which the drug does
not show any response. At this time, t = td, the duration of effect of a drug. The above
equation thus becomes:
K t
E d
log Cmin log Dose (13.6)
Vd 2.303
Rearranging to define duration of effect, the equation is:

2.303
td log Dose log CminVd (13.7)
K Et
where CminVd = X min, the minimum amount of drug in the body required to produce a
response. A plot of td versus log dose yields a straight line with slope 2.303/K E and x-
intercept at zero duration of effect of log X min (Fig. 13.4).
Fig. 13.4 Relationship between dose of drug and duration of action

Equation 13.7 shows that the duration of effect is also a function of t ½ (0.693/KE).
With each doubling of dose the duration of effect increases by one half-life. This can be
explained by considering that a dose Xo produces a duration of effect t d; so when double
the dose i.e. 2Xo is administered, the dose remaining after one half-life will be X o which
can produce a duration of effect equal to t d. Thus, the total duration of effect produced
by 2Xo will be t½ + td. However, the approach of extending the duration of action by
increasing the dose is harmful if the drug has a narrow therapeutic index. An alternative
approach is to administer the same dose when the drug level has fallen to X min. Thus,
after the second dose, the drug in the body will be (dose + X min). If Xmin is small in
relation to dose, very little increase in duration of action will be observed.
Intensity of Effect-Concentration Relationships

In case of a drug that produces quantal response, the pharmacodynamic parameter that
correlates better with its concentration is duration of action. The parameter intensity
of response is more useful for correlation with the concentration of a drug that shows
graded effect. Like duration of action, intensity of action also depends upon the dose
and rate of removal of drug from the site of action. The intensity of action also depends
upon the region of the concentration-response curve (refer Fig. 13.1). If a drug with
rapid distribution characteristics is given as i.v. bolus dose large enough to elicit a
maximum response, the log concentration-response plot obtained will be as shown in Fig.
13.1. The relationship between dose, intensity of effect and time can be established by
considering the plots depicted in Fig. 13.5. which also shows 3 regions.
Fig. 13.5 The fall in intensity of response with drug concentration and with time
following administration of a single i.v. bolus dose.
Region 3 indicates 80 to 100% maximum response. The initial concentration of drug
after i.v. bolus dose lies in this region if the dose injected is sufficient to elicit maximal
response. The drug concentration falls rapidly in this region but intensity of response
remains maximal and almost constant with time.
Region 2 denotes 20 to 80% maximum response. In this region, the intensity of
response is proportional to log of drug concentration and expressed by equation 13.2.
Intensity of Effect P log C I (13.2)
as: Since the decline in drug concentration is a first-order process, log C can be expressed
K Et
log C log C0 - (13.8)
2.303
Substituting 13.8 in equation 13.2. and rearranging we get:
P K Et
Intensity of Effect P log C0 1- (13.9)
2.303
If Eo is the intensity of response when concentration is C o, then:
PK t
Intensity of Effect E0 E
- 2.303 (13.10)
Equation 13.10 shows that the intensity of response falls linearly (at a constant zero-
order rate) with time in region 2. This is true for most of the drugs. The drug
concentration however declines logarithmically or exponentially in region 2 as shown by
equation 13.8.
Region 1 denotes 0 to 20% maximum response. In this region, the intensity of effect
is directly proportional to the drug concentration but falls exponentially with time and
parallels the fall in drug concentration.
QUESTIONS
1. Why is it that the pharmacological effect of a drug shows better correlation with its
plasma concentration than with its dosage?
2. What are some of the more important causes of poor correlation between plasma drug
concentration and pharmacological response?
3. Define therapeutic range. What does plasma drug concentration beyond this range
signify?
4. Define: (a) Graded response, and (b) Quantal response.
5. What are pharmacodynamic models? Discuss some of the more important models
used to quantify plasma concentration-response relationships.
6. When does onset of action occur for a drug that shows graded response and for the
one that elicits quantal response?
7. On what factors do duration and intensity of drug action depend?
8. Explain how with each doubling of dose, the duration of effect increases by one half-
life for a drug that elicits graded response.
9. When and why is it not advisable to extend the duration of action by increasing the
dose? What is the alternative in such cases?
10. How does intensity of drug action change with its plasma concentration?
11. The C50 of a drug showing graded response is 5 mcg/ml and has a shape factor n of
2.0. Calculate the concentration range if the drug is found to be effective when the
response is between 20 to 80% of the maximal value. (Hint: Take reciprocal of
equation 13.4 and express intensity of effect as 0.2 Emax and solve to obtain C20.
Similarly, take it next as 0.8 E max and solve to determine C 80)
Answer : C20 = 2.5 mcg/ml and C80 = 10.0 mcg/ml.
12. Mezlocillin has a MEC of 5 mcg/ml for a particular infection when given i.v. in a
bolus dose of 2.5 mg/Kg. What will be the duration of effect if a dose of 50 mg/Kg is
administered? The drug has a half-life of 0.8 hours. What will be the duration of
effect if the dose is doubled? Is the increase in duration of action equal to one half-
life?
Answer : 3.5 hours and 4.3 hours.
13. A newly developed antihypertensive drug shows linear relationship between intensity
of effect and log drug concentration. After i.v. administration of 0.15 mg/Kg dose,
the observed reduction in blood pressure with time is shown in the table below:
Time (hours) 0.5 3.0
% Reduction in B.P. 45.0 40.0
Given : P = 20.0%
a. What is the half-life of the drug? (Hint: Use equation 13.12 for a plot of intensity of
effect versus time and compute values from slope) Answer : t½ = 3
hours.
b. What will be the % intensity of response immediately after injection of drug?
Answer : 46.0%.
c. How long is the reduction in B.P. expected to remain above 20.0% of maximum
response?
Answer : 13 hours.
14. Controlled Release Medication
An ideal dosage regimen in the drug therapy of any disease is the one which
immediately attains the desired therapeutic concentration of drug in plasma (or at the
site of action) and maintains it constant for the entire duration of treatment. This is
possible through administration of a drug delivery system in a particular dose and at a
particular frequency. The term drug delivery covers a broad range of techniques used to
get therapeutic agents into the human body. The frequency of administration or the
dosing interval of any drug depends upon its half-life or mean residence time (MRT) and
its therapeutic index. When a drug is delivered as a conventional dosage form such as a
tablet, the dosing interval is much shorter than the half-life of the drug resulting in a
number of limitations associated with such a conventional dosage form:
1. Poor patient compliance; increased chances of missing the dose of a drug with
short half-life for which frequent administration is necessary.
2. A typical peak-valley plasma concentration-time profile is obtained which makes
3. attainment of steady-state
The unavoidable condition
fluctuations difficult
in the drug (concentration
see Fig. 14.1). may lead to under-
medication or over-medication as the Css values fall or rise beyond the
therapeutic range.
4. The fluctuating drug levels may lead to precipitation of adverse effects especially
of a drug with small therapeutic index whenever overmedication occurs.
There are two ways to overcome such a situation –
1. Development of new, better and safer drugs with long half-lives and large
therapeutic indices, and
2. Effective and safer use of existing drugs through concepts and techniques of
controlled and targeted delivery systems.

The first approach has many disadvantages which therefore resulted in increased
interest in the second approach. The second approach, owing to several technical
advancements, has resulted in the development of drug delivery systems capable of
controlling the rate of drug delivery, sustaining the duration of therapeutic action and/or
targeting the delivery of drug to a particular tissue. An ideal dru g deli very system should
deliver the drug at a rate dictated by the needs of the body over a specified period of
treatment. This idealized objective points to the two aspects most important to drug
delivery –
Spatial deli ver y of drug which relates to targeting a drug to a specific organ or
tissue. Such a distribution control of drug delivery is beneficial in two situations
–
1. When the natural distribution causes drug molecules to encounter tissues and
cause major side effects that prohibit further treatment. This situation is often
the cause of chemotherapy failure when bone marrow cell death prevents the
patient undergoing a complete drug treatment.
2. When the natural distribution of the drug does not allow drug molecules to
reach their molecular site of action. For example, a drug molecule that acts on
a receptor in the brain will not be active if it cannot cross the blood-brain
barrier.
Tempor al deli ver y of drug which refers to controlling the rate or specific time of
drug delivery
rapidly to the target
metabolized or havetissue.
short Temporal control
elimination is beneficial for drugs that are
half-lives.
An appropriately designed controlled-release drug-delivery system ( CRDDS) can
improve the therapeutic efficacy and safety of a drug by precise temporal and spatial
placement in the body, thereby reducing both the size and number of doses required (see
Figure 14.1).
Fig. 14.1 A hypothetical plasma concentration-time profile from conventional multiple

dosing and an ideal controlled delivery formulation
The several advantages of a controlled drug delivery system over a conventional
dosage form are—
1. Improved patient convenience and compliance due to less frequent drug
administration.
2. Reduction in fluctuation in steady-state levels (Fig. 14.1) and therefore –
 Better control of disease condition, and
 Reduced intensity of local or systemic side-effects.
3. Increased safety margin of high potency drugs due to better control of plasma
levels.
4. Maximum utilization of drug enabling reduction in total amount of dose
administered.
5. Reduction in health care costs through –
 Improved therapy
 Shorter treatment period

 Lower frequency of dosing, and
 Reduction in personnel time to dispense, administer and monitor patients.
Disadvantages of controlled-release dosage forms include —
1. Decreased systemic availability in comparison to immediate-release conventional
dosage forms. This may be due to –
 Incomplete release
 Increased first-pass metabolism
 Increased instability
 Insufficient residence time for complete release
 Site-specific absorption
 pH-dependent solubility.
2. Poor in vitro–in vivo correlation.
3. Possibility of dose dumping due to food, physiologic or formulation variables or
chewing or grinding of oral formulations by the patient and thus, increased risk of
toxicity.
4. Retrieval of drug is difficult in case of toxicity, poisoning or hypersensitivity
reactions.
5. Reduced potential for dosage adjustment of drugs normally administered in
varying strengths.
6. Higher cost of formulation.
FACTORS IN THE DESIGN OF

CONTROLLED-RELEASE DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS
The basic rationale of a controlled release drug delivery system is to optimise the
biopharmaceutic, pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of a drug in such a
way that its utility is maximized through reduction in side effects and cure or control of
condition in the shortest possible time by using smallest quantity of drug, administered by
the most suitable route.
A. Biopharmaceutic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of

CRDDS
The performance of a drug presented as a controlled-release system depends upon its:
1. Release from the formulation.
2. Movement within the body during its passage to the site of action.
The former depends upon the fabrication of the formulation and the physicochemical
properties of the drug while the latter element is dependent upon pharmacokinetics of
drug. In comparison to conventional dosage form where the rate-limiting step in drug
availability is usually absorption through the biomembrane, the rate-determining step in
the availability of a drug from controlled delivery system is the rate of release of drug
from the dosage form which is much smaller than the intrinsic absorption rate for the
drug (Fig. 14.2).
Fig. 14.2 Scheme representing the rate-limiting step in the design of controlled-release
drug delivery system
The type of delivery system and the route of administration of the drug presented in
controlled-release dosage form depend upon the physicochemical properties of the drug
and its biopharmaceutic characteristics. The desired biopharmaceutic properties of a drug
to be used in a controlled-release drug delivery system are discussed below.
1. Molecular Weight of the Drug: Lower the molecular weight, faster and more
complete the absorption. For drugs absorbed by pore transport mechanism, the molecular
size thresholdHowever,
compounds. is 150 Daltons
more thanfor spherical compounds
95% of drugs and 400
are absorbed by Daltons
passive for linear
diffusion.
Diffusivity , defined as the ability of a drug to diffuse through the membranes , is
inversely related to molecular size. The upper limit of drug molecular size for passive
diffusion is 600 Daltons. Drugs with large molecular size are poor candidates for oral
controlled-release systems e.g. peptides and proteins.
2. Aqueous Solubility of the Drug: A drug with good aqueous solubility, especially
if pH-independent, serves as a good candidate for controlled-release dosage forms e.g.
pentoxifylline. The lower limit of solubility of a drug to be formulated as CRDDS is
0.1mg/ml. Drugs with pH-dependent aqueous solubility e.g. phenytoin, or drugs with
solubility in non-aqueous solvents e.g. steroids, are suitable for parenteral (e.g. i.m.
depots) controlled-release dosage forms; the drug precipitates at the injection site and
thus, its release is slowed down due to change in pH or contact with aqueous body fluids.
Solubility of drug can limit the choice of mechanism to be employed in CRDDS, for
example, diffusional systems are not suitable for poorly soluble drugs. Absorption of
poorly soluble drugs is dissolution rate-limited which means that the controlled-release
device does not control the absorption process; hence, they are poor candidates for such
systems.
3. Apparent Partition Coefficient/Lipophilicity of the Drug: Greater the apparent
partition coefficient of a drug, greater its lipophilicity and thus, greater is its rate and
extent of absorption. Such drugs have increased tendency to cross even the more
selective barriers like BBB. The apparent volume of distribution of such drugs also
increases due to increased partitioning into the fatty tissues and since the blood flow rate
to such tissues is always lower than that to an aqueous tissue like liver, they may exhibit
characteristics of models having two or more compartments. The parameter is also
important in determining the release rate of a drug from lipophilic matrix or device.
4. Drug pKa and Ionisation at Physiological pH: The pKa range for acidic drugs
whose ionisation is pH-sensitive is 3.0 to 7.5 and that for basic drugs is 7.0 to 11.0. For
optimum passive absorption, the drugs should be non-ionised at that site at least to an
extent 0.1 to 5%. Drugs existing largely in ionised forms are poor candidates for
controlled delivery e.g. hexamethonium.
5. Drug Permeability: The three major drug characteristics that determine the
permeability of drugs for passive transport across intestinal epithelium are –
 Lipophilicity, expressed as log P.
 Molecular size.
The influence of each of these properties has been discussed above.
6. Drug Stability: Drugs unstable in GI environment cannot be administered as oral
controlled-release formulation because of bioavailability problems e.g. nitroglycerine. A
different route of administration should then be selected such as the transdermal route.
Drugs unstable in gastric pH, e.g. propantheline can be designed for sustained delivery in
intestine with limited or no delivery in stomach. On the other hand, a drug unstable in
intestine, e.g. probanthine, can be formulated as gastroretentive dosage form.
7. Mechanism and Site of Absorption: Drugs absorbed by carrier-mediated
transport processes and those absorbed through a window are poor candidates for
controlled-release systems e.g. several B vitamins.
8. Biopharmaceutic Aspects of Route of Administration: Oral and parenteral
(i.m.) routes are the most popular followed by transdermal application. Routes of minor
importance in controlled drug delivery are buccal/sublingual, rectal, nasal, ocular,
pulmonary, vaginal and intrauterinal. The features desirable for a drug to be given by a
particular route are discussed below.
(a) Oral Route: For a drug to be successful as oral controlled-release formulation, it
must get absorbed through the entire length of GIT. Since the main limitation of
this route is the transit time (a mean of 14 hours), the duration of action can be
extended for 12 to 24 hours. The route is suitable for drugs given in dose as high
as 1000 mg. A drug, whose absorption is pH-dependent, destabilized by GI
fluids/enzymes, undergoes extensive presystemic metabolism (e.g. nitroglycerine),
influenced by gut motility, has an absorption window and/or absorbed actively
(e.g. riboflavin), is a poor candidate for oral controlled-release formulations.
(b) Intramuscular/Subcutaneous Routes: These routes are suitable when the
duration of action is to be prolonged from 24 hours to 12 months. Only a small
amount of drug, about 2 ml or 2 grams, can be administered by these routes.
Factors important in drug release by such routes are solubility of drug in the
surrounding tissues, molecular weight, partition coefficient and pK a of the drug
and contact surface between the drug and the surrounding tissues.
(c) Transdermal Route: The route is best suited for drugs showing extensive first-
pass metabolism upon oral administration or drugs with low dose such as
nitroglycerine. Important factors to be considered for percutaneous drug
absorption are partition coefficient of drug, contact area, skin condition, skin
permeability of drug, skin perfusion rate, etc.
In short, the main determinants in deciding a route for administration of a controlled-

release system are physicochemical properties of the drug, dose size, absorption
efficiency and desired duration of action.
B. Pharmacokinetic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of
CRDDS
A detailed knowledge of the ADME characteristics of a drug is essential in the design of
a controlled-release product. An optimum range of a given pharmacokinetic parameter of
a drug is necessary beyond which controlled delivery is difficult or impossible.
1. Absorption Rate: For a drug to be administered as controlled-release formulation,
its absorption must be efficient since the desired rate-limiting step is rate of drug release
Kr i.e. Kr << Ka. A drug with slow absorption is a poor candidate for such dosage forms
since continuous release will result in a pool of unabsorbed drug e.g. iron. Aqueous
soluble but poorly absorbed potent drugs like decamethonium are also unsuitable
candidates since a slight variation in the absorption may precipitate potential toxicity.
2. Elimination Half-Life: An ideal CRDDS is the one from which rate of drug of
absorption (for extended period of time) is equal to the rate of elimination. Smaller the
t½, larger the amount of drug to be incorporated in the controlled-release dosage form.
For drugs with t½ less than 2 hours, a very large dose may be required to maintain the
high release rate. Drugs with half-life in the range 2 to 4 hours make good candidates for
such a system e.g. propranolol. Drugs with long half-life need not be presented in such a
formulation e.g. amlodipine. For some drugs e.g. MAO inhibitors, the duration of action
is longer than that predicted by their half-lives. A candidate drug must have t½ that can
be correlated with its pharmacological response. In terms of MRT, a drug administered
as controlled-release dosage form should have MRT significantly longer than that from
conventional dosage forms.
3. Rate of Metabolism: A drug which is extensively metabolized is suitable for
controlled-release system as long as the rate of metabolism is not too rapid. The extent of
metabolism should be identical and predictable when the drug is administered by
different routes. A drug capable of inducing or inhibiting metabolism is a poor candidate
for such a product since steady-state blood levels would be difficult to maintain.
4. Dosage Form Index (DI): It is defined as the ratio of Css,max to C ss,min. Since
the goal of controlled-release formulation is to improve therapy by reducing the dosage
form index while maintaining the plasma drug levels within the therapeutic window,
ideally its value should be as close to one as possible.
C. Pharmacodynamic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of

CRDDS
1. Drug Dose: In general, dose strength of 1.0 g is considered maximum for a
CRDDS.
2. Therapeutic Range: A candidate drug for controlled-release drug delivery system
should have a therapeutic range wide enough such that variations in the release rate do
not result in a concentration beyond this level.
3. Therapeutic Index (TI): The release rate of a drug with narrow therapeutic index
should be such that the plasma concentration attained is within the therapeutically safe
and effective range. This is necessary because such drugs have toxic concentration
nearer to their therapeutic range. Precise control of release rate of a potent drug with
narrow margin of safety is difficult. A drug with short half-life and narrow therapeutic
index shouldofbe
the activity administered
drug metabolitesmore
sincefrequently
controlledthan twicesystem
delivery a day. controls
One must also
only theconsider
release
of parent drug but not its metabolism.
4. Plasma Concentration-Response (PK/PD) Relationship: Drugs such as
reserpine whose pharmacological activity is independent of its concentration are poor
candidates for controlled-release systems.
A summary of desired biopharmaceutic, pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic
properties of a drug is given in table 14.1.
TABLE 14.1.
Factors in the Design of CRDDS
Properties of Candidate Drug Desired Features
A. Bi opharmaceuti c Proper ties
1. Molecular size Less than 600 Daltons
2. Aqueous solubility More than 0.1 mg/ml
3. Partition coefficient Ko/w 1–2
4. Dissociation constant pKa Acidic drugs, pKa > 2.5
Basic drugs, pKa < 11.0
5. Ionisation at physiological pH Not more than 95%
6. Stability in GI milieu Stable at both gastric and intestinal pH
7. Absorption mechanism Passive, but not through a window
B. Phar macoki netic Proper ties
1. Absorption rate constant K a High
2. Elimination half-life t½ 2 – 4 hours
3. Metabolism rate Not too high
4. Dosage form index One
C. Phar macodynamic Pr opert ies
1. Dose Maximum 1.0 g (in controlled release form)
2. Therapeutic range Wide
3. Therapeutic index Wide
4. PK/PD relationship Good
PHARMACOKINETIC PRINCIPLES IN THE DESIGN AND

FABRICATION OF CONTROLLED-RELEASE DRUG DELIVERY
SYSTEMS
The controlled-release dosage forms are so designed that they release the medicament
over a prolonged period of time usually longer than the typical dosing interval for a
conventional formulation. The drug release rate should be so monitored that a steady
plasma concentration is attained by reducing the ratio Css,max/Css,min while

maintaining the drug levels within the therapeutic window. The rate-controlling step in
the drug input should be determined not by the absorption rate but by the rate of release
from the formulation which ideally should be slower than the rate of absorption. In most
cases, the release rate is so slow that if the drug exhibits two-compartment kinetics with
delayed distribution under normal circumstances, it will be slower than the rate of
distribution and one can, thus, collapse the plasma concentration-time profile in such
instances into a one-compartment model i.e. a one-compartment model is suitable and
applicable for the design of controlled-release drug delivery systems. Assuming that the
KADME of a drug are first-order processes, to achieve a steady, non-fluctuating plasma
concentration, the rate of release and hence rate of input of drug from the controlled-
release dosage form should be identical to that from constant rate intravenous infusion.
In other words, the rate of drug release from such a system should ideally be zero-order
or near zero-order. One can thus treat the desired release rate Ro of controlled drug
delivery system according to constant rate i.v. infusion. In order to maintain the desired
steady-state concentration Css, the rate of drug input, which is zero-order release rate
(Ro), must be equal to the rate of output (assumed to be first-order elimination process).
Thus:
R0 R output (14.1)
The rate of drug output is given as the product of maintenance dose D M and first-
order elimination rate constant KE.
R output DM K E (14.2)
For a zero-order constant rate infusion, the rate of output is also given as:
R output K E Css Vd (14.3)
Since ClT = KE Vd, the above equation can also be written as:
R output Css ClT (14.4a)
Or R0 Css ClT (14.4b)
The bioavailability of a drug from controlled-release dosage form cannot be 100% as

the total release may not be 100% and the drug may also undergo presystemic
metabolism. Hence, if F is the fraction bioavailable, then:
Css ClT
R0 (14.5)
F
and R0 DM (14.6)
Substituting equation 14.6 in equation 14.5 and rearranging, we get:

Css ClT
DM (14.7)
F
where = dosing interval.
From the above equation, one can calculate the dose of drug that must be released
in a given period of time in order to achieve the desired target steady-state concentration.
It also shows that total systemic clearance is an important parameter in such a
computation.
Since attainment of steady-state levels with a zero-order controlled drug release
system would require a time period of about 5 biological half-lives, an immediate-release
dose, DI, called as loadin g dose, may be incorporated in such a system in addition to the
controlled-release components. The total dose, DT needed to maintain therapeutic
concentration in the body would then be:
DT DI DM (14.8)
The immediate-release dose is meant to provide the desired steady-state rapidly and
can be calculated by equation:
Css Vd R0
DI (14.9)
F KE
The above equation ignores the possible additive effect from the immediate and
controlled-release components. For many controlled-release products, there is no built-in
loading dose.
The dosing interval for a drug following one-compartment kinetics with linear
disposition is related to elimination half-life and therapeutic index TI according to
equation:
TI
t1/2 ln (14.10)
2
DRUG RELEASE PATTERNS OF CONTROLLED

DELIVERY DOSAGE FORMS
If one assumes that —
1. Drug disposition follows first-order kinetics
2. Rate-limiting step in the absorption is rate of drug release from the controlled-
release formulation (i.e. Kr < Ka), and
3. Released drug is rapidly and completely absorbed,
then, the four models for drug input based on the drug release pattern can be defined:
1. Slow zero-order release
2. Slow first-order release
3. Initial rapid release of loading dose followed by slow zero-order release
4. Initial rapid release of loading dose followed by slow first-order release.
The resulting profiles are depicted in Fig. 14.3.
Fig. 14.3 Schematic representation of four major types of drug release characteristics
from controlled-release formulations
Slow Zero-Order Release Systems

If the drug released from controlled-release formulations is stable in fluids at the
absorption site, has similar absorption efficiency from all absorption sites and is absorbed
rapidly and completely after its release, then, its rate of appearance in plasma will be
governed by follows
drug release its rate zero-order
of release from the controlled-release
kinetics, formulation.
absorption will also Thus,
be a zero-order when and
process the
concentration of drug in plasma at any given time can be given by equation:
-K E t
F K0 1 - e
C (14.11)
K E Vd
where K0 = zero-order release rate constant, also written as R 0, the zero-order release
rate.
The above equation is similar to the one that expresses the concentration-time course
of a drug that shows one-compartment kinetics following constant rate i.v. infusion. The
time to reach steady-state depends upon the elimination half-life of the drug. It is usually
not possible with a single oral controlled-release dose to attain the plateau even with a
drug having short half-life such as 3 hours since the mean GI residence time is around 12
hours. It takes 4.3 half-lives for attainment of 95% steady-state values. Thus, if t½ is 3
hours, about 13 hours will be required for the drug to reach plateau. Slower the
elimination, (longer the t½), more the time required to reach steady-state. Once the
desired steady-state is reached with repeated dosing of zero-order controlled-release
formulation, minimal fluctuations will be observed. Zero-order release systems are thus
ideal controlled delivery formulations.
Slow First-Order Release Systems

Such systems are easier to design but are inferior to zero-order systems especially when
they are meant for oral use. This is because with first-order release characteristics,
smaller and smaller amounts of drug are released as time passes and secondly, as the
formulation advances along the GIT, the absorption efficiency generally decreases due to
a number of reasons like decreased intestinal surface area, increased viscosity and
decreased mixing. Thus, larger amounts of drug are needed to be released at a later stage
when in fact the opposite happens with first-order systems.
The concentration of drug in plasma following administration of a controlled-release
formulation with slow first-order release is given by equation:
DM K r F
C e- K E t - e- K r t (14.12)
Vd K r KE
When Kr < K E, flip-flop phenomena is observed which is a common feature for such
controlled-release formulations. With repeated dosing of slow first-order release
formulations, one generally observes a lower Cmax, higher Cmin and longer tmax in
comparison to conventional release formulations.
Slow Zero-Order Release Systems with a Rapid Release Component

With such formulations, an initial dose is rapidly released ( burst-effect) for immediate
first-order availability while the remaining amount is released and absorbed at a slow
zero-order rate. The equation for concentration-time course of such a formulation
contains two portions, one each to denote rapid first-order release and slow zero-order
release.
DI K a F -KE t -Ka t K0 F -K E t
C e -e 1- e (14.13)
Vd K a KE K E Vd
Such a formulation is ideally suited for drugs with long t ½ in which cases attainment
of plateau would otherwise take a long time. The slow release component should ideally
begin releasing the drug when the drug levels from the fast component are at a peak.
However, the approach suffers from a big disadvantage when the formulation is meant
for repetitive dosing — the blood level profile shows a peak-trough pattern (which
normally does not result when all of the drug is released at a slow zero-order rate); this
may cause a momentous rise in peak concentration immediately after each dose
triggering toxic reactions (see Fig. 14.4). It is for this reason that such a design is
unpopular.
The transient fluctuations in the peak concentration with these formulations can
however be overcome by:
1. Decreasing the loading dose in the subsequent dosage forms (which appears to be
impractical),
2. Increasing the dosing interval (this also seems to be tedious), or
3. Administering an immediate-release conventional dosage form prior to repetitive
dosing of zero-order controlled-release formulation instead of incorporating it in
the latter.
Fig. 14.4 Plasma concentration-time profile which results from repeated dosing of a
controlled-release formulation with zero-order release and an initial fast
release component.
Slow First-Order Release Systems with a Rapid Release Component

The equation describing the time course of plasma drug concentration with this type of
formulation will also contain two portions—one to describe rapid first-order absorption
and the other for slow first-order absorption from controlled-release portion.
DI K a F -K E t -K a t DM K r F -K E t -K r t
C Vd K a KE e -e Vd K r KE e -e (14.14)
As in the previous case, to obtain the desired plateau, the slow release component, D M
should start releasing the drug:
1. When the peak has been attained with rapid release dose, D I; this requires DM >>
DI which results in wastage of drug since the absorption efficiency reduces as
time passes and dosage form descends down the GIT, or
2. When all of the DI has been released; this requires relatively small D M and
therefore less drug wastage and better sustained levels despite fluctuations in drug
levels (Fig. 14.5).
The problems that result from repeated dosing of this type of formulation are similar
to that described for the third type of release pattern and can be handled in a similar
manner.
Fig. 14.5 Plasma concentration-time profile which results after a single oral dose of
controlled-release drug delivery system containing a rapid release dose and a
slow first-order release component
CLASSIFICATION OF CRDDS
CRDDS can be classified in various ways –
1. On the basis of techni cal sophi sti cation
2. On th e basis of r oute of admin istrati on.
On the
1. basis of technical sophistication,
Rate-programmed DDS CRDDS can be categorised into 3 major classes:
2. Stimuli-activated DDS
3. Site-targeted DDS
In the former two cases i.e. except site-targeted DDS, the formulation comprise of three
basic components –
i. The drug
ii. The rate controlling element
iii. Energy source that activates the DDS.
Rate-Programmed DDS which the drug release has been programmed at specific rate
These DDS are those from
profiles. They are further subdivided into following subclasses:
1. Dissolution-controlled DDS
2. Diffusion-controlled DDS
3. Dissolution and diffusion-controlled DDS.
All the above systems can be designed in one of the following ways –
i. Reservoir systems (membrane-controlled DDS)
ii. Matrix systems (soluble/erodible/swellable/degradable)

iii. Hybrid systems (i.e. membrane-cum-matrix systems)
1. Dissolution-Controlled DDS
These systems are those where the rate-limiting phenomenon responsible for imparting
the controlled-release characteristics to the DDS is either of the two -

(a) Slow dissolu tion rate of the drug - the drug present in such a system may be one of
the following two types:
i. Drug with inherently slow dissolution rate e.g. griseofulvin, digoxin and
nifedipine. Such drugs act as natural prolonged-release products, or
ii. Dr ug that transforms into slow di ssolvin g for ms on contact with GI fluids e.g.
ferrous sulphate.
(b) Slow dissolu tion rate of th e r eser voir membrane or matr ix - the drug present in such
a system may be the one having high aqueous solubility and dissolution rate e.g.
pentoxifylline and metformin. The challenge in designing such systems lies in controlling
the drug dissolution rate by employing either or combination of following techniques –
i. Embedment in slowly dissolving, degrading or erodible matrix. The matrix in
addition may have low porosity or poor wettability.
ii. Encapsulation or coating with slow-dissolving, degrading or erodible
substances. In this approach, the rate of dissolution fluid penetration and/or
wettability of the reservoir system are controlled.
Slowly soluble and erodible materials commonly employed to achieve these
objectives include hydrophobic substances such as ethyl cellulose (containing an added
water-soluble release modifying agent such as PVP), polymethacrylates with pH
independent solubility (e.g. Eudragit RS and RL 100) and waxes such as glyceryl
monostearate, and hydrophilic materials like sodium CMC.

2. Diffusion-Controlled DDS
These systems are those where the rate-controlling step is not the dissolution rate of drug
or release controlling element, but the diffusion of dissolved drug molecule through the
rate-controlling element. The rate-controlling element in such a system is thus not
soluble, not erodible nor degradable but is water-swellable or water-insoluble. Water-
swellable materials include hydrophilic polymers and gums such as xanthan gum, guar
gum, high viscosity grades of HPMC and HPC, alginates, etc. Water-insoluble polymers
most commonly used in such systems are ethyl cellulose and polymethacrylates.
3. Dissolution
These systems and Diffusion-Controlled
are those where the rate ofDDS
drug release is controlled by drug or polymer
dissolution as well as drug diffusion i.e. the system is a combination of the two systems
discussed above.
A summary of various approaches that are employed in the design of rate-

programmed DDS is illustrated in figure 14.6.
Fig. 14.6 Approaches in the design of rate-programmed DDS
i. Reservoir systems (membran e-contr oll ed DDS) – These systems are those where the
drug is present as a core in a compartment of specific shape encased or encapsulated
with a rate-controlling wall, film or membrane having a well-defined thickness. The
drug in the core must dissociate from the crystal lattice and dissolve in the
surrounding medium, partition and diffuse through the membrane.
Depending upon the physical properties of the membrane, two types of
reservoir systems are possible –
(a) Non-swelling reservoir systems – are those where the polymer membrane do not
swell or hydrate in aqueous medium. Ethyl cellulose and polymethacrylates are
commonly used polymers in such systems. Such materials control drug release
owing to their thickness, insolubility or slow dissolution or porosity. Reservoir
system of this type is most common and includes coated drug particles, crystals,
granules, pellets, minitablets and tablets.
(b) Swelling-controlled reservoir systems – are those where the polymer membrane
swell or hydrate on contact with aqueous medium. In such systems drug release
is delayed for the time period required for hydration of barrier and after
attainment of barrier hydration, drug release proceeds at a constant rate. HPMC
polymers are commonly employed in such systems.
ii. M atri x systems (monoli thi c DDS) – These systems are those where the drug is
uniformly dissolved or dispersed in release-retarding material. Such devices can be
formulated as conventional matrix, or bi-or tri-layered matrix systems.

matrix devices are possible –
(a) Hydrophilic matrix – is the one where the release retarding material is water
swellable or swellable cum erodible hydrocolloid such as high molecular weight
HPMCs, HPC, HEC, xanthan gum, sodium alginate, guar gum, locust bean
gum, PEO (polyethylene oxide) and cross linked polymers of acrylic acid.
Hydrophilic matrices are porous systems.
Depending upon the swelling behaviour of hydrophilic polymer, two types
of matrices are possible –
 Free-swelling matrix – is the one in which swelling is unhindered.
 Restricted-swelling matrix – is the one in which the surface of the device is
partially coated with an impermeable polymer film that restricts the
hydration of swellable matrix material.
(b) Hydrophobic matrix – is the one where the release retarding material is either –
 Slowly soluble, erodible or digestible, for e.g. waxes such as glyceryl

monostearate, cetyl alcohol, hydrogenated vegetable oils, beeswax, carnauba
wax, etc.
 Insoluble or non-digestible, for e.g. ethyl cellulose, polymethacrylates, etc.
Depending upon the manner of incorporation of drug in the matrix,
hydrophobic matrices can be further classified as –
 Porous (heterogeneous) matrix – is the one where the drug and release-
retarding matrix microparticles are simply mixed with each other and
compressed into a tablet or the drug is dispersed in the polymer solution
followed by evaporation of the solvent.
 –
Nonporous (homogeneous)
matrix material matrix
is first melted and is thedrug
the one in
is which the release-retarding
then incorporated in it by
thorough mixing followed by congealing the mass while stirring. Two types
of nonporous matrix systems are possible –
Dissolved drug nonporous system – is the one where the drug is
dissolved in the molten release-retarding matrix material.
Dispersed drug nonporous system – is the one where the quantity
of drug is greater than its solubility in molten matrix polymer.
iii. H ybri d systems (membran e cum matri x D DS) – These systems are those where the
drug in matrix of release-retarding material is further coated with a release-
controlling polymer membrane. Such a device thus combines the constant release
kinetics of reservoir system with the mechanical robustness of matrix system.
Stimuli-Activated / Stimuli-Responsive DDS

In this group of CRDDSs, the release of drug molecules from the delivery systems is
activated by some stimuli – physical, chemical, or biological and/or facilitated by an
energy supplied externally (Fig. 2 Chien article). Certain stimulus-responsive DDS are
based on hydrogels. Hydrogels are three-dimensional and hydrophilic polymer networks
capable of swelling in water or biological fluids and retaining a large amount of fluids in
the swollen state. Such systems are capable of releasing drug in response to stimuli, they
are often called as smart or in tell igent DDS.
Stimuli-responsive DDS can be classified on the basis of manner of applied
stimulus into 2 categories –

1. Open loop/pulsatile/externally regulated systems – are those where the
information about the controlled variable is not automatically detected and are
triggered by the external stimuli, generally physical such as temperature,
ultrasound, electric current, etc.
2. Closed loop/self -r egul ated/f eedback-r egul ated/i nter nal ly-regul ated systems – are
those where the information about the controlled variable is detected and as a
result the system output is adjusted accordingly. The stimulus is produced without
any external intervention, within the body to control the structural changes in the
DDS and to exhibit the desired drug release. Such systems utilize several
approaches, generally chemical or biological, for rate control mechanisms such as
pH-sensitive polymers, enzyme-substrate interactions, antibody interactions, etc.
Stimuli-activated DDSs can also be classified, based on the nature of the process
applied or the type of energy used, into following categories:
A. Acti vation by Physical Pr ocesses
1. Osmotic pressure-activated DDS
2. Hydrodynamic pressure-activated DDS
3. Vapour pressure-activated DDS
4. Mechanical force-activated DDS
5. Magnetically-activated DDS
6. Thermally-activated / temperature-responsive DDS
7. Photo-activated DDS
8. Sonophoresis-activated / ultrasound-activated DDS
9. Iontophoresis-activated /electrically-activated DDS
B. Acti vation by Chemi cal Pr ocesses
1. pH-activated DDS
i. pH-dependent solubility systems
ii. pH-dependent erosion/degradation systems
iii. pH-dependent swelling systems
2. Ion-activated DDS
3. Hydrolysis-activated DDS
4. Chelation-activated DDS
C. Acti vation by Biol ogical Systems
1. Enzyme-activated DDS
i. Urea-responsive DDS
ii. Glucose-responsive DDS
2. Inflammation-activated DDS
3. Antibody interaction-activated DDS
A. Physical Process-Activated DDS
1. Osmotic Pressure-Activated DDS

Osmotic systems release drug at a predetermined, typically zero-order rate, based on the
principle of osmosis. Osmosis is natural movement of a solvent through a semipermeable
membrane into a solution of higher solute concentration, leading to equal concentration
of the solute on either sides of the membrane. Osmotic systems imbibe water from the
body through in
and increase a semipermeable membrane
volume and generate into an
osmotic osmoticthat
pressure material which
results dissolves
in slow in it
and even
delivery of drug through an orifice.
A semipermeable membrane (e.g. cellulose acetate) is the one that is permeable
to a solvent (e.g. water) but impermeable to ionic (e.g. sodium chloride) and high
molecular weight compounds.
In comparison to DDS based on diffusion and erosion, osmotic systems are more
complex in design but provide better zero-order drug delivery.
2. Hydration/Hydrodynamic Pressure-Activated DDS

These systems are identical to osmotic systems that release drug at a zero-order rate. It
however differs from osmotic system in that hydrodynamic pressure generating agent
which is typically a water swellable hydrocolloid such as HPMC is contained in one
compartment and the drug solution/dispersion in another collapsible reservoir. Both these
compartments are housed in a rigid, shape retaining but water permeable housing. The
hydrocolloid imbibes water and swells to generate hydrodynamic pressure that pushes the
drug reservoir compartment and thus force the drug through an orifice at a slow and
uniform rate.
3. Vapour Pressure-Activated DDS

These systems are identical to hydrodynamic systems in that the pumping compartment
and the drug solution/dispersion compartment are separated by a freely movable partition
and the whole system is enclosed in a rigid housing. The pumping compartment contains
a liquefied compressed gas that vaporises at body temperature and creates vapour
pressure that moves the partition to force the drug out of the device through a series of
flow regulator and delivery cannula into the blood circulation at a constant rate. A typical
example is the development infusion pump of heparin in anticoagulant therapy, of insulin
in the control of diabetes and of morphine for patients suffering from the intensive pain
of a terminal cancer.
4. Mechanical Force-Activated DDS

In these systems the drug reservoir is a solution in a container equipped with a
mechanically activated pumping system. A metered dose of drug formulation can be
reproducibly delivered into a body cavity, such as the nose, through the spray head upon
manual activation of the drug-delivery pumping system. The volume of solution
delivered is fixed and is independent of the force and duration of activation. A typical
example of this type of drug-delivery system is the development of a metered-dose
nebuliser for the intranasal administration of a precision dose of luteinizing hormone-
releasing hormone (LHRH) and its synthetic analogues, such as buserelin.
5. Magnetically-Activated DDS
In these systems a tiny doughnut-shaped magnet is positioned in the centre of a
hemispherical shaped drug-dispersing biocompatible polymer matrix and then coating the
external surface of the medicated polymer matrix, with the exception of one cavity at the
centre of the flat surface of the hemisphere, with a pure polymer, for instance, ethylene –
vinyl acetate
allowing copolymer
a peptide or silicone
drug such elastomers.
as insulin ThisWhen
to release. uncoated cavity is
the magnet is designed
activated,for
to
vibrate by an external electromagnetic field, it releases the drug at a zero-order rate by
diffusion process. (fig in Chien, p. 446 encyclo)
6. Thermally-activated / Temperature-responsive DDS

Temperature-sensitive polymers can be classified into two groups based on the origin of
thermosensitivity to aqueous media –
1. Polymers that interact with water.
2. Polymers that interact with water as well also show polymer-polymer interaction.
When a polymer swells in a solvent, there is negligible or small positive enthalpy, but its
aqueous solutions show opposite effect. This unusual behaviour is associated with a
phenomenon of polymer-phase separation as the temperature is raised to a critical value,
known as the lower critical solution temperature (LCST). Polymers characterized by
LCST usually shrink as the temperature is increased above LCST while they swell below
LCST, e.g. N-alkyl acrylamide homopolymers and copolymers. Drugs can be
immobilised in such temperature sensitive polymers for effecting controlled release.
7. Photo-activated DDS
Photoresponsive systems (gels) change their physical and chemical properties reversibly
upon photoradiation. A photoresponsive polymer consists of a photoreceptor, usually a
photochromic chromophore, and a functional part. The photochrome molecules capture
the optical signal and then the isomerization of the chromophores in the photoreceptor
converts it to a chemical signal.
8. Sonophoresis-Activated / Ultrasound-Activated DDS

This type of activation-controlled drug delivery system utilizes ultrasonic energy to
activate or trigger the delivery of drugs from a polymeric drug delivery device. The
system can be fabricated from either a non-degradable polymer, such as ethylene –vinyl
acetate (EVAc) copolymer, or a bioerodible polymer, such as poly(lactide –glycolide)
copolymer.
9. Iontophoresis-Activated / Electrically-Activated DDS

This type of CRDDS uses electrical current to activate and modulate the diffusion of a
charged drug molecule across a biological membrane, such as the skin, in a manner
similar to passive diffusion under a concentration gradient but at a much faster rate. It is a
painless procedure. Since like charges repel each other, application of a positive current
drives positively charged drug molecules away from the electrode and into the tissues;
and vice versa. (see fig. In book rev, what is iontophoresis, absorption of drug folder)
A typical example of this type of activation-controlled system is percutaneous

penetration of anti-inflammatory drugs such as dexamethasone to surface tissues.
B. Chemical Process-Activated DDS

1. pH-Activated DDS
Stimuli-responsive DDS based on pH-sensitive polymers have been developed along
three different approaches –
i. pH-dependent solubility
ii. pH-dependent degradation
iii. pH-dependent swelling.
i. pH -dependent solu bil it y systems - These systems are designed for acid-labile
drugs or drugs irritating to gastric mucosa and target their delivery to the
intestinal tract. It is fabricated by coating a core tablet of such a drug with a
combination of intestinal fluid-insoluble polymer, like ethyl cellulose, and
intestinal fluid-soluble polymer, like HPMCP. In the stomach, the coating
membrane resists dissolution in pH 1-3. After gastric emptying, the system travels
to the small intestine, and the intestinal fluid-soluble component in the coating
membrane is dissolved in at pH above 5 thereby producing a microporous
membrane that controls the release of drug from the core tablet. An example of
such a system is oral controlled delivery of potassium chloride, which is highly
irritating to gastric epithelium.
Glucose-dependent insulin release system was also based on this
phenomenon wherein EVAc polymer was utilised.
ii. pH -dependent degradation systems – A pH-sensitive bioerodible polymer
described in the section on systems utilising enzymes, an enzyme-substrate
reaction produces a pH change that is used to modulate the erosion of a pH-
sensitive polymer containing insulin.
iii. pH -dependent swelli ng systems – These systems are based on the principle that
polymers that contain weakly acidic or basic groups in their polymeric backbone
show swelling or deswelling behaviour on alteration of pH and thus devices made
from these polymers display release rates that are pH-dependent.
Polyacidic polymers – at low pH, unionised and unswollen;
at high pH, ionised and swollen.
Polybasic polymers – at low pH, ionised and swollen;
at high pH, unionised and unswollen.
2. Ion-Activated DDS
Based on the principle that the GIT has a relatively constant level of ions, this type of
system has been developed for controlling the delivery of an ionic or an ionisable drug at
a constant rate. Such a CRDDS is prepared by first complexing an ionisable drug with an
−
ion-exchange resin. A cationic drug is complexed with a resin containing SO 3 group or
+
an anionic drug with a resin containing N(CH 3)3 group. The granules of the drug–resin
complex are further treated with an impregnating agent, like polyethylene glycol 4000,
for reducing the rate of swelling upon contact with an aqueous medium. They are then
coated by an air-suspension coating technique with a water-insoluble but water-
permeable polymeric membrane, such as ethyl cellulose. This membrane serves as a rate-
controlling barrier
hydronium and to modulate
chloride the release
ions diffuse of CRDDS
into the drug from
andthe CRDDS.
interact withInthe
thedrug
GI –tract,
resin
complex to trigger the dissociation and release of ionic drug
Aci dic dru g release Re sin SO3- Drug H Re sin SO3- H Drug
Basic drug r elease Re sin N CH3 Drug Cl Re sin N CH3 Cl Drug
3 3
An example of such a formulation is liquid-oral with sustained release of a

combination of hydrocodone and chlorpheniramine. (Fig. Chien).
3. Hydrolysis-Activated DDS
This type of CRDDS depends on the hydrolysis process to activate the release of drug
molecules. In this system, the drug reservoir is either encapsulated in microcapsules or
homogeneously dispersed in microspheres or nanoparticles prepared from bioerodible or
biodegradable polymers such as polylactide, poly(lactide–glycolide) copolymer,
poly(orthoester) or poly(anhydride). The release of a drug from the polymer matrix is
activated by the hydrolysis-induced degradation of polymer chains, and the rate of drug
delivery is controlled by polymer degradation rate. A typical example is injectable
microspheres for the subcutaneous controlled delivery of luprolide, a potent biosynthetic
analogue of gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) for the treatment of gonadotropin-
dependent cancers, such as prostate carcinoma in men and endometriosis in females, for
upto 4 months. (Fig. Chien).
4. Chelation-Activated DDS
It is based on the ability of metals to accelerate the hydrolysis of carboxylate or
phosphate esters and amides. When a chelating agent such as quinaldic acid is attached
to a polymer chain such as polyvinyl alcohol by an ester or amide linkage, the renal
excretion rate and toxicity is reduced. In the presence of metal ions such Co(II), Zn (II),
Cu(II), etc. a complex with the polymer-bound chelating is formed wherein the metal ion
facilitates the hydrolysis resulting in release of metal-chelator complex and subsequent
elimination of the chelated metal.
C. Biologically-Activated / Bioresponsive DDS

1. Enzyme-Activated DDS
In this type of CRDDS, the drug reservoir is either physically entrapped in microspheres
or chemically bound to polymer chains fabricated from biopolymers, such as albumins or
polypeptides. The release of drugs is made possible by the enzymatic hydrolysis of
biopolymers by a specific enzyme in the target tissue. A typical example is the
development of albumin microspheres, which release 5-fluorouracil, in a controlled
manner, by protease-activated biodegradation.
Another approach in enzyme-activated DDS is use of pH change. Urea responsive

DDS and glucose responsive DDS fall in this category.
i. Ur ea-r esponsive DD S –This system consists of drug dispersed in a bioerodible

matrix made of poly(vinyl methyl ether) half-ester, which is coated with a layer of
immobilized urease. In a solution at neutral pH, the polymer erodes slowly. In the
presence of urea, urease at the surface of DDS metabolises urea to form ammonia.
This causes the pH to increase which activates a rapid degradation of polymer
matrix and subsequently release of drug molecules.
ii. Gl ucose-r esponsive DD S – These systems utilise enzymatic reaction of glucose

oxidase with glucose as shown below.
glucose oxidase
Glucose O2 Gluconic acid H 2O2
Here, pH-sensitive polymers contain immobilised glucose oxidase in a pH-
responsive hydrogel membrane that encloses insulin reservoir. When glucose
diffuses into the hydrogel, glucose oxidase catalyses it to gluconic acid thereby
lowering the pH in the hydrogel membrane microenvironment causing it to swell.
Since insulin permeates faster from swollen hydrogel membrane, rapid insulin
release in presence of glucose occurs. When the glucose concentration in the
hydrogel reduces in response to insulin, the hydrogel membrane contracts thus
causing a fall in insulin delivery.
2. Inflammation-Activated DDS
In this system drug-loaded lipid microspheres are dispersed in biodegradable hydrogels
of cross-linked hyaluronic acid. Hyaluronic acid is specifically degraded by hydroxyl
radicals which are produced by phagocytic cells such as leukocytes and macrophages,
locally at inflammatory sites.
3. Antibody interaction-Activated DDS

These systems are based on the principle that hapten-antibody interaction suppresses
enzymatic degradation of polymer matrix or permeability of polymeric reservoir of drug,
for e.g. naltrexone. The device is coated by covalently grafting morphine to the surface.
Exposure of the surface to morphine antibodies results in coating of polymer surface with
such antibodies, which in turn block the release of naltrexone. However, on exposure to
exogenous morphine, the process is reversed i.e. the antibodies are uncoated and
naltrexone is released.
Site-Targeted DDS
Most conventional dosage forms deliver drug into the body that eventually reaches the
site of action by multiple steps of diffusion and partitioning. In addition to the target site,
the drug also distributes to non-target tissues that may result in toxicity or adverse
reactions. Selective and targeted drug therapy could result in not just optimum and more
effective therapy but also a significant reduction in drug dose and cost.
Targeted- or site-specific DDS refer to systems that place the drug at or near the
receptor site or site of action.
Site-targeted DDS can be classified into three broad categories –
2. F ir st-order targetin g – refers to DDS that delivers the drug to the capillary bed or
the active site
3. Second-order targeting – refers to DDS that delivers the drug to a special cell
type such as the tumour cells and not to the normal cells
4. Third-order targeti ng – refers to DDS that delivers the drug intracellularly.
Site-targeted DDSs have also been characterized as –

Passive targetin g – refers to natural or passive disposition of a drug carrier based
on the physicochemical characteristics of the system in relation to the body.
Acti ve targeting – refers to alterations of the natural disposition of the drug
carrier, directing it to specific cells, tissues or organs; for e.g. use of ligands or
monoclonal antibodies which can target specific sites.
Drug targeting often requires carriers for selective delivery and can serve
following purposes –
1. Protect the drug from degradation after administration;
2. Improve transport or delivery of drug to cells;
3. Decrease clearance of drug; or
4. Combination of the above.
Carriers for drug targeting are of two types –
Carr iers covalentl

pharmacological y bonded to dru g – where the drug release is required for
activity.
Carr iers not covalently bonded to dru g – where simple uncoating of the drug is
required for pharmacological activity; e.g. liposomes.
The various carriers used for drug targeting are –
1. Polymeric carriers
2. Albumin
3. Lipoproteins
4. Liposomes.
1. Polymeric Carriers for Drug Targeting

The basic components of a polymeric targeted DDS are –
1. A polymeric backbone which is non-immunogenic and biodegradable that
contains following three attachments;
2. A homi ng device, also called as sit e-specif ic tar geti ng moiety, which is capable
of leading the drug delivery system to the vicinity of a target tissue (or cell);
3. A solubiliser , which enables the drug delivery system to be transported to and
preferentially taken up by the target tissue; and
4. A drug, which is covalently bonded to the polymeric backbone, through a spacer,

and contains a linkage that is cleavable only by a specific enzyme(s) at the target
tissue (fig. 14. 7).
Fig. 14.7. Polymeric carrier system for drug targeting
Polymers used for drug targeting include polyethylenediamine, polylysine,

chitosan, dextran and PEG for macromolecular drugs such as gene therapy. The homing
device is a monoclonal antibody, a recognised sugar moiety or a small cell-specific
ligand. At present, most site-specific DDS are limited to parenteral administration and
primarily utilise soluble polymers.
Besides their use as regular carriers, polymers may also be formulated as

microparticles or nanoparticles, wherein the drug is encapsulated in a biodegradable
colloidal polymer. The small size of nanospheres allows good tissue penetration while
providing protection or sustained release.
The disposition of micro- or nano-sphere depends upon their size –

Particles > 12 are lodged in the capillary bed at the site of injection
Particles from 2 – 12 are retained in lung, liver or spleen
Particles < 0.5 (500 nm) deposit in spleen and bone marrow.
2. Albumin as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Although distribution of albumin is not site-specific, it has been conjugated with drugs
such as methotrexate to increase duration of drug action and deliver drug to liver.
3. Lipoproteins as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Low-density lipoproteins enter cell by endocytosis and thus have the potential for
transporting drugs into the cell in which lipoprotein-drug complex can be hydrolysed by
lysosomal enzymes.
4. Liposomes as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Liposomes in the size range 0.5 – 100 have been used to reduce side effects and
efficacy of drugs such as doxorubicin, amphotericin B, etc. The site-specificity to
liposomes can be conferred by the type of lipid or by inclusion of a targeting agent such
as monoclonal antibody into the liposomal bilayer.
ORAL CONTROLLED RELEASE SYSTEMS

Oral route has been the most popular and successfully used route for controlled delivery
of drugs because of following reasons –
1. Convenience and ease of administration

2. Greater flexibility in dosage form design (possible because of versatility of GI
anatomy and physiology)
3. Ease of production and low cost of such a system.
The controlled-release systems for oral use are mostly solids and quite a few are
liquids such as suspensions containing controlled release coated or complexed drug
particles, granules, pellets or microcapsules.
An oral CDDS can be designed either as a continuous release system or as a pulsed
release system (see fig. 14.8 for classification).
Conti nu ous r elease systems release drug continuously over an extended period of
time.
Pulsati le release systems are characterized by a time period of no release (lag
time) followed by a rapid and complete or extended drug release. Such a system is
beneficial or advantageous in following situations –
1. Drugs with extensive first pass metabolism e.g. propranolol.
2. Targeting of a drug to a specific site in the intestinal tract, for e.g. large
intestine or colon for the treatment of inflammatory bowel diseases.
3. Protection of the gastric or upper intestinal mucosa from irritating drugs or
protecting the drug from degradation in regions of high enzymatic activity or
highly acidic stomach e.g. peptide drugs.
4. Adaptation of the drug to suit circadian rhythms of body functions or diseases.
Depending upon drug release pattern, pulsatile release systems can be classified
into two categories –
1. Single-pulse systems – are rupturable dosage forms that completely release the
drug after a time-lag.
2. Multiple-pulse systems – are those that behave like continuous release CDDS
after a specific time-lag. Such systems consist of a drug-containing core,
covered by a swelling layer and an outer insoluble, but semipermeable
polymer coating or membrane.
Fig. 14.8. Classification of oral CDDS

A. Continuous Release Systems: These systems release the drug for a prolonged
period of time along the entire length of GIT (especially up to the terminal region of
small intestine) with normal transit of the dosage form. The various systems under this
category are:
1. Dissolution controlled release systems
2. Diffusion controlled release systems
3. Dissolution and diffusion controlled release systems
4. Ion-exchange resin-drug complexes
5. Slow dissolving salts and complexes

6. pH-dependent formulations
7. Osmotic pressure controlled systems
8. Hydrodynamic pressure controlled systems
B. Delayed Transit and Continuous Release Systems: These systems are designed
to prolong their residence in the GIT along with their release. Often, the dosage form is
fabricated to detain in the stomach and hence the drug present therein should be stable to
gastric pH. Systems included in this category are:
1. Altered density systems
2. Mucoadhesive systems
3. Size-based systems
C. Delayed Release Systems: The design of such systems involves release of drug
only at a specific site in the GIT. The drugs contained in such a system are those that are:
i. Destroyed in the stomach or by intestinal enzymes
ii. Known to cause gastric distress
iii. Absorbed from a specific intestinal site, or
iv. Intended to exert local effect at a specific GI site.
The two types of delayed release systems are:

1. Intestinal release systems
2. Colonic release systems
Dissolution Controlled Release Systems
Such systems are easiest to design. The drug present in such a system may be the one:
i. With inherently slow dissolution rate e.g. griseofulvin and digoxin; such drugs
act as natural prolonged release products
ii. That produce slow dissolving forms when it comes in contact with GI fluids e.g.
ferrous sulphate, or
iii. Having high aqueous solubility and dissolution rate e.g. pentoxifylline.
Drugs belonging to the last category present challenge in controlling their dissolution
rate. The techniques employed are:
1. Embedment in slowly dissolving or erodible matrix, and
2. Encapsulation or coating with slowly dissolving or erodible substances (Fig.
14.6.).
Fig. 14.6 Schematic representation of dissolution controlled release systems —(a)

matrix system, and (b) coated/encapsulated system
Matrix (or Monolith) Dissolution Controlled Systems

Matrix systems are also called as monoliths since the drug is homogeneously
dispersed throughout a rate-controlling medium. They are very common and employ
waxes such as beeswax, carnauba wax, hydrogenated castor oil, etc. which control drug
dissolution by controlling the rate of dissolution fluid penetration into the matrix by
altering the porosity of tablet, decreasing its wettability or by itself getting dissolved at a
slower rate. The wax embedded drug is generally prepared by dispersing the drug in
molten wax and congealing and granulating the same. The drug release is often first-
order from such matrices.
Encapsulation/Coating Dissolution Controlled Systems (Reservoir Devices)

Here, the drug particles are coated or encapsulated by one of the several
microencapsulation techniques with slowly dissolving materials like cellulose, PEGs,
polymethacrylates, waxes, etc. The resulting pellets may be filled as such in hard gelatin
capsules (popularly called as spansules) or compressed into tablets. The dissolution rate
of coat depends upon the solubility and thickness of the coating which may range from 1
to 200 microns.
Diffusion Controlled Release Systems
In these types of systems, the rate-controlling step is not the dissolution rate but the
diffusion of dissolved drug through a polymeric barrier. The drug release rate is never
zero-order since the diffusional path length increases with time as the insoluble matrix is
gradually depleted of drug. The two types of diffusion controlled systems are—matrix
systems and reservoir devices.
Matrix Diffusion Controlled Systems

Here, the drug is dispersed in an insoluble matrix of rigid non-swellable hydrophobic
materials or swellable hydrophilic substances. Materials used for rigid matrix are
insoluble plastics such as PVC and fatty materials like stearic acid, beeswax, etc. With
plastic materials, the drug is generally kneaded with the solution of PVC in an organic
solvent and granulated. Waxy matrix is prepared by dispersing the drug in molten fat
followed by congealing. The granules are then compressed into tablets (Fig. 14.7.a).
Swellable matrix systems are popular for sustaining the release of highly water-soluble
drugs. The materials for such matrices are generally hydrophilic gums and may be of
natural origin (guar gum, tragacanth), semisynthetic (HPMC, CMC, xanthan gum) or
synthetic (polyacrylamides). The drug and the gum are granulated together with a
solvent such as alcohol and compressed into tablets. The release of drug from such
initially dehydrated hydrogels involves simultaneous absorption of water (resulting in
hydration, gelling and swelling of gum) and desorption of drug via a swelling controlled
diffusion mechanism. As the gum swells and the drug
Rate Controlling Step :

Diffusion of dissolved drug
through the matrix
Fig. 14.7 Diffusion controlled devices—(a) rigid matrix, and (b) swellable matrix
diffuses out of it, the swollen mass, devoid of drug appears transparent or glasslike and
therefore the system is sometimes called as glassy hydrogel (Fig. 14.7b). The drug
release follows Fickian first-order diffusion under equilibrium conditions. However,
during the swelling process, such an equilibrium may not exist and the diffusion may be
non-Fickian or anomalous diffusion.
Reservoir Devices (or Laminated Matrix Devices)

These systems are hollow containing an inner core of drug surrounded in a water
insoluble polymer membrane. The polymer can be applied by coating or
microencapsulation techniques. The drug release mechanism across the membrane
involves its partitioning into the membrane with subsequent release into the surrounding
fluid by diffusion (Fig. 14.8). The polymers commonly used in such devices are HPC,
ethyl cellulose and polyvinyl acetate. A disadvantage of all such microencapsulated drug
release systems is a chance of sudden drug dumping which is not common with matrix
devices.
Rate Controlling Factors:

Polymeric content in coating,
Thickness of coating,
Hardness of microcapsule
Fig. 14.8 Drug release by diffusion across the insoluble membrane of reservoir device
Dissolution and Diffusion Controlled Release Systems
In such systems, the drug core is encased in a partially soluble membrane. Pores are thus
created due to dissolution of parts of the membrane which:
 Permit entry of aqueous medium into the core and hence drug dissolution, and
 Allow diffusion of dissolved drug out of the system (Fig. 14.9).
An example of obtaining such a coating is using a mixture of ethyl cellulose with PVP
or methyl cellulose; the latter dissolves in water and creates pores in the insoluble ethyl
cellulose membrane.
Rate Controlling Factor :

Fraction of soluble polymer
in the coat
Fig. 14.9 Dissolution and diffusion controlled release system
Ion-Exchange Resin-Drug Complexes

Controlled delivery of ionisable acidic and basic drugs can be obtained by complexing
them with insoluble non-toxic anion exchange and cation exchange resins respectively.
The drug is released slowly by diffusion through the resin particle structure. The
following equation represents the release of a basic drug, NH 2R', from a cation exchange
resin RSO3H when in contact with GI fluid containing an ionic compound A +B- (either
gastric HCl or intestinal NaCl):
RSO3–NH3+R' + A+B– RSO3-A+ + NH3+R'B–

A number of basic drugs like noscapine, phenylpropanolamine and phentermine have
been retarded by such an approach. The complex can be prepared by incubating the
drug-resin solution or passing the drug solution through a column containing ion-
exchange resin. The drug-resin complex can be coated with cellulose or hard paraffin
and formulated as ion free suspension for paediatric use.
Slow Dissolving Salts and Complexes

Salts or complexes of drugs which are slowly soluble in the GI fluids can be used for
controlled-release of the active principle. Amine drugs can be reacted with tannic acid to
form poorly soluble complexes that can be formulated as long acting tablets. Penicillin G
has been complexed with N,N’-dibenzyl ethylenediamine to give benzathine penicillin G
that can be formulated as oral suspension. Such complexes can be obtained by simple
acid-base reaction on mixing together solutions of individual compounds.
pH-Independent Formulations
Such systems are designed to eliminate the influence of changing GI pH on dissolution
and absorption of drugs by formulating them with sufficient amount of buffering agents
(salts of phosphoric, citric or tartaric acids) that adjust the pH to the desired value as the
dosage form passes along the GIT and permit drug dissolution and release at a constant
rate independent of GI pH. The dosage form containing drug and buffer is coated with a
permeable substance that allows entry of aqueous medium but prevents dispersion of
tablet.
Osmotic Pressure Controlled Systems

Unlike the solution-diffusion mechanism for most systems, an oral osmotic pump,
popularly called as OROS, works on the principle of osmotic pressure to release the drug
at a constant zero-order rate. A core comprising of drug and an osmotically active
substance (also called as osmogen) such as potassium chloride or mannitol is surrounded
by a rigid semipermeable membrane coating such as cellulose ester or cellulose ether
having an orifice of 0.4 mm diameter produced by laser beam for drug exit. When
exposed to GI fluids, water flows through the semipermeable membrane into the tablet
due to osmotic pressure difference which dissolves the drug and pumps it out through the
orifice by the osmotic force (Fig. 14.10). Such devices can be used to target specific
areas of the GIT.
Rate Controlling Factors :

Orifice diameter
Membrane area
Membrane thickness
Membrane permeability
Osmotic properties of the core
Drug solubility
Fig. 14.10 Oral osmotic pump (oros)

The OROS principle can be used to design multiunit dosage forms consisting of drug
core particles coated with a water permeable membrane in which the delivery orifice is
made by using a channelling agent such as PVP and the coated particles filled in a
capsule.
Hydrodynamic Pressure Controlled Systems

The hydrodynamic pressure generated by swelling of a hydrophilic gum can also be used
to activate the delivery of drugs. The device comprises of a rigid, shape retaining
housing enclosing a collapsible, impermeable compartment containing liquid drug (Fig.
14.11). The space between the external housing and the drug compartment contains a
layer of swellable, hydrophilic gum such as polyhydroxyalkyl methacrylate. In the GIT,
the gum imbibes water through the opening present at the lower side of external housing
and swells creating a hydrodynamic pressure. The pressure thus created squeezes the
collapsible drug reservoir to release the medicament through the delivery orifice at a
zero-order rate. Such systems are also called as push-pull osmotic pu mps (PPOP).

Fluid permeability
Surface area of wall with openings
Hydrodynamic pressure gradient
Fig. 14.11 Hydrodynamic pressure controlled system (push-pull osmotic pump)

Altered Density Systems
The transit time of GI contents is usually less than 24 hours. This is the major limiting
factor in the design of oral controlled-release formulations which can reduce the
frequency of dosing to a time period little more than the residence time of drug.
However, if the residence time of drug in the stomach and/or intestine is prolonged in
some way, the frequency of dosing can be further reduced. There are 3 ways by which
this can be achieved—altering the density of drug particles, use of mucoadhesive

polymers and altering the size of the dosage form. The altered density approach involves
use of either high or low density pellets.
High Density Pellets

The density of GI fluids is around 1.4 g/cc. Use of drug pellets having density greater
than this value, preferably above 1.6 g/cc, results in prolonged GI residence that is
unaffected by food. Iron oxide, titanium dioxide and barium sulphate have been used to
increase the density of drug pellets. The drug is coated on the heavy core and then
covered by a diffusion controlled membrane (Fig. 14.12a).
Low Density Pellets

Also called as hydrodynamically balanced systems, such pellets, having density less
than that of GI fluids, float on the gastric juice for an extended period of time while
slowly releasing the drug. Globular shells such as that of poprice and celluloses have
been used to lower the density of system (Fig. 14.12b). A swellable gum like HPMC can
be used for a similar purpose (Fig. 14.12c).
Fig. 14.12 Altered density systems

Floating or buoyant tablets/capsules can be formulated by granulating a drug with
20 to 80% of hydrogel such as HPMC, HEC and HPC. On contact with GI fluids, the
tablet swells and forms a diffusible gel barrier that lowers the density of system to less
than 1 allowing it to float. Lipophilic polymers such as silicone elastomer can also be
modified to have swelling properties. This is achieved by impregnating a water miscible
liquid such as glycerol or a water-soluble salt such as sodium chloride in the lipophilic
matrix. On contact with aqueous medium, the modified lipophilic polymer swells due to
absorption of water by the hydrophilic additives in the matrix. Alternatively, a gas filled
flotation chamber can be attached to a membrane coated tablet for making it buoyant.
Mucoadhesive Systems
A bioadhesive polymer such as cross-linked polyacrylic acid, when incorporated in a
tablet, allows it to adhere to the gastric mucosa or epithelium. Such a system
continuously releases a fraction of drug into the intestine over prolonged periods of time.
Size-Based Systems
Gastric emptying of a dosage form can be delayed in the fed state if its size is greater than
2 mm. Dosage form of size 2.5 cm or larger is often required to delay emptying long
enough to allow once daily dosing. Such forms are however difficult to swallow.
Intestinal Release Systems

A drug may be enteric coated for intestinal release for several known reasons such as to
prevent gastric irritation, prevent destabilization in gastric pH, etc. Certain drugs are
delivered to the distal end of small intestine for absorption via Peyer’s patches or
lymphatic system. Peyer’s patches are mucosal lymphoid tissues that are known to
absorb macromolecules like proteins and peptides and antigens by endocytosis. Selective
release of such agents to Peyer’s patch region prevents them from getting
destroyed/digested by the intestinal enzymes. Such a site can be utilized for oral delivery
of insulin. Lymphatic system on the other hand is known to absorb highly lipophilic
agents directly into the systemic circulation without their first-pass through liver. The
drug is absorbed by two mechanisms —chylomicrons which are fatty vesicles that entrap
hydrophobic drugs, and pinocytic uptake of macromolecules.
Colonic Release Systems
Drugs
reasonsare
— poorly absorbed through colon but may be delivered to such a site for two
a. Local action as in the treatment of ulcerative colitis with mesalamine, and
b. Systemic absorption of protein and peptide drugs like insulin and vasopressin.
Advantage is taken of the fact that pH-sensitive bioerodible polymers like
polymethacrylates release the medicament only at the alkaline pH of colon or use of
divinylbenzene cross-linked polymers that can be cleaved only by the azoreductase of
colonic bacteria to release free drug for local effect or systemic absorption.
PARENTERAL CONTROLLED RELEASE SYSTEMS
One of the
duration of major
action advantages of parenteral
can be extended for days controlled
or months drug delivery systems
and sometimes is that The
upto a year. the
prime drawback is that, once administered, the drug cannot be easily removed if an
undesirable action is precipitated or if the drug is no longer needed. Most of such
systems are administered by subcutaneous and intramuscular routes and few by
intravenous and intraperitoneal routes. Subcutaneous route is limited to well absorbed
water-soluble drugs like insulin and dose volume is limited to 0.5 to 1.5 ml. Deep
intramuscular route is suitable for polymeric systems or slightly soluble drugs, the
volume size restricted to 2 ml. Intravenous route is useful for administration of

liposomes, nanoparticles, erythrocytes and polypeptides. An important criteria for this
route is drug particle size. A disadvantage of i.v. route is that the system may be taken up
by the reticuloendothelial system but the same can be put to use in targeting drugs to such
a system. Intraperitoneal route is important in targeting of antineoplastics into the
lymphatic system.
The vehicle, polymers and other substances used in the formulation of parenteral
controlled-release dosage forms should be sterile, pyrogen free, nonirritating,
biocompatible and biodegradable into nontoxic compounds within an appropriate time,
preferably close to the duration of drug action.
There are several approaches to achieve controlled drug delivery via parenteral route,
the release being controlled by dissolution, diffusion, dissociation, partitioning or
bioerosion. The systems can be broadly classified as:
A. Injectables:
1. Solutions
2. Dispersions
3. Microspheres and Microcapsules
4. Nanoparticles and Niosomes
5. Liposomes
6. Resealed Erythrocytes
B. Implants
C. Infusion Devices:
1. Osmotic Pumps
2. Vapour Pressure Powered Pumps
3. Battery Powered Pumps

Solutions
Both aqueous as well as oil solutions may be used for controlled drug release. With
aqueous solutions (given intramuscularly), the drug release may be controlled in three
ways:
i. By increasing the viscosity of vehicle by use of MC, CMC or PVP and thus,
decreasing molecular diffusion and localizing the injected drug.
ii. By forming a complex with macromolecules like MC, CMC or PVP from which
the drug dissociates at a controlled rate (only free drug will get absorbed).
iii. By forming complexes that control drug release not by dissociation but by
reducing the solubility of parent drug e.g. protamine zinc insulin and
cyanocobalamin zinc tannate.
Oil solutions control the release by partitioning the drug out of the oil in the
surrounding aqueous biofluids. Vegetable oils like arachis oil, cottonseed oil, etc. are
used for such a purpose. The method is applicable only to those drugs which are oil
soluble and have optimum partition coefficient.
Dispersions
Dispersed systems like emulsions and suspensions can be administered by i.m., s.c. or i.v.
routes. Among emulsions, the o/w systems have not been used successfully since
absorption of drug incorporated in the oil phase is rapid due to large interfacial area and
rapid partitioning. Similarly, few w/o emulsions of water-soluble drugs have been tried
for controlled-release. Multiple emulsions of w/o/w and o/w/o types (more correctly,
double
drug foremulsions ) are
partitioning becoming
which popular since
can effectively retardanitsadditional reservoir
release rate is presented to the
(Fig. 14.13).
Control of drug release from suspensions is easier and predictable. Drug dissolution
and subsequent diffusion are the main rate controlling steps. Release of water-soluble
drugs can be retarded by presenting it as oil suspension and vice versa for oil soluble
drugs. Factors to be considered in the formulation of such a system include -
i. Solid content : should be ideally in the range 0.5 to 5.0%
ii. Particle size : this factor is very important since larger the particle size, slower
the dissolution; however, larger particles have their own disadvantages like
causing irritation at the injection site (size should therefore be below 10
microns), poor syringeability and injectability and rapid sedimentation. The
latter problem can be overcome by use of viscosity builders which also retard
drug diffusion.
Fig. 14.13 Multiple emulsions for parenteral controlled-release systems

Aqueous suspensions can be given by i.m. or s.c. routes. Generally crystalline and
stable polymorphic forms of the drug are chosen rather than amorphous forms to delay
release. Solubility can be further reduced by salt or complex formation e.g. crystalline
zinc insulin shows more prolonged action than amorphous zinc insulin complex. Oil
suspensions, generally given i.m., prolong drug action much more in comparison to oil
solution and aqueous suspension since drug release involves two rate- limiting steps viz.
dissolution of drug particles, and partitioning of the dissolved drug from oil to the
aqueous biofluids.
Microspheres and Microcapsules

Microspheres are free flowing powders consisting of spherical particles of size ideally
less than 125 microns that can be suspended in a suitable aqueous vehicle and injected by
an 18 or 20 number needle. Each particle is basically a matrix of drug dispersed in a
polymer from which release occurs by a first-order process. The polymers used are
biocompatible and biodegradable e.g. polylactic acid, polylactide coglycolide, etc. Drug
release is controlled by dissolution/degradation of matrix. Small matrices release drug at
a faster rate and thus, by using particles of different sizes, various degrees of controlled-
release can be achieved. The system is ideally suited for controlled-release of
peptide/protein drugs such as LHRH which have short half-lives and otherwise need to be
injected once or more, daily, as conventional parenteral formulations. In comparison to

peptides, proteins are difficult to formulate because of their higher molecular weight,
lower solubility and the need to preserve their conformational structure during
manufacture.
In order to overcome uptake of intravenously administered microspheres by the
reticuloendothelial system and promote drug targeting to tumors with good perfusion,
magnetic microspheres were developed. They are prepared from albumin and
magnetite (Fe2O3) and have a size of 1.0 micron to permit intravascular injection. The
system is infused into an artery that perfuses the target site and a magnet is placed over
the area to localize it in that region. A 100 times higher concentration of doxorubicin
was attained at the target site by such an approach with just half the i.v. dose.
Microcapsules differ from microspheres in that the drug is centrally located within
the polymeric shell of finite thickness and release may be controlled by dissolution,
diffusion or both. Quality microcapsules with thick walls generally release their
medicaments at a zero-order rate. Steroids, peptides and antineoplastics have been
successfully administered parenterally by use of controlled-release microcapsules.
Nanoparticles and Niosomes

Nanoparticles are also called as nanospheres or nanocapsules depending upon whether
the drug is in a polymer matrix or encapsulated in a shell. They differ from microspheres
in having submicron particles in the nanometer size range —10 to 1000 nm. The
polymers used are the usual biodegradable ones. The main advantage of this system is
that it can be stored for upto 1 year and can be used for selective targeting via
reticuloendothelial system to liver and to cells that are active phagocytically.
Like nanoparticles, niosomes are inexpensive alternatives to liposomes. They are
closed vesicles formed in aqueous media from nonionic surfactants with or without the
presence of cholesterol or other lipids.
Liposomes
The term liposomes (meaning lipid body) was derived on the basis of names of
subcellular particles like lysosome and ribosome. It is defined as a spherule/vesicle of
lipid bilayers enclosing an aqueous compartment. The lipid most commonly used is
phospholipid. Sphingolipids, glycolipids and sterols have also been used to prepare
liposomes. Their size ranges from 25 to 5000 nm. Depending upon their structure,
liposomes are classified as:
i. MLV (multilamellar vesicles) : These liposomes are made of series of concentric
bilayers of lipids enclosing a small internal volume.
ii. OLV (oligolamellar vesicles) : These are made of 2 to 10 bilayers of lipids
surrounding a large internal volume.
iii. ULV (unilamellar vesicles) : These are made of single bilayer of lipids. They
may be SUV (small unilamellar vesicles) of size 20 to 40 nm, MUV (medium
unilamellar vesicles) of size 40 to 80 nm, LUV (large unilamellar vesicles) of
size 100 to 1000 nm or GUV ( giant unilamellar vesicles) of size greater than
1000 nm.
A large variety of drugs (antineoplastics, antibiotics), peptides/proteins (including

antibodies) and viruses and bacteria can be incorporated into liposomes. Water-soluble
drugs are trapped in the aqueous compartment while lipophilic ones are incorporated in
the lipid phase of liposomes. Because of their availability in various sizes, ability to
incorporate both water as well as oil soluble drugs, their inertness and their ability to
protect labile drugs,

Intramuscularly and liposomes are versatile
subcutaneously injectedcarriers for parenteral
liposomes drug
deliver drug at delivery systems.
a controlled rate
while intravenous administration selectively targets them to reticuloendothelial system
and phagocytic cells. A simple method by which liposomes can be produced involves
drying an organic solvent solution of lipids onto the wall of a flask/beaker followed by
hydration and dispersion of lipid by addition of buffer and mixing (Fig. 14.14).
Fig. 14.14 Production procedure for liposomes.
Resealed Erythrocytes
Drug loading in body’s own erythrocytes when used to serve as controlled delivery
systems have several advantages . They are fully biodegradable and biocompatible,
nonimmunogenic, can circulate intravascularly for days (act as circulatory drug depots)
and allow large amounts of drug to be carried. The drug need not be chemically modified
and is protected from immunological detection and enzymatic inactivation. Drug loading
can be done by immersing the cells in buffered hypotonic solution of drug which causes
them to rupture and release haemoglobin and trap the medicament. On restoration of
isotonicity and incubation at 37 o C, the cells reseal and are ready for use (Fig. 14.15).
Fig. 14.15 Drug loading in erythrocytes.
Damaged erythrocytes are removed by the liver and spleen. These organs can thus be
specifically targeted by drug loaded erythrocytes.
Implants
An ideal implantable parenteral system should possess following properties—
1. Environmentally stable : should not breakdown under the influence of heat, light,
air and moisture.
2. Biostable : should not undergo physicochemical degradation when in contact with

biofluids (or drugs).
3. Biocompatible : should neither stimulate immune responses (otherwise the implant
will be rejected) nor thrombosis and fibrosis formation.
4. Nontoxic and noncarcinogenic : its degradation products or leached additives must
be completely safe.
5. Should have a minimum surface area, smooth texture and structural characteristics
similar to the tissue in which it is to be implanted to avoid irritation.
6. Should be removable when required.
7. Should release the medicament at a constant predetermined rate for a
predetermined period of time.
Some of the important advantages of implants over injectable controlled-release
formulations are—
1. More effective and more prolonged action (for over a year).
2. A significantly small dose is sufficient.
A major disadvantage of such systems is that a microsurgery is required for
implantation of device. Some devices can be easily implanted by use of a specially
designed implanter syringe. The devices are generally implanted subcutaneously or
intramuscularly. Subcutaneous tissue is an ideal location because of its easy access to
implantation, poor perfusion, slow drug absorption and low reactivity towards foreign
materials.
The drug may be dissolved, dispersed or embedded in a matrix of polymers that
control release by dissolution, diffusion or both, bioerosion, biodegradation or an
activation process such as osmosis or hydrolysis. The system is generally prepared as
implantable flexible/rigid moulded or extruded rods, spherical pellets or compressed
tablets. Polymers used are silicone elastomers, polymethacrylates, polycaprolactone,
polylactide/glycolide, etc. Drugs generally presented in such systems are steroids like
contraceptives (megestrol acetate, norgestrone, etc.), morphine antagonists like
naltrexone for opiod-dependent addicts, etc.
Infusion Devices
These are also implantable devices but are versatile in the sense that they are
intrinsically powered to release the medicament at a zero-order rate and the drug
reservoir can be replenished from time to time. Depending upon the mechanism by
which these implantable pumps are powered to release the contents, they are classified
into following types:
1. Osmotic pressure activated drug delivery systems

2. Vapour pressure activated drug delivery systems
3. Battery powered drug delivery systems
Osmotic Pumps (Alzet)

These pumps are capsular in shape and made in a variety of sizes. The device is
shown in Fig. 14.16.
The pump is made of three concentric layers —the innermost drug reservoir contained
in a collapsible impermeable polyester bag (which is open to the exterior via a single
portal) followed by a sleeve of dry osmotic energy source (sodium chloride) and the
outermost rigid, rate-controlling semipermeable membrane fabricated from substituted
cellulosic polymers. A rigid polymeric plug is used to form a leakproof seal between the
drug reservoir
modulator, and theofsemipermeable
comprising a cap and a tubehousing. An additional
made of stainless steel is component,
inserted into the flow
the body
of osmotic pump after filling. After implantation, water from the surrounding tissue
fluids is imbibed through the semipermeable membrane at a controlled rate that dissolves
the osmogen creating an osmotic pressure differential across the membrane. The osmotic
sleeve thus expands and since the outer wall is rigid, it squeezes the inner flexible drug
reservoir and drug solution is expelled in a constant volume per unit time fashion. The
drug delivery continues until the reservoir is completely collapsed. Ionized drugs,
macromolecules, steroids and peptides (insulin) can be delivered by such a device.

Porosity of semipermeable membrane
Osmotic pressure difference across the
membrane
Fig. 14.16 Cross section of osmotic pump

Vapour Pressure Powered Pump (Infusaid)
This device is based on the principle that at a given temperature, a liquid in
equilibrium with its vapour phase exerts a constant pressure that is independent of
enclosing volume. The device is shown in Fig. 14.17.
The disc shaped device consists of two chambers —an infusate chamber containing the
drug solution which is separated by a freely movable flexible bellow from the vapour
chamber containing inexhaustible vaporizable fluid such as fluorocarbons. After

implantation, the volatile liquid vaporizes at the body temperature and creates a vapour
pressure that compresses the bellows and expels the infusate through a series of flow
regulators at a constant rate. Insulin for diabetics and morphine for terminally ill cancer
patients have been successfully delivered by such a device.
Fig. 14.17 Cross section of vapor pressure driven device
Battery Powered Pumps

Two types of battery powered implantable programmable pumps used successfully to
deliver insulin are—peristaltic pump and solenoid driven reciprocating pump, both with
electronic controls. The systems can be programmed to deliver drug at desired rates.
Their design is such that the drug moves towards the exit and there is no backflow of the
infusate.
TRANSDERMAL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Transdermal delivery systems are topically administered medicaments in the form of
patches that deliver drugs for systemic effects at a predetermined and controlled rate.
Some of the advantages of these systems over other controlled-release formulations are:
1. Drugs with very short half-lives e.g. nitroglycerine when administered as
transdermal patches, release medicaments at a constant rate for a time period more
than that obtainable with oral formulations.
2. Drugs with narrow therapeutic indices can be safely administered since better
control of release is possible.
3. The noninvasive nature of these systems permits easy removal and termination of
drug action in situations of toxicity.
4. Problems encountered with oral administration like degradation, gastric irritation,
first-pass effect, etc. are avoided.
The route is unsuitable when —

5. Drug dose is large
6. Drug has large molecular size (makes absorption difficult; should ideally be below
800-1000)
7. Drug is skin sensitising and irritating
8. Drug is metabolized in skin
9. Drug undergoes protein binding in skin
10. Drug is highly lipophilic or hydrophilic (should be moderately soluble in both oil
and water).
Other disadvantages of such systems include variation in absorption efficiency at
different sites of skin, difficulty of adhesion to certain skin types and length of time for
which a patch can be left on any area due to permeability changes (usually not more than
7 to 10 days).
Several types of transdermal drug delivery devices are available but they can be
basically divided into two broad categories based on the mechanism by which drug
release is controlled:
1. Monolithic (or matrix) systems.
2. Reservoir (or membrane) systems.
All such devices are fabricated as multilayer laminate structures in which the drug-
polymer matrix or a drug reservoir is sandwiched between two polymeric layers. The
outer layer, called as backing layer, is impermeable and meant to prevent drug loss
through it. It is generally composed of metallised plastic. The other layer which contacts
the device with the skin is adhesive layer. It is permeable and in some cases, may act as
rate-limiting membrane. It is generally made of pressure sensitive adhesive materials
like acrylic copolymers, polyisobutylene and polysiloxane or contact adhesives.
The choice of monolithic or reservoir type of system for controlling drug release
depends upon the major rate-limiting step in the absorption of drug from such devices.
The two rate-limiting steps are:
1. Rate of drug diffusion from the device, R1, and
2. Rate of drug permeation through the stratum corneum, R2.
The overall rate of drug transport is proportional to the sum (R 1 + R2).
Monolithic (or Matrix) Devices

These devices are used when R2 is the rate-controlling step (R2 < R1) and the drug
has a large therapeutic index so that overdosing does not precipitate toxic reactions.
The two categories of matrix devices are —one in which the drug is dissolved (usually
below saturation levels) in the polymer matrix and the other in which the drug is
dispersed (generally much above saturation levels). The polymers employed for matrix
systems may be hydrophilic or lipophilic and includes PVC, PVP, polysaccharides,
polyesters, microporous polypropylene and ethylene vinyl acetate copolymers. The drug
release rate from matrix systems is rapid

Drug concentration in
polymer matrix
Chemical nature of
polymer matrix
Geometry of device
Fig. 14.18 Schematic representation of a monolith (matrix)

transdermal drug delivery system
initially and falls as the matrix gets depleted of drug. The rate is thus proportional to the
square root of time. Fig. 14.18. shows a typical matrix system.
Reservoir (or Membrane) Devices

These devices are used when drug permeation rate is rapid and absorption should
therefore be controlled by controlling drug release (R 1 < R2). It is also suitable for
potent drugs with low therapeutic indices where monitoring drug levels in a narrow range
is essential. The drug is usually

Membrane thickness
Fig. 14.19 Schematic representation of reservoir (membrane) type of

contained within the reservoir as a suspension in a liquid (such as silicone) or gel carrier.
The rate-controlling thin polymeric membrane is made of olefinic polymers and
copolymers, cellulosic esters, polyamides or PVC. When applied on skin, the device
shows a rapid release at first (initial burst effect) followed by a constant zero-order
release
device. as long as the solution inside the reservoir is saturated. Fig. 14.19 shows such a
Mixed Monolithic-Reservoir Devices

A third type of system, it is basically a device having drug release kinetics
intermediate between monolithic and reservoir systems. Here the drug-polymer matrix is
layered by a rate-controlling membrane. Release is controlled initially by the membrane
but as the drug gets depleted, the rate is controlled by diffusion of drug through a thicker
layer of polymer matrix.
A major limitation of transdermal therapy is poor skin penetrability of several drugs.
This problem can be overcome by use of penetration enhancers such as glycerol,
propylene glycol, DMSO, SLS, etc.

Drugs commonly presented in such systems are nitroglycerine, clonidine, scopolamine
and oestradiol.
OPHTHALMIC DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Absorption of ophthalmic drugs across the corneal membrane is a diffusion process
and depends to a large extent on:
1. Physicochemical properties of the permeating molecule, and

2. Drainage and output of tears.
Most drugs for ophthalmic use like pilocarpine, epinephrine, local anaesthetics,
atropine, etc. are weak bases which are generally formulated at acidic pH to enhance
stability. But due to their highly ionised form, ocular diffusion is poor. This, coupled
with tear drainage, further reduces the rate and extent of absorption. Moreover, if the
drug has short half-life, the problems become more complicated. Frequent dosing of
large doses of such drugs becomes necessary to achieve the therapeutic objective which
often results in corresponding increase in local (e.g. irritation) and systemic side effects.
One of the approaches to improve drug effectiveness is to prolong its contact with corneal
surface. Highly viscous preparations like suspensions and ointments are intended to
achieve this purpose but do not offer the amount of control desired. Continuous delivery
of drugs in a controlled manner can overcome most of these problems. A number of
ocular drug delivery systems have been developed for providing zero-order input. The
best known system is ocular insert or ocusert developed to deliver pilocarpine in the
treatment of glaucoma. Available in two release forms—20 and 40 mcg/hour, the system
provides relief for 7 days (following insertion in the cul-de-sac, just below the cornea) in
contrast to eyedrops which are required to be instilled 3 to 4 times daily. The system is
basically a thin, flexible wafer, composed of a drug reservoir core surrounded on either
side by rate-controlling membranes of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (Fig. 14.20).
Fig. 14.20 Schematic representation of ocusert
INTRAVAGINAL AND INTRAUTERINE DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Controlled-release intravaginal systems are used for delivery of contraceptive steroid
hormones. The advantage of this route includes—no first-pass effect, improved
bioavailability and lesser drug dose in comparison to that required by oral route. Two
types of devices have been developed—a matrix diffusion controlled device e.g. medroxy
progesterone acetate dispersed in viscous silicone elastomer, and the other, dissolution
controlled device e.g. dispersion of a progestin and an Oestrogen in an
Fig. 14.21 Schematic representation of a vaginal ring

aqueous solution of PEG 400 to form microscopic drug reservoir in a mixture of silicone
elastomers. The device is generally prepared by extrusion of the resultant composition
into a doughnut shaped vaginal ring (Fig. 14.21). The system releases the medicament
for 21 days to achieve a cyclic intravaginal contraception.
Intrauterine route is also used for fertility control. Two types of medicated
intrauterine devices (IUDs) have been developed to produce effective contraception for
12 months or more.
1. Copper Medicated IUD

It consists of a polypropylene or polyethylene plastic support of number 7 or letter T
with certain amount of copper wire wound around them. T shape IUD is popular since
its shape conforms to the uterine cavity and resists displacement and rotation within the
cavity as well as expulsion from the cavity ( see Fig. 14.22a). The copper wire of surface
2
area 200 mm shows maximum contraceptive activity. Oxidation of copper in the body
fluids releases its ion slowly and exert its effect locally. The device is effective for more
than 3 years.
2. Progesterone Releasing IUD (Progestasert)

It is also a T shaped polyethylene device with a progesterone reservoir dispersed in a
silicone polymer placed in the vertical arm which is enclosed in a sleeve of rate-
controlling membrane of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (Fig. 14.22b). The device
releases progesterone at a rate of 65 mcg/day for a period of one year.
(a) (b)
Fig. 14.22 Contraceptive IUDs—(a) Copper T located in the uterus, and
(b) Progestasert
BIOAVAILABILITY TESTING OF CONTROLLED

RELEASE FORMULATIONS
The purpose of in vivo bioavailability study on a controlled-release formulation is to
determine—
1. The fraction of drug absorbed (should ideally be  80% of conventional release
dosage form).
2. Occurrence of dose dumping.
3. Influence of food as well as circadian effect on drug absorption.

4. The time period for which the plasma concentration stays within the therapeutic
range i.e. therapeutic occupancy time.
5. Cmax/Cmin ratios at steady-state.
6. Percent fluctuation calculated from equation:
100(Cmax – Cmin)/Css (14.15)
A single dose study is sufficient to assess the first three objectives but the subsequent
ones can only be evaluated from a multiple dose study. The reference standard is a
solution or a suspension of the drug or a currently marketed controlled-release
formulation.
For in vitro bioequivalence testing, the dissolution test should be designed to account
for the major variables to which a controlled-release formulation is exposed in vivo
before getting absorbed e.g. pHs from 1 to 8, influence of food/fasting state, solubilising
influence of bile and pancreatic secretions, etc. when considering oral controlled-release
formulations. Establishing
often difficult due in vivo-in
to complexity vitro involved.
of variables correlation for controlled drug delivery is
QUESTIONS
1. Define ideal dosage regimen. How is attainment of therapeutic objective possible by
use of conventional formulations?
2. What are the limitations of multiple dosing of conventional immediate release dosage
forms? What are the various approaches by which they can be overcome?
3. Define an ideal controlled drug delivery system. How does it differ from targeted and
sustained release systems?
4. What is the major objective of controlled-release formulations? List the advantages
and disadvantages of such a system.
5. What factors should be considered in the design of a controlled drug delivery system?
6. Unlike conventional immediate release dosage forms, what is the rate-limiting step in
the availability of a drug from controlled-release formulation?
7. List the physicochemical and biopharmaceutic properties of the drug and state what
pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic parameters are important in the design of
controlled-release formulation.
8. What criteria are necessary for the selection of a drug as candidate for formulation of
a controlled-release dosage form? Explain giving optimum ranges for the
biopharmaceutic and pharmacokinetic properties/parameters of the drug.
9. What are the main determinants in deciding a route for administration of a controlled-
release system?
10. Zero-order release systems are considered ideal controlled delivery formulations.
Why?
11. Even if a drug follows two-compartment kinetics, one-compartment model is
considered suitable for the design of controlled-release dosage forms. Why?
12. What assumptions are made in order to define the release pattern of a drug from
controlled-release formulation by a suitable model?
13. Name the four models commonly used to express drug input rate from controlled-
release formulations.
14. Give reasons for the observance of flip-flop phenomenon in the pharmacokinetics of a
slow drug release formulation?
15. When is it advisable to incorporate a loading dose in the controlled-release
formulation? What limitations are encountered in the multiple dosing of such
systems? How can such drawbacks be circumvented?
16. What are the causes of poor drug availability from oral controlled-release
formulations in comparison to immediate release systems?
17. Controlled drug delivery systems with slow first-order release are inferior in
comparison to zero-order systems for oral use. Explain.
18. Classify the oral controlled-release formulations.
19. Why is it easy to design a dissolution controlled release system?
20. The drug release from diffusion controlled matrix can never be a zero-order process.
Explain.
21. Why are reservoir devices susceptible to dose dumping?
22. Name and distinguish the two categories of intrinsically powered oral controlled
delivery formulations for zero-order drug release.
23. What are the various approaches by which the gastric transit of a dosage form can be
delayed? To what category of drugs are such approaches applicable for controlled
delivery?
24. If the mean residence time of a dosage form in the GIT is 14 hours and the t ½ of a
drug is 6 hours, for how long can the drug effect be prolonged? What would be the
dosing frequency if the drug can be formulated as oral controlled-release system?
25. Which principle is utilized in the oral delivery of protein and peptide drugs?
26. What are the various ways by which controlled drug release through injectable
solutions can be attained?
27. Among injectable dispersed systems for controlled drug release, multiple emulsions
and suspensions are superior in comparison to the simple emulsions and aqueous
suspensions respectively. Explain.
28. How are liposomes classified? Why are they considered versatile carriers for
parenteral drug delivery?
29. What are the advantages and disadvantages of transdermal drug delivery systems?
What criteria are necessary for a drug to be given by such a route?
30. Enumerate the properties of an ideal implantable parenteral system. Why is
subcutaneous tissue considered an ideal site for implants?
31. How are infusion devices for controlled drug delivery classified? Give the principle
behind activation of such devices to effect zero-order drug release.
32. What are the advantages of using resealed RBCs as drug delivery systems?
33. What are the two rate-limiting steps in the absorption of a drug from transdermal
device? How do they govern the selection of a particular device for controlled drug
delivery?
34. What are the objectives of in vivo bioavailability studies on controlled-release
formulations? Why is correlation of such studies with in vitro release difficult?
35. The pharmacokinetic parameters of two NSAIDs are given in the table below:
Parameters Diclofenac Ibuprofen
t½ (hours) 2.0 2.0
Vd (litres) 7.0 8.4
F 0.6 0.9
Desired Css (mcg/ml) 2.0 10.0
Determine the following for each drug:

a. The dose needed to maintain the therapeutic concentration for 12 hours.
Answer : Diclofenac 97 mg and Ibuprofen 388 mg.
b. The zero-order release rate to maintain the desired concentration

Answer : Diclofenac 8.085 mg/H and Ibuprofen 32.34 mg/H.
c. The time in hours to reach 90% of Css values.
Answer : 6.64 hours for both drugs.
d. The loading dose if C ss is to be attained rapidly.
Answer : Diclofenac 23.3 mg and Ibuprofen 93.3 mg.
e. The plasma drug concentration at the end of 5 hours if the release is zero-order.
Answer : Diclofenac 1.64 mcg/ml and Ibuprofen 8.23 mcg/ml.
f. The possibility to formulate once daily formulation for both drugs.
36. An oral controlled-release tablet of pentoxifylline having a loading dose of 170 mg to
attain the desired Css of 0.3 mcg/ml is to be formulated. If the Vd is 170 litres and t½
and F after rapid release are 1 hour and 0.35 respectively, calculate:
a. The amount of drug to be placed in the zero-order controlled-release core to maintain
the desired level for 12 hours.
Answer : 1212 mg.
b. If it is observed that oral availability from CR drug reduces to 0.3 and t ½ increases to
3.5 hours, what should be the 12 hours maintenance dose?
Answer : 404 mg.
c. What will be the plasma drug concentration after 4 hours of administration of such a
formulation if Ka is 2.2/H and F and t ½ for zero-order doses are 0.3 and 3.5 hours
respectively?
37. The following information is available about two beta-blockers:
Propranolol Sotalol
Molecular weight 259.3 277.4
pKa (base) 9.5 9.8

Aqueous solubility Soluble Freely soluble
Octanol/water partition coefficient 3.65 0.8
Oral availability 0.5 1.0
tmax (hours) 1.0 2.0
Therapeutic index 10.0 8.0
Elimination half-life (hours) 4.0 12.0
Apparent volume of distribution (L) 275.0 105.0
Minimum effective concentration (mcg/ml) 0.02 0.56
a. Evaluate from the data the suitability of both drugs as candidates for oral controlled-
release system.
b. Out of the two, which drug is a better candidate? Why?
c. Determine the desired Css for both drugs (Hint: Css = MEC x TI/2)
Answer : Propranolol 0.1 mcg/ml and Sotalol 2.24 mcg/ml.
d. What should be the zero-order release rate for both drugs?
Answer : Propranolol 9.52 mg/H and Sotalol 13.58 mg/H.
e. How much drug should be incorporated to maintain the desired level for 24 hours?
Answer : Propranolol 228.5 mg and Sotalol 326 mg.
f. How much time will be required to attain 90% of desired C ss value?
Answer : Propranolol 13.3 hours and Sotalol 40 hours.
g. What should be the loading dose if the desired C ss is to be attained rapidly?
Answer : Propranolol 55 mg and Sotalol 235.2 mg.
h. If both the drugs are formulated as slow first-order release systems with dose/unit 240
mg and 320 mg and release rate constant, Kr 1.0/H and 0.5/H for propranolol and
sotalol respectively, determine the plasma drug concentration after 5 hours from
administration.
14. Controlled Release Medication
An ideal dosage regimen in the drug therapy of any disease is the one which
immediately attains the desired therapeutic concentration of drug in plasma (or at the
site of action) and maintains it constant for the entire duration of treatment. This is
possible through administration of a drug delivery system in a particular dose and at a
particular frequency. The term drug delivery covers a broad range of techniques used to
get therapeutic agents into the human body. The frequency of administration or the
dosing interval of any drug depends upon its half-life or mean residence time (MRT) and
its therapeutic index. When a drug is delivered as a conventional dosage form such as a
tablet, the dosing interval is much shorter than the half-life of the drug resulting in a
number of limitations associated with such a conventional dosage form:
1. Poor patient compliance; increased chances of missing the dose of a drug with
short half-life for which frequent administration is necessary.
2. A typical peak-valley plasma concentration-time profile is obtained which makes
3. attainment of steady-state
The unavoidable condition
fluctuations difficult
in the drug (concentration
see Fig. 14.1). may lead to under-
medication or over-medication as the Css values fall or rise beyond the
therapeutic range.
4. The fluctuating drug levels may lead to precipitation of adverse effects especially
of a drug with small therapeutic index whenever overmedication occurs.
There are two ways to overcome such a situation –
1. Development of new, better and safer drugs with long half-lives and large
therapeutic indices, and
2. Effective and safer use of existing drugs through concepts and techniques of
controlled and targeted delivery systems.

The first approach has many disadvantages which therefore resulted in increased
interest in the second approach. The second approach, owing to several technical
advancements, has resulted in the development of drug delivery systems capable of
controlling the rate of drug delivery, sustaining the duration of therapeutic action and/or
targeting the delivery of drug to a particular tissue. An ideal dru g deli very system should
deliver the drug at a rate dictated by the needs of the body over a specified period of
treatment. This idealized objective points to the two aspects most important to drug
delivery –
Spatial deli ver y of drug which relates to targeting a drug to a specific organ or
tissue, and
Tempor al deli ver y of drug which refers to controlling the rate or specific time of
drug delivery to the target tissue.
An appropriately designed controlled-release drug-delivery system ( CRDDS) can
improve the therapeutic efficacy and safety of a drug by precise temporal and spatial
placement in the body, thereby reducing both the size and number of doses required (see
Figure 14.1).
Fig. 14.1 A hypothetical plasma concentration-time profile from conventional multiple

dosing and an ideal controlled delivery formulation
The several advantages of a controlled drug delivery system over a conventional
dosage form are—
1. Improved patient convenience and compliance due to less frequent drug
administration.
2. Reduction in fluctuation in steady-state levels (Fig. 14.1) and therefore –
 Better control of disease condition, and

 Reduced intensity of local or systemic side-effects.
3. Increased safety margin of high potency drugs due to better control of plasma
levels.
4. Maximum utilization of drug enabling reduction in total amount of dose
administered.
5. Reduction in health care costs through –
 Improved therapy
 Shorter treatment period
 Lower frequency of dosing, and
 Reduction in personnel time to dispense, administer and monitor patients.
Disadvantages of controlled-release dosage forms include —
1. Decreased systemic availability in comparison to immediate-release conventional
dosage forms. This may be due to –
 Incomplete release
 Increased first-pass metabolism
 Increased instability
 Insufficient residence time for complete release
 Site-specific absorption
 pH-dependent solubility.
2. Poor in vitro–in vivo correlation.
3. Possibility of dose dumping due to food, physiologic or formulation variables or
chewing or grinding of oral formulations by the patient and thus, increased risk of
toxicity.
4. Retrieval of drug is difficult in case of toxicity, poisoning or hypersensitivity
reactions.
5. Reduced potential for dosage adjustment of drugs normally administered in
varying strengths.
6. Higher cost of formulation.
FACTORS IN THE
CONTROLLED-RELEASE DRUGDESIGN OF SYSTEMS
DELIVERY
The basic rationale of a controlled release drug delivery system is to optimise the
biopharmaceutic, pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of a drug in such a
way that its utility is maximized through reduction in side effects and cure or control of
condition in the shortest possible time by using smallest quantity of drug, administered by
the most suitable route.
A. Biopharmaceutic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of

CRDDS
The performance of a drug presented as a controlled-release system depends upon its:
1. Release from the formulation.
2. Movement within the body during its passage to the site of action.
The former depends upon the fabrication of the formulation and the physicochemical
properties of the drug while the latter element is dependent upon pharmacokinetics of
drug. In comparison to conventional dosage form where the rate-limiting step in drug
availability is usually absorption through the biomembrane, the rate-determining step in
the availability of a drug from controlled delivery system is the rate of release of drug
from the dosage form which is much smaller than the intrinsic absorption rate for the
drug (Fig. 14.2).
Fig. 14.2 Scheme representing the rate-limiting step in the design of controlled-release
drug delivery system
The type of delivery system and the route of administration of the drug presented in
controlled-release dosage form depend upon the physicochemical properties of the drug
and its biopharmaceutic characteristics. The desired biopharmaceutic properties of a drug
to be used in a controlled-release drug delivery system are discussed below.
1. Molecular Weight of the Drug: Lower the molecular weight, faster and more
complete the absorption. For drugs absorbed by pore transport mechanism, the molecular
size threshold is 150 Daltons for spherical compounds and 400 Daltons for linear
compounds. However, more than 95% of drugs are absorbed by passive diffusion.
Diffusivity , defined as the ability of a drug to diffuse through the membranes , is
inversely related to molecular size. The upper limit of drug molecular size for passive
diffusion is 600 Daltons. Drugs with large molecular size are poor candidates for oral
controlled-release systems e.g. peptides and proteins.
2. Aqueous Solubility of the Drug: A drug with good aqueous solubility, especially
if pH-independent, serves as a good candidate for controlled-release dosage forms e.g.
pentoxifylline. The lower limit of solubility of a drug to be formulated as CRDDS is
0.1mg/ml. Drugs with pH-dependent aqueous solubility e.g. phenytoin, or drugs with
solubility in non-aqueous solvents e.g. steroids, are suitable for parenteral (e.g. i.m
depots) controlled-release dosage forms; the drug precipitates at the injection site and
thus, its release is slowed down due to change in pH or contact with aqueous body fluids.
Solubility of drug can limit the choice of mechanism to be employed in CRDDS, for
example, diffusional systems are not suitable for poorly soluble drugs. Absorption of
poorly soluble drugs is dissolution rate-limited which means that the controlled-release
device does not control the absorption process; hence, they are poor candidates for such
systems.
3. Apparent Partition Coefficient/Lipophilicity of the Drug: Greater the apparent
partition coefficient of a drug, greater its lipophilicity and thus, greater is its rate and
extent of absorption. Such drugs have increased tendency to cross even the more
selective barriers like BBB. The apparent volume of distribution of such drugs also
increases due to increased partitioning into the fatty tissues and since the blood flow rate
to such tissues is always lower than that to an aqueous tissue like liver, they may exhibit
characteristics of models having two or more compartments. The parameter is also
important in determining the release rate of a drug from lipophilic matrix or device.
4. Drug pKa and Ionisation at Physiological pH: The pKa range for acidic drugs
whose ionisation is pH-sensitive is 3.0 to 7.5 and that for basic drugs is 7.0 to 11.0. For
optimum passive absorption, the drugs should be non-ionised at that site at least to an
extent 0.1 to 5%. Drugs existing largely in ionised forms are poor candidates for
controlled delivery e.g. hexamethonium.
5. Drug Permeability: The three major drug characteristics that determine the
permeability of drugs for passive transport across intestinal epithelium are –
 Lipophilicity, expressed as log P.
 Molecular size.
The influence of each of these properties has been discussed above.
6. Drug Stability: Drugs unstable in GI environment cannot be administered as oral

controlled-release formulation because of bioavailability problems e.g. nitroglycerine. A
different route of administration should then be selected such as the transdermal route.
Drugs unstable in gastric pH, e.g. propantheline can be designed for sustained delivery in
intestine with limited or no delivery in stomach. On the other hand, a drug unstable in
intestine, e.g. probanthine, can be formulated as gastroretentive dosage form.

7. Mechanism and Site of Absorption: Drugs absorbed by carrier-mediated
transport processes and those absorbed through a window are poor candidates for
controlled-release systems e.g. several B vitamins.
8. Biopharmaceutic Aspects of Route of Administration: Oral and parenteral
(i.m.) routes are the most popular followed by transdermal application. Routes of minor
importance in controlled drug delivery are buccal/sublingual, rectal, nasal, ocular,
pulmonary, vaginal and intrauterinal. The features desirable for a drug to be given by a
particular route are discussed below.
(a) Oral Route: For a drug to be successful as oral controlled-release formulation, it
must get absorbed through the entire length of GIT. Since the main limitation of
this route is the transit time (a mean of 14 hours), the duration of action can be
extended for 12 to 24 hours. The route is suitable for drugs given in dose as high
as 1000 mg. A drug, whose absorption is pH-dependent, destabilized by GI
fluids/enzymes, undergoes extensive presystemic metabolism (e.g. nitroglycerine),
influenced by gut motility, has an absorption window and/or absorbed actively
(e.g. riboflavin), is a poor candidate for oral controlled-release formulations.
(b) Intramuscular/Subcutaneous Routes: These routes are suitable when the
duration of action is to be prolonged from 24 hours to 12 months. Only a small
amount of drug, about 2 ml or 2 grams, can be administered by these routes.
Factors important in drug release by such routes are solubility of drug in the
surrounding tissues,between
and contact surface molecular
the weight,
drug andpartition coefficient
the surrounding and pK a of the drug
tissues.
(c) Transdermal Route: Low dose drugs like nitroglycerine can be administered by
this route. The route is best suited for drugs showing extensive first-pass
metabolism upon oral administration. Important factors to be considered for
percutaneous drug absorption are partition coefficient of drug, contact area, skin
condition, skin permeability of drug, skin perfusion rate, etc.
In short, the main determinants in deciding a route for administration of a controlled-
release system are physicochemical properties of the drug, dose size, absorption
efficiency and desired duration of action.
B. Pharmacokinetic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of

CRDDS
A detailed knowledge of the ADME characteristics of a drug is essential in the design of
a controlled-release product. An optimum range of a given pharmacokinetic parameter of
a drug is necessary beyond which controlled delivery is difficult or impossible.
1. Absorption Rate: For a drug to be administered as controlled-release formulation,
its absorption must be efficient since the desired rate-limiting step is rate of drug release
Kr i.e. Kr << Ka. A drug with slow absorption is a poor candidate for such dosage forms
since continuous release will result in a pool of unabsorbed drug e.g. iron. Aqueous
soluble but poorly absorbed potent drugs like decamethonium are also unsuitable
candidates since a slight variation in the absorption may precipitate potential toxicity.
2. Elimination Half-Life: An ideal CRDDS is the one from which rate of drug of
absorption (for extended period of time) is equal to the rate of elimination. Smaller the
t½, larger the amount of drug to be incorporated in the controlled-release dosage form.
For drugs with t½ less than 2 hours, a very large dose may be required to maintain the
high release rate. Drugs with half-life in the range 2 to 4 hours make good candidates for
such a system e.g. propranolol. Drugs with long half-life need not be presented in such a
formulation e.g. amlodipine. For some drugs e.g. MAO inhibitors, the duration of action
is longer than that predicted by their half-lives. A candidate drug must have t½ that can
be correlated with its pharmacological response. In terms of MRT, a drug administered
as controlled-release dosage form should have MRT significantly longer than that from
conventional dosage forms.
3. Rate of Metabolism: A drug which is extensively metabolized is suitable for

controlled-release system as long as the rate of metabolism is not too rapid. The extent of
metabolism should be identical and predictable when the drug is administered by
different routes. A drug capable of inducing or inhibiting metabolism is a poor candidate
for such a product since steady-state blood levels would be difficult to maintain.
4. Dosage Form Index (DI): It is defined as the ratio of Css,max to C ss,min. Since
the goal of controlled-release formulation is to improve therapy by reducing the dosage
form index while maintaining the plasma drug levels within the therapeutic window,
ideally its value should be as close to one as possible.
C. Pharmacodynamic Characteristics of a Drug in the Design of

CRDDS
1. Drug Dose: In general, dose strength of 1.0 g is considered maximum for a
CRDDS.
2. Therapeutic Range: A candidate drug for controlled-release drug delivery system
should have a therapeutic range wide enough such that variations in the release rate do
not result in a concentration beyond this level.
3. Therapeutic Index (TI): The release rate of a drug with narrow therapeutic index
should be such that the plasma concentration attained is within the therapeutically safe
and effective range. This is necessary because such drugs have toxic concentration
nearer to their therapeutic range. Precise control of release rate of a potent drug with
narrow margin of safety is difficult. A drug with short half-life and narrow therapeutic
index should be administered more frequently than twice a day. One must also consider
the activity of drug metabolites since controlled delivery system controls only the release
of parent drug but not its metabolism.
4. Plasma Concentration-Response (PK/PD) Relationship: Drugs such as
reserpine whose pharmacological activity is independent of its concentration are poor
candidates for controlled-release systems.
A summary of desired biopharmaceutic, pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic

properties of a drug is given in table 14.1.
TABLE 14.1.
Factors in the Design of CRDDS
Properties of Candidate Drug Desired Features
A. Bi opharmaceuti c Proper ties
1. Molecular size Less than 600 Daltons
2. Aqueous solubility More than 0.1 mg/ml
3. Partition coefficient Ko/w 1–2
4. Dissociation constant pKa Acidic drugs, pKa > 2.5
Basic drugs, pKa < 11.0
5. Ionisation at physiological pH Not more than 95%
6. Stability in GI milieu Stable at both gastric and intestinal pH
7. Absorption mechanism Passive, but not through a window
B. Phar macoki netic Proper ties
1. Absorption rate constant K a High
2. Elimination half-life t½ 2 – 4 hours
3. Metabolism rate Not too high
4. Dosage form index One
C. Phar macodynamic Pr opert ies
1. Dose Maximum 1.0 g (in controlled release form)
2. Therapeutic range Wide
3. Therapeutic index Wide
4. PK/PD relationship Good
PHARMACOKINETIC PRINCIPLES IN THE DESIGN AND

FABRICATION OF CONTROLLED-RELEASE DRUG DELIVERY
SYSTEMS
The controlled-release dosage forms are so designed that they release the medicament
over a prolonged period of time usually longer than the typical dosing interval for a
conventional formulation. The drug release rate should be so monitored that a steady
plasma concentration is attained by reducing the ratio Css,max/Css,min while
maintaining the drug levels within the therapeutic window. The rate-controlling step in
the drug input should be determined not by the absorption rate but by the rate of release
from the formulation which ideally should be slower than the rate of absorption. In most
cases, the release rate is so slow that if the drug exhibits two-compartment kinetics with
delayed distribution under normal circumstances, it will be slower than the rate of
distribution and one can, thus, collapse the plasma concentration-time profile in such
instances into a one-compartment model i.e. a one-compartment model is suitable and
applicable for the design of controlled-release drug delivery systems. Assuming that the
KADME of a drug are first-order processes, to achieve a steady, non-fluctuating plasma
concentration, the rate of release and hence rate of input of drug from the controlled-
release dosage form should be identical to that from constant rate intravenous infusion.
In other words, the rate of drug release from such a system should ideally be zero-order
or near zero-order. One can thus treat the desired release rate Ro of controlled drug
delivery system according to constant rate i.v. infusion. In order to maintain the desired
steady-state concentration Css, the rate of drug input, which is zero-order release rate
(Ro), must be equal to the rate of output (assumed to be first-order elimination process).
Thus:
R0 R output (14.1)
The rate of drug output is given as the product of maintenance dose D M and first-
order elimination rate constant KE.
R output DM K E (14.2)
For a zero-order constant rate infusion, the rate of output is also given as:
R output K E Css Vd (14.3)

Since ClT = KE Vd, the above equation can also be written as:
R output Css ClT (14.4a)
Or R0 Css ClT (14.4b)
The bioavailability of a drug from controlled-release dosage form cannot be 100% as

the total release may not be 100% and the drug may also undergo presystemic
metabolism. Hence, if F is the fraction bioavailable, then:
Css ClT
R0 (14.5)
F
DM
and R0 (14.6)
Substituting equation 14.6 in equation 14.5 and rearranging, we get:

Css ClT
DM (14.7)
F
where = dosing interval.
From the above equation, one can calculate the dose of drug that must be released
in a given period of time in order to achieve the desired target steady-state concentration.
It also shows that total systemic clearance is an important parameter in such a

computation.
Since attainment of steady-state levels with a zero-order controlled drug release
system would require a time period of about 5 biological half-lives, an immediate-release
dose, DI, called as loadin g dose, may be incorporated in such a system in addition to the
controlled-release components. The total dose, DT needed to maintain therapeutic
concentration in the body would then be:
DT DI DM (14.8)
The immediate-release dose is meant to provide the desired steady-state rapidly and
can be calculated by equation:
Css Vd R0
D (14.9)
I
F KE
The above equation ignores the possible additive effect from the immediate and
controlled-release components. For many controlled-release products, there is no built-in
loading dose.
The dosing interval for a drug following one-compartment kinetics with linear
disposition is related to elimination half-life and therapeutic index TI according to
equation:
TI
t1/2 ln (14.10)
2
DRUG RELEASE PATTERNS OF CONTROLLED

DELIVERY DOSAGE FORMS
If one assumes that —
1. Drug disposition follows first-order kinetics
2. Rate-limiting step in the absorption is rate of drug release from the controlled-
release formulation (i.e. Kr < Ka), and
3. Released drug is rapidly and completely absorbed,
then, the four models for drug input based on the drug release pattern can be defined:
1. Slow zero-order release

2. Slow first-order release
3. Initial rapid release of loading dose followed by slow zero-order release
4. Initial rapid release of loading dose followed by slow first-order release.
The resulting profiles are depicted in Fig. 14.3.
Fig. 14.3 Schematic representation of four major types of drug release characteristics
from controlled-release formulations
Slow Zero-Order Release Systems
If the drug released from controlled-release formulations is stable in fluids at the

absorption site, has similar absorption efficiency from all absorption sites and is absorbed
rapidly and completely after its release, then, its rate of appearance in plasma will be
governed by its rate of release from the controlled-release formulation. Thus, when the
drug release follows zero-order kinetics, absorption will also be a zero-order process and
concentration of drug in plasma at any given time

-K t
can be given by equation:
F K0 1 - e E
C (14.11)
K E Vd
where K0 = zero-order release rate constant, also written as R 0, the zero-order release
rate.
The above equation is similar to the one that expresses the concentration-time course
of a drug that shows one-compartment kinetics following constant rate i.v. infusion. The
time to reach steady-state depends upon the elimination half-life of the drug. It is usually
not possible with a single oral controlled-release dose to attain the plateau even with a
drug having short half-life such as 3 hours since the mean GI residence time is around 12
hours. It takes 4.3 half-lives for attainment of 95% steady-state values. Thus, if t½ is 3
hours, about 13 hours will be required for the drug to reach plateau. Slower the
elimination, (longer the t½), more the time required to reach steady-state. Once the
desired steady-state is reached with repeated dosing of zero-order controlled-release
formulation, minimal fluctuations will be observed. Zero-order release systems are thus
ideal controlled delivery formulations.
Slow First-Order Release Systems

Such systems are easier to design but are inferior to zero-order systems especially when
they are meant for oral use. This is because with first-order release characteristics,
smaller and smaller amounts of drug are released as time passes and secondly, as the
formulation advances along the GIT, the absorption efficiency generally decreases due to
a number of reasons like decreased intestinal surface area, increased viscosity and
decreased mixing. Thus, larger amounts of drug are needed to be released at a later stage
when in fact the opposite happens with first-order systems.
The concentration of drug in plasma following administration of a controlled-release
formulation with slow first-order release is given by equation:
DM K r F -K E t -K r t
C e -e (14.12)
Vd K r KE
When Kr < K E, flip-flop phenomena is observed which is a common feature for such
controlled-release formulations.
formulations, one generally With
observes repeated
a lower dosing
C max , higherofCslow first-order release
min and longer tmax in
comparison to conventional release formulations.
Slow Zero-Order Release Systems with a Rapid Release Component

With such formulations, an initial dose is rapidly released ( burst-effect ) for immediate
first-order availability while the remaining amount is released and absorbed at a slow
zero-order rate. The equation for concentration-time course of such a formulation
contains two portions, one each to denote rapid first-order release and slow zero-order
release.
DI K a F -KE t -Ka t K0 F -K E t
C e -e 1- e (14.13)
Vd K a KE K E Vd
Such a formulation is ideally suited for drugs with long t ½ in which cases attainment
of plateau would otherwise take a long time. The slow release component should ideally
begin releasing the drug when the drug levels from the fast component are at a peak.
However, the approach suffers from a big disadvantage when the formulation is meant
for repetitive dosing — the blood level profile shows a peak-trough pattern (which
normally does not result when all of the drug is released at a slow zero-order rate); this
may cause a momentous rise in peak concentration immediately after each dose
triggering toxic reactions (see Fig. 14.4). It is for this reason that such a design is
unpopular.
The transient fluctuations in the peak concentration with these formulations can
however be overcome by:
1. Decreasing the loading dose in the subsequent dosage forms (which appears to be
impractical),
2. Increasing the dosing interval (this also seems to be tedious), or
3. Administering an immediate-release conventional dosage form prior to repetitive
dosing of zero-order controlled-release formulation instead of incorporating it in
the latter.
Fig. 14.4 Plasma concentration-time profile which results from repeated dosing of a
controlled-release formulation with zero-order release and an initial fast
release component.
Slow First-Order Release Systems with a Rapid Release Component
The equation describing the time course of plasma drug concentration with this type of
formulation will also contain two portions—one to describe rapid first-order absorption
and the other for slow first-order absorption from controlled-release portion.
DI K a F DM K r F
e- K E - e- K a e- K E - e- K r
t t t t
C (14.14)
Vd K a KE Vd K r KE
As in the previous case, to obtain the desired plateau, the slow release component, D M
should start releasing the drug:
1. When the peak has been attained with rapid release dose, D I; this requires DM >>
DI which results in wastage of drug since the absorption efficiency reduces as
time passes and dosage form descends down the GIT, or
2. When all of the DI has been released; this requires relatively small D M and
therefore less drug wastage and better sustained levels despite fluctuations in drug
levels (Fig. 14.5).
The problems that result from repeated dosing of this type of formulation are similar
to that described for the third type of release pattern and can be handled in a similar
manner.
Fig. 14.5 Plasma concentration-time profile which results after a single oral dose of
controlled-release drug delivery

slow system
first-order containing
release a rapid release dose and a
component
CLASSIFICATION OF CRDDS
CRDDS can be classified in various ways –
1. On the basis of techni cal sophi sti cation
2. On th e basis of r oute of admin istrati on.
On the basis of technical sophistication, CRDDS can be categorised into 4 major classes:
1. Rate-programmed DDS
2. Activation-controlled DDS
3. Feedback-controlled DDS
4. Site-targeted DDS
In the former three cases i.e. except site-targeted DDS, the formulation comprise of three
basic components –
i. The drug
ii. The rate controlling element
iii. Energy source that activates the DDS.
Rate-Programmed DDS
These DDS are those from which the drug release has been programmed at specific rate
profiles. They are further subdivided into following subclasses:
1. Dissolution-controlled DDS
2. Diffusion-controlled DDS
3. Dissolution and diffusion-controlled DDS.
All the above systems can be designed in one of the following ways –
i. Reservoir systems (membrane-controlled DDS)
ii. Matrix systems (soluble/erodible/swellable/degradable)
iii. Hybrid systems (i.e. membrane cum matrix systems)
1. Dissolution-Controlled DDS
These systems are those where the rate-limiting phenomenon responsible for imparting
the controlled-release characteristics to the DDS is either of the two -
(a) Slow dissolu tion rate of the drug - the drug present in such a system may be one of
the following two types:
i. Drug with inherently slow dissolution rate e.g. griseofulvin, digoxin and
nifedipine. Such drugs act as natural prolonged-release products, or
ii. Dr ug that transforms into slow di ssolvin g for ms on contact with GI fluids e.g.
ferrous sulphate.
(b) Slow dissolu tion rate of th e r eser voir membrane or matr ix - the drug present in such
a system may be the one having high aqueous solubility and dissolution rate e.g.
pentoxifylline and metformin. The challenge in designing such systems lies in controlling
the drug dissolution rate by employing either or combination of following techniques –
i. Embedment in slowly dissolving, degrading or erodible matrix. The matrix in
addition may have low porosity or poor wettability.
ii. Encapsulation or coating with slow-dissolving, degrading or erodible
substances. In this approach, the rate of dissolution fluid penetration and/or
wettability of the reservoir system are controlled.
Slowly soluble and erodible materials commonly employed to achieve these
objectives include hydrophobic substances such as ethyl cellulose (containing an added
water-soluble release modifying agent such as PVP), polymethacrylates with pH
independent solubility (e.g. Eudragit RS and RL 100) and waxes such as glyceryl
monostearate, and hydrophilic materials like sodium CMC.
2. Diffusion-Controlled DDS
These systems are those where the rate-controlling step is not the dissolution rate of drug
or release controlling
rate-controlling element,
element. but the diffusion
The rate-controlling of dissolved
element drug
in such molecule
a system through
is thus the
neither
soluble, erodible nor degradable but is water-swellable or water-insoluble. Water-
swellable materials include hydrophilic polymers and gums such as xanthan gum, guar
gum, high viscosity grades of HPMC and HPC, alginates, etc. Water-insoluble polymers
most commonly used in such systems are ethyl cellulose and polymethacrylates.
3. Dissolution and Diffusion-Controlled DDS

These systems are those where the rate of drug release is controlled by drug or polymer
dissolution as well as drug diffusion i.e. the system is a combination of the two systems
discussed above.
A summary of various approaches that are employed in the design of rate-

programmed DDS is illustrated in figure 14.6.
Fig. 14.6 Approaches in the design of rate-programmed DDS
i. Reservoir systems (membrane-contr oll ed D DS) – (see also Modern Pharmaceutics

for advantages and disadv) These systems are those where the drug is present as a
core in a compartment of specific shape encased or encapsulated with a rate-
controlling wall, film or membrane having a well-defined thickness. The drug in the
core must dissociate themselves from the crystal lattice and dissolve in the
surrounding medium, partition and diffuse through the membrane.
reservoir systems are possible –
(a) Non-swelling reservoir systems – are those where the polymer membrane do not
swell or hydrate in aqueous medium. Ethyl cellulose and polymethacrylates are
commonly used polymers in such systems. Such materials control drug release
owing to their thickness, insolubility or slow dissolution or porosity. Reservoir
system of this type is most common and includes coated drug particles, crystals,
granules, pellets, minitablets and tablets.
(b) Swelling-controlled reservoir systems – are those where the polymer membrane
swell or hydrate on contact with aqueous medium. In such systems drug release
is delayed for the time period required for hydration of barrier and after
attainment of barrier hydration, drug release proceeds at a constant rate. HPMC
polymers are commonly employed in such systems.
ii. M atri x systems (monoli thi c DDS) – (see also Modern Pharmaceutics for advantages
and disadv) These systems are those where the drug is uniformly dissolved or
dispersed in release-retarding material. Such devices can be formulated as
conventional matrix, or bi-or tri-layered matrix systems.
matrix devices are possible –
(a) Hydrophilic matrix – is the one where the release retarding material is a water
swellable or swellable cum erodible hydrocolloid such as high molecular weight
HPMCs, HPC, HEC, xanthan gum, sodium alginate, guar gum, locust bean
gum, PEO (polyethylene

Hydrophilic oxide)systems.
matrices are porous and cross linked polymers of acrylic acid.
Depending upon the swelling behaviour of hydrophilic polymer, two types

of matrices are possible –
 Free-swelling matrix – is the one in which swelling is unhindered.
 Restricted-swelling matrix – is the one in which the surface of the device is
partially coated with an impermeable polymer film that restricts the
hydration of swellable matrix material.
(b) Hydrophobic matrix – is the one where the release retarding material is either –
 Slowly soluble, erodible or digestible, for e.g. waxes such as glyceryl
monostearate, cetyl alcohol, hydrogenated vegetable oils, beeswax, carnauba
wax, etc.
 Insoluble or non-digestible, for e.g. ethyl cellulose, polymethacrylates, etc.
Depending upon the manner of incorporation of drug in the matrix,
hydrophobic matrices can be further classified as –
 Porous (heterogeneous) matrix – is the one where the drug and release-
retarding matrix microparticles are simply mixed with each other and
compressed into a tablet or the drug is dispersed in the polymer solution

followed by evaporation of the solvent.
 Nonporous (homogeneous) matrix – is the one in which the release-retarding
matrix material is first melted and the drug is then incorporated in it by
thorough mixing followed by congealing the mass while stirring. Two types
of nonporous matrix systems are possible –

Dissolved drug nonporous system – is the one where the drug is
dissolved in the molten release-retarding matrix material.
Dispersed drug nonporous system – is the one where the quantity
of drug is greater than its solubility in molten matrix polymer.
iii. H ybri d systems (membran e cum matri x DD S) – (see also Modern Pharmaceutics for
advantages and disadv) These systems are those where the drug in matrix of release-
retarding material is further coated with a release-controlling polymer membrane.
Such a device thus combines the constant release kinetics of reservoir system with the
mechanical robustness of matrix system.
Activation-Controlled DDS
In this group of CRDDSs, the release of drug molecules from the delivery systems is activated by
some physical, chemical, or biochemical processes and/or facilitated by an energy supplied
externally (Fig. 2 Chien article). The rate of drug release is then controlled by regulating the
process applied or energy input. Based on the nature of the process applied or the type of energy
used, these activation-controlled DDSs can be classified into following categories:
A. Acti vation by Physical Pr ocesses
1. Osmotic pressure-activated DDS
2. Hydrodynamic pressure-activated DDS
3. Vapour pressure-activated DDS
4. Mechanical force-activated DDS
5.
6. Magnetically-activated
Sonophoresis-activated DDS
DDS
7. Iontophoresis-activated DDS
B. Acti vation by Chemi cal Pr ocesses
1. pH-activated DDS
2. Ion-activated DDS
3. Hydrolysis-activated DDS
C. Acti vation by Biochemi cal Pr ocesses
1. Enzyme-activated DDS
A. Physical Process-Activated DDS

1. Osmotic Pressure-Activated DDS
Osmotic systems release drug at a predetermined, typically zero-order rate, based on the
principle of osmosis. Osmosis is natural movement of a solvent through a semipermeable
membrane into a solution of higher solute concentration, leading to equal concentration
of the solute on either sides of the membrane. Osmotic systems imbibe water from the
body through a semipermeable membrane into an osmotic material which dissolves in it
and increase in volume and generate osmotic pressure that results in slow and even
delivery of drug through an orifice.
A semipermeable membrane (e.g. cellulose acetate) is the one that is permeable

to a solvent (e.g. water) but impermeable to ionic (e.g. sodium chloride) and high
molecular weight compounds.
In comparison to DDS based on diffusion and erosion, osmotic systems are more
complex in design but provide better zero-order drug delivery.
2. Hydration/Hydrodynamic Pressure-Activated DDS

These systems are identical to osmotic systems that release drug at a zero-order rate. It
however differs from osmotic system in that hydrodynamic pressure generating agent
which is typically a water swellable hydrocolloid such as HPMC is contained in one
compartment and the drug solution/dispersion in another collapsible reservoir. Both these
compartments are housed in a rigid, shape retaining but water permeable housing. The
hydrocolloid imbibes water and swells to generate hydrodynamic pressure that pushes the
drug reservoir compartment and thus force the drug through an orifice at a slow and
uniform rate.
3. Vapour Pressure-Activated DDS

These systems are identical to hydrodynamic systems in that the pumping compartment
and the drug solution/dispersion compartment are separated by a freely movable partition
and the whole system is enclosed in a rigid housing. The pumping compartment contains
a liquefied compressed gas that vaporises at body temperature and creates vapour
pressure that moves the partition to force the drug out of the device through a series of
flow regulator and delivery cannula into the blood circulation at a constant rate. A typical
example is the development infusion pump of heparin in anticoagulant therapy, of insulin
in the control of diabetes and of morphine for patients suffering from the intensive pain
of a terminal cancer.
4. Mechanical Force-Activated DDS

In these systems the drug reservoir is a solution in a container equipped with a
mechanically activated pumping system. A metered dose of drug formulation can be
reproducibly delivered into a body cavity, such as the nose, through the spray head upon
manual activation of the drug-delivery pumping system. The volume of solution
delivered is fixed and is independent of the force and duration of activation. A typical
example of this type of drug-delivery system is the development of a metered-dose
nebuliser for the intranasal administration of a precision dose of luteinizing hormone-
releasing hormone (LHRH) and its synthetic analogues, such as buserelin.
5. Magnetically-Activated DDS
In these systems a tiny doughnut-shaped magnet is positioned in the centre of a
hemispherical shaped drug-dispersing biocompatible polymer matrix and then coating the
external surface of the medicated polymer matrix, with the exception of one cavity at the
centre of the flat surface of the hemisphere, with a pure polymer, for instance, ethylene –
vinyl acetate copolymer or silicone elastomers. This uncoated cavity is designed for
allowing a peptide drug to release. When the magnet is activated, to vibrate by an
external electromagnetic field, it releases the drug at a zero-order rate by diffusion
process. (fig in Chien)
6. Sonophoresis-Activated DDS
This type of activation-controlled drug delivery system utilizes ultrasonic energy to
activate or trigger the delivery of drugs from a polymeric drug delivery device. The
system can be fabricated from either a non-degradable polymer, such as ethylene –vinyl
acetate copolymer, or a bioerodible polymer, such as poly(lactide–glycolide) copolymer.
7. Iontophoresis-Activated DDS
This type of CRDDS uses electrical current to activate and modulate the diffusion of a
charged drug molecule across a biological membrane, such as the skin, in a manner
similar to passive diffusion under a concentration gradient but at a much faster rate. It is a
painless procedure. Since like charges repel each other, application of a positive current
drives positively charged drug molecules away from the electrode and into the tissues;
and vice versa. (see fig. In book rev, what is iontophoresis, absorption of drug folder)
A typical example of this type of activation-controlled system is percutaneous
penetration of anti-inflammatory drugs such as dexamethasone to surface tissues.
B. Chemical Process-Activated DDS

1. pH-Activated DDS
These systems are designed for acid-labile drugs or drugs irritating to gastric mucosa and
target their delivery to the intestinal tract. It is fabricated by coating a core tablet of such
a drug with a combination of intestinal fluid-insoluble polymer, like ethyl cellulose, and
intestinal fluid-soluble polymer, like HPMCP. In the stomach, the coating membrane
resists dissolution in pH 1-3. After gastric emptying, the system travels to the small
intestine, and the intestinal fluid-soluble component in the coating membrane is dissolved
in at pH above 5 thereby producing a microporous membrane that controls the release of
drug from chloride,

potassium the core which
tablet. isAn example
highly of such
irritating a system
to gastric is oral controlled
epithelium. (fig. Chien)delivery of
2. Ion-Activated DDS
Based on the principle that the GIT has a relatively constant level of ions, this type of
system has been developed for controlling the delivery of an ionic or an ionisable drug at
a constant rate. Such a CRDDS is prepared by first complexing an ionisable drug with an
−
ion-exchange resin. A cationic drug is complexed with a resin containing SO 3 group or
+
an anionic drug with a resin containing N(CH 3)3 group. The granules of the drug–resin
complex are further treated with an impregnating agent, like polyethylene glycol 4000,
for reducing the rate of swelling upon contact with an aqueous medium. They are then
coated by an air-suspension coating technique with a water-insoluble but water-
permeable polymeric membrane, such as ethyl cellulose. This membrane serves as a rate-
controlling barrier to modulate the release of drug from the CRDDS. In the GI tract,
hydronium and chloride ions diffuse into the CRDDS and interact with the drug –resin
complex to trigger the dissociation and release of ionic drug
Aci dic dru g release Re sin SO3- Drug H Re sin SO3- H Drug
Basic drug r elease Re sin N CH3 Drug Cl Re sin N CH3 Cl Drug
3 3
An example of such a formulation is liquid-oral with sustained release of a

combination of hydrocodone and chlorpheniramine. (Fig. Chien).
3. Hydrolysis-Activated DDS
This type of CRDDS depends on the hydrolysis process to activate the release of drug
molecules. In this system, the drug reservoir is either encapsulated in microcapsules or
homogeneously dispersed in microspheres or nanoparticles prepared from bioerodible or
biodegradable polymers such as polylactide, poly(lactide–glycolide) copolymer,
poly(orthoester) or poly(anhydride). The release of a drug from the polymer matrix is
activated by the hydrolysis-induced degradation of polymer chains, and the rate of drug
delivery is controlled by polymer degradation rate. A typical example is injectable
microspheres for the subcutaneous controlled delivery of luprolide, a potent biosynthetic
analogue of gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) for the treatment of gonadotropin-
dependent cancers, such as prostate carcinoma in men and endometriosis in the females,
for up to 4 months. (Fig. Chien).
A. Biochemical Process-Activated DDS

1. Enzyme-Activated DDS
In this type of CRDDS, the drug reservoir is either physically entrapped in microspheres
or chemically bound to polymer chains fabricated from biopolymers, such as albumins or
polypeptides. The release of drugs is made possible by the enzymatic hydrolysis of
biopolymers by a specific enzyme in the target tissue. A typical example is the
development of albumin microspheres, which release 5-fluorouracil, in a controlled
manner, by protease-activated biodegradation.
Feedback-Controlled DDS
In this group of CRDDSs, the release of drug molecules is activated by a triggering agent,
such as a biochemical substance, in the body via some feedback mechanisms. The rate of
drug release is regulated by the concentration of a triggering agent detected by a sensor
built into the CRDDS. (fig chien)
1. Bioerosion-Activated DDS
This CRDDS consists of drug dispersed in a bioerodible matrix made of poly(vinyl
methyl ether) half-ester, which is coated with a layer of immobilized urease. In a solution
at neutral pH, the polymer erodes slowly. In the presence of urea, urease at the surface of
the drug delivery system metabolizes urea to form ammonia. This causes the pH to
increase which activates a rapid degradation of polymer matrix and subsequently release
of drug molecules.
2. Bioresponsive DDS
In this CRDDS, the drug reservoir is contained in a device enclosed by a bioresponsive
polymeric membrane whose permeability to drug molecules is controlled by the
concentration of a biochemical agent in the tissue where the CRDDS is located. A typical
example of this is the development of a glucose-triggered insulin delivery system, in
which the insulin reservoir is encapsulated within a hydrogel membrane containing
pendant NR 2 groups. In an alkaline solution, the NR 2 groups exist at neutral state and the
membrane is not swollen and thus impermeable to insulin. As glucose penetrates into the
membrane, it is oxidized enzymatically by the glucose oxidase entrapped in the
membrane to form gluconic acid. This process triggers the protonation of NR 2 groups to
+
form NR2H , and the hydrogel membrane becomes swollen and permeable to insulin
molecules. The amount

glucose penetrating of CRDDS.
into the insulin delivered
(fig chien)is bioresponsive to the concentration of
3. Self-Regulating DDS
This type of feedback-controlled DDS depends on a reversible and competitive binding
mechanism to activate and to regulate the release of drug. The drug reservoir is a drug
complex encapsulated within a semipermeable polymeric membrane. The release of drug
from the CRDDS is activated by the membrane permeation of a biochemical agent from
the tissue where the CRDDS is located. An example of this is development of self-
regulating insulin delivery system that utilizes complex of glycosylated insulin –
concanavalin A, which is encapsulated inside a polymer membrane. As glucose
penetrates
complex forinto the system,
a controlled it activates
release from the the release
system. The of glycosylated
amount of insulininsulin from
released the
is thus
self-regulated by the concentration of glucose that has penetrated into the insulin delivery
system.
Site-Targeted DDS
Most conventional dosage forms deliver drug into the body that eventually reaches the
site of action by multiple steps of diffusion and partitioning. In addition to the target site,
the drug also distributes to non-target tissues that may result in toxicity or adverse
reactions. Selective and targeted drug therapy could result in not just optimum and more
effective therapy but also a significant reduction in drug dose and cost.
Targeted- or site-specific DDS refer to systems that place the drug at or near the
receptor site or site of action.
Site-targeted DDS can be classified into three broad categories –
1. F ir st-order targetin g – refers to DDS that delivers the drug to the capillary bed or
the active site
2. Second-order targeting – refers to DDS that delivers the drug to a special cell
type such as the tumour cells and not to the normal cells
3. Third-order targeti ng – refers to DDS that delivers the drug intracellularly.
Site-targeted DDSs have also been characterized as –

Passive targetin g – refers to natural or passive disposition of a drug carrier based
on the physicochemical characteristics of the system in relation to the body.
Acti ve targeting – refers to alterations of the natural disposition of the drug
carrier, directing it to specific cells, tissues or organs; for e.g. use of ligands or
monoclonal antibodies which can target specific sites.
Drug targeting often requires carriers for selective delivery and can serve
following purposes –
1. Protect the drug from degradation after administration;
2. Improve transport or delivery of drug to cells;
3. Decrease clearance of drug; or
4. Combination of the above.
Carriers for drug targeting are of two types –
Carr iers covalentl y bonded to dru g – where the drug release is required for
pharmacological activity.
Carr iers not covalently bonded to dru g – where simple uncoating of the drug is
required for pharmacological activity; e.g. liposomes.
The various carriers used for drug targeting are –
1. Polymeric carriers
2. Albumin
3. Lipoproteins
4. Liposomes.
1. Polymeric Carrier Systems for Drug Targeting

The basic components of a polymeric targeted DDS are –
1. A polymeric backbone which is non-immunogenic and biodegradable that
contains following three attachments;
2. A homi ng device, also called as sit e-specif ic tar geti ng moiety, which is capable
of leading the drug delivery system to the vicinity of a target tissue (or cell);
3. A solubiliser , which enables the drug delivery system to be transported to and
preferentially taken up by the target tissue; and
4. A drug, which is covalently bonded to the polymeric backbone, through a spacer,
and contains a linkage that is cleavable only by a specific enzyme(s) at the target
tissue (fig. 14. 7).
Fig. 14.7. Polymeric carrier system for drug targeting
Polymers used for drug targeting include polyethylenediamine, polylysine,

chitosan, dextran and PEG for macromolecular drugs such as gene therapy. The homing
device is a monoclonal antibody, a recognised sugar moiety or a small cell-specific
ligand. At present, most site-specific DDS are limited to parenteral administration and
primarily utilise soluble polymers.
Besides their use as regular carriers, polymers may also be formulated as

microparticles or nanoparticles, wherein the drug is encapsulated in a biodegradable
colloidal polymer. The small size of nanospheres allows good tissue penetration while
providing protection or sustained release.
The disposition of micro- or nano-sphere depends upon their size –

Particles > 12 are lodged in the capillary bed at the site of injection
Particles from 2 – 12 are retained in lung, liver or spleen
Particles < 0.5 (500 nm) deposit in spleen and bone marrow.
2. Albumin as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Although distribution of albumin is not site-specific, it has been conjugated with drugs
such as methotrexate to increase duration of drug action and deliver drug to liver.
3. Lipoproteins as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Low-density lipoproteins enter cell by endocytosis and thus have the potential for
transporting drugs into the cell in which lipoprotein-drug complex can be hydrolysed by
lysosomal enzymes.
4. Liposomes as Carrier for Drug Targeting

Liposomes in the size range 0.5 – 100 have been used to reduce side effects and
efficacy of drugs such as doxorubicin, amphotericin B, etc. The site-specificity to
liposomes can be conferred by the type of lipid or by inclusion of a targeting agent such
as monoclonal antibody into the liposomal bilayer.
endpoint
ORAL CONTROLLED RELEASE SYSTEMS

Oral route has been the most popular and successfully used route for controlled delivery
of drugs because of convenience and ease of administration, greater flexibility in dosage
form design (possible because of versatility of GI anatomy and physiology) and ease of
production and low cost of such a system.
The controlled-release systems for oral use are mostly solids and based on dissolution,
diffusion or a combination of both mechanisms in the control of release rate of drug.
Depending upon the manner of drug release, these systems are classified as follows:
A. Continuous Release Systems: These systems release the drug for a prolonged
period of time along the entire length of GIT (especially up to the terminal region of
small intestine) with normal transit of the dosage form. The various systems under this
category are:
1. Dissolution controlled release systems
2. Diffusion controlled release systems
3. Dissolution and diffusion controlled release systems

4. Ion-exchange resin-drug complexes
5. Slow dissolving salts and complexes
6. pH-dependent formulations
7. Osmotic pressure controlled systems
8. Hydrodynamic pressure controlled systems
B. Delayed Transit and Continuous Release Systems: These systems are designed
to prolong their residence in the GIT along with their release. Often, the dosage form is
fabricated to detain in the stomach and hence the drug present therein should be stable to
gastric pH. Systems included in this category are:
1. Altered density systems
2. Mucoadhesive systems
3. Size-based systems
C. Delayed Release Systems: The design of such systems involve release of drug
only at i.
a specific site in the
Destroyed in GIT. The drugs
the stomach contained
or by intestinalinenzymes
such a system are those that are:
ii. Known to cause gastric distress
iii. Absorbed from a specific intestinal site, or
iv. Intended to exert local effect at a specific GI site.
The two types of delayed release systems are:
1. Intestinal release systems
2. Colonic release systems
Dissolution Controlled Release Systems
Such systems
i. With are easiest to
inherently design.
slow The drug
dissolution present
rate in such a system
e.g. griseofulvin may be the
and digoxin; one:
such drugs
act as natural prolonged release products
ii. That produce slow dissolving forms when it comes in contact with GI fluids e.g.
ferrous sulphate, or
iii. Having high aqueous solubility and dissolution rate e.g. pentoxifylline.
Drugs belonging to the last category present challenge in controlling their dissolution
rate. The techniques employed are:
1. Embedment in slowly dissolving or erodible matrix, and
2. Encapsulation or coating with slowly dissolving or erodible substances (Fig.
14.6.).
Fig. 14.6 Schematic representation of dissolution controlled release systems —(a)

matrix system, and (b) coated/encapsulated system
Matrix (or Monolith) Dissolution Controlled Systems

Matrix systems are also called as monoliths since the drug is homogeneously
dispersed throughout a rate-controlling medium. They are very common and employ
waxes such as beeswax, carnauba wax, hydrogenated castor oil, etc. which control drug
dissolution by controlling the rate of dissolution fluid penetration into the matrix by
altering the porosity of tablet, decreasing its wettability or by itself getting dissolved at a
slower rate. The wax embedded drug is generally prepared by dispersing the drug in
molten wax and congealing and granulating the same. The drug release is often first-
order from such matrices.
Encapsulation/Coating Dissolution Controlled Systems (Reservoir Devices)

Here, the drug particles are coated or encapsulated by one of the several
microencapsulation techniques with slowly dissolving materials like cellulose, PEGs,
polymethacrylates, waxes, etc. The resulting pellets may be filled as such in hard gelatin
capsules (popularly called as spansules) or compressed into tablets. The dissolution rate
of coat depends upon the solubility and thickness of the coating which may range from 1
to 200 microns.
Diffusion Controlled Release Systems
In these types of systems, the rate-controlling step is not the dissolution rate but the
diffusion of dissolved drug through a polymeric barrier. The drug release rate is never
zero-order since the diffusional path length increases with time as the insoluble matrix is
gradually depleted of drug. The two types of diffusion controlled systems are—matrix
systems and reservoir devices.
Matrix Diffusion Controlled Systems

Here, the drug is dispersed in an insoluble matrix of rigid non-swellable hydrophobic
materials or swellable hydrophilic substances. Materials used for rigid matrix are
insoluble plastics such as PVC and fatty materials like stearic acid, beeswax, etc. With
plastic materials, the drug is generally kneaded with the solution of PVC in an organic
solvent and granulated. Waxy matrix is prepared by dispersing the drug in molten fat
followed by congealing. The granules are then compressed into tablets (Fig. 14.7.a).
Swellable matrix systems are popular for sustaining the release of highly water-soluble
drugs. The material for such matrices are generally hydrophilic gums and may be of
natural origin (guar gum, tragacanth), semisynthetic (HPMC, CMC, xanthan gum) or
synthetic (polyacrylamides). The drug and the gum are granulated together with a
solvent
initially such as alcohol
dehydrated and compressed
hydrogels into tablets. absorption
involves simultaneous The release of drug
of water from such
(resulting in
hydration, gelling and swelling of gum) and desorption of drug via a swelling controlled
diffusion mechanism. As the gum swells and the drug
Rate Controlling Step :

Diffusion of dissolved drug
through the matrix
Fig. 14.7 Diffusion controlled devices—(a) rigid matrix, and (b) swellable matrix
diffuses out of it, the swollen mass, devoid of drug appears transparent or glasslike and
therefore the system is sometimes called as glassy hydrogel (Fig. 14.7b). The drug
release follows Fickian first-order diffusion under equilibrium conditions. However,
during the swelling process, such an equilibrium may not exist and the diffusion may be
non-Fickian or anomalous diffusion.
Reservoir Devices (or Laminated Matrix Devices)

These systems are hollow containing an inner core of drug surrounded in a water
insoluble polymer membrane. The polymer can be applied by coating or
microencapsulation techniques. The drug release mechanism across the membrane
involves its partitioning into the membrane with subsequent release into the surrounding
fluid by diffusion (Fig. 14.8). The polymers commonly used in such devices are HPC,
ethyl cellulose and polyvinyl acetate. A disadvantage of all such microencapsulated drug
release systems is a chance of sudden drug dumping which is not common with matrix
devices.
Rate Controlling Factors:

Polymeric content in coating,
Thickness of coating,
Hardness of microcapsule
Fig. 14.8 Drug release by diffusion across the insoluble

membrane of reservoir device
Dissolution and Diffusion Controlled Release Systems
In such systems, the drug core is encased in a partially soluble membrane. Pores are thus
created due to dissolution of parts of the membrane which:
 Permit entry of aqueous medium into the core and hence drug dissolution, and
 Allow diffusion of dissolved drug out of the system (Fig. 14.9).
An example of obtaining such a coating is using a mixture of ethyl cellulose with PVP
or methyl cellulose; the latter dissolves in water and creates pores in the insoluble ethyl
cellulose membrane.
Rate Controlling Factor :

Fraction of soluble polymer
in the coat
Fig. 14.9 Dissolution and diffusion controlled release system
Ion-Exchange Resin-Drug Complexes

Controlled delivery of ionisable acidic and basic drugs can be obtained by complexing
them with insoluble nontoxic anion exchange and cation exchange resins respectively.
The drug is released slowly by diffusion through the resin particle structure. The
following equation represents the release of a basic drug, NH 2R', from a cation exchange
resin RSO3H when in contact with GI fluid containing an ionic compound A +B- (either
gastric HCl or intestinal NaCl):
RSO3–NH3+R' + A+B– RSO3-A+ + NH3+R'B–

A number of basic drugs like noscapine, phenylpropanolamine and phentermine have
been retarded by such an approach. The complex can be prepared by incubating the
drug-resin solution or passing the drug solution through a column containing ion-
exchange resin. The drug-resin complex can be coated with cellulose or hard paraffin
and formulated as ion free suspension for paediatric use.
Slow Dissolving Salts and Complexes

Salts or complexes of drugs which are slowly soluble in the GI fluids can be used for
controlled-release of the active principle. Amine drugs can be reacted with tannic acid to
form poorly soluble complexes that can be formulated as long acting tablets. Penicillin G
has been complexed with N,N’-dibenzyl ethylenediamine to give benzathine penicillin G
that can be formulated as oral suspension. Such complexes can be obtained by simple
acid-base reaction on mixing together solutions of individual compounds.
pH-Independent Formulations
Such systems are designed to eliminate the influence of changing GI pH on dissolution
and absorption of drugs by formulating them with sufficient amount of buffering agents
(salts of phosphoric, citric or tartaric acids) that adjust the pH to the desired value as the
dosage form passes along the GIT and permit drug dissolution and release at a constant
rate independent of GI pH. The dosage form containing drug and buffer is coated with a
permeable substance that allows entry of aqueous medium but prevents dispersion of
tablet.
Osmotic Pressure Controlled Systems

Unlike the solution-diffusion mechanism for most systems, an oral osmotic pump,
popularly called as oros, works on the principle of osmotic pressure to release the drug at
a constant zero-order rate. A core comprising of drug and an osmotically active
substance (also called as osmogen) such as potassium chloride or mannitol is surrounded
by a rigid semipermeable membrane coating such as cellulose ester or cellulose ether
having an orifice of 0.4 mm diameter produced by laser beam for drug exit. When
exposed to GI fluids, water flows through the semipermeable membrane into the tablet
due to osmotic pressure difference which dissolves the drug and pumps it out through the
orifice by the osmotic force (Fig. 14.10). Such devices can be used to target specific
areas of the GIT.

Orifice diameter
Membrane area
Membrane thickness
Osmotic properties of the core
Drug solubility
Fig. 14.10 Oral osmotic pump (oros)

The oros principle can be used to design multiunit dosage forms consisting of drug
core particles coated with a water permeable membrane in which the delivery orifice is
made by using a channelling agent such as PVP and the coated particles filled in a
capsule.
Hydrodynamic Pressure Controlled Systems

The hydrodynamic pressure generated by swelling of a hydrophilic gum can also be used
to activate the delivery of drugs. The device comprises of a rigid, shape retaining
housing enclosing a collapsible, impermeable compartment containing liquid drug (Fig.
14.11). The space between the external housing and the drug compartment contains a
layer of swellable, hydrophilic gum such as polyhydroxyalkyl methacrylate. In the GIT,
the gum imbibes water through the opening present at the lower side of external housing
and swells creating a hydrodynamic pressure. The pressure thus created squeezes the
collapsible drug reservoir to release the medicament through the delivery orifice at a
zero-order rate. Such systems are also called as push-pull osmotic pumps.

Fluid permeability
Surface area of wall with openings
Hydrodynamic pressure gradient
Fig. 14.11 Hydrodynamic pressure controlled system (push-pull osmotic pump)
Altered Density Systems

The transit time of GI contents is usually less than 24 hours. This is the major limiting
factor in the design of oral controlled-release formulations which can reduce the
frequency of dosing to a time period little more than the residence time of drug.
However, if the residence time of drug in the stomach and/or intestine is prolonged in
some way, the frequency of dosing can be further reduced. There are 3 ways by which
this can be achieved—altering the density of drug particles, use of mucoadhesive
polymers and altering the size of the dosage form. The altered density approach involves
use of either high or low density pellets.
High Density Pellets

The density of GI fluids is around 1.4 g/cc. Use of drug pellets having density greater
than this value, preferably above 1.6 g/cc, results in prolonged GI residence that is
unaffected by food. Iron oxide, titanium dioxide and barium sulfate have been used to
increase the density of drug pellets. The drug is coated on the heavy core and then
covered by a diffusion controlled membrane (Fig. 14.12a).
Low Density Pellets

Also called as hydrodynamically balanced systems, such pellets, having density less
than that of GI fluids, float on the gastric juice for an extended period of time while
slowly releasing the drug. Globular shells such as that of poprice and celluloses have
been used to lower the density of system (Fig. 14.12b). A swellable gum like HPMC can
be used for a similar purpose (Fig. 14.12c).
Fig. 14.12 Altered density systems

Floating or buoyant tablets/capsules can be formulated by granulating a drug with
20 to 80% of hydrogel such as HPMC, HEC and HPC. On contact with GI fluids, the
tablet swells and forms a diffusible gel barrier that lowers the density of system to less
than 1 allowing it to float. Lipophilic polymers such as silicone elastomer can also be
modified to have swelling properties. This is achieved by impregnating a water miscible
liquid such as glycerol or a water-soluble salt such as sodium chloride in the lipophilic
matrix. On contact with aqueous medium, the modified lipophilic polymer swells due to
absorption of water by the hydrophilic additives in the matrix. Alternatively, a gas filled
flotation chamber can be attached to a membrane coated tablet for making it buoyant.
Mucoadhesive Systems
A bioadhesive polymer such as cross-linked polyacrylic acid, when incorporated in a
tablet, allows it to adhere to the gastric mucosa or epithelium. Such a system
continuously releases a fraction of drug into the intestine over prolonged periods of time.
Size-Based Systems
Gastric emptying of a dosage form can be delayed in the fed state if its size is greater than
2 mm. Dosage form of size 2.5 cm or larger is often required to delay emptying long
enough to allow once daily dosing. Such forms are however difficult to swallow.
Intestinal Release Systems

A drug may be enteric coated for intestinal release for several known reasons such as to
prevent gastric irritation, prevent destabilization in gastric pH, etc. Certain drugs are
delivered to the distal end of small intestine for absorption via Peyer’s patches or
lymphatic system. Peyer’s patches are mucosal lymphoid tissues that are known to
absorb macromolecules like proteins and peptides and antigens by endocytosis. Selective
release of such agents to Peyer’s patch region prevents them from getting
destroyed/digested by the intestinal enzymes. Such a site can be utilized for oral delivery
of insulin. Lymphatic system on the other hand is known to absorb highly lipophilic
agents directly into the systemic circulation without their first-pass through liver. The
drug is absorbed by two mechanisms —chylomicrons which are fatty vesicles that entrap
hydrophobic drugs, and pinocytic uptake of macromolecules.
Colonic Release Systems

Drugs are poorly absorbed through colon but may be delivered to such a site for two
reasons—
a. Local action as in the treatment of ulcerative colitis with mesalamine, and
b. Systemic absorption of protein and peptide drugs like insulin and vasopressin.
Advantage is taken of the fact that pH-sensitive bioerodible polymers like
polymethacrylates release the medicament only at the alkaline pH of colon or use of
divinylbenzene cross-linked polymers that can be cleaved only by the azoreductase of
colonic bacteria to release free drug for local effect or systemic absorption.
PARENTERAL CONTROLLED RELEASE SYSTEMS
One of the major advantages of parenteral controlled drug delivery systems is that the
duration of action can be extended for days or months and sometimes upto a year. The
prime drawback is that, once administered, the drug cannot be easily removed if an
undesirable action is precipitated or if the drug is no longer needed. Most of such
systems are administered by subcutaneous and intramuscular routes and few by
intravenous
water-solubleand intraperitoneal
drugs like insulinroutes. Subcutaneous
and dose volume is route
limitedis to
limited
0.5 toto 1.5
wellml.
absorbed
Deep
intramuscular route is suitable for polymeric systems or slightly soluble drugs, the
volume size restricted to 2 ml. Intravenous route is useful for administration of
liposomes, nanoparticles, erythrocytes and polypeptides. An important criteria for this
route is drug particle size. A disadvantage of i.v. route is that the system may be taken up
by the reticuloendothelial system but the same can be put to use in targeting drugs to such
a system. Intraperitoneal route is important in targeting of antineoplastics into the
lymphatic system.
The vehicle, polymers and other substances used in the formulation of parenteral
controlled-release dosage forms should be sterile, pyrogen free, nonirritating,
biocompatible and biodegradable into nontoxic compounds within an appropriate time,
preferably close to the duration of drug action.
There are several approaches to achieve controlled drug delivery via parenteral route,
the release being controlled by dissolution, diffusion, dissociation, partitioning or
bioerosion. The systems can be broadly classified as:
A. Injectables:
1. Solutions
2. Dispersions
3. Microspheres and Microcapsules
4. Nanoparticles and Niosomes
5. Liposomes
6. Resealed Erythrocytes
B. Implants
C. Infusion Devices:
1. Osmotic Pumps
2. Vapor Pressure Powered Pumps
3. Battery Powered Pumps
Solutions
Both aqueous as well as oil solutions may be used for controlled drug release. With
aqueous solutions (given intramuscularly), the drug release may be controlled in three
ways:
i. By increasing the viscosity of vehicle by use of MC, CMC or PVP and thus,
decreasing molecular diffusion and localizing the injected drug.
ii. By forming a complex with macromolecules like MC, CMC or PVP from which
the drug dissociates at a controlled rate (only free drug will get absorbed).
iii. By forming complexes that control drug release not by dissociation but by
reducing the solubility of parent drug e.g. protamine zinc insulin and
cyanocobalamin zinc tannate.
Oil solutions control the release by partitioning the drug out of the oil in the
surrounding aqueous biofluids. Vegetable oils like arachis oil, cottonseed oil, etc. are
used for such a purpose. The method is applicable only to those drugs which are oil
soluble and have optimum partition coefficient.
Dispersions
Dispersed systems like emulsions and suspensions can be administered by i.m., s.c. or i.v.
routes. Among emulsions, the o/w systems have not been used successfully since
absorption of drug incorporated in the oil phase is rapid due to large interfacial area and
rapid partitioning. Similarly, few w/o emulsions of water-soluble drugs have been tried
for controlled-release. Multiple emulsions of w/o/w and o/w/o types (more correctly,
double emulsions) are becoming popular since an additional reservoir is presented to the
drug for partitioning which can effectively retard its release rate (Fig. 14.13).
Control of drug release from suspensions is easier and predictable. Drug dissolution
and subsequent diffusion are the main rate controlling steps. Release of water-soluble
drugs can be retarded by presenting it as oil suspension and vice versa for oil soluble
drugs. Factors to be considered in the formulation of such a system include -
i. Solid content : should be ideally in the range 0.5 to 5.0%
ii. Particle size : this factor is very important since larger the particle size, slower
the dissolution; however, larger particles have their own disadvantages like
causing irritation at the injection site (size should therefore be below 10
microns), poor syringeability and injectability and rapid sedimentation. The
latter problem can be overcome by use of viscosity builders which also retard
drug diffusion.
Fig. 14.13 Multiple emulsions for parenteral controlled-release systems

Aqueous suspensions can be given by i.m. or s.c. routes. Generally crystalline and
stable polymorphic
release. forms
Solubility can be of the drug
further are chosen
reduced by saltrather than amorphous
or complex formation forms to delay
e.g. crystalline
zinc insulin shows more prolonged action than amorphous zinc insulin complex. Oil
suspensions, generally given i.m., prolong drug action much more in comparison to oil
solution and aqueous suspension since drug release involves two rate- limiting steps viz.
dissolution of drug particles, and partitioning of the dissolved drug from oil to the
aqueous biofluids.
Microspheres and Microcapsules
Microspheres are free flowing powders consisting of spherical particles of size ideally
less than 125 microns that can be suspended in a suitable aqueous vehicle and injected by
an 18 or 20 number needle. Each particle is basically a matrix of drug dispersed in a
polymer from which release occurs by a first-order process. The polymers used are
biocompatible and biodegradable e.g. polylactic acid, polylactide coglycolide, etc. Drug
release
a faster is controlled
rate and thus,bybydissolution/degradation of matrix.
using particles of different sizes, Small
variousmatrices
degreesrelease drug at
of controlled-
release can be achieved. The system is ideally suited for controlled-release of
peptide/protein drugs such as LHRH which have short half-lives and otherwise need to be
injected once or more, daily, as conventional parenteral formulations. In comparison to
peptides, proteins are difficult to formulate because of their higher molecular weight,
lower solubility and the need to preserve their conformational structure during
manufacture.
In order to overcome uptake of intravenously administered microspheres by the
reticuloendothelial system and promote drug targeting to tumors with good perfusion,
magnetic microspheres were developed. They are prepared from albumin and
magnetite (Fe2O3) and have a size of 1.0 micron to permit intravascular injection. The
system is infused into an artery that perfuses the target site and a magnet is placed over
the area to localize it in that region. A 100 times higher concentration of doxorubicin
was attained at the target site by such an approach with just half the i.v. dose.
Microcapsules differ from microspheres in that the drug is centrally located within
the polymeric shell of finite thickness and release may be controlled by dissolution,
diffusion or both. Quality microcapsules with thick walls generally release their
medicaments at a zero-order rate. Steroids, peptides and antineoplastics have been
successfully administered parenterally by use of controlled-release microcapsules.
Nanoparticles and Niosomes

Nanoparticles are also called as nanospheres or nanocapsules depending upon whether
the drug is in a polymer matrix or encapsulated in a shell. They differ from microspheres
in having submicron particles in the nanometer size range —10 to 1000 nm. The
polymers used are the usual biodegradable ones. The main advantage of this system is
that it can be stored for upto 1 year and can be used for selective targeting via
reticuloendothelial system to liver and to cells that are active phagocytically.
Like nanoparticles, niosomes are inexpensive alternatives to liposomes. They are
closed vesicles formed in aqueous media from nonionic surfactants with or without the
presence of cholesterol or other lipids.
Liposomes
The term liposomes (meaning lipid body) was derived on the basis of names of
subcellular particles like lysosome and ribosome. It is defined as a spherule/vesicle of
lipid bilayers enclosing an aqueous compartment. The lipid most commonly used is
phospholipid. Sphingolipids, glycolipids and sterols have also been used to prepare
liposomes. Their size ranges from 25 to 5000 nm. Depending upon their structure,
liposomes are classified as:
i. MLV (multilamellar vesicles) : These liposomes are made of series of concentric
bilayers of lipids enclosing a small internal volume.
ii. OLV (oligolamellar vesicles) : These are made of 2 to 10 bilayers of lipids

surrounding a large internal volume.
iii. ULV (unilamellar vesicles) : These are made of single bilayer of lipids. They
may be SUV (small unilamellar vesicles) of size 20 to 40 nm, MUV (medium
unilamellar vesicles) of size 40 to 80 nm, LUV (large unilamellar vesicles) of
size 100 to 1000 nm or GUV ( giant unilamellar vesicles) of size greater than
1000 nm.
A large variety of drugs (antineoplastics, antibiotics), peptides/proteins (including
antibodies) and viruses and bacteria can be incorporated into liposomes. Water-soluble
drugs are trapped in the aqueous compartment while lipophilic ones are incorporated in
the lipid phase of liposomes. Because of their availability in various sizes, ability to
incorporate both water as well as oil soluble drugs, their inertness and their ability to
protect labile drugs, liposomes are versatile carriers for parenteral drug delivery systems.
Intramuscularly and subcutaneously injected liposomes deliver drug at a controlled rate
while intravenous administration selectively targets them to reticuloendothelial system
and phagocytic cells. A simple method by which liposomes can be produced involves
drying an organic solvent solution of lipids onto the wall of a flask/beaker followed by
hydration and dispersion of lipid by addition of buffer and mixing (Fig. 14.14).
Fig. 14.14 Production procedure for liposomes.
Resealed Erythrocytes
Drug loading in body’s own erythrocytes when used to serve as controlled delivery
systems have several advantages . They are fully biodegradable and biocompatible,
nonimmunogenic, can circulate intravascularly for days (act as circulatory drug depots)
and allow large amounts of drug to be carried. The drug need not be chemically modified
and is protected from immunological detection and enzymatic inactivation. Drug loading
can be done by immersing the cells in buffered hypotonic solution of drug which causes
them to rupture and release hemoglobin and trap the medicament. On restoration of
isotonicity and incubation at 37 o C, the cells reseal and are ready for use (Fig. 14.15).
Fig. 14.15 Drug loading in erythrocytes.
Damaged erythrocytes are removed by the liver and spleen. These organs can thus be
specifically targeted by drug loaded erythrocytes.
Implants
An ideal implantable parenteral system should possess following properties—
1. Environmentally
air and moisture. stable : should not breakdown under the influence of heat, light,
2. Biostable : should not undergo physicochemical degradation when in contact with
biofluids (or drugs).
3. Biocompatible : should neither stimulate immune responses (otherwise the implant
will be rejected) nor thrombosis and fibrosis formation.
4. Nontoxic and noncarcinogenic : its degradation products or leached additives must
be completely safe.
5. Should have a minimum surface area, smooth texture and structural characteristics
similar to the tissue in which it is to be implanted to avoid irritation.
6. Should be removable when required.

7. Should release the medicament at a constant predetermined rate for a
predetermined period of time.
Some of the important advantages of implants over injectable controlled-release
formulations are—
1. More effective and more prolonged action (for over a year).
2. A significantly small dose is sufficient.
A major disadvantage of such systems is that a microsurgery is required for
implantation of device. Some devices can be easily implanted by use of a specially
designed implanter syringe. The devices are generally implanted subcutaneously or
intramuscularly. Subcutaneous tissue is an ideal location because of its easy access to
implantation, poor perfusion, slow drug absorption and low reactivity towards foreign
materials.
The drug may be dissolved, dispersed or embedded in a matrix of polymers that
control release by dissolution, diffusion or both, bioerosion, biodegradation or an
activation process such as osmosis or hydrolysis. The system is generally prepared as
implantable flexible/rigid moulded or extruded rods, spherical pellets or compressed
tablets. Polymers used are silicone elastomers, polymethacrylates, polycaprolactone,
polylactide/glycolide, etc. Drugs generally presented in such systems are steroids like
contraceptives (megestrol acetate, norgestrone, etc.), morphine antagonists like
naltrexone for opiod-dependent addicts, etc.
Infusion Devices
These are also implantable devices but are versatile in the sense that they are
intrinsically powered to release the medicament at a zero-order rate and the drug
reservoir can be replenished from time to time. Depending upon the mechanism by
which these implantable pumps are powered to release the contents, they are classified
into following types:
1. Osmotic pressure activated drug delivery systems
2. Vapor pressure activated drug delivery systems

3. Battery powered drug delivery systems
Osmotic Pumps (Alzet)

These pumps are capsular in shape and made in a variety of sizes. The device is
shown in Fig. 14.16.

The pump is made of three concentric layers —the innermost drug reservoir contained
in a collapsible impermeable polyester bag (which is open to the exterior via a single
portal) followed by a sleeve of dry osmotic energy source (sodium chloride) and the
outermost rigid, rate-controlling semipermeable membrane fabricated from substituted
cellulosic polymers. A rigid polymeric plug is used to form a leakproof seal between the
drug reservoir and the semipermeable housing. An additional component, the flow
modulator, comprising of a cap and a tube made of stainless steel is inserted into the body
of osmotic pump after filling. After implantation, water from the surrounding tissue
fluids is imbibed through the semipermeable membrane at a controlled rate that dissolves
the osmogen creating an osmotic pressure differential across the membrane. The osmotic
sleeve thus expands and since the outer wall is rigid, it squeezes the inner flexible drug
reservoir and drug solution is expelled in a constant volume per unit time fashion. The
drug delivery continues until the reservoir is completely collapsed. Ionized drugs,
macromolecules, steroids and peptides (insulin) can be delivered by such a device.

Porosity of semipermeable membrane
Osmotic pressure difference across the
membrane
Fig. 14.16 Cross section of osmotic pump
Vapour Pressure Powered Pump (Infusaid)

This device is based on the principle that at a given temperature, a liquid in
equilibrium with its vapour phase exerts a constant pressure that is independent of
enclosing volume. The device is shown in Fig. 14.17.
The disc shaped device consists of two chambers —an infusate chamber containing the
drug solution which is separated by a freely movable flexible bellow from the vapour
chamber containing inexhaustible vaporizable fluid such as fluorocarbons. After
implantation, the volatile liquid vaporizes at the body temperature and creates a vapour
pressure that compresses the bellows and expels the infusate through a series of flow
regulators at a constant rate. Insulin for diabetics and morphine for terminally ill cancer
patients have been successfully delivered by such a device.
Fig. 14.17 Cross section of vapor pressure driven device
Battery Powered Pumps

Two types of battery powered implantable programmable pumps used successfully to
deliver insulin are—peristaltic pump and solenoid driven reciprocating pump, both with
electronic controls. The systems can be programmed to deliver drug at desired rates.
Their design is such that the drug moves towards the exit and there is no backflow of the
infusate.
TRANSDERMAL DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Transdermal delivery systems are topically administered medicaments in the form of
patches that deliver drugs for systemic effects at a predetermined and controlled rate.
Some of the advantages of these systems over other controlled-release formulations are:
1. Drugs with very short half-lives e.g. nitroglycerine when administered as
transdermal patches, release medicaments at a constant rate for a time period more
than that obtainable with oral formulations.
2. Drugs with narrow therapeutic indices can be safely administered since better
control of release is possible.
3. The noninvasive nature of these systems permits easy removal and termination of
drug action in situations of toxicity.
4. Problems encountered with oral administration like degradation, gastric irritation,
first-pass effect, etc. are avoided.
The route is unsuitable when —
4. Drug dose is large
5. Drug has large molecular size (makes absorption difficult; should ideally be below
800-1000)
6. Drug is skin sensitising and irritating
7. Drug is metabolized in skin
8. Drug undergoes protein binding in skin
9. Drug is highly lipophilic or hydrophilic (should be moderately soluble in both oil
and water).
Other disadvantages of such systems include variation in absorption efficiency at
different sites of skin, difficulty of adhesion to certain skin types and length of time for
which a patch can be left on any area due to permeability changes (usually not more than
7 to 10 days).
Several types of transdermal drug delivery devices are available but they can be
basically divided into two broad categories based on the mechanism by which drug
release is controlled:
1. Monolithic (or matrix) systems.
2. Reservoir (or membrane) systems.
All such devices are fabricated as multilayer laminate structures in which the drug-
polymer matrix or a drug reservoir is sandwiched between two polymeric layers. The
outer layer, called as backing layer, is impermeable and meant to prevent drug loss
through it. It is generally composed of metallized plastic. The other layer which contacts
the device with the skin is adhesive layer. It is permeable and in some cases, may act as
rate-limiting membrane. It is generally made of pressure sensitive adhesive materials
like acrylic copolymers, polyisobutylene and polysiloxane or contact adhesives.
The choice of monolithic or reservoir type of system for controlling drug release
depends upon the major rate-limiting step in the absorption of drug from such devices.
The two rate-limiting steps are:
1. Rate of drug diffusion from the device, R1, and
2. Rate of drug permeation through the stratum corneum, R2.
The overall rate of drug transport is proportional to the sum (R 1 + R2).
Monolithic (or Matrix) Devices

These devices are used when R2 is the rate-controlling step (R2 < R1) and the drug
has a large therapeutic index so that overdosing does not precipitate toxic reactions.
The two categories of matrix devices are —one in which the drug is dissolved (usually
below saturation levels) in the polymer matrix and the other in which the drug is
dispersed (generally much above saturation levels). The polymers employed for matrix
systems may be hydrophilic or lipophilic and includes PVC, PVP, polysaccharides,
polyesters, microporous polypropylene and ethylene vinyl acetate copolymers. The drug
release rate from matrix systems is rapid

Drug concentration in
polymer matrix
Chemical nature of
polymer matrix
Geometry of device
Fig. 14.18 Schematic representation of a monolith (matrix)

initially and falls as the matrix gets depleted of drug. The rate is thus proportional to the
square root of time. Fig. 14.18. shows a typical matrix system.
Reservoir (or Membrane) Devices

These devices are used when drug permeation rate is rapid and absorption should
therefore be controlled by controlling drug release (R 1 < R2). It is also suitable for
potent drugs with low therapeutic indices where monitoring drug levels in a narrow range
is essential. The drug is usually

Membrane thickness
Fig. 14.19 Schematic representation of reservoir (membrane) type of

contained within the reservoir as a suspension in a liquid (such as silicone) or gel carrier.
The rate-controlling thin polymeric membrane is made of olefinic polymers and
copolymers, cellulosic esters, polyamides or PVC. When applied on skin, the device
shows a rapid release at first (initial burst effect) followed by a constant zero-order
release as long as the solution inside the reservoir is saturated. Fig. 14.19 shows such a
device.
Mixed Monolithic-Reservoir Devices

A third type of system, it is basically a device having drug release kinetics
intermediate between monolithic and reservoir systems. Here the drug-polymer matrix is
layered by a rate-controlling membrane. Release is controlled initially by the membrane
but as the drug gets depleted, the rate is controlled by diffusion of drug through a thicker
layer of polymer matrix.
A major limitation of transdermal therapy is poor skin penetrability of several drugs.

This problem can be overcome by use of penetration enhancers such as glycerol,
propylene glycol, DMSO, SLS, etc.
Drugs commonly presented in such systems are nitroglycerine, clonidine, scopolamine
and estradiol.
OPHTHALMIC DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Absorption of ophthalmic drugs across the corneal membrane is a diffusion process
and depends to a large extent on:
1. Physicochemical properties of the permeating molecule, and
2. Drainage and output of tears.
Most drugs for ophthalmic use like pilocarpine, epinephrine, local anesthetics,
atropine, etc. are weak bases which are generally formulated at acidic pH to enhance
stability. But due to their highly ionized form, ocular diffusion is poor. This, coupled
with tear drainage, further reduces the rate and extent of absorption. Moreover, if the
drug has short half-life, the problems become more complicated. Frequent dosing of
large doses of such drugs becomes necessary to achieve the therapeutic objective which
often results in corresponding increase in local (e.g. irritation) and systemic side effects.
One of the approaches to improve drug effectiveness is to prolong its contact with corneal
surface. Highly viscous preparations like suspensions and ointments are intended to
achieve this purpose but do not offer the amount of control desired. Continuous delivery
of drugs in a controlled manner can overcome most of these problems. A number of
ocular drug delivery systems have been developed for providing zero-order input. The
best known system is ocular insert or ocusert developed to deliver pilocarpine in the
treatment of glaucoma. Available in two release forms—20 and 40 mcg/hour, the system
provides relief for 7 days (following insertion in the cul-de-sac, just below the cornea) in
contrast to eyedrops which are required to be instilled 3 to 4 times daily. The system is
basically a thin, flexible wafer, composed of a drug reservoir core surrounded on either
side by rate-controlling membranes of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (Fig. 14.20).
Fig. 14.20 Schematic representation of ocusert
INTRAVAGINAL & INTRAUTERINE DRUG DELIVERY SYSTEMS

Controlled-release intravaginal systems are used for delivery of contraceptive steroid
hormones. The advantage of this route includes—no first-pass effect, improved
bioavailability and lesser drug dose in comparison to that required by oral route. Two
types of devices have been developed—a matrix diffusion controlled device e.g. medroxy
progesterone acetate dispersed in viscous silicone elastomer, and the other, dissolution
controlled device e.g. dispersion of a progestin and an estrogen in an
Fig. 14.21 Schematic representation of a vaginal ring

aqueous solution of PEG 400 to form microscopic drug reservoir in a mixture of silicone
elastomers. The device is generally prepared by extrusion of the resultant composition
into a doughnut shaped vaginal ring (Fig. 14.21). The system releases the medicament
for 21 days to achieve a cyclic intravaginal contraception.
Intrauterine route is also used for fertility control. Two types of medicated
intrauterine devices (IUDs) have been developed to produce effective contraception for
12 months or more.
1. Copper Medicated IUD

It consists of a polypropylene or polyethylene plastic support of number 7 or letter T
with certain amount of copper wire wound around them. T shape IUD is popular since
its shape conforms to the uterine cavity and resists displacement and rotation within the
cavity as well as expulsion from the cavity ( see Fig. 14.22a). The copper wire of surface
area 200 mm2 shows maximum contraceptive activity. Oxidation of copper in the body
fluids releases its ion slowly and exert its effect locally. The device is effective for more
than 3 years.
2. Progesterone Releasing IUD (Progestasert)

It is also a T shaped polyethylene device with a progesterone reservoir dispersed in a
silicone polymer placed in the vertical arm which is enclosed in a sleeve of rate-
controlling membrane of ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer (Fig. 14.22b). The device
releases progesterone at a rate of 65 mcg/day for a period of one year.
(a) (b)
Fig. 14.22 Contraceptive IUDs—(a) Copper T located in the

uterus, and (b) Progestasert
BIOAVAILABILITY
RELEASETESTING OF CONTROLLED
FORMULATIONS
The purpose of in vivo bioavailability study on a controlled-release formulation is to
determine—
1. the fraction of drug absorbed (should ideally be  80% of conventional release
dosage form).
2. occurrence of dose dumping.
3. influence of food as well as circadian effect on drug absorption.
4. the time period for which the plasma concentration stays within the therapeutic
range i.e. therapeutic occupancy time.
5. Cmax/Cmin ratios at steady-state.

6. percent fluctuation calculated from equation:
100(Cmax – Cmin)/Css (14.15)
A single dose study is sufficient to assess the first three objectives but the subsequent
ones can only be evaluated from a multiple dose study. The reference standard is a
solution or a suspension of the drug or a currently marketed controlled-release
formulation.
For in vitro bioequivalence testing, the dissolution test should be designed to account
for the major variables to which a controlled-release formulation is exposed in vivo
before getting absorbed e.g. pHs from 1 to 8, influence of food/fasting state, solubilizing
influence of bile and pancreatic secretions, etc. when considering oral controlled-release
formulations. Establishing in vivo-in vitro correlation for controlled drug delivery is
often difficult due to complexity of variables involved.
QUESTIONS
1. Define ideal dosage regimen. How is attainment of therapeutic objective possible by
use of conventional formulations?
2. What are the limitations of multiple dosing of conventional immediate release dosage
forms? What are the various approaches by which they can be overcome?
3. Define an release
sustained ideal controlled
systems? drug delivery system. How does it differ from targeted and
4. What is the major objective of controlled-release formulations? List the advantages
and disadvantages of such a system.
5. What factors should be considered in the design of a controlled drug delivery system?
6. Unlike conventional immediate release dosage forms, what is the rate-limiting step in
the availability of a drug from controlled-release formulation?
7. List the physicochemical and biopharmaceutic properties of the drug and state what
pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic parameters are important in the design of
controlled-release formulation.
8. What criteria are necessary for the selection of a drug as candidate for formulation of
a controlled-release dosage form? Explain giving optimum ranges for the
biopharmaceutic and pharmacokinetic properties/parameters of the drug.
9. What are the main determinants in deciding a route for administration of a controlled-
release system?
10. Zero-order release systems are considered ideal controlled delivery formulations.
Why?
11. Even if a drug follows two-compartment kinetics, one-compartment model is
considered suitable for the design of controlled-release dosage forms. Why?
12. What assumptions are made in order to define the release pattern of a drug from
controlled-release formulation by a suitable model?
13. Name the four models commonly used to express drug input rate from controlled-
release formulations.
14. Give reasons for the observance of flip-flop phenomenon in the pharmacokinetics of a
slow drug release formulation?
15. When is it advisable to incorporate a loading dose in the controlled-release
formulation? What limitations are encountered in the multiple dosing of such
systems? How can such drawbacks be circumvented?
16. What are the causes of poor drug availability from oral controlled-release
formulations in comparison to immediate release systems?
17. Controlled drug delivery systems with slow first-order release are inferior in
comparison to zero-order systems for oral use. Explain.
18. Classify the oral controlled-release formulations.
19. Why is it easy to design a dissolution controlled release system?
20. The drug release from diffusion controlled matrix can never be a zero-order process.
Explain.
21. Why are reservoir devices susceptible to dose dumping?
22. Name and distinguish the two categories of intrinsically powered oral controlled
delivery formulations for zero-order drug release.
23. What are the various approaches by which the gastric transit of a dosage form can be
delayed? To what category of drugs are such approaches applicable for controlled
delivery?
24. If the mean residence time of a dosage form in the GIT is 14 hours and the t ½ of a
drug is 6 hours, for how long can the drug effect be prolonged? What would be the
dosing frequency if the drug can be formulated as oral controlled-release system?
25. Which principle is utilized in the oral delivery of protein and peptide drugs?
26. What are the various ways by which controlled drug release through injectable
solutions can be attained?
27. Among injectable dispersed systems for controlled drug release, multiple emulsions
and suspensions are superior in comparison to the simple emulsions and aqueous
suspensions respectively. Explain.
28. How are liposomes classified? Why are they considered versatile carriers for
parenteral drug delivery?
29. What are the advantages and disadvantages of transdermal drug delivery systems?
What criteria are necessary for a drug to be given by such a route?
30. Enumerate the properties of an ideal implantable parenteral system. Why is
subcutaneous tissue considered an ideal site for implants?
31. How are infusion devices for controlled drug delivery classified? Give the principle
behind activation of such devices to effect zero-order drug release.
32. What are the advantages of using resealed RBCs as drug delivery systems?
33. What are the two rate-limiting steps in the absorption of a drug from transdermal
device? How do they govern the selection of a particular device for controlled drug
delivery?
34. What are the objectives of in vivo bioavailability studies on controlled-release
formulations? Why is correlation of such studies with in vitro release difficult?
35. The pharmacokinetic parameters of two NSAIDs are given in the table below:
Parameters Diclofenac Ibuprofen
t½ (hours) 2.0 2.0
Vd (liters) 7.0 8.4
F 0.6 0.9
Desired Css (mcg/ml) 2.0 10.0
Determine the following for each drug:

a. The dose needed to maintain the therapeutic concentration for 12 hours.
Answer : Diclofenac 97 mg and Ibuprofen 388 mg.
b. The zero-order release rate to maintain the desired concentration
Answer : Diclofenac 8.085 mg/H and Ibuprofen 32.34 mg/H.
c. The time in hours to reach 90% of Css values.
Answer : 6.64 hours for both drugs.
d. The loading dose if C ss is to be attained rapidly.
Answer : Diclofenac 23.3 mg and Ibuprofen 93.3 mg.
e. The plasma drug concentration at the end of 5 hours if the release is zero-order.
Answer : Diclofenac 1.64 mcg/ml and Ibuprofen 8.23 mcg/ml.
f. The possibility to formulate once daily formulation for both drugs.
36. An oral controlled-release tablet of pentoxifylline having a loading dose of 170 mg to
attain the desired Css of 0.3 mcg/ml is to be formulated. If the Vd is 170 liters and t½
and F after rapid release are 1 hour and 0.35 respectively, calculate:
a. The amount of drug to be placed in the zero-order controlled-release core to maintain

the desired level for 12 hours.
Answer : 1212 mg.
b. If it is observed that oral availability from CR drug reduces to 0.3 and t ½ increases to
3.5 hours, what should be the 12 hour maintenance dose?
Answer : 404 mg.
c. What will be the plasma drug concentration after 4 hours of administration of such a
formulation if Ka is 2.2/H and F and t ½ for zero-order doses are 0.3 and 3.5 hours
respectively?
37. The following information is available about two beta-blockers:
Propranolol Sotalol
Molecular weight 259.3 277.4
pK (base) 9.5 9.8
a
Aqueous solubility Soluble Freely soluble
Octanol/water partition coefficient 3.65 0.8
Oral availability 0.5 1.0
tmax (hours) 1.0 2.0
Therapeutic index 10.0 8.0
Elimination half-life (hours) 4.0 12.0
Apparent volume of distribution (L) 275.0 105.0
Minimum effective concentration (mcg/ml) 0.02 0.56
a. Evaluate from the data the suitability of both drugs as candidates for oral controlled-
release system.
b. Out of the two, which drug is a better candidate? Why?
c. Determine the desired Css for both drugs (Hint: Css = MEC x TI/2)
d. What should be the zero-order release rate for both drugs?
Answer : Propranolol 9.52 mg/H and Sotalol 13.58 mg/H.

Biopharmaceutics Brahmankar

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biopharmaceutics Brahmankar

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biopharmaceutics Brahmankar

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7/14/2019 Biopharmaceutics- Brahmankar

Drugs, whether obtained from plant, animal or mineral sources or synthesized

which is responsible (metabolism),

Fig. 1.1. Schematic illustration of pharmacokinetic processes

Fig. 1.2. Schematic representation of the processes involved in drug therapeutics

The knowledge and concepts of biopharmaceutics and pharmacokinetics thus

1. Lesser susceptibility of the drug for degradation or interaction due

3. More uniform, greater and reproducible therapeutic response.

injection (SC) from aqueous vaccines and drugs absorption depends

GASTROINTESTINAL ABSORPTION OF DRUGS

Cell Membrane: Structure and Physiology

Fig. 2.2. Basic structure of functional cell membrane

MECHANISMS OF DRUG ABSORPTION

A. Tr anscell ul ar/I ntracell ular Tr anspor t – is defined as the passage of

1. Passive Tr anspor t Pr ocesses – These transport processes do not

2. Active Transport Processes – This transport process requires

Paracellular transport differs from pore transport in that the former

C. Vesicular or Corpuscular Transport (Endocytosis) – Like active

Figure 2.3. compares transcellular, paracellular and vesicular transport

Fig. 2.3. Illustrative comparison of transcellular, paracellular and vesicular

dQ/dt = rate of drug diffusion (amount/time). It also represents the rate of

canBased on the above

molecular size of the drug – drugs having molecular weights between

100 to 400 Daltons are effectively absorbed passively. The diffusion

Equation 2.2 is an expression for a first-order process. Thus, passive

Fig. 2.4. Relative passive diffusion rate of different types of molecules

Fig. 2 5. Ion-pair transport of a cationic drug

5. As the number of carriers is limited, the transport system is subject to

Fig. 2.6. Comparison of rate of absorption versus drug concentration

5. Specialized absorption or carrier-mediated absorption generally occurs

Fig. 2.7. Facilitated diffusion of vitamin B12

(a) Organic anion transporter – which aids absorption of

Fig. 2.8. Active absorption of a drug

Fig. 2.9. Types of active transport

Figure 2.10 compares active and passive transport

Fig. 2.10. Comparison between active and passive transport

Fig. 2.11. Endocytic uptake of macromolecules.

Combined Absorption Mechanisms

Fig. 2.12. Summary of important transport processes and drugs absorbed

Phases of Drug Transfer from GI Absorption Site (GI Epithelium) into

(c) the GIT via

Fig. 2.13. Transfer of drug from intestinal epithelium to splanchnic and

FACTORS INFLUENCING DRUG ABSORPTION

Biopharmaceutic Considerations in Dosage Form Design

Fig. 2.14. Sequence of events in the absorption of drugs from orally

shown in Table 2.2.

A. PHARMACEUTICAL FACTORS: include factors relating to the

b. Gut wall enzymes

PHYSICOCHEMICAL FACTORS AFFECTING DRUG

Based on the intestinal permeability and solubility of drugs, Amidon et al

Class I dru gs (high solubility/high permeability) are well absorbed orally

Theories of Drug Dissolution

Dissolution is a process in which a solid substance solubilises in a given

Fig. 2.16. Diffusion layer model for drug dissolution

Cb = concentration of drug in the bulk of the solution at time t.

Whitney’s equation to:

Equation 2.4 represents first-order dissolution rate process, the driving

Fig. 2.17. Dissolution rate under non-sink and sink conditions.